JP2020099764A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine facilitating a performance of a presentation between an opposition of a slide member and an opposing member.SOLUTION: Since forming positions of a rotation shaft 4523c and shaft supporting holes 4521b2, 4522c are located eccentrically to one side in a slide displacing direction, according to a rotation position of a liquid crystal display device 4523, a clearance (gap) between an opposition of the liquid crystal display device 4523 and an opposing member 525 can be increased/decreased. Therefore, by placing a decorative surface 523b in a posture facing the front side, an opposing clearance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 can be made larger. Accordingly, a presentation causing a player to visually recognize the light irradiated from LEDs through the opposition (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 can be performed effectively.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine including a slide member that is slidably movable between a first position and a second position (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-014602, A

When the facing member is arranged to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position (not known at the time of filing of the present application), sufficient effect is provided between the facing of the slide member and the facing member. There was a problem that I could not do it.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating an effect between the slide member and the facing member facing each other.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a slide member that is slidably displaceable between a first position and a second position, and is arranged at the first position. The slide member is provided with a facing member that is arranged to face the slide member from the side opposite to the second position, and a rendering unit that performs a rendering between the facing member and the slide member, and the slide member has a direction of the slide displacement. It is rotatably formed by a rotation shaft located eccentrically along the axis.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the rendering means includes an irradiation means for irradiating light toward a space between the facing member and the slide member.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member on the base member. It is arranged.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily perform an effect between the slide member and the facing member facing each other.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the irradiation means.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 2, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member taken along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at the separated position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (A) is a reference figure, (b) is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. FIG. 6A is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position, and FIG. 9B is a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in a 2nd embodiment typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a reference drawing. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in a 3rd embodiment typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism in the state where the liquid crystal surface is directed to the front side, and (b) is a schematic view showing the slide mechanism in the state where the decorative surface is directed to the front side. It is the front schematic diagram shown. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of a slide mechanism which shows a transition state when a base member is rotated from a 1st rotation position to a 2nd rotation position. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of a slide mechanism which shows a transition state when a base member is rotated from a 2nd rotation position to a 1st rotation position. (A) is a partial expanded front perspective view of the game board in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a partial expanded front view of the game board. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the LVI-LVI line of FIG. 55(b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the LVII-LVII line of FIG. 56(b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the passage member in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of a passage member in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a passage member in a LIXb-LIXb line of Drawing 59 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the passage member in an 8th embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the 1st control example as 9th Embodiment, and (b) is the actual display screen in the 1st control example. It is the figure which illustrated. (A) is a figure which shows the control of the display area in a 1st control example, (b) is a figure which shows the effect in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the reversal operation of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decoration surface of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display control in a 1st control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, (b), the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence relationship with, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence relationship between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the variation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of a voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM of a voice lamp control apparatus typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of an over-winning table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of a winning over-winning table typically, (c) is a sign overrun It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the winning a prize table typically, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the omission over winning table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of an ending table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit ending table typically, (c) is a sign ending table It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the detachment ending table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a sub liquid crystal drive scenario, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of a slide drive scenario, and (c) is a rotary drive. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the scenario typically, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the inversion drive scenario typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of a drive data storage area. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows over-win prize processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp edit process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows sub liquid crystal drive processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing performed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display jackpot related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the number-of-rounds command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a normal winning effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing an over-winning effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a flow chart which shows sub-symbol setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing correction process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example as a 10th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing the internal configuration of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the example of the 2nd control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decorative surface of the slide member in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a distribution motor setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game method notification process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display device of the pachinko machine in a 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example as 11th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario in the 3rd control example, (b) is the model which showed the content of the mirror production drive scenario in the 3rd control example typically. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example as 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows ending processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit game timekeeping processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 4th example of control. It is the figure which shows one example of production display. It is the figure which shows one example of production display. FIG. 15A is a front view of the liquid crystal display device according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159B is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a liquid crystal display device. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a liquid crystal display device. It is an exploded view of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 16A is a top view of the conductive member, and FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb in FIG. FIG. 16A is a front view of the substrate member, and FIG. 16B is a sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXIVb-CLXIVb in FIG. It is a rear view of a liquid crystal display device. 165A is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device taken along line CLXVIa-CLXVIa in FIG. 165, FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. It is an expanded sectional view of a liquid crystal display in the range LXVIIIc of 166 (b). It (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a liquid crystal display device. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 16A is a top view of the conductive member according to the fourteenth embodiment, FIG. 16B is a side view of the conductive member as seen in the direction of arrow CLXIXb in FIG. 169A, and FIG. FIG. 169 is a side view of the conductive member as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXIXc of 169. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 17A is a top view of the conductive member according to the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the conductive member as seen in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in FIG. 171A. FIG. 17A is a top view of the conductive member according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the conductive member as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIIb in FIG. 172A. FIG. 17A is a top view of the conductive member according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 173A. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a liquid crystal display device. (A) to (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (A) is a top view of the electrically conductive member in 18th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrically conductive member in CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb line of FIG. 176 (a). FIG. 17A is a front view of the substrate member according to the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177A. FIG. 17A is a top view of the conductive member, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb in FIG. 178A. (A) And (b) is a schematic cross section of a conductive member. FIG. 180A is a front view of the substrate member according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180B is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXXXb-CLXXXb in FIG. 180A. 18A is a top view of the conductive member, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXXIb-CLXXXIb in FIG. 181A. (A) And (b) is a schematic cross section of a conductive member.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open. .. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a "thousand box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Mounted on the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided on the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by the lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing or not by the lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with the lit state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lit state, and the 7-segment display device gives a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is carried out when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. On the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, not only is the lottery result a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but also a big jackpot type is shown if it is a big hit. ..

Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a certainty jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R regular jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

The "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of big jackpot is not occurring, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is odd. In addition, the short-time state (time-shortening state) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

During the probability change or time saving, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the balls to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a opens at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4 ), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. Thereby, during the probability change and time reduction, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric winning object 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or the shortening, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of the through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first winning opening 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning opening 640. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also short, so in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than that during normal time during the probability change and the shortening of time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability of being a jackpot is the same in the case where the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball wins the second winning opening 640 in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

A second variable winning device 82a is arranged on the upper left of the first winning port 64, and a second specific winning port 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot), the second variable winning device is opened (in the expanded state), so that the ball is in the special game state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning opening 82. You can

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example, Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 stores, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is cut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is reached. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 to 14 are front views of the operation unit 200. 5 to 14, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface of the back case 300 is omitted.

Here, FIGS. 7 to 10 show a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, and FIGS. 11 to 14 show a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position. It

In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position with the display surface 523a facing the front is shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, and the display surface 523a is facing the front. The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is shown in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 9 and 13, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the close position with the decorative surface 523b facing forward is shown in FIGS. 10 and 14, and the decorative surface 523b is facing forward. The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is shown in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and the slide unit SL is rotatably accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 300.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front surface. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. ..

The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 rotatably supported by the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a slide mechanism 500 arranged on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 that are formed so as to be slidable in a direction in which they approach or separate from each other. It should be noted that the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged such that their displacements (the rotation about the rotation shaft 523c and the slide displacement accompanying the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and the timing of the displacement (the start of the displacement or the stop of the displacement). ) Are set (controlled) so that they are the same as each other.

The base member 400 is rotatably formed between a first rotation position and a second rotation position having a phase difference of approximately 90° from the first rotation position. In the first rotation position, the direction of slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and in the second rotation position, the direction of slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. Is the left-right direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display for displaying a pattern and the like, is rotatably supported, and has a display surface 523a facing the front (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11, and 12). ) And a posture in which the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a, faces the front (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13, and 14).

When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid in a direction in which they approach each other and are arranged in the proximity position, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the third symbol While the display device 81 is invisiblely shielded (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11, and 13), when the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and are arranged in the separated position, By retracting the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (FIGS. 8, 10, 12 and 12). 14).

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 43. First, with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23, a configuration in which the base member 400 of the slide unit SL is rotatably supported with respect to the rear case 300 will be described.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL. 17 to 19 are front views of the rear case 300 and the base member 400.

Note that, in FIG. 17, the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, in FIG. 19, the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position, and in FIG. 18, the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position. The transition states are illustrated as they are rotated from one rotational position to a second rotational position and vice versa.

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 19, the rear case 300 includes a rotation driving mechanism for applying a rotation driving force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and The second wheel member 322 and the covering members 331 to 334 for holding the respective wheel members 321 and 322 are arranged.

The rotary drive mechanism includes a drive motor 311, a pinion gear 312 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 311, a head gear (first transmission gear 313a) meshed with the pinion gear 312, and an end gear (first gear). 3 transmission gear 313c) is provided with a transmission gear train that is meshed with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 at the upper right of the front view. The second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disk-shaped members that are rotatably supported by a shaft 303 that is erected from the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the outer peripheral edge of the base member 400. A plurality of them are arranged at a predetermined interval along the. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is located in two places below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is located in two places above and two places on the left and right of the base member 400. Each is arranged. Here, the detailed configuration of each of the wheel members 321 and 322 will be described with reference to FIG.

20A is a sectional view of the first wheel member 321 taken along the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 20B is a sectional view of the second wheel member 322 taken along the line XXb-XXb of FIG. is there.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in such a manner that the shaft 303 projects toward the front side. Around the periphery of 303, a first recess 301b1 and a second recess 301b2, which are concentric with the shaft 303 and are circular in a front view, are provided in the bottom wall 301.

The first recess 301b1 and the second recess 301b2 are recesses for receiving and accommodating the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported by the shaft 303, and the inner diameter of the second recess 301b2 is , Smaller than the outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 and larger than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. As a result, it is possible to suppress an error in assembling the first wheel member 321 into the second recess 301b2.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are formed as members having an H-shaped cross section in which grooves 321a and 322a having a U-shaped cross section that are continuous in the circumferential direction are recessed in the outer peripheral surface, and the bases of the grooves 321a and 322a are formed. The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. Thereby, the base member 400 is rotatably supported on the rear base 300 while restricting the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (downward direction in FIG. 20A) and the front-back direction (leftward and rightward direction in FIG. 20A). it can.

The first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spheres are arranged between the inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and the outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. Accordingly, the durability of the first wheel member 321 that bears the load of the base member 400 can be ensured, and the output required for the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

Further, in the second wheel member 322, the outer diameter of the wall portion located on the front side (left side in FIG. 20B) of the pair of wall portions facing each other across the groove 322a is larger than the inner diameter of the recess 301b2. To be done. That is, the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322 is larger at the front wall portion than at the rear wall portion. Accordingly, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the second wheel member 322 and improve the durability while suppressing an error in the mounting direction of the second wheel member 322 to the shaft 303.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the slide mechanism 500, which is relatively heavy, is arranged on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400, which receives the weight of the slide mechanism 500, leans forward and tilts. However, since the second wheel member 322 is disposed above and on the left and right of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the front wall portion of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. The configuration described above is particularly effective for suppressing the forward tilted posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

It returns to FIG. 15 to FIG. 19 and demonstrates. The covering members 331 to 334 are formed in a shape in which a rectangular plate-shaped body having a circular opening in the center is divided into four parts vertically and horizontally, and are arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. .. Accordingly, the covering members 331 to 334 are covered on the front sides of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and the wheel members 321 and 322 are restricted from coming off the shaft 303.

The base member 400 is a disc-shaped member having a substantially rectangular opening 401 formed in a front view in the center thereof, and is formed in a flange shape along the outer edge thereof to form the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 321 described above. The flange portion 402 that is inserted into the grooves 321a and 322a of the wheel member 322, and the last gear (the third transmission) in the transmission gear train of the rotary drive mechanism that is engraved on the front side and curved in an arc shape along the circumferential direction. A gear portion 403 with which the gear 313c) is meshed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the forward direction from the state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17, and the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312. The rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise in a front view (clockwise rotation direction in FIG. 17). When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the forward direction, the base member 400 moves to the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19 through the state shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state in which the base member 400 is located at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19, the rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is stopped. , And is transmitted to the gear portion 403, the base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (counterclockwise rotation direction in FIG. 19), and is placed at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17 through the state shown in FIG. It

In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 being mainly in contact with the groove bottom of the groove 321a of the first wheel member 321. That is, since the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer peripheral surface of the groove bottom of the groove 321a are supported by rolling contact between the peripheral surfaces, the contact surface is minimized and the friction surface is supported in a low friction state. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 required for rotationally driving the base member 400 can be suppressed.

Further, since the slide mechanism 500 is disposed (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, as described above, the base member 400 has the first rotation position and the second rotation position with respect to the rear case 300. When the slide mechanism 500 is rotated between the two, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23. 21 to 23 are front views of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG. 23 corresponds to FIG. 19, respectively.

Next, a detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 43. 24 and 25 are a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position, and FIGS. 26 and 27 are the liquid crystal display device 523 arranged at the separated position. It is a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in the closed state. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 arranged on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail arranged on the front side of the cover member 420. 510, a slide member 520 disposed on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 to slide the slide member 520.

The cover member 420 is a disk-shaped member having a substantially rectangular opening 421 formed in a front view in the center thereof. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is provided on the front side of the base member 400 at a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap. Are arranged (fixed).

The space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is arranged at a position overlapping with the openings 401 and 421 in a front view in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position, and can be rotated without interfering with the cover member 420.

Here, the detailed configuration of the slide driving mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 28 and 29. 30, 32 and 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33 and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

30 and 31, the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inward protruding position, which is a position for arranging the slide member 520 at the close position, is different from that in FIG. 34 and FIG. 32 and 32, the transmission arm 437 is rotated from the inward protruding position to the outward inversion position, or vice versa. The transition states when the process is performed are respectively illustrated. 30 to 35, the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 is schematically illustrated using a chain double-dashed line to show the positional relationship with the transmission arm 437 and to facilitate understanding.

In the slide mechanism 500 of the present embodiment, a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for respectively driving the slide members 520 are arranged. Since they are structurally the same, the same reference numerals are given to both, and only one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 arranged on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and a pinion gear 432. A transmission gear 433 to be meshed, a rack gear 434a to which the transmission gear 433 is meshed are engraved on the outer peripheral side, and a rack member 434 is formed in a curved plate shape, and an inner peripheral side of the rack member 434. A transmission gear 435 meshed with a rack gear 434b engraved with the gear, a pair of arm drive gears 436 rotated in opposite directions by the transmission gear 435, and a base end side fixed to the pair of arm drive gears 436. And a pair of transmission arms 437, which are mainly provided.

Therefore, for example, the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inwardly projecting position (the position in which the tip end side faces the opening 421 side of the cover member 420) shown in FIGS. 30 and 31. When the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated, whereby a pair of transmissions is transmitted. The arms 437 are rotated about the base end side in opposite directions.

When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the forward direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 undergoes the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and then the outer reversal position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 (approximately 180 from the inner reversal position). It is rotated and is arranged at a position in which the tip end side is directed to the side opposite to the opening 421 of the cover member 420).

On the other hand, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged in the outward reversal position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, and the rotation is transmitted via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433 to the rack member 434. When it is transmitted to the rack gear 434 a, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated, whereby a pair of transmissions is transmitted. The arms 437 are rotated about the base end side in opposite directions. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the reverse direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged in the inwardly inverted position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

As will be described later, the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 is slidably coupled to the sliding groove 524a in the coupling frame 524 of the slide member 520, and the transmission arm 437 is rotated about the proximal end side. The inner surface of the sliding groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520 is pushed and pulled by the tip side of the transmission arm 437, and the slide member 520 is slid and displaced (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

In this case, in the structure in which the linear driving member extending along the sliding direction of the slide member 520 is used to convert the rotational driving force of the drive motor 431 into the slide displacement of the slide member 520, When the slide displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member does not fit within the circular outer shapes of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and interferes with the rear case 300 (outer wall portion 302). You can no longer rotate it.

When the linear rack member is housed within the circular outer shapes of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 in order to enable the rotation of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 becomes short. Not only that, the linear rack member is exposed through the opening 421 so that it can be visually recognized by the player, and the appearance is impaired.

On the other hand, a structure in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431 is also conceivable. In this case, however, the position where the drive motor 431 is disposed overlaps the movement locus of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, and thus the slide movement is performed. The amount of slide displacement of the member 520 becomes shorter.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack member 434 curved in an arc shape is arranged on the outer edge side of the cover member 420 (outside the opening 421) along the circumferential direction, and the rotation of the drive motor 431 is controlled by the rack member 434. And the displacement of the arm drive gear 436 to rotate the transmission arm 437, the slide displacement of the slide member 520 is ensured while the base member 400 is moved relative to the rear case 300. The rack member 434 can be rotated by rotating it, and the rack member 434 can be prevented from being exposed through the opening 421 to improve the appearance. In addition, since the drive motor 431 can be disposed outside (both sides) of the slide displacement trajectory of the slide member 520, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 can be secured from this point as well.

It returns to FIG. 24 to FIG. 29 and demonstrates. The slide rail 510 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism provided between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520, and when the slide rail 510 is expanded and contracted, the slide member 520 moves relative to the cover member 420. The slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rail 510 has a pair of supporting both ends of the slide member 520 as one set, and the two sets are in the postures in which the expansion and contraction directions are different from each other (that is, the phases are different by 180°). It is arranged opposite.

Here, the detailed configurations of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are exploded rear perspective views of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. Note that, in FIGS. 36 to 38, the transmission arm 437 is illustrated for easy understanding.

In the present embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 and slide members 520 are arranged. In these two sets, the pair of slide rails 510 in one set are opposed to each other by a pair of slides in the other set. Since the rails 510 have substantially the same configuration except that they are smaller than the facing distance of the rails 510, the same reference numerals are given to both, and only one will be described, and description of the other will be omitted. It should be noted that by providing a difference in the facing intervals described above, the slide rails 510 of one set can be arranged between the facing slide rails 510 of the other set.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to a base end rail 511 arranged in front of the cover member 420 and a relative displacement in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the base end rail 511. And an end rail 513 connected to the front side of the intermediate rail 512 so as to be capable of relative displacement in the longitudinal direction. That is, the base rail 511 and the tip rail 513 can be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction with respect to each other via the intermediate rail 512.

The slide member 520 includes one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 on which the front end rails 512 of the pair of slide rails 510 are arranged on the back side, respectively, and the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522. A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between the members 522, a connecting frame 524 connecting the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the connecting frame 524. And a facing member 525 that is disposed so as to face each other.

The one-side guided member 521 is divided into a rail-side member 521a on which the tip rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is arranged, and a liquid crystal-side member 521b that rotatably supports the liquid crystal display device 523. 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so that relative displacement is possible.

Specifically, insertion holes 521a1 having a circular cross section are formed at two positions on the rail-side member 521a, and cylindrical insertion pins 521b1 respectively inserted into the insertion holes 521a1 at the two positions are paired from the liquid crystal-side member 521b. It is projected. The axial distance between the insertion holes 521a1 is the same as the axial distance between the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

In this case, the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 is orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 and parallel to the slide plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed over the entire circumference between the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1, and the gap can be relatively displaced in any direction (direction orthogonal to both axes). it can.

A washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1 to prevent the insertion pin 521b1 from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

In this case, the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped portion of the rail side member 521a in which the insertion hole 521a1 is bored is set to be smaller than the protruding dimension of the insertion pin 521b1. Accordingly, the rail side member 521a can be relatively displaced with respect to the liquid crystal side member 521b also in the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 can be inclined with respect to the rail side member 521a with the other guided member 522 side serving as a fulcrum. For example, the liquid crystal side member 521b precedes the rail side member 521a in the slide displacement direction, and the facing interval between them becomes larger on the front side in the slide displacement direction (smaller on the rear side in the slide displacement direction). Relative displacement in form is acceptable. Accordingly, as will be described later, it is possible to easily prevent the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced by the inertial force when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven.

The liquid crystal display device 523 is a plate-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed as a liquid crystal display as described above, and one side is a display surface 523a capable of displaying a pattern and the like, and the other side is opposite. The other side is a decorative surface 523b with decoration.

In this case, the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with cylindrical rotation shafts 523c protruding from both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof, and each rotation shaft 523c has one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member. The shaft support holes 521b2 and 522c of 522 are rotatably supported respectively. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 through the rotation shaft 523c and the shaft supporting holes 521b2 and 522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. It is possible to form a posture in which the front side (the player side) is directed and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

The axis of the rotating shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, since the liquid crystal display is arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523, the display surface 523a side is heavier than the decorative surface 523b side. Further, due to the asymmetrical shape of the components of the liquid crystal display and the decorative surface 523b, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically located from the axis of the rotating shaft 523c to at least the display surface 523a side. Therefore, an inertial force is likely to be generated when the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops rotating.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotational drive mechanism provided on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521. The rotary drive mechanism includes a drive motor 531, a pinion gear 532 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 531, a first gear 533 meshed with the pinion gear 532, and a meshed mesh with the first gear 533. A second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 523 via each gear 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. ..

The rotation drive mechanism sets (controls) the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 such that the speed of displacement (rotation) and the timing of displacement (rotation) (start of rotation or stop of rotation) are the same. To be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the facing member 525 is constant regardless of which of the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b the liquid crystal display device 523 faces.

The connecting frame 524 is provided with a sliding groove 524a linearly extending along a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510, and the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 slides in the sliding groove 524a. Can be inserted. Since the connection frame 524 is disposed on the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the slide driving mechanism described above, and the tip end side thereof is slid into the sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid and displaced.

The connecting frame 524 connects between the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, so that the liquid crystal side member 521b, the liquid crystal display device 523, and the other-side member 522 as a whole. As a result, it is possible to increase the rigidity. Accordingly, it is possible to easily maintain the facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521b and the other side member 522 constant, and to easily rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 smoothly. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to easily prevent the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced due to the inertial force when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven.

The facing member 525 is a plate-like member that is erected from the front of the connection frame, and is located at a predetermined distance (a surface that connects the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 and the liquid crystal display device 523. They are opposed to each other with a space (allowing rotation) therebetween. Further, a plurality of LEDs (effect means) are arranged on the facing member 525, and are formed so that light can be emitted toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light emitted from the LED and reflected on the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 is visually recognized by the player from between the facing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523.

A structure in which the slide member 520 thus configured is slid and displaced by the slide drive mechanism (transmission arm 437) will be described. 39(a), 40(a) and 41(a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIGS. 39(b), 40(b) and 41(b) show the slide member 520. FIG.

Note that in FIG. 39, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position, in FIG. 41, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position, and in FIG. 40, the liquid crystal display device 523 is located at the close position. The transition states as they are slid into the spaced position and vice versa are respectively illustrated. 39 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 34 and 35.

Here, as described above, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have the same displacement speed (sliding displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and displacement timing (displacement start or displacement stop). Is set (controlled) as follows. Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inward projecting positions (see FIGS. 30 and 31 ), the slide rail 510 is in a shortened state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is at the close position. Is located in. When the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in the opposite directions from each other around the base end side in this state, the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connection frame 524, so that the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 523 is slid and displaced in the direction in which the slide rail 510 is extended.

When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 are placed in the outward reversal position as shown in FIG. 41 through the state shown in FIG. 40 (see FIGS. 34 and 35). The slide rail 510 is extended and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position.

On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 41, when the pair of transmission arms 437 is rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above, the tip end side of the transmission arms 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the coupling frame 524. The liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced in the direction of shortening the slide rail 510. When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 are placed in the inward projecting position as shown in FIG. 39 through the state shown in FIG. 40, the slide rail 510 is shortened. Then, the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in the close position.

42A is a reference diagram, and FIG. 42B is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500.

In the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is composed of two parts, that is, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, which are connected so that they can be displaced relative to each other. In the structure shown as (hereinafter referred to as “reference structure”), the one-side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). The other configurations of the reference structure are the same as those of the present embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

In this embodiment, the slide member 520 is slidably formed by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 rotates between the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522. And a liquid crystal display device 523 that is pivotally supported as much as possible. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as slidably displaced, and the variation of the effect operation can be increased. That is, the player can visually recognize not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decoration surface 523b.

However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42A, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated with respect to the one-side guided member X and the other-side guided member 522, the rotation starts or stops. The accompanying inertial force becomes parallel to the direction of slide displacement, and the slide member (the one-side guided member X, the other-side guided member 522 and the liquid crystal display device 523) on which the inertial force acts causes the slide rail 510 to expand and contract. , Slide displacement will occur. That is, it becomes difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 only while the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped at a predetermined position in the sliding displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42A).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and both members 521a and 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. An allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 disposed on the side guided member 521 (right side in FIG. 42B) and a side disposed on the other guided member 522 (see FIG. 42(b) left side) The permissible amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 can be made different.

As a result, when the inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 is displaced to the other side displaced member. The liquid crystal display device 523 can be provided with a displacement component in a direction (left direction in FIG. 42B) orthogonal to the slide displacement direction (upward and downward direction in FIG. 42B) so that the liquid crystal display device 523 can be displaced more easily than the 522 side. .. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction can be used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510 (that is, the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 can be restricted). Sliding displacement of 520 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the sliding displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42B).

In this case, in the present embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 disposed on the one side guided member 521 (the right side in FIG. 42(b)) is distributed to the other side guided member 522. Where the liquid crystal display device 523 is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the slide rail 510 on the installed side (the left side in FIG. 42(b)), the one-side guided member 521 in which the relative displacement is easily tolerated. The liquid crystal side member 521b is provided with the rotation driving means (the driving motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other guided member 522 side.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, the rotation drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532 to 534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the sliding displacement direction.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism is arranged such that its drive shaft is directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 side and the main body is directed away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The position of the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be located farther from the other-side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other-side displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the sliding displacement direction.

43A is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position, and FIG. 43B shows the liquid crystal display device 523 at the close position. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the slide mechanism 500 in the state arrange|positioned.

Here, in the above-described reference structure (see FIG. 42(a)), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in a direction in which they are close to each other and are arranged at the close positions, they are brought into close contact with each other at the close positions without a gap. Then, the load of the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431, the gears 432, 433, etc., see FIG. 31) for slidingly displacing the liquid crystal display device 523 is increased, and the damage is caused.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allowance is made for the position where the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped in consideration of the dimensional tolerance, the assembly tolerance, or the control tolerance. If a sufficient gap is set between the two so that they do not come into contact with each other), the gap becomes large (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side from the gap is visually recognized by the player), and the appearance (effect effect) Worsen.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are relatively displaced. The slide members 520 thus formed are connected to each other as much as possible, and the slide members 520 thus formed are arranged face to face in a staggered posture. That is, the one guided member 521 of one slide member 520 is the other guided member 522 of the other slide member 520, and the other guided member 522 of the one slide member 520 is one side of the other slide member 520. The guided members 521 are arranged to face each other.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 43(b), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in a direction in which they are close to each other and the liquid crystal display devices 523 are in contact with each other at the close positions, the one slide member 520 and the other slide member 520 can be By the relative displacement of the side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b retracts with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other side guided member 522 of the other (the other and one) slide member 520 can be received. (One and the other liquid crystal display device 523 can each be in a posture inclined with respect to the slide displacement direction).

Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 come into contact with each other at close positions, damage to the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431, the gears 432, 433, etc.) can be suppressed, and the position at which the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped is made closer. Can be set to position. As a result, at the close position, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other in a state in which the gap between the liquid crystal display devices 523 is made smaller, and the appearance (effect effect) can be improved accordingly.

Here, in the present embodiment, the other-side guided member 522 is provided with a detected portion, and the cover member 420 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion. Is detected by the detection sensor, it is detected that the slide member 520 is slid to a predetermined position. Therefore, even if the attitude of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, the position shift of the detected member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor) can be suppressed. As a result, the slide displacement position of the slide member 520 can be detected more accurately.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of slide rails 510 and slide members 520 supported by the slide rails 510 (that is, the two sets have substantially the same configuration as each other). The case where the two sets are arranged to face each other (that is, the phases are different by 180°) and face each other has been described. However, the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment is different from the slide member 520 and the slide member having different configurations. 2520, and the slide members 520 and 2520 are arranged to face each other in a facing posture. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

44 and 45 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 46 is a reference diagram, and is a front schematic view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment. Note that, in FIG. 44, the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is shown in FIG. 45, and the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. In addition, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, as in the case of the first embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 have different expansion and contraction directions (that is, a phase of 180). They are placed facing each other in different postures.

In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, the slide member 520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 44 and 45) as in the case of the first embodiment. A slide member 2520 is provided on the slide rail 510 of the other set (lower side of FIGS. 44 and 45).

In the slide member 2520, the arrangement positions of the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed with respect to the slide member 520. Therefore, the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 of the one set includes the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of the other set and the other-side guided member 522 of the slide member 520 of the one set. The other side guided members 522 of the other set of slide members 2520 are arranged to face each other.

That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, the slide member 520 of one set and the slide member 2520 of the other set are slid displacement of both members 520, 2520 in the plan view shown in FIGS. 44 and 45. Is located in the center in the direction of and the line is symmetrical with respect to an imaginary line perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, as described above, two sets having substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases differ by 180°). Since the pair of slide members 520 are arranged to face each other, the one side guided member 521 of the one set of slide members 520 and the other side guided member 522 of the other set of slide members 2520 and the other side of the one set of slide members 520. The guided member 522 is arranged so as to face the one guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of the other set.

That is, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, the slide member 520 of one set and the slide member 520 of the other set are located at the center in the slide displacement direction of both members 520 in the plan view shown in FIG. It is arranged in a posture that is point-symmetric with respect to a virtual point (that is, the center of rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300) located at the center in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction. It

Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, when the inertial force caused by the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, it is orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the slide members 520 of one set. And the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction generated in the other set of slide members 520 are staggered in directions (point-symmetrical directions, ie, the base member 400 and the cover member 420). 46), the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are rotated in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 46 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while keeping the base member 400 and the cover member 420 stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when an inertial force caused by the rotation start or the rotation stop of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one set of slides is slid. A displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement generated in the member 520 and a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 2520 have the same direction (direction of line symmetry). ) Can be.

Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 due to the displacement component, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

FIG. 47 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500, and shows a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position (see FIG. 45 ), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of the one set and the other set of the slide member 520 are set. The one guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 is disposed on the right side in front view.

In this case, the second rotation position of the base member 400 is a position rotated by 90° from the first rotation position in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction) when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, the slide displacement direction of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 47)). Arranging the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 of one set and the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of the other set on the lower side in the front view (lower side in the vertical direction), respectively. You can

As a result, when the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 47 and the inertial force caused by the start of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement is applied, the slide displacement is performed. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (displacement component in the direction in which the slide members 520 and 2520 are pressed against the slide rail 510 (the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 is restricted) is vertically upward (the direction opposite to the gravity direction, FIG. 47 upward direction).

As a result, when the slide member 520 (the liquid crystal display device 523) is slid and displaced in the horizontal direction, the action of gravity is canceled or reduced by the displacement component in the above-described direction, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity. Can be reduced, and as a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the wear of the slide rail 510 due to the slide displacement.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the second embodiment, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (the state where the slide members 520 and 2520 are slid and displaced in the horizontal direction), the one side guided member 521 is the other side guided member 522. The case where the one side guided member 521 of the third embodiment is arranged vertically above the other side guided member 522 has been described above. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

48 and 49 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment. Note that, in FIG. 48, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position. In FIG. 49, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. In addition, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180°. That is, contrary to the case of the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is provided on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49), while the other set (FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). A slide member 520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 on the lower side.

That is, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position, the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of one set and the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 of the other set are arranged. The guide member 521 and the guide member 521 are arranged on the left side in front view.

As in the case of the second embodiment, the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment having the above-described structure also operates when an inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 acts. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the slide member 2520 of the other set and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the slide member 520 of the other set have the same direction (line Symmetric orientation).

Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 due to the displacement component, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

FIG. 50 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500, and shows a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position (see FIG. 49), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of one set and the other set of the slide member 2520. The one guided member 521 of the slide member 520 is disposed on the left side in front view.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, the slide displacement direction of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 50)). The one side guided member 521 of the one set of slide members 2520 and the one side guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 520 can be arranged on the upper side in the front view (the upper side in the vertical direction). ..

As a result, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 47 and the inertial force caused by the rotation start or the rotation stop of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the slide displacement A displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (a displacement component that generates a force (braking force) that presses the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be set vertically downward (gravitational direction, lower side in FIG. 50). As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the slide member 520 from rising, and to stabilize the rotation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling caused by lifting.

In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 is provided with the rotation driving means (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other guided member 522 side.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, the rotation drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532 to 534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member 520 from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling caused by lifting.

Further, the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism is arranged such that its drive shaft is directed to the liquid crystal display device 523 side and the main body is directed away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The position of the center of gravity of can be arranged at a position farther from the other-side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other-side displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member 520 from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling caused by lifting.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary shaft 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the center in the width direction has been described. However, the rotary shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment has a position eccentric in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. It is installed in. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 4520 according to the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 52A is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 with the display surface 523a facing the front side, and FIG. 52B shows the decorative surface 523b facing the front side. FIG. 11 is a front schematic view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 in the closed state. Note that FIGS. 52A and 52B show a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 4523 is arranged at the separated position.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the slide mechanism 4500 according to the fourth embodiment, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, cylindrical rotation shafts 4523c are provided so as to project from both longitudinal ends of the liquid crystal display device 4523. The rotation shaft 4523c is rotatably supported by the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c of the one guided member 4521 (liquid crystal side member 4521b) and the other guided member 4522.

That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 4521 and the other-side guided member 4522 via the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft supporting holes 4521b2, 4522c, and the rotation thereof causes the display surface 523a to rotate. It is possible to form a posture in which the front side (the player side) is directed and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

In this case, the rotary shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c are separated from the facing member 525 in the slide displacement direction along the slide displacement direction as compared with the formation position in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Set to position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation shaft 523c is arranged at the center of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the width direction, whereas the rotation shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is arranged in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (see FIG. ) And FIG. 52( b) vertical direction).

In the rotary drive mechanism of the fourth embodiment, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are different from those of the rotary drive mechanism of the first embodiment because the formation position of the shaft support hole 4521b is separated from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531. And a third gear 4535 is additionally provided between and.

Here, as described above, the facing member 525 is provided with a plurality of LEDs on the side surface on the side facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surface (the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 4523 is arranged. Light is formed so as to be capable of irradiating light toward the connection surface), and light reflected from the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 that is emitted from such an LED is played between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 (a gap) between them. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the person.

Therefore, when the facing interval (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 is narrow, a space (gap) for passing the light reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 cannot be secured, and the light is effectively provided to the player. Can't be seen.

In this case, the facing interval between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the vertical interval in FIG. 52A) is the third symbol display from the facing interval through the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420. Since the player can visually recognize the device 81, it is preferable that the device 81 can be maximized. On the other hand, the facing distance between the pair of facing members 525 (the vertical distance in FIG. 52A) must be set to a size that allows the space to be stored between the facing walls of the outer wall portion 302 of the rear case 300. It cannot be expanded because it receives

Therefore, when the facing interval between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is increased and a space for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 is secured between the facing faces, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (LED) face each other. Since the space (gap) is reduced, it is difficult to secure a space for irradiating, reflecting, or passing the light of the LED. On the other hand, in order to secure the space, the facing space between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is narrowed. Then, it becomes difficult to secure a space for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the formation positions of the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c are eccentrically located on one side in the slide displacement direction, the rotation position of the liquid crystal display device 4523 is changed. The space (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 facing each other can be increased or decreased.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be reduced. .. Therefore, the facing interval of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of protrusion of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to the front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced, and as a result, the player can display the third symbol display device. It is possible to secure a viewable area for viewing 81.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52B, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the decorative surface 523b faces the front side. .. Therefore, a space (gap) for passing the light emitted from the LEDs of the facing member 525 and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can be secured, and as a result, the space (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (gap). Therefore, it is possible to effectively perform an effect that the player visually recognizes.

Further, in order to increase the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525, it is necessary to dispose the facing member 525 at a position distant from the liquid crystal display device 4523 (that is, increase the distance between the pair of facing members 525). Therefore, the slide mechanism 4500 can be downsized. That is, the slide mechanism 4500 can be accommodated between the outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300 facing each other, and at the same time, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect produced by the light emitted from the LEDs are both achieved. You can

Next, a method for suppressing the driving force required for the rotation when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa will be described.

53A and 53B are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position.

When rotating the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. 53A, in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are placed at the close position. To place. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53(a)) has the display surface 523a oriented toward the front side, while the other (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53(a)). The liquid crystal display device 4523 is in a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

As a result, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 as a whole can be arranged at a position eccentric to the upper side with respect to the center in the vertical direction, and accordingly, the position of the center of gravity G is located above the center of rotation of the base member 400. Can be made.

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated clockwise by 90° in the front view (clockwise in FIG. 53A) to rotate from the first rotational position shown in FIG. 53(a) to the second rotational position shown in FIG. 53(b). When it is rotated to, the locus of movement of the center of gravity G (illustrated by the broken line arrow in FIG. 53(b)) can be taken as the locus of moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required to rotate the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position can be suppressed.

54A and 54B are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

When rotating the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 54A, in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are placed at the close position. To place. In this case, while the liquid crystal display device 4523 of one side (the side that moves in the direction of gravity along with the rotation to the first rotation position, the left side in FIG. 54A) has the display surface 523a in the attitude with the front side facing, The liquid crystal display device 4523 on the other side (the side that moves to the side opposite to the direction of gravity in accordance with the rotation to the first rotation position, the right side in FIG. 54A) has the decorative surface 523b in a posture with the front surface side facing.

As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the position of the center of gravity G) is located away from the center of rotation of the base member 400 and is eccentric to the side that moves in the direction of gravity with the subsequent rotation ( 54(a) left side).

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 54(a)) by 90°, and from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 54(a) to the first rotation shown in FIG. 54(b). When rotating to the position, the locus of movement of the center of gravity G (illustrated by the broken line arrow in FIG. 54(b)) can be taken as the locus of moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required to rotate the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position can be suppressed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

55A is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. Further, FIG. 56 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line LVI-LVI of FIG. 55(b), and FIG. 57 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line LVII-LVII of FIG. 56(b). It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 formed of a resin material and forming a passage through which the game balls flow down. In the passage member 5600, a rolling plate 5610 extending in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 55(b)) and a front side (55(b) front side of the drawing) of the rolling plate 5610. The front wall portion 5620 arranged, the rear wall portion 5630 arranged on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 55(b)), and a part of the rear wall portion 5630 are arranged on the back side. An overhanging wall portion 5640 formed by overhanging is mainly provided.

The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface serves as a rolling surface of the game ball, and has a first portion formed by being inclined downward from the end portion in the width direction of the game board 13, and the first portion thereof. A W-shaped rolling surface in front view is formed from an end portion on the descending slope side and a second portion which is inclined upward toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610 is recessed in the connecting portion between the first portion and the second portion, and descends toward the front side (front side in FIG. 55B). A recessed portion 5611 that is inclined and a recessed portion 5612 that is recessed in the uppermost portion of the second portion and that is inclined downward toward the back side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 55(b)) are provided.

The front wall portion 5620 is erected above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and prevents the game balls from falling from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, the front wall portion 5620 is cut out at a portion corresponding to the recess 5611 of the rolling plate 5610, and the game ball received in the recess 5611 can be dropped.

The overhang wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for causing the game ball rolling on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area, and rolling. The game ball, which is rolled in the plate 5610 and received in the concave portion 5612, is received in the projecting wall portion 5640.

Here, the operation unit 200 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, when the projecting wall portion 5640 is projected from the rear surface side of the game board 13 as in the present embodiment, in order to avoid interference with the projecting wall portion 5640, the operation unit 200 (slide unit SL ), the movable range is limited, and its effect is impeded.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the overhang wall portion 5640 is formed in a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width dimension between the inner wall surfaces (dimension in the horizontal direction of FIG. 57) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is also set to a slightly larger size, while the depth dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 57) from the front surface of the back wall portion 5630 to the inner wall surface is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In this case, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is chamfered (cut) by a virtual plane parallel to the back surface wall portion 5630 at the top portion having an arcuate cross section in the overhanging direction (the right side in FIG. 56, the upper side in FIG. 57), In the chamfered portion, an opening 5641 whose width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed.

That is, the game ball can pass (flow down) through the passage formed by the overhang wall portion 5640 in a state where a part of the game ball is projected from the opening portion 5641 to the outside, so that the entire inner circumference of the game ball is obtained. It is possible to suppress the overhanging dimension L1 of the overhanging wall portion 5640 to the back side, as compared with the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed to have a size surrounding the side. Therefore, the space for disposing the operation unit 200 and the movable range of the slide unit SL can be secured accordingly.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member 6600 according to the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 57. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58, the overhang wall portion 6640 according to the sixth embodiment includes a pair of wall portions that are erected from the back wall portion 5630 and a wall portion that connects the standing tips of the pair of wall portions. Is formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and an opening 6641 is formed in the wall portion on the protruding tip side (upper side in FIG. 58) in the U-shaped cross section.

The opening 6641 is formed such that the width dimension (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 58) of the projecting wall portion 6640 decreases from the inner wall surface side toward the outer wall surface side. That is, the overhang wall portion 6640 has an inner peripheral surface formed as an inclined surface. Thereby, the amount of protrusion that allows a part of the game ball to protrude from the opening 6641 to the outside is increased, and the overhanging dimension L2 of the overhanging wall 5640 can be suppressed, while the peripheral portion of the opening 6641 (an inclined surface and It is possible to secure the rigidity of the overhang wall portion 6640 by maximizing the thickness dimension in the portion to be formed).

In this case, in this embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 in the inner wall surface of the overhang wall portion 6640 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall surface and the opening of the overhang wall portion 5640 are set. The angle of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) is set so that the ridgeline portion S with the inner peripheral surface of the portion 5641 comes into contact with the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the object from being received at the tip end side of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) while securing a projectable amount that allows a part of the game ball to project from the opening 6641 to the outside ( That is, it is possible to suppress damage to the overhang wall portion 6640 (periphery of the opening portion 6641) by receiving the game ball at the ridge line portion S having a relatively high rigidity.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. 59A is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59B is a sectional view of the passage member 7600 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the passage member 7600 according to the seventh embodiment includes a front wall portion 7651, a rear wall portion 7652 arranged to face the front wall portion 7651, and front surfaces thereof. The wall portion 7651 and the back wall portion 7652 are provided with side wall portions 7653 respectively disposed on both sides thereof, and a space having a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by these wall portions 7651 to 7653 forms a passage through which a game ball flows down. ..

Here, the passage member 7600 is configured such that a part of the front wall portion 7651 and the rear wall portion 7652 (the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) is projected toward the rear wall portion so that the front inner peripheral wall A bent passage is formed by the portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. That is, the inner peripheral side of the passage in which the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a is bent is formed, and the outer peripheral side of the path in which the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a is bent is formed.

In this case, in this embodiment, the opening 7654 is formed in the front inner peripheral wall 7651a on the inner peripheral side of the bent passage. That is, the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball (rightward in FIG. 59A) when passing through the bent passage. Since the opening 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by protruding a part of the game ball from the opening 7654 to the outside, it is possible not only to suppress the overhanging dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a, but also to suppress damage and wear of the passage member 7600. It can be done easily.

That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the curved passage (right direction in FIG. 59(a)), it is pressed by the centrifugal force. The game ball can be received by the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a, which has a relatively high rigidity without the opening portion 7654 being formed therein, and can be suppressed from being pressed against the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a by centrifugal force. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651 and wear on the peripheral edge of the opening 7654, which has a relatively low rigidity due to the formation of the opening 7654.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 60, the same parts as those in the above-described respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment has a front wall portion 7651 (front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a) and a rear wall portion 7652 (rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) as in the case of the seventh embodiment. And the side wall portion 7653 form a bent passage having a substantially rectangular cross section. In this embodiment, the opening 8654 is formed in the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. The opening portion 8654 is formed substantially the same as the opening portion 6641 in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball from the opening portion 8654 to the outside, the overhanging dimension L4 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed. In this case, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set to a position that overlaps with the range Rg that is a partial displacement locus of the game ball projected from the opening 8654. Accordingly, the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded by effectively utilizing the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the overhanging dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. As a result, the effect produced by the slide unit SL can be enhanced.

In this case, the passage member 8600 is provided with a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 for detecting passage of a game ball, respectively, on the upstream side and the downstream side of the opening 8654. Therefore, by monitoring the detection state by the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, at least the game ball does not exist in the passage of the passage member 8600, therefore, a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 8654. It is possible to understand that it is not done.

Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is moved to the range Rg only while it is understood that at least a part of the game ball is not projected from the opening 8654. It is possible to avoid the interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball by controlling the displacement so that the slide unit SL and the game ball overlap.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a ninth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 62 to 126. The first control example is configured to display an over-winning effect when the game ball overwins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the over-winning has occurred during the jackpot game, so that the player can provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

As the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of gaming balls over-winned may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily understand the number of gaming balls that have won an over-win. In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of game balls that have won the over prize. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, which can enhance the interest of the player.

In the first control example, as the over-prize effect, the over-win prize effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in accordance with the progress of the round in the jackpot game. That is, the selection ratio of the over-prize effect is configured to be different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the character strings suggesting right-handedness (right-handed right-handed right-handed) are arranged in a circle and displayed. Thereby, even when the display screen (sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

It should be noted that a display suggesting a right-handed stroke may be performed and a voice suggesting a right-handed stroke (for example, a voice saying "please right-hand") may be output. With this, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is right hitting.

In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LEDs are blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. Configured to.

As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 cannot be visually recognized, the blinking display state of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. According to the displacement, the display position of the design is changed. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 and perform an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to preferably display the effect.

In the first control example, the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are vertically driven (slide) (that is, the display area is vertically long) and horizontally (slide). The display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected in this case (that is, when the display area is horizontally long). As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 and perform an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

First, with reference to FIG. 62A, data of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described.

In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are configured to perform display based on one image data. Specifically, the image data represented by the coordinates (0,0) to (X,Y3) is used, and the image data in the area (0,0) to (X,Y1) is stored in the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Displayed on the upper display surface 523a, the image data of the area (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image of the area (0, Y2) to (X, Y3). The data is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 62(b) is a schematic diagram showing the effect contents at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to the close position, and the button with the word "PUSH" is drawn on the lower display surface 523a2. Is displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 while this button is displayed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the sliding movement. The effect is started (see FIGS. 63 to 65).

Next, the effect display in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In this control example, effect display using the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) and the third symbol display device 81 provided on the slide member 520 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is directed upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is directed downward. By sliding down (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), the display area used for effect display is enlarged, and the design (design imitating “fish” in FIG. 63) is enlarged using the enlarged display area. The effect display that causes the number of symbols to be increased is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to display a variety of patterns in the display area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram showing a display area in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. In this state, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to a position where the upper display surface 523a1 lowers the upper half of the design. The display is controlled so that the display surface 523a2 is displayed.

Even in such a case, the display data displayed on each display surface (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide display data for the sub liquid crystal display device, and the amount of data can be reduced.

In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, but other configurations may be used, for example, the third symbol display device displays. The display area in which the information regarding the game to be played (for example, the display of the number of stored memories and the display of an abnormality) is displayed may be visible regardless of the position of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Good.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts the sliding movement from the state shown in FIG. 63(a), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 63(b). FIG. 63(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has started from the state shown in FIG. 63(a). As shown in FIG. 63(b), when the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started, the upper display surface 523a1 slides upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63(b)), and moves downward. The display surface 523a2 slides downward (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63B). On the slide-moved upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2, the same display objects (the upper half and the lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63A are displayed. This can be realized by moving the display position of the display object according to the amount of movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

Then, as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. In the third symbol display device 81, the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2, the display of the symbol corresponding to the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the third symbol display The symbols displayed on the display surface of the device 81 are displayed, and from the front side (visible side), the lower display surface 523a2 (lower symbol), the upper display surface 523a1 (upper symbol), the third symbol display device 81. Are displayed in the order of the display surface (middle pattern).

In the state shown in FIG. 63(b), most of the three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) are displayed in an overlapping state, so it is clear which symbol is displayed to the player. It is difficult to get to know. In this state, since the symbols (middle symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are layered so that the symbols are most difficult to see, what symbol is the symbol that appears last for the player? There is an effect that it is possible to execute the effect while expecting, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), a state will be described in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 63(b). 64(a) is a diagram showing a state where the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63(b), and FIG. 64(b) is a diagram showing the state shown in FIG. 64(a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 advanced further.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), as the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. By gradually exposing the surface, the entire display area is gradually expanded. Even in this state, the same display object (the upper half and the lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63A is displayed on the slidably moved upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2.

Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the respective symbols are displayed so that the overlapping of the upper symbol, the middle symbol and the lower symbol is gradually reduced. With this configuration, with respect to the display of the upper display 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, display of display data corresponding to a specific display object (display object displayed from the state of FIG. 63(a)). It suffices to execute the control for moving the position in accordance with the sliding movement of each display surface, and it is possible to reduce the load of the display control.

Moreover, the effect display for gradually reducing the overlapping of the symbols is fixed by actually moving the display surfaces (the upper display 523a1, the lower display surface 523a2, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81). There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with the case of executing on a display surface.

In this case, the timing of sliding movement of each display surface (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) is changed, or the speed of the sliding movement is changed, and the display movement of each display surface is changed in accordance with the sliding movement. Display control should be executed. As a result, there is an effect that the staging effect can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b), a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is further slid from the state of FIG. 64(b) will be described. FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and FIG. 65(b) is a state showing the state shown in FIG. 65(a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 advanced further.

By sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to the position shown in FIG. 65(a), a part of the mode showing the numbers attached to the middle symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Further, when the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses and the state of FIG. 65(b) is reached, the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol are completely displayed (each display surface is separated to the maximum). It will be in a state of sliding to the position). In this state, the player visually recognizes the mode showing the number attached to the middle symbol, so that the result of the special symbol corresponding to the current display effect can be grasped.

In this control example, when a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are configured to be executed. , Other than that may be used. For example, after displaying that the special symbol has been won as a big jackpot with the third symbol, this technique is used to notify whether the big hit is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot using the effect display (so-called probability variation promotion effect). May be.

Next, the display content when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates will be described with reference to FIG. 66. 66(a) is a diagram showing a mode in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and FIG. 66(b) shows the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in the left/right direction. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of contacting in a direction.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66A to the state shown in FIG. 66B, the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is changed to the sub position. By correcting the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the rotation angle, the same display mode as before rotation can be displayed. Even in this case, since the display data displayed on each display surface is the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to separately provide the display data and the data amount can be reduced. There is an effect that you can.

Next, the inversion operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible as described above, and the display surface (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) described above is provided on one surface side of the slide member 520, and the other surface side thereof is provided. Is provided with decorative surfaces (upper decorative surface 523b1 and lower decorative surface 523b2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 67 to FIG. 68, an effect mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed at a position covering the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. 67(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from the state of facing the front surface side, and FIG. 67(b) is a display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in the rear surface. It is the figure which showed the state which started facing the side (state in which the decoration surface started facing the front side). The sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state in which most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side is hidden, and the main effect is switched to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in place of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. At the lower part of the lower display surface 523a2, a decorative design Z indicating that the special design is being variably displayed is displayed, and on the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative design Z on the front side and The sub-LEDs 290 are arranged at the matching positions. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 face the front surface side, respectively. By inverting, the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (connected in parallel (arranged in contact with each other)) to form a pattern of an apple, so that the characters "CHANGE" are formed. It is configured. In addition, the lower surface of the apple is provided with a corrugated decoration, and four LEDs are arranged at each tip. Among them, the bottom LED arranged on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is composed of the sub LED 290. 68A shows a state in which the sub LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68B shows a state in which the sub LED is turned on.

With this configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 520 is inverted and the display surface cannot be visually recognized, the player can be informed that the special symbol is changing, and the player will be confused. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a right-handed notification mode, which is a mode in which the launch position of the game ball during the jackpot game is suggested, will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a right hitting notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the jackpot game. The character "right hit" is displayed in a three-circle (ring-shaped) curve, and during the jackpot game, each character is rotated right and displayed. In this control example, the variable winning device 65, the game ball flowing down the right side (right flow path) of the third symbol display device 81, the game flow down the left side (left flow path) of the third symbol display device 81. The game balls are arranged at a position where it is easier to win than the balls (lower right part of the game area). As a result, the player normally operates the handle by passing the game ball through the left flow path and performing the game so that the first starting opening 64 is won and the left hitting strength is achieved. Although the ball is fired, during the jackpot game, the handle is operated so that the firing strength is such that the game ball passes through the right flow path to play the game.

Here, by displaying the right-handed notification mode, while notifying that the steering wheel is operated with the emission strength at which the game ball passes through the right-hand side flow path, and the word right-handed is rotated to the right, the right-hand side flow path is displayed. Position (direction) and the turning direction of the handle are simultaneously notified.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is slidably moved during the jackpot game, it moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and when the third symbol display device 81 is hidden. Displays a right-handed notification mode on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1. FIG. 69C is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated rightward. In this case, it is displayed in the lower right part of the upper display surface 523a1 (FIG. 69(b) and the actual display position is not changed). Also in this case, the right-handed operation can be correctly notified without changing the direction of the right-handed character display or the rotational display direction of the character.

As described above, in this control example, the right-handed character display is rotated and displayed in a ring shape, so that even if the displayed display surface is rotated, the correct position is notified without changing the display mode. You can Therefore, the load of the display control process can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data can be reduced as compared with the case where various right-handing notification modes are prepared.

In this control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed with characters, but a ring-shaped arrow symbol or a pattern simulating a game ball may be rotated. Further, it is also possible to rotate and display a design imitating a handle for changing the emission intensity of the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a modification of the right-handing notification mode in this control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a modification of the right-handed notification mode. This modification is modified in that an arrow symbol curved rightward is added in a three-ring shape on the back side of the right-handed character display.

FIG. 147(a) is a diagram showing the display area in the right-handed notification mode. The right-handed notification mode is displayed in the display area having a ring shape. This display area is divided into three areas every 120 degrees from the center, and is composed of a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. The first area α is an area in which an arrow symbol curved to the right is displayed by rotating to the right, and the second area β and the third area γ each have the characters “right hit” along the ring shape. It is curved and displayed. The second area β and the third area γ are set in a layer above the rotationally displayed arrow symbol, and the rotationally displayed arrow symbol is displayed in the second area β and the third area γ. It is configured not to be. Further, three arrow symbols are set, and when one arrow symbol moves to the back of the second area β, the next arrow symbol moves to the first area α and is displayed. There is. The position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is variably set according to the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 147(a) is a display mode when the right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the right-handed character display layer in the layer of the first area α is below the arrow pattern. It is set. Therefore, the arrow symbol is displayed in the first area α, and the right-handed character is not displayed. FIG. 147(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees to the right. In this case, the character display layer of the third area β is set below the arrow design layer, and the character display layer of the first area α is set to a layer above the arrow design.

With such a configuration, a rightward arrow symbol is always displayed in the upper direction of the gaming machine 10, and the player can be notified of the correct position of the right flow path. In this modification, the position where the arrow is displayed is changed by changing the setting of the layer, but the present invention is not limited to this. The liquid crystal display device 523 may be configured to be variable by being rotated according to the amount of rotation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, details for setting the effect described in FIGS. 63 to 65 will be described. In the present control example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid, the effect of correcting the display position of the symbol according to the amount of the slid movement is configured.

Specifically, in accordance with the fact that the upper display surface 523a1 is changed in the upward direction from FIG. 70(a) to FIG. 70(b), based on the amount by which the upper display surface 523a1 is slid and moved, the symbol 2 The display coordinates of (upper pattern) are corrected in the upward direction.

Further, in response to the lower display surface 523a2 being changed downward, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (lower symbol) are corrected downward based on the amount by which the lower display surface 523a2 is slid.

In this way, by changing the display coordinates of each symbol according to the amount of sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the symbol spreads as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides. The effect can be displayed.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for normal symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, to the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning of the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) The second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the winning of each is provided, respectively, in each of these areas, in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, the first hit The respective values of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a universal figure execution area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a sphere on either side. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67 of.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is the per per random number table. When it coincides with the value of the random number which is a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table, for low probability of special symbols (time period of low probability state of special symbols), and high probability of high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special symbols) Of high random number) and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9". It is determined whether there is any, and if any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is "9", and if "9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value is returned to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1 symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, the random number value "0" is for low probability Is stored in the random number table for the first. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for high probability. In this way, at the time of high probability of a special symbol, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random number value that is a big jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value that is a big jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability overlap. In order not to become, it is possible to set the random number value which becomes each jackpot. If there is a value that is always used as a big hit random number regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number will be input from the outside and the big hit will be apt to be fraudulently assigned. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), by changing the random number value to be a big jackpot, the jackpot of a special symbol Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that becomes, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 29" is "big hit A". Moreover, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In addition, in the present control example, there are two types of jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol, by setting the jackpot type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol can be more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the winning in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly motivated to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played longer.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol "disconnect reach." (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and “complete detachment” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 storage ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. Stored in area 203a. It is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the sphere has won the second winning opening 64.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbols and low probability for special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is 0 to 79, which is narrow and for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72(a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "variation (for long time)", "variation (for short time)", "variation normal reach", and "variation super reach" are defined as variation patterns for deviation. As the variation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Although not shown in the figure, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and more detailed fluctuations corresponding to the types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal symbol per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is a normal symbol. When it matches the value of the random number that is a hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined as a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table, for low probability of the normal symbol (the period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that at the time of low probability (at the time of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the number of big numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be a hit, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), when the normal symbol has a low probability, there are 24 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range thereof is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are a big hit is 24, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is "0.2 seconds x 1 time". However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values to win is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds”, as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and is further attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the electric accessory 640a becomes very long, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is "1 second x 2 times" only. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device (not shown) can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 72A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 72A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(a)) is a table in which the value of a random number that is a big prize for a special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

This first random number table 202a, the jackpot determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot at a low probability of the special symbol (the jackpot determination value at the time of a low probability), and the special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol And a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of high probability) for determining whether or not it is a jackpot, and the number of determination values (random numbers) to be each jackpot is different. In this way, by changing the number of judgment values (random numbers) that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73(b)) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be respectively selected. Specifically, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A, and “50 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit B.

Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 (that is, a lottery for determining whether or not it is in the probability variation state). However, in the “big hit B”, it is impossible (or difficult) to pass the probability variation switch 65a5 (that is, the lottery for determining whether or not the probability variation state is established is not executed).

Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73C is a diagram schematically showing the content of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 73(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 73(c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is usually determined as a winning symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device (not shown) ends, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time as being displayed, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74(a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74(a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74(b)), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74(c)), At least the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74(d)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a fluctuation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, "0 to 50" is for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "51 to 179" is for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds). ), the variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big jackpot, hits the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 74C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is out. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach “198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out during the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined and is acquired from the out-of-place (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 74C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase of the period until the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is lengthened during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 72(b), special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, action counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball It has at least a timer 203p, a probability variation valid flag 203q, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time saving counter 203t, a warning flag 203u, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. The respective values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2, which are acquired based on winning the prize, are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored are shifted.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 640 (for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a described above. It is different only in that it is changed to the second special symbol), so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) similarly to the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing is performed to pack the data of (1) into the reserved area having the area number smaller by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 (third) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the sphere enters the first winning port 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases 1 up to a maximum value of 4 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

Special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, the variable display of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball (start prize) into the second winning opening 640 (third) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time the sphere enters the second winning opening 640 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 1 up to 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 85).

The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times of variable display holding N1 in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (the number of holding times of variable display in the first special symbol N2) is The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the number of reserved balls command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85, S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is changed. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the variable display reserved sphere number itself, which is reserved in 110. As a result, the variable display holding ball number managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of held balls in the displayed actual variable display deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and holds the number of holding balls for display to notify the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a variable display holding sphere number (standby number) of the normal symbol (second symbol) which is performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the sphere at the normal starting opening 67. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the normal starting opening 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 89).

When the sphere normally passes through the starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. Then, the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (see S705 of FIG. 90). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S703 of FIG. 90). : No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low-probability gaming state (including a time saving gaming state). In the present control example, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when the probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. It should be noted that, in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed to the probability variation switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on the setting to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65a5 has passed before the power was turned off. 203h may be configured to be officially set to on and then returned. In this case, whether or not the probability variation switch 65a5 has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an irregularity in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65a5 in one round during the big hit game (13 rounds in the big hit A in this control example). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning port 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65a5 is passed (see S1511 in FIG. 98). In addition, after the process of determining whether the number of gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1611 in FIG. 99). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) become one. After it is discriminated whether it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds in the jackpot A based on the start of 13 rounds, and the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on in the jackpot B for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Is set. In the action counter 203k, the jackpot A is set with a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds as start data for 13 rounds, and the jackpot B is set with a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds (see S1202 in FIG. 95). .. On the other hand, in the process of S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65a5 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (a voice "Look at the liquid crystal" in this control example) for drawing the player's attention. In the present control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the twelfth round (10 winnings in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 in the processing of S1402 of the notification processing (see FIG. 97) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is prompted to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the passage solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined by the operation period of the passage solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is over, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, a notification is given to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is performed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed contents, and it is possible to divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the present control example, the notification is made to show the third symbol display device 81 so as to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable winning is started before the 13th round is started. The device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured so as to divert the player's attention by notifying the player that the decorative lamp 34 and the like are to be seen. Further, the player may be distracted by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 12 rounds and giving a notification prompting the user to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the distracting effect is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time necessary for discharging the game balls in the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. Is the counter.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for discharging the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this control example, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match ( S1607 in FIG. 99). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is blocked in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65, give a shock or the like at the start timing of the 13th round, and make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and it is a big hit B. Also, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5.

When the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability variation valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 based on that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It means that a certain amount of time has not elapsed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball may pass through the probability variation switch 65a5.

The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON. The probability variation valid timer 203r can determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65a5 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In this control example, the time required for the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65a5 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not to be passed.

Thereby, the switching member 65h is changed illegally to allow the probability variation switch 65a5 to pass the game ball, or to push the game ball from below the probability variation switch 65a5 with a piano wire or the like to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65a5. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as erroneous detection of passing through a magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (not shown) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1611 in FIG. 99).

The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present control example, if the probability variation game state is not set after the jackpot game, the time shift game state of 100 times is entered.

Prediction flag 203u, winning information is obtained when the transition to the probability variation gaming state, the winning information is already pending (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b It is a flag indicating that the winning information which becomes the big hit A (that is, there is a possibility of shifting to the probability variation gaming state) is stored in (Information). In the prefetch process (see FIG. 88), the sign flag 203u is changed based on the winning information when the winning information which is a big hit when the game shifts to the probability variation gaming state is acquired (S507: Yes in FIG. 88). When it is determined that there is a possibility that it is in the probability variation game state when the game is started (that is, there is winning information for jackpot A by then) (S508: Yes in FIG. 88), it is set to ON. It Then, the winning information command indicating that the precursor flag 203u is turned on is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S511 of FIG. 88). Then, in the ending process (see FIG. 96) executed at the end of the jackpot game, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (that is, when the probability variation game state is entered) (see S1304 in FIG. 96), Set off. Although illustration is omitted, in the ending process (FIG. 96), when it is determined that the jackpot game based on the winning information in which the predictor flag 203u is turned on is finished (that is, the jackpot A jackpot game is executed. In the case where the probability variation game state is not entered), the sign flag 203u is also set to OFF.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags and the like are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via the input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 91) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 225, the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and other devices 228 (slide motor 311, rotation motor 431, reversing motor 531). , A sub LED 290, a clock generator (CLK) 900, and the like, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

The slide motor 311 is a motor for sliding and moving the display surface 523a, which is the upper display surface 523a1 that is the sub liquid crystal display device 523, in a direction parallel to the gaming machine, and is configured by a stepping motor. The rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is composed of a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is composed of a stepping motor that is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The reversing motor 531 is provided with a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2, respectively. 523a2 can be rotated independently of each other. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 independently of each other such that the display area faces the front side and the display area faces the rear side. Is.

The sub LED 290 is arranged on the decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and when the upper display surface 523a1 is inverted, the decorative pattern Z (displayed on the third symbol display device 81). The symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is changing) is changed to blinking that the special symbol is changing to notify the player.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

The clock generator 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms period to the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. The clock generation device 900 is a device for supplying a synchronization signal for controlling blinking of the sub LED 290 and the decorative pattern Z at the same timing in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and moved to a position overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub LED 290 blinks 0 in synchronization with the displayed decorative symbol Z. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by notifying the player that the special symbol is fluctuating and displaying it by displaying.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78.

In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 75(a), a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over-winning table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and other various types necessary for game control. Data, programs, etc. are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (off, out-of-reach, various reach, etc.) are set in the counter value for not-shown variation pattern selection. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment of success or failure, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent a player from getting tired early.

The over-winning table 222b is a table for selecting an over-winning effect to be executed when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Here, the details of the over-winning prize table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the over-winning table 222b. The over-winning table 222b is a table used for selecting an over-winning effect in a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the over-winning table 222b includes a winning over-winning table 222b1 and a predictive over-winning table. 222b2 and a missed over winning table 222b3 are provided.

The winning over winning table 222b1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 76(b), the winning over-prize table 222b1 defines the effect content selected as the over-win prize effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f, and the rule varies depending on the number of rounds. Has become.

Specifically, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, not executed), and " If it is "150 to 198", it becomes "foam", and if it is "199", it becomes "fish school".

The "fish group" is selected as the effect content of the over-winning effect only when the winning over-winning table 222b1 is used (that is, when the pending winning information includes winning information that is a big hit). By displaying the effect of "fish school" as the over-winning effect, it can be suggested (notified) that the winning information held for the player includes the winning information to be a big hit.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, not executed), and "100 to 189". If so, it becomes "foam", and if it is "190-199", it becomes "fish group". In this way, as the round in the jackpot game progresses, the jackpot game is configured to be easily displayed with the over-winning performance indicating that the expectation that the jackpot information is held is high. Even for a long period of time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the predictive over-winning table 222b2, there is winning information that is a big hit if it shifts to the probability variation game state in the pending prize information, and the variation probability state before the fluctuation based on the pending prize information is started. It is a table used when there is a possibility of shifting to (that is, when there is a high probability that a big hit will occur afterwards, although it has not been determined that this is a big hit).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76C, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none." (That is, not executed), and if “150 to 199”, it becomes “bubble”.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, not executed), and "100 to 199". If so, it becomes "foam".

The out-of-over prize table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information that is a big hit among the pending winning information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76D, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 179", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none." (That is, not executed), and if it is “180 to 199”, it is “bubble”.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 159", the effect content of the over-prize effect is "none" (that is, not executed) and "160 to 199". If so, it becomes "foam".

As described above, the missed over-winning table 222b3 is configured so that “foam” is less likely to be selected as the over-winning effect than the predictive over-winning table 222b2. As a result, when "bubbles" are displayed as the over-winning effect, the player can be expected to win a big jackpot after that, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In this control example, any one of the three types of “none”, “bubble” or “fish school” is selected as the over-winning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to select from four types, or may be selected from two types. In addition, the effect content may be configured such that "none" (that is, not executed) is not selected, and an over-winning effect is displayed each time an over-winning is achieved. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand that the over-winning is achieved.

Further, as the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of gaming balls over-winned may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily understand the number of gaming balls that have won an over-win.

In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of game balls that have won the over prize. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, which can enhance the interest of the player.

Next, details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used for selecting an ending effect at the end of the big hit game, and as shown in FIG. 77(a), the ending table 222c includes a winning ending table 222c1 and a predictive ending table 222c2. A detaching ending table 222c3 is provided.

The winning ending table 222c1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77(b), the winning ending table 222c1 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect contents selected as the ending effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(b), when the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 19", the effect content of the ending effect is "none" (that is, not executed), In the case of "20 to 59", "foam" is selected, in the case of "60 to 99", "special foam" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 199", "fish school" is selected.

In the sign ending table 222c2, there is winning information that is a big hit if it shifts to the probability variation game state in the pending prize information, and it changes to the probability variation game state before the fluctuation based on the pending prize information is started. It is a table used when there is a possibility of migration.

As shown in FIG. 77(c), the predictive ending table 222c2 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect contents selected as the ending effect, and "foam" as the over-winning effect during the jackpot game. Is defined differently depending on the number of selected times (the value of the bubble number counter 223j).

Specifically, when the value of the bubble counter 223j is "0 to 4" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 149", the effect content of the ending effect is "none" (that is, not executed). ) Is selected, if “150 to 179”, “foam” is selected, and if “180 to 199”, “special foam” is selected.

When the value of the bubble counter 223j is "5 to 15" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 99", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect. If "100 to 159", "foam" is selected, and if "160 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

When the value of the bubble number counter 223j is "16 or more" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 49", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and " If "50 to 99", "foam" is selected, and if "100 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

In this way, when many "foam" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select the "foam" or "special foam" ending effect that suggests that a big hit is likely to occur thereafter. Is configured as follows. As a result, even though a large number of "bubbles" are selected (displayed) in the over-winning presentation, a production with a low degree of expectation (for example, "none") is selected in the ending production. It can prevent (suppress) that motivation is reduced.

In addition, when the ending effect is selected using the sign ending table 222c2, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur thereafter. Therefore, when a lot of "foam" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select an effect that suggests that a jackpot is likely to occur thereafter, that is, the reliability of the displayed effects is high. Will be. As a result, as the number of over-winning game balls increases, a benefit that the reliability of the ending effect is improved can be given, and the player's interest can be improved.

The off-ending ending table 222c3 is a table that is used when there is no winning information that is a big hit if the game shifts to the probability variation gaming state in the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77(d), the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect contents selected as the ending effect are defined in the detachment ending table 222c2.

Specifically, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 159", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and if "160 to 189", "foam". Is selected, and if “190 to 199”, “special bubble” is selected.

In the present control example, only the signing ending table 222c2 is configured to change the value of the effect counter 223f and the content of the effect according to the value of the bubble number counter 223j, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the same may be applied to the hit ending table 222c1 and the miss ending table 222c3.

Next, the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) for changing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523 are driven. The information of is stored.

Specifically, the slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving the slide motor 431 that slides the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, and the circumferential movement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. A rotation drive scenario 222d2 for driving the rotation motor 311 to be driven and a reversal drive scenario 222d3 for driving the reversal motor 531 for reversing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are provided.

First, the contents of the slide drive scenario 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. In the slide drive scenario 222d1, a set value (operating speed (pps), which is set for the motor control IC (motor driver), corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of variable display, The number of operation steps and the operation direction) are specified.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), an operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the close position in correspondence with the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m (forward path) Information) is stored. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction. The setting contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the separated position to the close position.

Here, the operating speed of 50 pps means that 50 pulses (steps) are output to the motor driver per second, so that the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 operate 100 steps (moving from the separated position to the close position). Required time is 100/50 seconds (2 seconds).

Corresponding to the value “5001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, information related to the operation (return path operation) for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is stored. There is. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. The setting contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

Here, since the drive scenario counter 223m is a counter that increments by 1 every 1 ms, the value of the drive scenario counter 223m becomes "5001" because the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are located close to each other. It is 5 seconds after the slide displacement is started to the separated position (that is, 3 seconds after the completion of the slide displacement for 2 seconds).

Then, the information "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored in correspondence with the value "7001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. The value of the drive scenario counter 223m becomes “7001” because 2 seconds after the operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is started (that is, This is when the slide displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is completed). By reading this "END" data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

As described above, in the slide drive scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and then are maintained at the separated position for 3 seconds, and then again moved to the second position. It takes a second to slide from the close position to the separate position.

Next, the contents of the rotary drive scenario 222d2 will be described with reference to FIG. Similarly, in the rotary drive scenario 222d2, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 correspond to the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m at the first rotation position (upper display). The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are left and right at a position rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first rotation position from the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 which are upper and lower positions. Stores information related to the operation for rotating in the circumferential direction to the position (the operation on the outward path). Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction.

Corresponding to the value “8001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the operation for rotating the third symbol display device 81, the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the second rotation position to the first rotation position in the circumferential direction (return path operation). ) Related information is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

Then, the information "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored in correspondence with the value "12001" of the drive scenario counter 223m.

Thus, in the rotation drive scenario 222d2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position over 3 seconds, and then the second rotation position for 5 seconds. Then, it is rotated again from the second rotation position to the first position in 3 seconds.

Next, the contents of the inversion drive scenario 222d3 will be described with reference to FIG. Similarly, the reverse drive scenario 222d3 also corresponds to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display, and the set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver). , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side) corresponding to the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m. Information regarding an operation (outward movement) for reversing the position from the (reverse position) to the reverse position (the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction.

Corresponding to the value "5001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, information about the operation (return operation) for the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to invert again from the inversion position to the normal position is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

Then, in correspondence with the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, information "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored.

As described above, in the inversion drive scenario 222d3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from the normal position to the inversion position over 2 seconds, then is maintained in the inversion position for 3 seconds, and then over 2 seconds again from the inversion position. Flip to position.

In this control example, the operation for one motor is specified in each drive scenario, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a driving scenario in which the reversing motor 531 is driven after the sliding motor 431 is driven may be defined. Accordingly, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be slid and displaced to the close position, and then the reversal operation can be performed. As a result, variations that drive (displace) the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, and a stop. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub prize number counter 223h, fish group flag 223i, bubble number counter 223j, clock counter 223k, drive scenario counter 223m, drive scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z, Is provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved ball before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control unit 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control unit 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a special sphere 1 reserved sphere number command 203d indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1907 in FIG. 102). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of holding sphere number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110, so that Detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2302 in FIG. 106). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2309 of FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 used for advance notice effect and various lottery. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round in the jackpot game is executed. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when the over-winning effect is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over-winning effect depending on the value of the round number counter 223g, the over-winning effect can be selected (displayed) at a different ratio for each round.

The sub winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 65a in the big hit game round. The sub winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning number command received from the main control device 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and is either a normal winning or an over winning depending on the value of the sub winning number counter 223h. Is determined (see S2008 in FIG. 103). Although not shown, it is initialized to 0 when a new round number command is received.

The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the effect of "fish school" is selected (displayed) in the over-winning effect. The fish school flag 223i is set to ON when the "fish school" over-winning effect is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2109 in FIG. 104), and is set to OFF in the ending setting process (see S2109). (See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), when the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes in FIG. 105), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probability variation game state is given is repeatedly executed (displayed) and the player feels uncomfortable. Further, it is possible to prevent a so-called fall, in which the effect of "bubbles" is displayed in the subsequent ending effect even though the effect of "fish school" is displayed as the over-winning effect.

The bubble number counter 223j is a counter for determining the number of times the effect of "bubble" is selected as the over-winning effect. The bubble number counter 223j is incremented by 1 when the "foam" over-winning effect is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2111 in FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of the bubble number counter 223j is used when the ending effect is selected in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated from 0 to 65535 that is counted according to the clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and by performing an effect based on the value of the clock counter 223k, the effect can be synchronized with the display control device 114.

Specifically, in the ramp editing process (see FIG. 107), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The effect timing is determined based on the value of the clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k reaches 1000, lighting of the sub LED 290 and display of the sub symbol are started, and at 1002, the sub LED 290 is turned off and the sub symbol is hidden. It is determined.

The clock of the clock generator 900 changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start an effect such as lighting of the LED after 2 seconds, it is sufficient to determine to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although illustration is omitted, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to one that changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock whose frequency is 5 Hz). For example, it may be changed in a cycle of once every 50 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 10 Hz), or may be changed in a cycle of once every 500 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 1 Hz). When the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high (that is, the changing interval becomes short), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may be made short. As a result, even when the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high, the clock counter 223k can be updated without missing the change.

The drive scenario counter 223m is a counter for determining the timing for executing control of various drive motors. The drive scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when the change pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the change display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). Then, in the sub liquid crystal drive processing (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, 1 is added when the drive scenario is set in the drive scenario storage area 223n described later. Information for driving the motors set in the drive scenario storage area 223n is acquired according to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m, and various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are acquired. ) Is driven and controlled.

The drive scenario storage area 223n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d stored in the ROM 222 described above. The drive scenario storage area 223m stores the corresponding drive scenario 222d when the change pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the change display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). It Various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are drive-controlled based on the drive scenario information stored in the drive scenario storage area 223m.

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 102) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 ( (Variation production) and notice production are controlled.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 ( (Variation production) and notice production are controlled.

FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113 and the clock generation device 900, and the output side of the input port 238 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 on the bus line. It is connected via 240. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages in succession, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND type flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is first stored after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c or less, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the information on the image being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are completed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when the entry of is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage”, the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all third symbol display devices. It is an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed at 81, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the back image is scrolled horizontally from left to right by the image controller 237. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, and therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 does The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is started in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers "0" to "9", main symbols consisting of rear symbols such as a wooden box, characters such as rear symbols and planers, furoshiki, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the device 114 stores it in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effect, jackpot-related A display data table corresponding to the command-related display, round effect, and demonstration effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started and the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbols showing the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time saving period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so the chances of drawing a regular symbol will increase, and the chances of winning the ordinary symbol also increase. .. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbols to be opened as a jackpot for the ordinary symbols, the balls can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the special symbols can be easily selected. Therefore, the longer the shortened time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit for the special symbol, which can be given to the player, and the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so the electric prize is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get the feeling of a period when you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol without it. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

Also, in the ending production, by notifying that the lottery result of any one of the held special symbols will be a jackpot of the special symbol, the player will be a special symbol in the lottery of the held special symbol. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is a main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified by this back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this control example, the case where only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table will be described. Instead of this, what range of the backside type and the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the back surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time but may be the information indicating the address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

As for the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information by managing the offset information with the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol changes at high speed for a predetermined time period when the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 82). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 82).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4705 in FIG. 123(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 of FIG. 111(b)) and the simple display setting process are performed so that the image at power-on 8 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2912 in FIG. 111B) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 and the like. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123(b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 on the basis of the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 111(b )), the pointer updating process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such updating of the pointer 233f is performed, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 83), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,. For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold sphere number symbol. Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 111(b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 of FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is displayed to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 111B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The display clock counter 233m is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535 that are counted according to the clock change input from the clock generation device 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect is easily synchronized with the audio lamp control device 113 by performing the effect based on the value of the display clock counter 223m. Can be made.

Specifically, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The clock of the clock generator 900 changes in a cycle of once in 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start an effect such as lighting of the LED after 2 seconds, it is sufficient to determine to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although illustration is omitted, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

Although details will be described later, the clock output of the clock generation device 900 is started after the startup process of the display control device 114 (see S2601 to S2606 of FIG. 109) is completed. As a result, the start-up process of the display control device 114, which requires more time than the voice lamp control device 113, ends (that is, the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 ends. Since the clock output is started, the values of the clock counters (clock counter 223k and display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

The drive data storage area 233p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p has a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and a reverse amount storage area 233p3.

This drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when the drive of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) is set in the voice lamp control device 113. The drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates and the display angle of each image forming one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. Accordingly, even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid or moved, it is possible to display a suitable effect.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and other than the demo display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 99. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present control example, When they reach 299, 99 and 239 respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is accompanied by the passage of a ball. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the third symbol It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

The value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A special symbol 2 holding ball number command (special figure 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the processing of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is subtracted (S270), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) indicating the holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 86. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it is a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

In this control example, when the big hit A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that although the display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (the present lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a scenario for opening the specific winning opening is set (S217), and then the setting of the start of jackpot A (such as 16 rounds). The jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is special. Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment) It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed on the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

If the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time, the jackpot of the special symbol Whether or not the lottery result is acquired from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(c)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(c)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. By configuring in this way, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state), the first obtained in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 73(c)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value for this hit, the jackpot for the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined as a jackpot for the special symbol (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of the big hit showing the big hit A is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type is set as the stop type. Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74(a)) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display state at the time of detachment corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Then, this process is completed.

Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process ends, it returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87, the starting winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. If there is, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

When the starting winning process (S87 in FIG. 87) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. With respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the prefetching process (S413) which is one process of the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413).

In this prefetching process (FIG. 88, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), the process proceeds to S502.

In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of fluctuation is a probable change (S502), and if the game state is a probable change (S502: Yes), the high probability of the first random number table 202a is determined. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the game state is not a certain change (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a (S504), and the process of S505 is performed. Move.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S505). In the processing of S505, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S505: Yes), a big hit is shown and a winning information command including a big hit type is set (S506), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if it is determined that the lottery result is out of place (S505: No), then, if the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the probability variation gaming state, whether the lottery result is a big hit or not. It is determined (S507).

In the processing of S507, even if the game state at the start of fluctuation is the probability variation game state, if the lottery result is out (S507: No), the winning information command indicating the out is set (S508), and The process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S507, if the gaming state at the start of variation is the probability variation gaming state, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S507: Yes), then the transition to the probability variation state at the time of variation start. It is determined whether there is a possibility (S508). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the changing winning information or the pending winning information includes the winning information that is a big hit for shifting to the probability changing state.

In the process of S508, when there is no possibility that the state has changed to the probability variation state at the start of fluctuation (that is, there is no jackpot winning information that shifts to the probability variation gaming state) (S508: No), a prize indicating a deviation The information command is set (S509), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when there is a possibility that the state has transitioned to the probability variation state at the start of fluctuation (that is, there is jackpot winning information that transitions to the probability variation gaming state) (S508: Yes), a high probability. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value for the game and the low probability (S520). Then, the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S511), which indicates that the sign flag 203u is ON, and the winning information command including each lottery result acquired in the process of S520 is set (S512), and the present process To finish.

Here, in this control example, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probability variation game state is given until the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65a5 during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the present control example, by executing the processing of S507 to S512, when there is the winning information that is a big hit that can pass through the probability variation switch 65a5, the lottery results at the high probability and the low probability are obtained. It can be acquired and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, an appropriate effect can be displayed regardless of whether the probability variation game state is given or not.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the electric winning combination associated with the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the first winning opening 64 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. The middle and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the high random probability second symbol per random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the high random number second random symbol table 202c per symbol. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 73(c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 73(c)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) by lighting.

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when the hit of the normal symbol is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 640. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of place (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the ordinary symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is opened/closed when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not normally completed, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 93), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), the output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 84) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, it transmits the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) and the start winning process (see FIG. 87) to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, if any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37A, 37B. In the present control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) is finished, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the stop symbol (first symbol) is the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B is stopped (lighted).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 91 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1008 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 93), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1103). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big jackpot of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the processing of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. Then, this process is completed. In the process of S1202, the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), a round number command corresponding to the round number is set (S1205), and this processing is ended.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects.

Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106). When it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1108). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is finished, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present control example), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1109), and the ending process is executed (S1110). Then, this process is completed. Although illustration is omitted, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF just in case in the process of S1009.

Here, details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the content of this ending process (FIG. 96, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302). In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1302: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1303), and this process ends. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S1302, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the present process ends.

Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability variation switch 65a5 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65a5 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. Therefore, whether the game ball passes to the probability variation switch 65a5 during the big hit game or not. You can play games with interest.

Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the contents of this notification processing (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402). The determination of the end timing of the twelfth round is made in the case of detecting that 10 balls have been won in the twelfth round or when it has been determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1402, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the twelfth round (S1402: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the counter of 2 seconds in S1403, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after 12 rounds are finished, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is given. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning a prize device 65 is identified, It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the end of the jackpot game with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given.

In the present control example, the notification counter 203m is provided to perform the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), the notification command is set (S1406). Then, this process is completed. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the output of the voice "Look at the liquid crystal".

Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1501). The round valid period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by incrementing by 1, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is displayed. It is set (S1503). Then, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1506). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1507). Then, the process of S1508 is executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1504 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1505). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the process of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the process of S1508 is executed.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1508). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1509). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i to update (S1511). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1512). Then, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1510, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the processing of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S1514). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1515). Then, this process is completed. Here, if the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 has passed the probability variation switch 65a5 even after the switching member 65h has been switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1508, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1516). If the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1516: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1516: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1517). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1518). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1518: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to OFF (S1519). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S1520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1518, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the process of S1510 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65a5, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball spitting. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65a5 from passing the game ball illegally and being given the probability variation game state.

Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing for monitoring whether or not the probability variation switch 65a5 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1601). If it is outside the round valid period (S1601: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1603). Then, the process of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed.

In the process of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1605). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1606: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1607).

If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the process of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). Then, the process of S1609 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65a5 even if it is the big hit B.

In the process of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1610). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1611), and thereafter, this process ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 100, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1815 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 101). It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 101, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 101), the power-off process of S1815 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1815 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1702: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1815 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1817 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1817, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process advances to S1704 to start the initialization of the RAM 223.

In the process of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1817 is executed (see S1816 in FIG. 101). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1817 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1708 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1817 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the startup process this time was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1704 to S1706 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1709, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1711), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1709 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704 when the processing of S1704 is passed through the processing of S1706 to the processing of S1708. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S1801 this time has been executed (S1801), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1811. In the process of S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1802 to S1811, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). It is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1813 and the command determination process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S1805 without the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display updating process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number of holding balls counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect. It is a process of setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. Further, the input of whether or not the touch operation is performed on the third symbol display device 81 is also monitored.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1808), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, etc. are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the ramp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1809, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1810 is completed, the sub liquid crystal drive processing is executed to drive (slide drive, rotation drive, etc.) the sub liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) 523 (S1811). Details of this sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1812). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the process proceeds to S1813. In the process of S1813, the variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

Then, when the variable display setting process ends, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in-process flag are both turned on (S1816), and the power-off process is executed (S1817). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1818), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1812). This command determination process (S1812) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 101) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. In addition, in this processing, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIG. 102, S1812), first of all unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The fluctuation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). When the reserved ball count command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball count command is the special map 1 reserved ball count command or the special map 2 reserved ball count command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the number of reserved balls counter 203e (the number of times N2 the variable display is reserved in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 number of reserved balls counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the processing of S1908, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c that have been updated are respectively set to the display holding sphere number command for notifying the display control device 114. After the processing of S1908 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), or a special symbol lottery Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol is selected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1908. The value of the number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. Incidentally, when the process of S1908 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1907, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S1909). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this control example, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected, and the display command for notification is set. Yes (S1910).

Next, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S1911). In the process of S1911, when it is determined that the command related to the big hit has been received (S1911: Yes), the big hit related process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. Details of the jackpot-related processing (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1911, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received, the processing directly proceeds to the processing of S1913.

In the process of S1913, it is determined whether or not another command is received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot-related processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the big hit related process (S1912). The jackpot-related processing (S1912) is processing that is executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related processing, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the opening command for display is set (S2002), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the big hit on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2003). In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S2004). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S2005), and this processing is ended.

In the processing of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S2003: No), it is determined whether or not the winning number command is received (S2006). In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to S2008.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub winning number counter 223h updated in the process of S2007 is larger than 10 (S2008). In the process of S2008, when the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is larger than 10 (S2008: Yes), more game balls than the predetermined winning number (10) in one round have entered the specific winning opening 65a ( This is the case when the so-called over-winning prize is given. In this case, the over-winning process is executed (S2009), and this process ends. The details of the over-winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the sub prize number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), the normal effect command is set to execute the normal winning effect, and the main winning command is set. The process ends.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command is not received (S2006: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S2011).

In the processing of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting processing is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and this processing ends. To do. Details of the ending setting process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S2014).

In the process of S2014, when it is determined that the V passage command is received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, and the effect suggesting that the probability variation game state is given is executed. The V effect command for display is set (S2015), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the over-winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the over-winning process (S2009). The over-winning process (S2009) is executed in the above-described jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect based on an over-winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the over-winning process, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning information to be won in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). When it is determined that there is winning information to be won (S2103: Yes), the over-winning effect is selected from the winning over-winning table 222b1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the process of S2101 (S2103). , S2107.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2103 that there is no winning information to be won (S2103: No), it is then determined whether or not there is winning information including the information in which the precursory flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). In the process of S2104, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information in which the predictive flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), the predictive over winning table 222b2 is overrun based on the value of the effect counter 223f. A winning effect is selected (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2107.

In the process of S2104, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information in which the predictive flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), the out-over winning table 222b3 causes an overrun based on the value of the effect counter 223f. A winning effect is selected (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107.

In the process of S2107, a display over-winning command indicating the over-winning effect selected in the process of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the process proceeds to S2108.

In the processing of S2108, it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is "fish school" (S2108). When it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is "fish school" (S2108: Yes), the fish school flag 223i is set to ON (S2109), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2108, when it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not "fish group" (S2108: No), it is determined whether the selected over-winning effect is "bubble". (S2110). When it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is "bubble" (S2110), the bubble number counter 223j is incremented by 1 (S2111), and this processing is ended. In the processing of S2111, the number of times "foam" is selected in the over-winning is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times "foam" is selected (Fig. 104).

In the processing of S2110, when it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not “bubble” (S2110: No), this processing is ended as it is.

In this way, the over-winning effect displayed at the time of over-winning is different depending on whether or not there is information that is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not it is a big hit thereafter). Is configured. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the over-winning effect will be displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S2012). This ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the above-mentioned big hit related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect when the big hit ends.

In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). In the process of S2201, when it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), in the over-winning effect, thereafter, an effect indicating that the probability variation game state is given is already executed (displayed). Since this is the case, the continuous ending effect is selected (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probability variation game state is given is repeatedly executed (displayed) and the player feels uncomfortable.

In the processing of S2201, if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information to be won is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204).

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be won is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: Yes), the ending effect is selected from the winning ending table 222c1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (S2205) and the process proceeds to S2209.

On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be won is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: No), then the winning information including the information in which the predictive flag 203u is set to ON It is determined whether there is any (S2206).

In the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information in which the predictor flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), an effect is selected from the predictor ending table 222c2, and the process proceeds to S2209. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information in which the precursory flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), the effect is selected from the out-of-game ending table 222c3, and the process of S2209. Move to.

In the process of S2209, the effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S2202, S2505, S2207, or S2208 is set (S2209), the fish school flag 223i is set to OFF (S2210), and the value of the bubble number counter 223j is set. This is set to 0 (S2211), and this processing ends.

In this way, the ending effect displayed at the end of the jackpot is different depending on whether or not there is information to be a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not to be a jackpot thereafter). Is configured. As a result, the player pays attention to the ending effect and executes the game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1813). This fluctuation display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2301: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2306 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then in the processing of S1903 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 102), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2303).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2304). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

When the process of S2304 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2303 includes a drive scenario setting (S2305). In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the driving scenario is set (S2305: Yes), the corresponding driving scenario is stored from the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d to the driving scenario storage area 223n (S2306), and the driving scenario is stored. The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

In the process of S2308, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2308). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2308: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process proceeds to S2312. In the processing of S2312, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2312). .. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a lamp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing this ramp edit processing (S1808). This lamp editing process (S1808) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114. Settings such as lighting of the sub LED whose lighting is controlled by are executed.

In the ramp edit process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2401). When it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the processes of S2402 to S2406 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2407.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). ..

In the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (S2403: No), the processes of S2404 to S2406 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2407.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is the change start timing (S2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be turned on is determined based on the selected change time (S2404). Then, a counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), the lighting data of the sub LED is set based on the determined value of the clock counter (S2406), and the process proceeds to S2407. To do.

In the process of S2407, the process for turning on the other lamps is executed, and the present process ends.

As will be described later in detail, the sound lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 perform lighting of the sub LED and display of the sub symbol based on the value of the counter updated based on the same clock signal. I am trying to do it. Thereby, it is possible to control to turn on the sub LED at the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

Next, the sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing this sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811). This sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and drives the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (slide drive, This is a process for rotating the drive).

In the sub liquid crystal drive process (FIG. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not a drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2501). In the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the driving scenario is not stored, it is not the timing to drive the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and thus the present processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the driving scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the driving scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is motor drive data corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m after addition in the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area (S2503). In the process of S2503, when it is determined that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. To do so, the motor drive data is set based on the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2504), the drive data command is set (S2505), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that there is no motor drive data (S2503), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506). Specifically, if the information of the drive scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is "END", it is determined that it is the end timing of the drive scenario.

In the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506: Yes), the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the drive scenario, the present process is directly ended.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 126. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, like the present control example, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2702, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2702, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs that are currently being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2703). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2601 in FIG. 109). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization processing (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing is completed.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S2601), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S2702. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2701 transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2701. Alternatively, the processing of S2703 to S2705 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2702 and S2702.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present control example, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2703 to S2705 without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 109. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2603, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2604). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2604, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2605). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 123(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 123A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S2908 of FIG. 111(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2909 of FIG. 111(b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to stand by until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issues an instruction to start the variation effect to the voice lamp control device. If it is through 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. You can Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining resident image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2605, the interrupt permission is set (S2606), and the clock output device 900 is set to start the clock output (S2607). As a result, the clock output is started after the display control device 114 starts up. Since the voice lamp control device 113 rises earlier than the display control device 114, the timing at which clock output is started is after both the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have risen, and both devices are activated. Can be accurately synchronized in.

After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the information on the image being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 111(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2902) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2903) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2902), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 to 90.

In the display setting process (S2903), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 93.

After the display setting process is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2904). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2903) or the simple display setting process (S2909). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview production or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, a drawing correction process is executed to correct the drawing contents (S2906). Details of the drawing correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2907). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2904), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905). The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). As a counter updated by the process of S2908, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/outside reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, chance of complete removal, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Then, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2909). When it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is incremented by 1 (S2910), and the V interrupt processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2911) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2912) is executed, and then S2904 is executed. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118, the details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S2902) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2903) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3002), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3003).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3005), the process returns to S3001.

Details of the variation pattern command processing (S3005) will be described with reference to FIG. 113(a). FIG. 113A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3101).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, there is no reception of two or more display fluctuation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, so the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may also be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, like the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed a time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S3101 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S3103, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S3105). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3106), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3105 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3102. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step 233f, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In the display setting process, the time counter 233h for which the time data is set in the process of S3104 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the process of S3004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006), If there is a display variation type command (S3006: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S3007), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 113(b). FIG. 113B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete disconnection, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S3201), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S3202).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S3203), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is described. In the above-described task process (S2904), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3203, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in the present control example, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3201, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S3202.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will be confused that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, like the present control example, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol jackpot", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3008), and the jackpot is determined. If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S3009), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, referring to FIGS. 114 to 117, the above-described display jackpot-related command process (S3009), which is one process of the command determination process (S2902, see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. Details will be described. First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 114, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3301), and if there is a display opening command (S3301). S3301: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3302), and the process proceeds to S3303.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). FIG. 115(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S3501). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. In the process of S3303, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and the display command is displayed. If there is an ending command for use (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3307.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116A is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3602).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the process of S3305, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the display normal winning effect command (S3307). If there is a display normal winning effect command (S3307: Yes), a normal winning effect command process is executed (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3309.

Details of the normal winning effect command processing (S3308) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG. 116(b) is a flowchart showing the normal winning effect command processing. This normal winning effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display normal winning effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the normal winning effect command processing, first, a normal winning display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal winning effect indicated by the display normal winning effect command is determined, and the determined normal winning display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. Read out from and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3702).

Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3705), the normal winning command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the process of S3307, if it is determined that there is no display normal winning award effect command (S3307: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display over-winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3309). ), if there is a display over-winning effect command (S3309: Yes), a normal over-effect command process is executed (S3310), and the process proceeds to S3311.

Here, the details of the over-prize effect command processing (S3310) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117(a) is a flowchart showing the over-winning effect command processing. This over-prize effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display over-prize effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the over-prize effect command processing, first, an over-prize effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over-prize effect indicated by the display over-prize effect command is determined, and the determined over-prize effect display data table is stored in the data table. It is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3802).

Next, based on the over-prize effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. Yes (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the over-prize effect command processing is terminated, and the display jackpot-related command processing is returned to.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the process of S3309, if it is determined that there is no display over-winning effect command (S3309: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3311). If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3312), and the display jackpot-related command process ends.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b). FIG. 117(b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing. The V effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Display data table buffer 233d (S3901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3902).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command processing is ended, and the processing for display jackpot related commands is returned to.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the process of S3311, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display jackpot-related command process is ended as it is.

Returning to FIG. 112, the description will be continued. In the process of S3008, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S3010), and the back image change command If there is (S3010: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S3009) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4603) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4001). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S4002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4001 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S4002. .. When the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S4002 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than 2 back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the process of S3010, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S3010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3010), and there is an error command. If (S3010: Yes), the error command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

Details of the error command process (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S4102), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S4102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S4102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the process of S3012, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a counter command among the unprocessed commands (S3014).

When it is determined that there is a counter command in the process of S3014 (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to S3001. The counter command notifies the display control device 114 of the timing of lighting the sub LED 290 in the audio lamp control device 113. The lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the notified timing of lighting the sub LED 290. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, a sub symbol is set in a sub symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) described later. Thereby, with reference to the display clock counter 223m that is a counter synchronized with the voice lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the sub-symbol is displayed at the same timing as the timing when the sub LED 290 is turned on in the voice lamp control device 113. Since it is possible, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol can be produced in synchronization.

In the process of S3014, if it is determined that there is no counter command (S3014: No), then it is determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016), and if there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes), reception The drive data storage area 223p is updated based on the command (S3017), and the process proceeds to S3001.

By the process of S3017, the display content (for example, display angle) can be changed according to the updated information driven by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, so that a suitable effect can be executed.

In the process of S3016, if it is determined that there is no drive data command (S3016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3018), and the process returns to S3001.

In the processing of S3001 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes). ), and the processes of S3002 to S3013 and S3019 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3001 to S3013 and S3019 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3001 that there are no unprocessed new commands, The command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S2911) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 113(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 113(b)) that are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed, and other The command is deleted without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122, details of the above-described display setting process (S2903) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this display setting processing.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S4201), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S4201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S4202 to S4204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S4202), and then S4203 to S4204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4301).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary for each sprite to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 119. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

In S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer updating process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S4403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and this processing is ended. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S4406), terminates this processing, and returns to display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, when the variable display data table is set, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4402: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

Here, returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S4206 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, in order to set the display of the sub symbol, a sub symbol setting process is executed (S4207). Here, details of the sub symbol setting process (S4207) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. This sub symbol setting process is a process for displaying the sub symbol on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in synchronization with the sub LED 290 whose lighting is controlled in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the sub symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not it is a variable period (S4501). In the process of S4501, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation period (S4501: No), it is not the timing to display the sub-symbols displayed corresponding to the fluctuation, and thus the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is the fluctuation period (S4501), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502). Specifically, it is determined whether, of the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n, the information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m is the lighting information.

In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) is selected. Of these, the information of the sub-symbol is set to be turned on (changed), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) Of these, the information on the sub-symbols is set to be off (changed), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When the process of S4207 is completed, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4209: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag 233z is on. Yes (S4210).

As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the finalized display effect is not yet produced, and the finalized display effect is reached. Therefore, first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set (S4311) and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S4212). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4213), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4215), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4216), and returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol final display effect in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect that is performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by S4216, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4210, if the confirmed display flag 233z is OFF instead of ON (S4210: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is ON (S4217). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the display data table for demo is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting them in the table buffer 233d (S4218) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4219). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4222), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

In the process of S4217, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S4217: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Therefore, the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2912) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting a display data table that specifies that (not shown) is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 123(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S4702). In the process of S4702, when the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237 and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S4702 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Further, as a result of the processing in S4701, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the processing proceeds to S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No), it is determined that the resident target image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

As a result of the processing in S4703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting processing (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer updating process (S4205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2903). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Further, in the processing of S4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the processing of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4805. In the processing of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

In the processing of S4806, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S4806 that the transfer processing is not completed (S4806: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4806: Yes), the process moves to S4807. Further, as a result of the processing in S4805, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is turned on (S4807). If the transfer start flag is turned on (S4807: Yes), image data to be transferred is present. Is turned off (S4808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S4807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4809). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S4809: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4813, if the back image determination flag in the on state is that of the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing in S4813, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer processing, if the back-side image is changed based on the reception of the back-side image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the back-side image is changed. The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, among the image data used in step S1, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d must be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the above-described drawing correction processing (S2906) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this drawing correction processing. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting the effect to be displayed according to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

In the drawing correction process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901). In the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not driven (S4901: No), there is no need to correct the drawing content, and thus this processing is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4902 in order to perform the correction according to the driving state.

In the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to slide (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to slide (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of sliding movement. (S4903) and S4904 are executed. In the process of S4903, the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected, so that the display positions of the symbols 1 to 3 are integrally changed corresponding to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (display). It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the processing of S4902, when it is determined that the slide driving is not performed (S4902: No), the processing of S4903 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4904.

In the process of S4904, it is determined whether the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904). In the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and the display angle of all images are displayed according to the rotationally driven rotation amount. ) Is corrected (S4905), and this processing ends.

By the processing of S4905, the display coordinates (and display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the rotation amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, so that even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates, a suitable effect is displayed. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the above-described drawing process (S2907) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2904). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the rearranged sprites are sorted in the detailed order for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 111B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

As described above, the first control example is configured to display the over-winning effect when the game ball overwins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the over-winning has occurred during the jackpot game, so that the player can provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

As the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of gaming balls over-winned may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily understand the number of gaming balls that have won an over-win. In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of game balls that have won the over prize. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, which can enhance the interest of the player.

In the first control example, as the over-prize effect, the over-win prize effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in accordance with the progress of the round in the jackpot game. That is, the selection ratio of the over-prize effect is configured to be different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the character strings suggesting right-handedness (right-handed right-handed right-handed) are arranged in a circle and displayed. Thereby, even when the display screen (sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

It should be noted that a display suggesting a right-handed stroke may be performed and a voice suggesting a right-handed stroke (for example, a voice saying "please right-hand") may be output. With this, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is right hitting.

In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LEDs are blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. Configured to.

As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 cannot be visually recognized, the blinking display state of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. According to the displacement, the display position of the design is changed. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 and perform an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to preferably display the effect.

In the first control example, the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are vertically driven (slide) (that is, the display area is vertically long) and horizontally (slide). The display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected in this case (that is, when the display area is horizontally long). As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 and perform an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a tenth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine that displays an effect when the gaming ball overwins the specific winning opening 65a has been described.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the game balls over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in an area visible to the player, and the ending effect of the jackpot game is set according to the number of the stored game balls. It was configured to change the contents of the performance. As a result, it is possible to focus on the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the first control example described above, the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device) is displayed by arranging and displaying the character strings suggesting right-handed (right-handed, right-handed, right-handed) in a circle. Even when 81) rotates, the gaming machine capable of suitably suggesting that the game state is right hitting has been described.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for indicating the game state (the direction in which the game ball is shot) are arranged in a circle on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the circumference thereof is arranged. The gaming patterns are configured to be suggested by the lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern and counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a-j arranged in a circle. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse video, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the game state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged circumferentially.

In the second control example, in comparison with the first control example, the variable winning device 65 is over-winned and the game balls are changed so as to be stored in an area visible to the player. A distribution member 65c for distributing whether or not to store the winning game balls and a distribution motor 65c2 for driving the distribution member, and a decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in a game state. The difference is that the direction notification LEDs 295a-j for indicating the (direction of shooting the game ball) are arranged in a circle. Further, the contents of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control process 113 are partially changed. The difference is that you did. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, the present control example is different in that the inside of the variable winning a prize device 65 in the above-described first control example is changed, and the other points are the same.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, the variable winning a prize device 65 in the present control example has the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 a predetermined number of times (for example, when the jackpot game is started, as in the first control example. , 15 times (round). In each round, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or a predetermined number (10) balls are won).

In each round, a predetermined number of game balls that have won the prize are discharged by flowing down the normal winning passage 65e1 in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, game balls that have won more than a predetermined number (so-called over-winned game balls) are configured to flow down the over-winning flow passage 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

On the left side of the opening/closing door 65f1, a performance unit for performing a performance with the game ball after winning the variable winning device 65 is formed. This effect section will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 128. In each round game, game balls that have won more than 10 prizes (hereinafter referred to as over-winning prizes) are distributed members 65c (see FIG. 128). And the effect of whether or not to be guided to the storage channel 65e4 is executed. In the present control example, it is configured such that, in each round, when the four or more balls are stored in the storage channel 65e4, the holding balls that are hits are stored in the holding balls. As shown in FIG. 127, since the distribution member 65c and the storage flow path 65e4 are arranged at positions visible to the player, more prize balls will be paid out than usual by over-winning during the jackpot game. In addition to the expectation for that, it is possible to enjoy the effect of whether the over-winning game ball is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved.

Next, the details of the variable winning a prize device 65 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128A is a rear view of the variable winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening formed at a height that allows one game ball to pass, and the game ball entering the opening is directed to the back side of the game board 13. A guideway is formed to guide Inside the specific winning opening 65a, a guide hole for guiding the game ball to a guide path for letting the game ball flow down is formed, and the guide hole and an over-winning flow passage 65e3 or a normal prize described later. It is formed so as to communicate with the flow path 65e1. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guide hole, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is detected.

A winning passage switching member 65b is arranged between the normal winning passage 65e1 and the over-winning passage 65e3, and the game balls are distributed to the normal winning passage 65e1 and the over-winning passage 65e3. Has been done. The prize flow passage switching member 65b is rotated upward by an unillustrated over-winning solenoid so that its tip is oriented horizontally (see FIG. 128(b)) and is rotated downward so that its tip is directed downward. It is configured to be rotatable in the state (see FIG. 128(a)). When the over-winning solenoid is turned on, the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward (see FIG. 128(b)), and when the over-winning solenoid is turned off, the winning flow path switching member 65b is moved downward. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128(a)).

The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path for vertically flowing down the game ball when the prize flow path switching member 65b is rotated downward (see FIG. 128(a)), and is for discharging the game ball. It is configured to communicate with the discharge flow path 65e2. The discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a game ball flowing down. This normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path through which the game balls until 10 balls are won in each round flow down, and the flow down game balls pass through the discharge flow path 65e2 and the probability variation switch 65a5 is arranged. Is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine after being guided to. The game ball detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball like the game ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, it is possible to store a game ball and use it for an effect.

The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path for flowing down the game ball to the left in a state where the winning-flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward and communicates with the over-winning flow path 65e3 (see FIG. 128(b)). Is. The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path through which over-winning game balls that have won over 10 balls in each round flow down. At the end of the over-winning flow path 65e3, an over-winning detection switch 65a2 (photo sensor) for detecting passage of an over-winning game ball is arranged. On the downstream side of the over-winning flow path 65e3, a distribution member 65c for allocating the over-winning game balls to the storage flow path 65e4 and the discharge flow path 65e2 is arranged.

The distribution member 65c has a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than that of one game ball. A shaft portion is formed at the center of the distribution member 65c so as to project to the back side, and is configured to be rotatable left and right by a stepping motor. The distribution member 65c is configured with a recessed area into which one game ball can be inserted as a storage area 65c1. The storage area 65c1 has an opening formed on the side surface of the distribution member 65c so that a game ball flowing down from the over-winning flow path 65e3 can enter. The storage area 65c1 is configured such that when a game ball enters, the entire game ball fits within the storage area 65c1, and even if the distribution member 65c rotates, the rotation is not hindered. Has been done. The distribution member 65c is a position (see FIG. 128(a)) at which the game ball flowing down from the over-winning flow passage 65e3 can always be received by the head region 65c1 (see FIG. 128(a)). It is stopped with the opening facing, and two seconds after the game ball is detected by the over-prize detection switch 65a2, the game ball is stored in the storage area 65c1 so that it rotates in either the left or right direction. It is configured. The direction in which the ball is rotated is determined on the basis of the result of judgment whether or not the reserved ball is stored in the reserved ball. As will be described later in detail, when a reserved ball that is a jackpot is stored, a lottery is executed with a probability of 1/2 each time an over-winning game ball is generated, and if a lottery is won, it is rolled out. The minute member 65c rotates to the left, and the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Note that the upper limit number is 6 balls, and when the 6 balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the distribution member 65c rotates to the right with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. Then, the game ball stored in the discharge flow path 65e2 is caused to flow down. In addition, in the case of being out of the above-mentioned 1/2 probability lottery, the distribution member 65c is rotated rightward, and the game balls in the storage area 65c1 are guided to the discharge flow path 65e2 (distribution). To be done.

In the case where the holding ball which is a big hit is not stored in the holding balls in the hold (when the holding ball which is a big hit is stored when the probability variation switch 65a5 is passed (including before passing the probability variation switch 65a5)) , 1/3, and the sorting member 65c is swung to the left and right in the same manner as in the case where the above-mentioned big hitting holding ball is stored. When the reserved ball which is a big hit when passing through the switch 65a5 is stored, the over-winning ball is guided to the storage area 65i up to a maximum of 4 balls, and the distribution member 65c is on the right for the game balls larger than that. The game ball that is rotated in the direction and stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the discharge flow path 65e2.

As described above, the storage channel 65e4 has the storage area 65i capable of storing up to six over-winning balls at the end portion. The storage area 65i is formed with a height that allows the game balls to be stacked in two stages and has a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined to the right, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging the game balls in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end portion. The storage switching member 65g has a shaft portion 65g1 formed on one end side rotatably fixed to the upper wall portion of the storage region 65i and is rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128(b). ) And a state in which the tip portion is oriented vertically downward and is rotated downward. In this control example, at the start of the big hit game, it is in a state of being rotated downward, and based on the ending start timing which is the end timing of the big hit game, the storage area is rotated upward (rotated in the upper right direction). The game ball in 65i is configured to be discharged to the storage discharge channel 65e6. A storage/discharge switch 65a4 (photosensor or the like) capable of detecting the game balls discharged from the storage area 65i is arranged at the upstream portion (entrance portion) of the storage/discharge flow path 65e6. The game balls discharged from the storage area 65i are not guided to the probability variation switch 65a5.

Although not shown, a switching member 65h and a probability variation switch 65a5 that are varied by the probability variation solenoid 65k are provided at the destination of the discharge flow path 65e2. When the probability variation solenoid 65k is on, the flowing down game ball can pass the probability variation switch 65a5, and when the probability variation solenoid 65k is off, the flowing down game ball cannot pass (or is difficult) through the probability variation switch 65a5. Is configured to be.

In this way, in the variable winning device 65 in the present control example, the winning flow passage switching member 65b is configured so that the game balls pass through the normal winning passage 65e1 until the number of ten winning balls determined in each round is reached. Is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to separate the flow path of the game ball that has won over and the game ball that has not won over, and it is possible to accurately detect the game ball that has won over.

In the present control example, the game board 13 is hollowed out on the front surface of the rendering unit (the distribution member 65c, the storage channel 65e4, and the storage area 65i), and is configured to be visible from the front side of the game machine 10. There is.

As described above, in this control example, when an over-winning occurs in each round, the distribution member 65c is rotated to perform an effect as to whether or not the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the over-winning is achieved. The player can visually recognize that a game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, can confirm the over-winning, and can enjoy the effect of whether the distribution member 65c rotates to the left or right. it can. Depending on the number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i during the jackpot game, it is also possible to predict the hit determination result of the hold balls stored in the hold. In this control example, when the holding ball which is a big hit is stored in the holding ball, the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i with a high probability, and thus the storage area 65i is distributed by the distribution member 65c. The determination result in the reserved ball can be predicted also by the frequency of distribution to the. Therefore, the player stores the game balls in the storage area 65i to store the holding balls that are the big hits in the holding balls, and the big hits are continuously executed in a short period even after the big hit game. Can have expectations for Further, in this control example, the maximum number of game balls to be guided to the storage area 65i is set to be variable according to the determination result stored in the hold, so that the result of determination of win/fail can be obtained early from the number of guidance. Can be predicted. Further, when five or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it is possible to recognize that a holding ball that is a big hit is stored in the holding, and the player is notified of the determination result at an early stage, which is interesting. Can be improved.

In addition, in the present control example, although it is configured to notify that the reserved balls that are a big hit with five or more balls are stored, the number of balls or the like may be set as appropriate. In addition, the lottery probability of whether or not to distribute to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c may be appropriately set. Furthermore, the lottery probability of distribution may be changed according to the history of the occurrence rate of over-winning prizes (in the previous jackpot game). Furthermore, the maximum number based on the determination result in the reserve ball guided to the storage area 65i may be changed according to the occurrence rate of over-winning (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of the big hit game, during the big hit game, or the like, the third symbol display device 81 is provided with characters or voice guidance such as "If three game balls are accumulated in the storage area 65i, the holding sequence is confirmed!!". Thus, the player can easily play the game. Furthermore, although the distribution member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by rotating, the distribution member 65c is not limited to this, and may be arranged in a seesaw shape. In addition, by guiding all over prize balls to the storage area 65i, the judgment result in the reserved ball is notified by the number of accumulated over prize balls, and is used for promotion production during a jackpot game from normal symbols to probability variation symbols. You may. In this case, it is conceivable that the number of over-prize balls during the jackpot game may give a chance to be promoted.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second control example, in comparison with the first control example described above, the distribution motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. However, the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The distribution motor 65c2 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is drive-controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 is started and the distribution member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the distribution motor 65c2 is alternately driven in the counterclockwise direction and the clockwise direction at regular intervals (two-second intervals), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c has flowed down the over-winning flow passage 65e3. A position that rotates 120 degrees counterclockwise around the position where the game ball can be received (a position where the game ball in the storage area 65c1 flows down to the storage channel 65e4) and a position that rotates 90 degrees clockwise ( The game ball in the storage area 65c1 is alternately moved to a position where it flows down to the outflow path 65e5) (see FIG. 128).

The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp output device 113, and lighting is controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The direction notification LEDs 295 are arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and five pieces (295f to 295j) are provided on the upper decorative surface 523b1 and five pieces (295a to 295e) are provided on the lower decorative surface 523b2. (See FIG. 132). As described above, when the gaming state is a gaming state in which the player strikes to the right, the direction notification LED 295 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the lighting order is clockwise (clockwise), and it is suggested that the player strikes to the right. (Notification), when the game state is a left-handed game state, the direction LED 295 is controlled to turn left and right (counterclockwise) so that the left-handed state is controlled. (Notified).

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example in that a storage number counter 203v and a storage upper limit number 203w are added. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The stored number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have been distributed to the storage region 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. In the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), the value of the stored number counter 203v is incremented by one when the distribution motor drive is set with the distribution destination 65e4 as the distribution destination (see FIG. 133). 5111). Then, in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4, it is determined whether the game balls will be distributed to the storage region in excess of the storage upper limit number. Referenced for. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the storage number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the big hit game.

The storage upper limit number 203w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of game balls that are distributed to the storage region 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. The value of the storage upper limit number 203w is set in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 134) according to the pending winning information (that is, in accordance with the degree of expectation of a big hit thereafter) (see FIG. 134). See S5103, S5105, S5106). Then, when the value of the storage number counter 203v described above is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w, the allocation destination is allowed to be determined in the storage channel 65e4. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the storage upper limit number 203w is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a specific winning port state 223p and a stored number counter 223r in addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is open, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is open, and that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Indicates. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to an open state when a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game (that is, opening of the specific winning opening 65a) is received from the main control device 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136). The closed state is set when the closing command based on the closing of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is received (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when the winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2032 of FIG. 136), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether the command is based on over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, which is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in the present control example, will be described. 131A and 131B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect executed in the present control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 131A, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven vertically will be described.

As shown in FIG. 131A, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are vertically driven, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the The display content displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 is changed.

Specifically, in the state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. An image of a star is displayed on the section.

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 is visible in the central portion. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left and displayed. The image of the star that is moved and displayed in the upper right and the upper left is displayed across the visible third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, and is moved and displayed in the lower right and lower left. The image of the star is displayed across the visible third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2.

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is driven further upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is driven further downward, the star images that are moved to the upper right and upper left and displayed are displayed on the upper display surface 523a1. The star image displayed by moving to the lower right and lower left is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

In this way, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, as the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven up and down, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 The effect of moving the star image in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is displayed together. As a result, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be driven up and down, and an effect according to the driving can be displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 131B, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right will be described. ..

In the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the above-mentioned upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are vertically driven. The same image data is used, and the effect is executed by correcting the rotation angle and position of the image data. As a result, it is possible to reduce the volume of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect.

Specifically, in the state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. An image of a star is displayed on the section.

The image of the star displayed in the center is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. Accordingly, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) by 90 degrees, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven to the left, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven to the right, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 is visible in the central portion. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left and displayed. The image of the star displayed by moving to the upper left and the lower left is displayed across the visible third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, and moved to the upper right and lower right to be displayed. The image of the star is displayed across the visible third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2.

The star image that is moved and displayed in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is counterclockwise (when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down). It is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise and displayed. Further, the display positions are corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, the display area is vertically long. The display area changes to a horizontally long display area. Therefore, the display position is corrected so that each star pattern has a small vertical movement amount and a large horizontal movement amount. Accordingly, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) by 90 degrees, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is driven further upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and the display position of each star image are corrected, and the images are moved to the upper left and lower left. The displayed star image is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the star image that is moved to the upper right and lower right is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

As described above, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the above-described upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. The same image data is used in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the effect is performed, and the effect is executed by correcting the rotation angle and the display position of the image data. As a result, it is possible to reduce the volume of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect.

In this control example, the display position of the image data is corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) so as to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the image data may be compressed (reduced) so as to be horizontally long.

Further, when either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven due to a failure or the like and the display area cannot be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display area. Alternatively, the image data may be compressed (reduced). As a result, even when either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven and the display area cannot be expanded, it is possible to preferably display the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a game method suggesting effect executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents of the game method suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), the decorative surface 523 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is decorated with an imitation of an apple, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 is decorated with the left half thereof. The remaining right half is decorated on the lower decorative surface 523b2. Therefore, by driving the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to be adjacent to each other, it is possible to perform an integrated effect.

Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are circumferentially arranged on the round fruit of the decoration of the decoration surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LED 295a is arranged at the uppermost position of the right half, and the direction notification LEDs 295 are arranged in that order clockwise (direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c... 295j). The direction notification LED 295j is arranged at the uppermost position of the left half.

The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are controlled by lighting by setting a right-handing notification command or a left-handing command according to the current game state by a game method notification process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

When the right-handing notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a gaming state of performing right-handing is set, first, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on and off, then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on and off, Thus, the respective direction notification LEDs 295 are turned on and off in the clockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circle are turned on and off in a clockwise direction (clockwise direction), which suggests to the player that the player is currently in a right-handed gaming state ( Notification).

On the other hand, when the left hitting notification command indicating that the current gaming state is the left hitting gaming state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on/off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on/off. , And so on, the direction notification LEDs 295 are turned on and off in the order of counterclockwise rotation. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circle are turned on and off counterclockwise (counterclockwise), which suggests to the player that the player is currently in a left-handed game state. (Notification) can be made.

FIG. 132(b) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven clockwise by 90 degrees with respect to FIG. 132(a). Also in this case, when the right-handing notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on and off in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction). When the left-handing notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on and off counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

As described above, in this control example, regardless of the state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, the same control process is executed to make a game state in which the right hit (or left hit) is performed. Can be suggested (notified). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the control process from becoming complicated.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 133. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in this control example. This jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of main controller 110.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

Then, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and the present process is ended. To do.

Further, by the process of S1131, the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON, and thus it becomes possible to store the game ball that has entered the storage region 65i. This storage area 65i is an area in which over-winning game balls flow down, and the content of the ending effect is configured to differ according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game. .. The game ball stored in the storage area 65i is flown down to the storage discharge passage 65e6 by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to OFF at the end of the jackpot (before the start of the ending effect).

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the big hit (S1101: No), it is then determined whether or not the big hit is in progress (S1103). In the process of S1103, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF (S1132), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1134), This process ends.

By the process of S1132, the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF, so that the game ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed through the detection switch 65a1 can flow down to the normal winning passage 65e1. Although the details will be described later, when a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of game balls pass through the detection switch 65a1 in the same round, the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to ON and enters the specific winning opening 65a. The game ball that has passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1 and flows down to the over-winning flow path 65e2.

In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the closing operation timing (S1133). When it is determined in the processing of S1133 that it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to ON (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to OFF (S1135), and the closing command is set. Then (S1136), the present process is terminated.

By the process of S1134, the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to ON, so that the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a and passing through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning passage 65e1. It is ready to flow down to the winning passage 65e2. The game ball flowing down to the over-winning flow path 65e2 flows down to the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c and is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5.

By the process of S1135, the open solenoid is set to OFF, so that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

By the processing of S1136, the fact that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. By notifying the closing command, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine that the incoming ball number command notified thereafter is the incoming ball number command based on over-winning.

In the processing of S1133, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106). In the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1133, when it is determined that it is not the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: No), it is then determined whether or not it is the storage and discharge timing (S1137), and it is determined that the storage and discharge timing is reached. If so (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is set to off (S1138), and this processing ends.

In the process of S1137, if it is a predetermined timing as the jackpot game (5 seconds before the ending timing of the ending effect in this control example), it is determined to be the storage discharge timing. As a result, the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i before the ending effect can be counted by the storage/discharge switch 65a4, and the ending effect corresponding to the count result can be displayed.

The storage and discharge timing is not limited to the above. For example, the numbers may be counted such that they are discharged in each round, or may be discharged at the timing when the ending command is received.

In the processing of S1137, if it is determined that it is not the storage and discharge timing (S1137: No), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the storage and discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage and discharge switch 65a4 is set to the game ball. When it is determined that the sheet has passed (S1139: Yes), the storage and discharge command is set (S1140), and this processing is ended.

By the processing of S1140, since the storage discharge command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 can count the number of game balls stored during the jackpot game, and depending on the count result. The ending effect can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1139, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

In the process of S1108, when it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1108: Yes), the processes of S1109 and S1110 are executed and the present process is ended, as in the first control example.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: No), the distribution motor setting process is executed (S1141), and other processes (notification process (S1111), winning process) (S1112) and abnormality processing (S1113) are executed, and this processing is ended.

Here, the details of the distribution motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether the distribution motor 65c2 is driven so as to distribute the game ball that has passed through the over-winning prize switch 65a2 to the storage flow passage 65e4 or the out flow passage 65e5. This is a process for setting.

In the distribution motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), it is not necessary to drive the distribution motor to distribute the game ball. finish. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution motor may be always driven.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the held winning information includes winning information that is a jackpot. Yes (S5102).

In the process of S5102, when it is determined that the pending winning information includes the winning information of the big hit (S5102: Yes), it is the case that it is determined that the big hit will occur thereafter. Is set to 4, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5102, when it is determined that the winning information held is not the jackpot information (S5102: No), then it is determined whether the predictor flag 203u is on (S5103). ).

In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the precursory flag 203u is ON (S5103), although it is not decided that a big hit will occur after that, it is a case where a big hit is likely to occur. Is set to 3, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the precursory flag 203u is ON (S5103: No), when all the pending winning information is out (that is, when the probability of being a big jackpot thereafter is low). Therefore, the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 2, and the process proceeds to S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined which of the storage passage 65e4 and the out passage 65e5 the game sphere that has passed through the over-winning switch 65a2 is to be sorted (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

Specifically, if the pending winning information has big winning information, the table for big winning is used, and if the value of the counter is “0 to 2”, the distribution destination is stored. The path 65e4 is determined, and in the case of "3 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, if there is no jackpot information in the pending prize information, a table for deviation is used. If it is determined to be “2 to 5,” the distribution destination is determined to be the outflow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

In this way, when the pending winning information has a big hit, the distribution destination is likely to be determined to the storage flow path 65e4, and when the pending winning information does not have a big hit, the sorting destination is determined to the out flow path 65e5. It is structured to be easy. The distribution ratio is not limited to this, and may be changed appropriately.

When the process of S5107 is completed, it is determined whether or not the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 in the process of S5107 (S5108).

In the process of S5108, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 (S5108: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

In the processing of S5109, when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set with the distribution destination 65e4 as the distribution destination. In S5111), the stored number counter 203v is incremented by 1 (S5112), and this processing ends.

By the drive control of the distribution motor 65c2 by the process of S5111, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over-winning flow passage 65e2. The state (direction) in which the storage channel 65e4 is in communication with the storage channel 65e4 is changed. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, and flow down to the storage area 65i via the storage flow path 65e4. Become. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to the position (origin position) in which it is in a state of communicating with the over-winning flow passage 65e2.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution destination is the outflow path 65e5 (S5108: No) and when the value of the storage number counter 203v is the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes). Sets the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 with the distribution destination being the outflow path 65e5 (S5112), and ends this processing.

By the drive control of the distribution motor 65c2 by the processing of S5112, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over-winning flow passage 65e2. The state (direction) of changing from the open state to the state of communicating with the out channel 65e4. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the out flow path 65e4. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in which it is in a state of communicating with the over-winning flow passage 65e2.

In this way, in the distribution motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 is determined based on the pending winning information (that is, according to the degree of expectation of a big hit thereafter). Configured differently. As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 can be suggested to the player. Since it can be noticed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, since the rendering unit 65α is configured to be visible, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be viewed. As a result, attention can be paid to the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, since the storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is provided in the production unit 65α so as to be visible, the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the jackpot game can be changed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be easily grasped and is easy for the player to understand.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the present control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) is changed to execute the game method notification process (see FIG. 138), and the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103). The difference is that the jackpot related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead, the ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of the ending process (see FIG. 105), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 135. In the main process 2, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

After the processing of S1811, the game method notification processing is executed (S1831), and the processing proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the game method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Here, the jackpot-related process 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 136. As described above, in the present control example, the main controller 110 is the closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a is closed during the jackpot game, and the storage discharge command indicating that the game ball has passed the storage discharge switch 65a4. Sent by. In contrast to the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 103) in the first control example, the jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912) in this control example is different in that it is modified to perform the processing when these commands are received. Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the opening command is not received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether the round number command is received (S2003).

When it is determined that the round number command is received in the process of S2003 (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S2004), and the round for display is displayed based on the value of the round number counter 223g. A number command is set (S2005). Then, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state (S2031), and this processing is ended.

By the process of S2031, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state based on the reception of the round number command indicating the start of the round from the main control device 110. As a result, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state is a normal winning (that is, not an over-winning).

On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning number command is received (S2006).

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command is received (S2006: Yes), it is then determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2032). In the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is the closed state (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on over-winning, so the over-winning process is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is the open state (S2032: No), the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, so the normal winning command is set. The setting is made (S2010), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether the closing command has been received (S2033). In the process of S2033, when it is determined that the close command is received (S2033: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2034), and this process is ended.

In this way, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state when the closing command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, after the closing command is received from the main control device 110 until a new round number command is received (that is, after the specific winning opening 65a finishes the specified number (10) of winnings, the next specific winning is performed. Until the opening of the mouth 65a), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state. This makes it possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is the winning number command based on over-winning.

If the closed state is set based on the elapse of the predetermined period (30 seconds), it may not be determined that the over-winning is achieved. In this case, the elapsed time from the start of the round may be measured and it may be determined whether or not the closing command is received at the elapse timing of the predetermined period.

In the processing of S2033, when it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2033: No), it is then determined whether or not the storage discharge command has been received (S2035). In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage/discharge command is received (S2035: Yes), the storage/discharge counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S2036), and the present process is ended.

Since the storage discharge command is transmitted from the main control device 110 by the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, when all the storage discharge commands are received, the value of the storage discharge counter 233r is stored. It is the number of game balls stored in the area 65i. The display content of the ending effect is determined based on the value of the storage discharge counter 223r. That is, the ending effect corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received (S2011). In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command is received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting process 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is executed. finish.

In the process of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command is not received (S2011: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are performed in the same manner as the jackpot-related process of the first control example (see FIG. 103 ). The process is executed and the present process is terminated.

Next, details of the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 137. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example in that the ending effect is selected according to the value of the storage discharge counter 223r. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ending effect process 2 (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is turned on (S2201). If it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is turned on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is performed. The continuous effect is selected as (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209.

In the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is larger than 4 (S2231). In the process of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage discharge counter 223r is 4 or less (that is, when the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is 4 or less) (S2231: No). ), the normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect, and the process proceeds to S2209.

On the other hand, in the process of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage discharge counter is larger than 4 (that is, when the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is more than 4 balls) (S2231: Yes). ), similarly to the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2203 to S2208 are executed, and the process proceeds to S2209.

In the process of S2209, a display ending effect command indicating the ending effect selected in the process of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208 or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, similarly to the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed, and the present process is ended.

As described above, in this control example, when the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the ending effect that suggests the degree of expectation that there is winning information that is a big hit in the hold is selected. When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, the normal ending effect is selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the value of the storage and discharge counter will be 2 or more in the jackpot game (that is, two or more game balls will enter the storage area 65i). Can be improved.

Although the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is set to 2 or more, the present invention is not limited to this and may be set to 3 or more, or such a limitation may be omitted.

Furthermore, only when the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately indicates whether or not there is a winning information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may do so.

Further, the table for selecting the ending effect may be changed according to the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r.

Details of the game method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138. In the game method notification process (S1831), the current game state is a game state in which the game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down the left side of the third symbol display device 81 (so-called left-handed game state), and the third symbol display. This is a process for suggesting (displaying) which one of the game state (so-called right hitting game state) in which the right side of the device 81 is shot so that the game ball flows down.

In the gaming method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state (S5201). In the processing of S5201, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state (S5201: Yes), it is the gaming state in which right-handing is performed, so the display right-handing suggestion command is set (S5202). ).

The display right-handing suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display right-handing suggestion command, whereby the third symbol display device 81, or the sub-device. An image suggesting right-handedness is displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 523. With this, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

When the process of S5202 is completed, the right-handing suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and the process is completed. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are sequentially turned on and off one by one in the order of 295a to 295j by the right hitting suggestive LED command set in the process of S5203. Be done. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are turned on clockwise (clockwise), which is right for the player. It can be suggested (notified) that it is in a game state of hitting. As a result, even during the performance in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inverted state, it is possible to suggest (notify) that the player is in the game state in which the player is right-handed by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b. ..

Further, the suggestion (notification) of the game state of right-handed striking is that the LED is turned on clockwise (clockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Since there is not, it is possible to make a suggestion (notification) with the same control.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5201, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving or the probability variation gaming state (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67.

In the process of S5201, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the game state is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 even though the game state is the left-handed game state. Since the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided (that is, the case where the right-handed game is being performed), the processing of S5205 is performed to suggest (notify) that the game state is the left-handed game. Move to.

In the process of S5205, a left-handed display suggesting command for display is set (S5205). The display left-handing suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display left-handing suggestion command, whereby the third symbol display device 81 or the sub On one of the liquid crystal display devices 523, the character "Please return to the left!" is displayed. With this, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

When the process of S5205 is finished, the left hitting suggestive LED command is set (S5206), and the process is finished. The direction indicating LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are sequentially turned on and off one by one in the order from 295j to a by the left hitting suggestive LED command set in the process of S5205. Be done. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are turned on counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the player is informed. It is possible to indicate (notify) that the player is in the left-handed gaming state. Thereby, even during the production in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inverted state, it is possible to suggest (notify) that the player is in the left-handed game state by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b. ..

Further, this suggestion (notification) that the game state is left-handed is that the lighting of the LED is performed counterclockwise (counterclockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. Since there is no change, it is possible to make a suggestion (notification) with the same control.

As described above, in the second control example, the distribution ratio for allocating the game balls over-winning during the big hit to the storage flow path 65e4 is based on the pending winning information (that is, the big hit is subsequently made). Configured differently (depending on expectations). As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 can be suggested to the player. Since it can be noticed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the second control example, the production section 65α in which the distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game balls is arranged is made visible. As a result, the player can visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, and the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be focused on, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the second control example, a storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is provided in the rendering unit 65α so as to be visible. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 during the big hit game, and to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the second control example, the game balls over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in a region visible to the player, and the jackpot is awarded according to the number of the stored game balls (the value of the storage discharge counter 223r). It was configured to change the effect contents of the ending effect of the game. As a result, it is possible to focus on the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved.

It should be noted that only when the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether or not there is jackpot information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may do so.

In the second control example, direction notification LEDs 295a-j for indicating a game state (direction of shooting a game ball) are arranged in a circle on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and are arranged in the circle. The gaming state is suggested by the lighting pattern (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse video, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the game state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged circumferentially.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as an eleventh embodiment with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145.

In the above-described first control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2, which are the back sides of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, are used. I explained about the gaming machine that performs the production.

On the other hand, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a1 facing the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display effect on the surface 523a2 is configured to be executable by a mirror effect in which it can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine via a mirror (mirror) 298. Accordingly, since the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the back surface thereof can be used at the same time for the effect, the variation of the effect can be increased. This can improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror), and light is reflected from the bright side to be a mirror (mirror). However, when viewed from the dark side, light penetrates and becomes like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the LED 297 on the rear surface of the mirror, the rear surface of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 simply becomes a window (glass).

In this control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) that is inverted and becomes the back side is ready for display (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on, The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. This prevents the player from seeing the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display is ready, so that it is possible to provide a suitable effect.

Here, an aspect of the mirror effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the mirror effect in this control example. FIG. 139(a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to the close position, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), in the mirror effect in this control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left-right direction and are moved to the proximity position, and the proximity thereof is set. At the position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted, and the upper decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

A left mirror 298a is arranged on the left rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a right mirror 298b is arranged on the right rear side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are arranged so as to be inclined toward the rear (rear side) position toward the center of the pachinko machine 10. When the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are viewed from the upper side, It is arranged in the shape of a letter (see FIG. 139(b)). Therefore, the rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the center side of each mirror 298 can be viewed from the front side through the right mirror 298a and the left mirror 298.

The right mirror front LED 296a is arranged on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and the left mirror front LED 296b is arranged on the front side of the left mirror 298b. Further, the left mirror rear surface LED 297a is arranged on the rear surface side of the left mirror 298a, and the right mirror rear surface LED 297b is arranged on the rear surface side of the right mirror 298b. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are respectively configured by magic mirrors, and when the left mirror front side LED 296a is turned on, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror, and the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decorative surface 523b1 is The decoration mode can be displayed. When the left-mirror rear LED 297a is lit, the magic mirror is transparent and the rear side is visible (a transmissive member, not a mirror) and does not form a mirror surface. Therefore, the rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not reflected on the left mirror 298a. Is configured. The right mirror 298b is similarly configured.

With such a configuration, the state of the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between a state in which the player can visually recognize it and a state in which the player cannot visually recognize it, thereby providing the player with a fresh effect. You can

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The third control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 are connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device, and the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different. The difference is that the contents and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 141. As shown in FIG. 141(a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a mirror liquid crystal drive scenario 222d4 is added to the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and the other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 141(b). The mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 is a scenario for sliding and then reversing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

In the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4, a set value (operating speed (pps)) to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141(b), the slide motor 431 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 50 pps, and the number of operation steps is defined in accordance with the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m. Is defined as 100, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

Corresponding to the value “2001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 100 pps, the operation step number is defined as 200, and the operation direction is defined as the forward direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value “8001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 100 pps, the operation step number is defined as 200, and the operation direction is defined as the negative direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value “10001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 50 pps, the operation step number is defined as 100, and the operation direction is defined as the negative direction. ing.

Then, the information "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored in correspondence with the value "12001" of the drive scenario counter 223m.

As described above, in the mirror effect driving scenario 222d4, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and at the close position, the normal position is changed to the reflection position (the display surface (523a1 facing the rear side). 523a2) is turned over to a position where it can be visually recognized from the front side through the mirror 298) over 2 seconds, and then maintained at the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then again over 2 seconds from the reflection position to the normal position. It reverses and slides from the proximity position to the separation position over 2 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a flag 223s during mirror effect is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mirror effect in-progress flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not the mirror effect is being executed. When the flag is on, it indicates that the mirror effect is being executed, and when it is off, the mirror effect is being executed. Indicates that there is no. The mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as the drive scenario in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145) (that is, when the mirror effect is set as the effect pattern). Is set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is turned on, in the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144), the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 are controlled to be turned on and off, and the display content is inverted with respect to the display control device 114. The command to perform this is notified. Although illustration is omitted, it is set to OFF when the variable display in which the mirror effect is executed ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the present control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, a change is made so that the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 143) is executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143), and the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106). The difference is that the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead of the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 143. In the main process 3, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed, similar to the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1811 is completed, the mirror effect setting process is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. The mirror effect setting process (S1851) is a command for controlling turning on/off of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 and a command for inverting the display content to the display control device 114 when the mirror effect is being executed. This is a process for notifying.

In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect flag 223s is on. In the process of S1851, when it is determined that the flag 223s during mirror effect is off (S5301: No), the mirror effect has not been executed, and thus this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, when it is determined that the mirror effect flag 223s is ON (S5301: YES), it is determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). In the process of S5302, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF so that the mirror 298 does not function as a mirror (S5303). ), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to ON (S5304), and this processing ends.

When it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

In the processing of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to the close position. This is the timing at which the reversing operation is completed at the close position. In this case, since the display surface (523a1, 523a2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized from the front side through the mirror 298 by performing the reversing operation, the process proceeds to S5306. Transition.

In the process of S5306, a display inversion correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front LED 296 is set to ON (S5307), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to OFF (S5308), and this process is ended. As a result, the display content of the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) is symmetrically inverted (that is, the display content becomes normal when viewed through a mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and thus the mirror 298 is illuminated. Will function as a mirror.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

In the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309: Yes), it is the timing when the display surface facing the back side is reversed to the front side in the mirror effect. ..

In this case, the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF (S5310), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to ON (S5311), the display inversion correction end command is set (S5312), and this processing is ended.

By the processing of S5310 to S5312, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 which is display-controlled by the display control device 114 is set to the normal state, and the mirror 298 is set to the state not functioning as a mirror. To be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), it is then determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

In the process of S5313, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), since it is the end timing of the mirror effect, the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF (S5314), and the mirror is turned on. The back LED 297 is set to OFF (S5315), and this processing ends.

By the processing of S5313 and S5314, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 can be turned off when the mirror effect is not performed, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

Details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described below with reference to FIG. 145. In the variable display setting process 3 (S1813), the processes of S2301 to S2307 are executed as in the first control example. When the process of S2307 ends, it is determined whether the drive scenario stored in the process of S2306 is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351).

In the process of S2351, when it is determined that the drive scenario is the drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351: Yes), it means that the variation pattern including the mirror effect is set, and thus the mirror effect flag 223s. Is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2308.

On the other hand, in the process of S2351, when it is determined that the drive scenario does not correspond to the mirror effect (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2308.

After S2308, the processes of S2308 to S2312 are executed similarly to the first control example described above, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a1 facing the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display effect on the surface 523a2 is configured to be executable by a mirror effect in which it can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine via a mirror (mirror) 298. Accordingly, since the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the back surface thereof can be used at the same time for the effect, the variation of the effect can be increased. This can improve the interest of the player.

In the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged for executing the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror). When viewed from the bright side, light reflects and becomes a mirror (mirror), but when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and becomes a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the rear side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the LED 297 on the rear surface of the mirror, the rear surface of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 simply becomes a window (glass). In this manner, by controlling the lighting of the LED, it is possible to change whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or a window.

In the case of functioning as a window, a pattern, a pattern, or the like can be provided on the back side of the mirror 298 so that the mirror 298 can be integrated with the sub liquid crystal display device 523. In addition, by arranging LEDs for effect on the back side and varying the lighting pattern of the LEDs, it is possible to change the pattern or pattern that is visible when the mirror 298 functions as a window. As a result, the variation of production can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the third control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) that is inverted and becomes the rear side is ready for display (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on. The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. This prevents the player from seeing the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display is ready, so that it is possible to provide a suitable effect.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested (notified) depending on whether or not the mirror 298 functions as a mirror in the mirror effect. As a result, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the close position, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted at the close position, and then the upper display is displayed. Since it is possible to focus on whether the display contents of the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are displayed via the mirror 298, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<Modification of Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a modification of the mirror effect described in FIG. 139 will be described. In the present control example, in the case of executing a mirror effect for allowing the player to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, a left back mirror member 299a is provided between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved to project (reflect) on the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With such a configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely inverted up to a position facing the third symbol display device 81 in parallel, the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 of the sub liquid crystal display mode with the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely flattened.

<Regarding Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the effect display in the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150. 148 to 150 are different from the effect display shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example, in which the order in which the respective symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) are overlapped is different, and It is used for the technology (so-called "probability variation promotion production") that uses the performance display to notify whether the jackpot this time is a regular jackpot or a probability variation jackpot after displaying that the symbol has been won as a jackpot with the third symbol. is there.

In this case, when the probability variation promotion effect is started, as shown in FIG. 148(a), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid so that the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered (the upper display surface 523a1 and The lower display surface 523a2 is slid so that the lower display surface 523a2 is in contact with the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the fact that the "probable variation promotion effect" is started is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(a), one promotion effect design is enlarged and displayed. The symbols for promotion effect displayed in this case are different from the third symbols displayed corresponding to the normal game (special symbol variation game), and are the character symbols in which the parts indicating the numbers are deleted. If the character design displayed in this state is the same mode (character) as the "probability variation design" (designated with specific numbers, for example, "3" or "7") used in the normal game, , "Probability change promotion effect", it becomes an effect display showing that the probability change jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the character design displayed in this state is the same mode (character) as the design other than the "probability variation pattern" used in the normal game, "probability variation promotion without notifying that the probability variation jackpot was won. Production” continues.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 148(b) to 150(b), the display area is gradually expanded by slidingly moving the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the display area is expanded to the state of FIG. 150(b). When enlarged, some character designs (for example, the character design displayed in the center) out of the three character designs displayed side by side in the up-down direction are provided with a mode showing numbers.

If the number given in this case is a number (for example, "3", "7") attached to the "probability variation pattern" used in the normal game, the "probability variation promotion effect" wins the probability variation jackpot. The effect display will indicate that. That is, as the character design used in this "probability variation promotion effect", a character similar to the third design used in the normal game is used, and a plurality of numbers (at least "probability variation design" are attached to the character design). And a number other than the “probability variation pattern”).

According to the above-mentioned “probable change promotion effect”, the timing at which the character symbol is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148(a)) and the timing at which the character symbol is given a mode indicating a numeral (FIG. 150(b) It is possible to notify that the probability variation jackpot has been won at the two timings of ()). Therefore, from the start to the end of the "probability variation promotion effect", the player will pay attention to the performance while expecting to be promoted to the probability variation jackpot, which can improve the enjoyment of the game. effective.

Further, in the above-mentioned "probability change promotion effect", a mode showing numbers is attached to each of the three character designs displayed in the vertical direction, and the numbers attached to the respective character designs are set according to a predetermined rule (numbers are added. If it is an odd number, or if the number satisfies a predetermined rule (eg, “341” is displayed), it may be notified that the probability variation jackpot has been won. Thereby, it becomes possible to more effectively use the enlargement of the display area for the effect.

In addition, the timing at which a mode showing a number is attached to the three character patterns displayed in the vertical direction is shifted, or the mode of the character patterns displayed in the three vertical directions is switched in the middle of the "probability change promotion effect". You may do it.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a twelfth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. In the fourth control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, after transmitting an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game as a command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only a closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is transmitted. Is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the time elapsed after receiving the closing command. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

First, with reference to FIG. 151, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a big jackpot flag 223t, and a clock counter 223u are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is open, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is open, and that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Indicates. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state (see S5306 in FIG. 156) when it is determined that it is the round start timing in the jackpot game timing process (see FIG. 156), and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set. The closing state is set when the closing command based on the closing is received (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when the winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether the command is based on over-winning.

The jackpot flag 223t is a flag for determining whether the jackpot game is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the jackpot game is being executed, and when it is off, the jackpot game is being executed. Indicates that there is no. The big hit flag 223t is set to ON when the opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2071). Then, in the jackpot timing process (see FIG. 156), it is referred to for determining whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and when it is determined that it is the ending start timing of the jackpot game. , Are set to OFF (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the present control example, the big hit operation setting process 4 (S1105) in which a part of the process is changed is executed instead of the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example described above. The difference is that the ending process 4 (S1110) in which a part of the process is changed is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 96), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that the round number command is not set, and other points are the same, and thus the details thereof will be described. Description is omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the round by measuring the elapsed time after receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round. As a result, the number-of-rounds command indicating the start of the round in the jackpot game from the main controller 110 can be eliminated, and the processing load can be reduced.

Next, details of ending processing 4 (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. The ending process 4 (S1110) is different from the ending process (FIG. 96) in the first control example in that the ending command is not set, and the other points are the same, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the ending by counting the elapsed time after receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round and the number of executed rounds. There is. Thereby, the ending command from the main control device 110 indicating the start of the ending in the jackpot game can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. In the present control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the jackpot related processing 4 (S1912) in which a part of the processing is changed is executed instead of the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 103), and the jackpot timing processing. (See FIG. 156) is different from the point that it is newly executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 154. In the main process 4, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed, similar to the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the processing of S1811 is completed, the jackpot timing processing is executed (S1831), and the processing proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the jackpot timing process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the jackpot-related processing 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination processing (S1812) will be described in detail. In the jackpot-related processing 4 (S1912), in contrast to the first control example, when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received, the jackpot medium flag 223t is set to ON, and a specific winning during the jackpot game. When the closing command indicating that the mouth 65a has been closed is received, the elapsed time after receiving the closing command is measured, and the number of rounds command and the ending command are received. The difference is that the processing is deleted, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot related process 4 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received (S2001), and when it is determined that the opening command is received (S2001: Yes), the opening command for display is set. Then (S2002), the big hitting medium flag is set to ON (S2071), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the winning number command is received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2072).

In the process of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is the closed state (S2072: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on over-winning, so the over-winning process is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, so the normal winning command is set. The setting is made (S2010), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether the closing command has been received (S2073).

In the process of S2073, when it is determined that the close command is received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2074), and the clock counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), and this processing ends.

By the processing of S2075, the clock counter 223u is initialized to 0 every time the specific winning opening 65a is closed. As a result, the elapsed time after the specific winning opening 65a is closed can be measured.

On the other hand, in the process of S2073, when it is determined that the close command is not received (S2073: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are executed similarly to the first control example, and the present process is ended.

Next, details of the jackpot time counting process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. The jackpot time counting process (S1831) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process of timing to determine the round start timing and ending timing in the jackpot game.

In the big hit time counting process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 223t is ON (S5301). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is off (S5301: No), it is not in the jackpot game, and since it is not necessary to measure the time, this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the big hit flag 223t is on (S5301: Yes), the value of the clock counter 223u is incremented by 1 (S5302), and the added value of the clock counter 223u is added. Based on this, it is determined whether or not it is the round start timing (S5303).

Specifically, if the value of the clock counter 223u is 4000, it means that 4 seconds have elapsed since the end of the round, so that it is determined that it is the round start timing.

If it is determined that it is the round start timing in the process of S5303 (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S5304), the display round number command is set (S5305), and the specific winning is performed. The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5303, if it is determined that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), then it is determined whether it is the ending start timing (S5307).

Specifically, when the value of the round counter 223g is 16 and the value of the clock counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the clock counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving the close command in the final round. It is determined that it is the case, and it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

In the final round, when the ending effect is started a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed, it is sufficient to wait until the time counter 223u reaches the predetermined period.

In the processing of S5307, when it is determined that it is the ending start timing (S5307), the same ending setting processing (see FIG. 105) as in the first control example is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), the big hit medium flag 223t is set to OFF (S5310), and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the fourth control example, after the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is mainly performed. The control device 110 is configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the time elapsed after receiving the closing command. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification 2 of the first control example>
Next, a modification of the open/close display effect in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 158.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. To be done. On the lower right part of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative pattern Z is displayed in a blinking manner. It shows that the middle symbol that is the reach display mode is changing.

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start to slide vertically with respect to each other. The reach symbols are moved to the upper right, respectively, and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed region of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A school of fish effects (an effect in which the school of fish is variably displayed) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 158(c), when the sliding amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. In this way, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area where the middle pattern is displayed is a small group of fish and the school of many fish is moved and displayed in the area where the middle pattern is not displayed. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the fluctuation of the school of fish schools in accordance with the sliding direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and to effectively use the display area that is expanded by sliding to move the school of fish. It is possible to widen the area to be used.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid to the left and right (slides outward in the left-right direction). FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. To be done. On the lower right part of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative pattern Z is displayed in a blinking manner. It shows that the middle symbol that is the reach display mode is changing.

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start to slide outward from each other. The reach symbols are moved to the upper right, respectively, and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed region of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A school of fish effects (an effect in which the school of fish is variably displayed) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 158(c), when the sliding amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. In this way, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area where the middle pattern is displayed is a small group of fish and the school of many fish is moved and displayed in the area where the middle pattern is not displayed. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the fluctuation of the school of fish schools in accordance with the sliding direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and to effectively use the display area that is expanded by sliding to move the school of fish. It is possible to widen the area to be used.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated to the state shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the rotation coordinates and the display coordinates of the display data of the similar fish school effect are corrected and set, so that the respective display is performed. Is configured to be. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately store the fish school data when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates, and the data amount can be suppressed.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168. Although the detailed description of the liquid crystal display device 523 is omitted in the first embodiment, the internal configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described in detail in the thirteenth embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 161. 159(a) is a front view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159(b) is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective front view of the liquid crystal display device 523, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523.

As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the liquid crystal display device 523 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view, and a front case 541 disposed on the front side (player side) and a rear side of the front case 541. , A liquid crystal device 543 disposed between the front case 541 and the rear case 542 facing each other, a substrate member 545 disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal device 543, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member. And an interposition member 544 provided between the opposing surfaces of the 545.

The front case 541 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and a front opening 541a is formed in the bottom surface of the front case 541 so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction in a rectangular shape. The front case 541 is formed so that the liquid crystal device 543 can be disposed inside from the side of the back opening 541b that opens on one side. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543 can be viewed by the player through the front opening 541a.

The front case 541 is formed with two recesses 541c, which are recessed inside the left and right side surfaces. Further, a through hole 541d penetrating in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541 (horizontal direction in FIG. 159(a)) is formed at the tip of the recessed portion 541c.

Further, in the concave portion 541c formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541 (left side in FIG. 159(a)), a concave portion that is concave from the rear opening 541b side of the concave tip portion to the front opening 541a side. 541c1 is formed. The recessed portion 541c1 is a recess that engages with an engaging portion 544b of the intervening member 544 described below.

The liquid crystal device 543 includes a liquid crystal display 543a for displaying symbols and the like on the front surface (a surface visible to the player through the front opening 541a). Further, the liquid crystal device 543 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its lateral dimension is set to be substantially the same as the lateral dimension inside the rear opening 541b, and its longitudinal dimension is set to the left and right of the front case 541. The width is set to be substantially the same as the width between the recesses 541c facing each other.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces thereof are in contact with the inner wall of the front case 541. This makes it possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 from being displaced with respect to the front case 541.

Further, the liquid crystal device 543 has a rear surface (a surface opposite to the liquid crystal display 543a) covered with a rear surface portion 543c formed of a plate member made of a metal material. The back surface portion 543c is a shield member for blocking electrical noise (reducing the influence of the electrical noise on the liquid crystal device 543), and includes a substrate member 54 and a conductive member 546 (connecting means) described later. It is electrically connected. Accordingly, the static electricity charged on the liquid crystal device 543 (back surface portion 543c) can be released to the substrate member 545 through the conductive member 546.

The liquid crystal device 543 is set such that its thickness dimension (dimension in the depth direction in the plane of FIG. 159(a)) is smaller than the distance dimension from the rear opening 541b side of the inner portion of the front case 541 to the front opening 541a side. .. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 can be housed inside the front case 541. Further, the front case 541 is provided with a standing portion 541e which stands on the inner side surface on one side in the short-side direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)).

The standing portion 541e is formed so as to partially project from the substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541. The distance dimension between the inner side surface of the front case 541 facing the rear opening 541b and the side surface of the standing portion 541e is set to be substantially the same as the thickness dimension of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged inside the front case 541, the side surface of the standing portion 541e and the liquid crystal device 543 are in contact with each other.

That is, the standing portion 541e is brought into a state of being engaged with the lower end portion of the liquid crystal device 543. Thus, in the state where the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged inside the front case 541, the liquid crystal device 543 is prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 comes out of the rear case 542) with respect to the front case 541. It can be made easier.

The liquid crystal display 543a is formed in a shape that is substantially the same as the shape of the opening 541a of the front case 541 in a front view, and its size is set to be substantially the same as the opening 541a. This allows the player to view the entire area of the liquid crystal display 543a through the opening 541a of the front case 541.

The liquid crystal device 543 is provided with fastening holes 543b formed in a circular shape at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The fastening hole 543b is a hole to which the tip of the screw inserted into the through hole 541d of the front case 541 is fastened, and the axis of the fastening hole 543b is in the same straight line as the axis of the through hole 541d when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. Are formed in a shape. Accordingly, the liquid crystal device 543 can be fixed to the front case 541 by fastening the screw to the fastening hole 543b through the through hole 541d in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged inside the front case 541.

Further, as described above, since the through hole 541d is formed in the recessed tip of the recess 541c, the head of the screw can be housed inside the recess 541c when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. A wall portion that covers the space of the recess 541c is formed on the front opening side 541a side of the front case 541. On the other hand, on the rear opening side 541a side of the recess 541c, a back case 542 is attached at a position facing the recess 541c. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the fastening portion between the front case 541 and the liquid crystal device 543.

The interposition member 544 is formed in a plate shape of a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a plurality of openings 544a that open in the plate thickness direction (from the liquid crystal device 543 side to the substrate member 545 side), and protrudes in the longitudinal direction from one end in the longitudinal direction. It is mainly provided with an engaging portion 544b and a through hole 544c penetratingly formed in the plate thickness direction at the other end in the longitudinal direction.

The opening 544a is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and its inner wall is formed along the plate thickness direction. In this embodiment, four positions are formed on the interposition member 544. Further, a plurality of openings 544a are formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 159(a)) with respect to the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and the openings 544a are formed at different positions in the longitudinal direction.

Since the pair of third portions 546b5 are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of the endless belt (cloth member 546b), the deformability of the cloth member 546b in the opening direction of the endless belt can be enhanced.

Further, the four openings 544a are formed on one side in the short-side direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)) with respect to the center position in the short-side direction of the interposition member 544. The interposition member 544 is formed in an outer shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of the front case 541, and is disposed on the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the four openings 544a are located at one side in the short-side direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)) with respect to the center position in the short-side direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (front case 541).

As described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged so that one pair faces the rear case 300 (see FIG. 7). Therefore, in the state where the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 is directed to the player side (the state shown in FIGS. 7 and 11), the openings 544a are arranged so as to be biased toward the opposing side.

The engaging portion 544b is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction from the end surface on the one end side (left side in FIG. 159(a)) in the longitudinal direction of the interposing member 544, and the protruding tip end surface thereof is a short side of the interposing member 544. It is bent in both directions (vertical direction in FIG. 159(a)). That is, the engaging portion 544b is formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front.

The tip of the engaging portion 544b is disposed inside the concave portion 541c via the concave portion 541c1. Therefore, the one end side (the engaging portion 544b side) in the longitudinal direction of the interposition member 544 can be positioned in the lateral direction with respect to the front case 541.

The through hole 544c is formed so as to penetrate in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction. The inner diameter of the through hole 544c is substantially the same as or larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 541f formed in a cylindrical shape on the back surface of the other end side (right side in FIG. 159(a)) of the front case 541. Is also set a little larger. The through hole 544c and the protrusion 541f are formed coaxially in the assembled state of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Therefore, when the interposition member 544 is attached to the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543, the protrusion 541f can be inserted into the through hole 544c. As a result, the other end side (through hole 554c side) of the interposition member 544 in the longitudinal direction can be positioned with respect to the front case 541.

As described above, the interposition member 544 is positioned on both sides in the longitudinal direction with respect to the front case 541 by the through hole 544c and the engaging portion 544b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interposition member 544 from moving (displacement) with respect to the front case 541.

The board member 545 is formed in a plate shape having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is formed smaller than the shape of the rear case 542 in front view. The substrate member 545 is formed by providing a plurality of LEDs that irradiate the rear case 542 with light on the rear surface on the rear case 542 side. This allows the rear case 542 described later to emit light.

The board member 545 also includes a first region 545a in which a plurality of protrusions 545a1 (see FIG. 164) protruding toward the front case 541 are formed. A detailed description of the first area 545a will be given later.

The substrate member 545 is formed with a plurality of through holes that are circularly opened in the plate thickness direction, and the through holes are fitted into the plurality of protrusions that protrude from the intermediate member 544 into a cylindrical shape, so that the intermediate member is formed. It can be positioned relative to 544.

The rear case 542 has a front view shape that is substantially the same as the front case shape of the front case 541, and is also formed to have substantially the same size as the outer shape of the front case 541. The rear case 542 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the front case 541 side. Therefore, by combining the front case 541 and the back case 542, the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 can be arranged between the facing (inside) the front case 541 and the back case 542.

Next, the conductive member 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 is an exploded view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 163(a) is a top view of the conductive member 546, and FIG. 163(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 546 taken along the line CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb in FIG. 163(a). Note that FIG. 162 illustrates a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the interposed member 544 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the conductive member 546 is inserted into the inside of the opening 544a in the front portion (upper portion of FIG. 163(a)) on the front case 541 side when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. .. The front surface of the conductive member 546 is in contact with the rear surface 543c of the liquid crystal device 543, and the rear surface (lower part of FIG. 163(b)) is in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545. ..

The conductive member 546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped long in one direction (left and right direction in FIG. 163(a)) in a state before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523 (between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545). In addition, the conductive member 546 is parallel to the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 165) of the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 163(a)). It is arranged inside.

Further, the conductive member 546 has a laterally long rectangular outer shape in a front view before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, and has a longitudinal dimension that is a distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the opening 544a of the interposing member 554. The dimension in the short side direction is smaller than the distance dimension in the short side direction of the opening 544a.

Further, the conductive member 546, when assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, is constricted toward the inner side in the longitudinal direction at the intermediate portion between the contact surface with the back surface portion 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a. A constricted portion 546c is provided.

The conductive member 546 is mainly provided with an elastic member 546a formed of an elastic material and cloth members 546b arranged on four surfaces of the elastic member 546a excluding two opposite surfaces.

The elastic member 546a is formed of a non-conductive sponge-like material. The elastic member 546a is a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in one direction when the cloth member 546b is not provided (that is, the constricted portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is not formed). In this embodiment, the elastic member 546a is made of synthetic sponge formed by foaming a synthetic resin of polyurethane.

The cloth member 546b is formed of an endless belt-shaped cloth-like body (a conductive cloth in the present embodiment) in which a fibrous body formed of a conductive metal material is woven. Further, since the cloth member 546b is formed of a fibrous body of a metal material, it is easily deformed, and the conductive member 546 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 523 while being wound around the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a. The constricted portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is formed by making a crease at both ends in the longitudinal direction (left and right in FIG. 163(a)) of the intermediate portion between the contact surface with the 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a. Can be formed.

Further, in the conductive member 546, since the cloth member 546b is formed in an endless belt shape and the elastic member 546a is fitted in the cloth member 546b, the assembly of the conductive member 546 is simplified and the cost of parts is reduced. be able to.

Further, since the cloth member 546b is formed of a conductive cloth, its flexibility can be ensured, so that the durability of the cloth member 546b when repeatedly deformed due to the relative displacement of the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 can be improved. It is possible to improve.

In addition, although the case where the cloth member 546b is formed of a conductive cloth has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cloth member 546b may be formed of a conductive nonwoven fabric. Examples of the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric include a polyester fiber whose outer surface is coated with one or both of copper and nickel and which are woven or not woven to form a cloth (sheet). .. Examples of the weave method include plain weave and twill weave.

The cloth member 546b includes a first portion 546b3 that is in contact with one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543, a second portion 546b4 that is in contact with the ground portion 545d (projection 545a1) of the substrate member 545, and A pair of third portions 546b5 connecting between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, and a width dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 (a contact surface with the back surface portion 543c of the first portion 546b3). Or the width dimension of the third portion 546b5 (dimension L11 (see FIG. 163(a))) on the contact surface between the second portion 546b4 and the first region 545a (the pair of the first and second portions 546b4 and 545a). The facing dimension (dimension L12 (see FIG. 163(b))) of the three portions 546b is set to a small dimension at least in part.

Therefore, the cloth member 546b can be easily deformed in the opening direction of the endless belt by using the third portion 546b5. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction and in the opening direction of the endless belt of the cloth member 546b, the first portion 546b3 and the second portion of the cloth member 546b are moved. It is possible to prevent the portion 546b4 from sliding on the one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Further, as described above, since the elastic member 546a can be elastically deformed to form the constricted portion 546c in the conductive member 546 by making a crease in the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a is held in the elastically deformed state. it can. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a can be increased in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other (vertical direction in FIG. 163(a)). As a result, the elastic member 546a can be easily clamped between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545.

Further, the cloth member 546b is bonded at the contact surface with the elastic member 546a, and both ends thereof are bonded together. As described above, since the elastic member 546a is formed of a sponge body, the adhesive area of the cloth member 546b is reduced by the amount of bubbles when the sponge body is formed. Therefore, the cloth member 546b is easily separated from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a. When the cloth member 546b is peeled from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a, it becomes difficult to maintain the contact state between the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 546, and static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device 523 described later is applied to the ground portion 545c (projection of the substrate member 545). 545a1) could be difficult to escape.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since both ends of the cloth member 546b are bonded to each other, the area of the bonding surface of the cloth member 546b can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cloth member 546b from coming off from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a.

Further, the cloth members 546b are arranged such that the adhesive surfaces at both ends thereof are arranged at the one constricted portion 546c of the conductive member 546 (that is, the adhesive surface between the end portions of the cloth member 546b is provided on one of the pair of third portions 546b5). Is formed). Accordingly, the contact area of the conductive member 546 with the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be secured.

That is, when the end portions of the cloth member 546b are adhered to each other, the end portions are overlapped with each other to form a step, so that the adhering surfaces of both ends are the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546 with the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. If formed, the contact area between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is reduced by the step difference.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting the one end and the other end of the strip shape, and the connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end of the strip shape is the one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543. Since it is disposed at the (back surface portion 543c) or at a position that is not in contact with the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545, the connecting portion becomes a step and one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 or the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545. It is possible to prevent the contact state with the contact from becoming unstable. That is, the contact area can be secured, and the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545, and the charge can be easily removed.

Further, the conductive member 546, in a state in which the conductive member 546 is not assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, has a distance dimension between opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of left and right constricted portions 546c (a dimension L13 between opposing outer peripheral portions of the pair of third portions 546b5). (See FIG. 163(a)) is larger than the dimension of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 in the longitudinal direction.

Accordingly, when the conductive member 546 is inserted into the opening 544a of the interposition member 544, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 can be elastically deformed, and thus the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily assembled.

That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with a plate-shaped interposing member 544 that is interposed between the one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and has an opening 544a formed therein. Since the size of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the size of the conductive member 546 in the unloaded state in the longitudinal direction, the size of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546 is reduced. It can hold two sides.

Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while holding the conductive member 546 on the interposition member 544, and the positioning with respect to the conductive member 546 can be performed along with the disposition of the interposition member 544. The workability of can be improved.

In the state where the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the constricted portion 546c is smaller than the dimension of the opening 544a in the longitudinal direction, and the two surfaces at the longitudinal ends of the conductive member 546 are not sandwiched by the opening 544a. Further, the conductive member 546 is interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and is only inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the opening 544a and is not fixed by a screw or the like. It is difficult to hold the conductive member 546 during assembly. Therefore, it is necessary to carefully assemble the liquid crystal display device 523.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 can be held by sandwiching the two surfaces of the conductive member 546 at both ends in the longitudinal direction between the openings 544a, so that the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily assembled. Can be done. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 523 and the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is compressed to be deformed inward by the amount of bubbles formed by foaming. Thus, the state of being sandwiched by the opening 544a can be eliminated.

In addition, as described above, the four openings 544a face each other in the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 when the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 is directed to the player (the state shown in FIGS. 7 and 11). It is arranged in a biased manner to the side where Therefore, the conductive member 546 disposed inside the opening 544a is also biased to the opposite side of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 in a state where the liquid crystal display 543a is directed to the player side.

Here, when the liquid crystal display 543a faces the player side and the liquid crystal display devices 523 facing each other are made to collide (merge) at the center of the rear case 300 (see FIG. 7), the two liquid crystal displays 543a are set to one. It is necessary to bring the liquid crystal display devices 523 closer to each other in order to make them easily visible to the player as one display surface.

Further, since the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal display device 523 has an edge portion in which liquid crystal cannot be displayed on the outer edge of the liquid crystal display 543a, in order to allow the player to visually recognize the two liquid crystal displays 543a as one display surface, It is necessary to arrange the two liquid crystal devices 523 without a gap.

Therefore, in order to move the two liquid crystal display devices 523 to positions closer to each other, the two liquid crystal display devices 523 are likely to collide. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 arranged inside the liquid crystal display device 523 are likely to shake. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 inside the liquid crystal display device 523 may collide with other members.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the opening 544a faces the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 toward the player, the conductive member 546 is biasedly arranged on the opposite side, so that the two Shaking inside the liquid crystal device 523 that occurs when the liquid crystal display device 523 collides can be easily suppressed.

That is, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the collision side of the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 arranged inside the liquid crystal display device 523 is high because the kinetic energy on the collision side is high. Easy to shake. Therefore, when the board member 543, the interposition member 544, and the board member 545 swing, the board member 545 collides with another member (for example, the interposition member 544) to short the wiring, or the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal device 543. Etc. may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 arranged inside the liquid crystal display device 523 are electrically conductive to the swaying side. Since the member 546 is arranged, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, it is possible to easily prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 from swinging due to the elastic force of the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 from being damaged.

Next, the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 164(a) is a front view of the substrate member 545, and FIG. 164(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXIVb-CLXIVb in FIG. 164(a). In addition, in FIG. 164, the first region 545a is illustrated by a broken line. Further, in FIG. 164(a), the wiring 545g is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 164, the substrate member 545 is formed of a plate member 545c formed of a non-conductive resin material in a plate shape, and a conductive metal material provided on one surface side of the plate member 545c. And a cover member 545e formed of a non-conductive resin material, which is arranged so as to cover one side of the ground portion 545d and the plate member 545c. ..

The plate member 545c is a plate material that forms the skeleton of the substrate member 545, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view of the substrate member 545.

The ground portion 545d is a conductor that conducts electricity to the control component mounted on the board member 545. The ground portion 545d in the present embodiment is formed over the entire first region 545a. The board member 545 is formed between the covering member 545e and the plate member 545c, and includes a wiring 545g connected to each ground portion 545.

The wiring 545g is formed of a metal material and is connected to a connector 545f provided on the substrate member 545. The wiring 545g is connected (conducted) to the ground (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 via the connector 545f. Therefore, the electricity input to the ground portion 545d can be released to the ground of the pachinko machine 10 via the wiring 545g.

The covering member 545e is arranged so as to cover the entire area of one surface of the ground portion 545d and the plate member 545c. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the electricity that conducts the ground portion 545d and the wiring 545g from being discharged to another member (such as a chip arranged on the base member 545).

Further, the covering member 545e is not formed around the protrusion 545a1 provided on the substrate member 545, but is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 545a1 by a predetermined distance. In this case, a projection 545a1 described later is projected from the covering member 545e. This ensures the contact (connection) between the conductive member 546 and the ground portion 545d (see FIG. 164(b)).

The plate member 545c, the ground portion 545d, and the covering member 545e described above are illustrated only in FIG. 164(b), and are not illustrated in other drawings.

The first region 545a mainly includes a plurality of protrusions 545a1 protruding toward the liquid crystal device 543 side and a plurality of through holes 545a2 penetrating in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction of the substrate member 545 (left and right direction in FIG. 164(b)). Prepared to be formed.

A plurality of through holes 545a2 are formed in the first region 545a in a state of being aligned in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction of the substrate member 545. In this embodiment, five substrate members 545 are formed in the longitudinal direction, and four substrate members 545 are formed in the lateral direction.

It should be noted that projections 545a2, which will be described later, are fitted into the through holes 545a2 in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction of the substrate member 545 at every other location. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through holes 545a2 penetrating in the plate thickness direction (the state in which the protrusion 545a1 is not fitted) are formed at three positions in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 and at two positions in the lateral direction. ..

The protrusion 545a1 is formed of solder soldered to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545. That is, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged in the through hole 545a2 by soldering to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Therefore, the protrusion 545a1 can be formed in the step of soldering the electronic component to the board member 545. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a step for forming the protrusion 545a1, and the step can be used in common, so that the number of steps can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since the protrusion 545a1 is formed by the solder soldered to the ground portion 545d, the contact area between the cloth member 546b and the ground portion 545d can be secured accordingly, and when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, the substrate The charge can be easily removed through the ground portion 545d of the member 545.

The protrusion 545a1 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 545a2. Further, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged so as to be fitted inside the through hole 545a2, and the outer diameter of the tip end on the liquid crystal device 543 side is formed so as to swell in the radial direction, and the protrusion 545a1 protrudes from the through hole 545a2. It is said that

Accordingly, the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 can be connected (in a state of being in contact with each other), so that electricity conducted to the protrusion 545a1 is transmitted through the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 and the wiring 545g. You can escape to the ground of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the protrusion 545a1 has a radially bulged tip end portion that abuts on the liquid crystal device 543 side of the ground portion 545d, and the outer peripheral surface of the base end portion contacts the inner edge portion of the through hole 545a that penetrates the ground portion 545d. Since they are in contact with each other, the contact area between the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d can be secured. As a result, the static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

Further, the cloth member 546b can be made to follow the shape of the protrusion 545a1, and the cloth member 546b can slide relative to the one surface side (the back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 by that much. Can be suppressed.

That is, since the tip of the protrusion 545a1 is projected from the substrate member 545, the protrusion 545a1 can be arranged in a state of biting into the side surface of the conductive member 546. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the conductive member 546 to be displaced in the direction (shear direction) parallel to the front surface (the left side surface of FIG. 164(b)) of the substrate member 545. As a result, the static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

The protrusions 545a1 are arranged at intervals of one place with respect to the through holes 545a2 formed by arranging a plurality of protrusions. That is, the protrusions 545a1 are arranged in a staggered manner with respect to the through holes 545a2.

Therefore, the plurality of protrusions 545a1 can be used to prevent the cloth member 546b from sliding with respect to the substrate member 545, and the liquid crystal device 543 can easily remove the charged electric charge, and the through hole 545a2 can be used. Thus, the heat generated between the protrusion and the cloth member 546b can be efficiently released.

That is, since static electricity flows through the cloth member 546b in the conductive member 546, heat is likely to be accumulated due to the electricity, and the heat may easily destroy the substrate member 545. However, the heat is easily discharged through the through hole 545a2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the substrate member 545 from being broken by cooling the conductive member 546.

Next, the arrangement state of the conductive members 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. FIG. 165 is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. 166(a) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along the line CLXVIa-CLXVIa in FIG. 165, and FIG. 166(b) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. FIG. 166(c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the range LXVIIIc of FIG. 166(b).

Note that FIG. 165 illustrates a state where the rear case 542 and the substrate member 545 of the liquid crystal display device 523 are removed, and in FIGS. 166(a) to 166(c), the rear case 542 and the substrate member 545 are mounted. The closed state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the conductive member 546 is in a state in which the front side (the first portion 546b3 side described later (FIG. 166(b) upper side)) is in contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543, The back surface side (the second portion 546b4 side (to be described below, FIG. 166(b) lower side) to be described later) is brought into contact with the first region 545a (see FIG. 164(a)) of the substrate member 545, and the elastic member 546a serves as the liquid crystal. The device 543 and the substrate member 545 are arranged in a compressed state in the opposing direction.

That is, in the state where the conductive member 546 is not arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523, the distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 163(a)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 in the facing direction is the same as that of the liquid crystal device 543. The distance dimension L5 is set to be larger than the distance dimension L5 facing the substrate member 545. Therefore, when the substrate member 545 is assembled to the liquid crystal device 543, the conductive member 546 can be compressed in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other.

Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the conductive member 546 in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are opposed to each other (the horizontal direction in FIG. 166(b)) can be increased, so that the conductive member 546 is connected to the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is possible to bring the conductive member 546 into contact with and to maintain the contact state.

Further, since the conductive member 546 is formed with the constricted portion 546c and the elastic member 546a is made of a compressible material, the conductive member 546 is compressed (smallly) in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. In this case, the compressive force can be applied to the fold portion of the cloth member 546b of the constricted portion 546c, and the constricted portion 546c can be folded inside the conductive member 546.

As a result, as described above, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled (when the conductive member 546 is provided between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other), the two ends of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction are separated. The state of being sandwiched between the surface and the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 can be eliminated.

More specifically, in the configuration in which the conductive member 546 is made smaller than the size of the conductive member 546 in the unloaded state and the conductive member 546 is sandwiched by the opening 544a of the interposition member 544, shear deformation of the elastic member 546a is hindered, and thus the liquid crystal device When the 543 or the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the cloth member 546b may slide with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the elastic member 546a is formed of the compressible elastic member 546a, and the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the opening of the intermediate member 544 is opened. Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of 544a and the outer surface of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 546 other than the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 side, the conductive member 546 (elastic member 546a) is formed on the inner edge of the opening 544a. You can suppress being restrained. That is, at the time of assembling work, the conductive member 546 is held in the interposition member 544 (opening 544a) to improve workability of the assembling work, and at the same time, the conductive member is placed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. In a state in which 546 is sandwiched, the elastic member 546a can be easily sheared and the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding on the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

The first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b are in contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, so that the contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, the charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Further, the outer surface of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the elastic member 546a (on the side of the third portion 546b5 of the cloth member 546b) that is sandwiched by the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 is constricted (recessed) toward the inside. Since the portion 546c is provided, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the outer surface of the elastic member 546a starts from the inward constricted portion 546c, and the outer surface of the interposing member 544 is formed. It can be easily deformed in the direction away from the inner edge of the opening 544a (inward of the elastic member 546a). As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 and the outer surface of the conductive member 546.

Further, the conductive member 546 is formed into an endless belt shape by connecting a cloth member 546b to one end and the other end of the belt shape, and the elastic member 546a is fitted into the cloth member 546b to form one end and the other end of the belt shape. Since the connecting portion connecting the parts is disposed on the outer surface side (the third portion 546b5 side of the cloth member 546b) that is recessed inward of the elastic member 546a, it is formed by recessing inward. It is possible to accommodate a connection portion in which one end and the other end of the strip shape are connected to each other in the space. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the connecting portion that connects the one end and the other end of the strip shape to abut the inner edge of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544. As a result, the deformability of the conductive member 546 can be secured.

That is, at the bonding surface between the end portions of the cloth member 546b, the bonded portion of the cloth member 546 is less likely to be plastically deformed due to the fixing of the adhesive material. In the present embodiment, the bonding position is different from the fold position of the cloth member 546b, so that when the conductive member 546b is compressed in the direction in which the liquid phase device 543 and the substrate member 545 oppose each other, the cloth member The position of the fold line of 546b can be folded.

Further, since the bonded portion is less likely to be plastically deformed, the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a is increased in the process of compressing the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546, so that the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from being plastically deformed. As a result, the constricted portion 546c can be easily folded inside the conductive member 546.

Further, as shown in FIG. 166(c), the protrusion 545a1 is disposed so as to project from the substrate member 545 (covering member 545e), so that the conductive member 546 is prevented from contacting the opening edge of the through hole 545a2. Can be suppressed. That is, since the conductive member 546 is lifted by the protrusion 545a1 to form a space between the substrate member 545 (through hole 545a2) and the conductive member 546, it is possible to prevent the through hole 545a2 from being blocked by the conductive member 546.

Thereby, the outside air is caused to flow into the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546 through the through hole 545a, or the air in the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546 is caused to flow out through the through hole ka545a. be able to. That is, it is possible to secure (increase) a circulation path of air and easily cool the conductive member 546 and the substrate member 545. As a result, damage to the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a case where the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is changed will be described. 167(a) to 167(c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

167(a) to 167(c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166(b). 167(b) is a normal state (reference position), and FIGS. 167(a) and 167(c) show a state in which the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is changed.

Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed so as to be displaceable (rotation about the rotation shaft 523c and slide displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) (FIGS. 7 to 14). reference). Therefore, the inertial force of the displacement may change the positional relationship between the respective components inside the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, if the distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other changes, the contact state of the conductive member 546 interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be released. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167, since the conductive member 546 is formed of the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a, the elastic member 546a is elastically deformed, so that the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal are formed. The contact state between the device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be easily maintained.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 167( a ), when the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is close and the distance dimension L 6 is smaller than the distance dimension L 5, the distance dimension L 6 is adjusted. Then, the elastic member 546a is compressed in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are opposed to each other (vertical direction in FIG. 167(a)), thereby maintaining the contact state between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. it can.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(c), the distance between the facing surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is larger than the distance dimension L5 and smaller than the dimension L4 of the conductive member 546 (see FIG. 163). In the case of L7, since the elastic member 546a is arranged in a compressed state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other, the elastic member 546a corresponds to the distance dimension L7. It is possible to maintain the contact state between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 by elastically deforming the 543 and the substrate member 545 in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167(c)).

That is, since the conductive member 546 that is elastically deformable in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167(b)) is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are disposed. It is possible to easily maintain the contact state between the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 when the distance between the facing portions changes.

Next, a case where the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are changed in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. 168. 168(a) to 168(c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

168(a) to 168(c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166(a). 168(b) is taken as a normal (reference position), in FIG. 168(a), the liquid crystal device 543 is located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (right side in FIG. 168(a)) with respect to the substrate member 545. FIG. 168(c) shows a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 has changed to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (left side in FIG. 168(c)) with respect to the substrate member 545.

Further, in FIGS. 168(a) to 168(c), the virtual line KJ1 is located at the center position of the first region 545a in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545, and the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b (see FIG. 163(a)). The virtual line KJ2 is shown by a two-dot chain line at the center position in the longitudinal direction of FIG.

Here, conventionally, a substrate (substrate member 545) having an electric device (liquid crystal device 543) and a ground part (ground part 545d) which is arranged to face one surface of the electric device and is grounded, and the substrate thereof. There is known a gaming machine provided with a connecting means (a conductive member 546 in the present embodiment) for electrically connecting an electric device to the ground part of the. Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member (back surface portion 543c) made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal display 543a). In the conventional product, the connecting means is formed as an arcuate leaf spring, the base end of which abuts (electrically connects) with the ground portion of the substrate, and the arcuate convex surface abuts the shield member (electrical). Connected). The connecting means has a base end fixed to the substrate and an arcuate convex surface pressed against the shield member, and is kept in contact by elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thereby, the static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground through the ground portion of the substrate. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged by static electricity generated due to rolling of a game ball or displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the charge is removed through the ground portion of the substrate to cause color unevenness or dot defects in the liquid crystal display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

However, in the above-described conventional technique, the electric device is displaced, or the electric device is vibrated due to the displacement of another effect member or the input of the external force caused by the rolling/collision of the game ball, thereby shielding the shield. When the member and the substrate are relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connecting means is slid with respect to the shield member, and the connecting means or the contact target of the connecting means is worn. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the one surface (the back surface portion 543c) side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545, and the liquid crystal device 543 or When the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the shear displacement is caused by the relative displacement (the direction orthogonal to the facing direction between the first portion 546b3 side and the second portion 546b4 side of the cloth member 546b). Since the conductive member 546 is formed so as to be deformable (longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546), one side and the other side of the conductive member 546 are connected to the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (projection) of the substrate member 545. It is possible to maintain the state of being in contact with each of 545a1). That is, when the conductive member 546 is sheared and deformed, it is possible to prevent the first portion 546b3 or the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 546 from sliding (displacement) with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 546 or the contact target (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) of the conductive member 546 from being worn.

Further, since the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the rear surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 at the time of assembly. It suffices to sandwich the conductive member 546 between them, and work such as fastening can be unnecessary. As a result, it is possible to improve workability and reduce product cost.

That is, as shown in FIG. 168, when the liquid crystal device 543 changes in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (horizontal direction in FIG. 168(b)) with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546. By elastically deforming, it is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surface.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 168(a), the liquid crystal device 543 changes to one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (right side in FIG. 168(a)) with respect to the substrate member 545 (with respect to the virtual line KJ1). Then, when the virtual line KJ2 changes to one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523), the bending angle of the fold portion formed in the third portion 546b5 is made shallow (obtuse angle), and the first portion 546b3 side. Elastic member 546a is displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction.

In this case, as described above, the conductive member 546 elastically recovers the elastic member 546a in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 by folding the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b inside the conductive member 546. Since it is formed easily, it is possible to prevent the positions of the contact surfaces of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b from contacting the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 546 or the contact target (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) of the conductive member 546 from being worn.

Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 of the present embodiment is configured so that the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated 90 degrees about the axis of the base member 400. In this case, when the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is changed from the state parallel to the horizontal direction to the direction parallel to the direction of gravity, the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 cause the substrate member 545 and While the holding direction of the liquid crystal device 543 is changed, the holding portions of the interposition member 544 and the substrate member 545 with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 are the projections 541f and the through holes 544c on one side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the front case 541. (See FIG. 161) only, the interposition member 544 and the substrate member 545 are likely to be displaced in the gravity direction with respect to the liquid crystal device 543.

Therefore, the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are easily displaced. Therefore, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are displaced, the contact target may be worn.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 546 is arranged such that the opening direction of the endless belt shape is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the deformability of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be improved.

Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees about the axis of the base member 400, and its longitudinal direction is positioned parallel to the horizontal direction (see FIG. 7), and the longitudinal direction is positioned parallel to the gravity direction. It is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being displaced when being displaced to the opened state (see FIG. 11). As a result, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are misaligned, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the contact target.

Further, here, the liquid crystal display device 523 of the present embodiment is configured such that both longitudinal ends thereof are supported and can be slidably displaced in the lateral direction by the slide unit SL (see FIGS. 7 to 14). In this case, to the liquid crystal display device 523, a driving unit (driving motor 431) for enabling the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is connected to one end side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced, static electricity generated by driving the drive motor 431 is easily transmitted from one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523.

On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the present embodiment, the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 is formed (disposed) so as to be biased toward one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposition member 544. Therefore, the conductive member 546 disposed in the opening 544a is in a state of being biased to one end side of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Therefore, the static electricity transmitted from the drive unit (drive motor 431) to the liquid crystal device 543 when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slid in the lateral direction is transferred to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 543 before being transmitted. It is transmitted to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 by the conductive member 546. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity from accumulating in the liquid crystal device 543 due to the slide displacement. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of defects such as color unevenness and dot missing in the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal device 523.

Note that when the liquid crystal device 543 shown in FIG. 168(c) is changed to the left side (left direction in FIG. 168(c)) with respect to the substrate member 545, the liquid crystal device 543 shown in FIG. Since this is only the opposite of the case of changing to the right direction (right direction in FIG. 168(c)) with respect to the member 545, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170, the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Although the cloth member 546b is formed around the elastic member 546a with a constant width in the thirteenth embodiment, the cloth member 14546b is formed with a different width in the fourteenth embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

169(a) is a top view of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 169(b) is a side view of the conductive member 14546 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXIXb in FIG. 169(a). FIG. 16C is a side view of the conductive member 14546 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXIXc in FIG. 169. 170A to 170C are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Note that FIGS. 170A to 170C correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166A. 170(a) to 170(c), FIG. 170(b) is set to the normal (reference) position, and in FIG. 170(a), the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged on the substrate member 545 of the liquid crystal display device 523. In FIG. 170(c), the state in which the liquid crystal display device 543 is changed to one side in the lateral direction (lower side in FIG. 170(a)), the liquid crystal device 543 is positioned on the other side in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 relative to the substrate member 545 (FIG. The state changed to 170 (c) upper side) is shown respectively. Further, in FIG. 170, the cutout portions 14546b1 and 14546b2 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the cloth member 14546b of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment has a short side of the liquid crystal display device 523 on the third portion 14546b5 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 169(a)). A cutout portion 14546b1 is cut out from the end face on the other side (right side in FIG. 169(b)) toward the one side in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (left side in FIG. 169(b)), and one end side in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 169(a) right side of the third portion 14546b5 from the end face of the liquid crystal display device 523 in one lateral direction (right side of FIG. 169(c)) to the other side of the liquid crystal display device 523 in lateral direction (FIG. 169(c)). A cutout portion 14546b2 is cut out toward the left side).

The notch portion 14546b1 is formed at a substantially intermediate position in the facing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 169(a)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546, and the opening direction width of the cloth member 14546b is the same as that of the conductive member 14546. It is set to approximately one third of the width dimension of the cloth member 14546b in the opening direction. In addition, the notch size in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the notch portion 14546b1 (left and right direction in FIG. 169(b)) is the facing direction dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546. Is set to be larger than half of.

The cutout portion 14546b2 is formed at a substantially intermediate position in the facing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 169(a)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546, and the opening direction width of the cloth member 14546b is the conductive member. It is set to approximately one third of the width dimension of the cloth member 14546b of 14546 in the opening direction. In addition, the notch size in the facing direction (left and right direction in FIG. 169(c)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cutout portion 14546b2 is the facing direction dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546. Is set to be larger than half of.

That is, the cutout portion 14546b1 and the cutout portion 14546b2 are formed at substantially the same position in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, and at least a part of each other overlaps in the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 14546. Stated. Accordingly, it is possible to facilitate shear displacement of each side surface of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 14546 is elastically deformed, so that the conductive member 14546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the contact surface with.

More specifically, when the cloth member 14546b is formed endlessly by disposing the cloth member 14546b on four surfaces other than the two surfaces facing each other of the elastic member 546a, the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b is prevented. When the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced from each other in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 14546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced because the cloth member 14546b interferes with the displacement. I was afraid to do it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170(a) or 170(b), the cutout portion 14546b1 and the cutout portion 14546b2 are formed in the third portion 14546b5, so that the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b is reduced. The rigidity of can be reduced. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the elastic member 546a (conductive member 14546) is disposed at the intermediate portion of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 in the facing direction. It can be transformed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 14546 from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the contact surface between the substrate member 545 or the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 14546.

Here, as described above, the engaging portion 544b is formed at one longitudinal end of the interposition member 545, and is inserted into the recessed portion 541c1 formed in the front case 541. Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is configured to be rotatable by 90 degrees about the axis of the base member 400. In a state where the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is parallel to the direction of gravity, the other end of the longitudinal direction is positioned on the upper side in the direction of gravity and the one end in the longitudinal direction is positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, since one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposition member 544 only engages with the engaging portion 544b, the interposition member 544 and the interposition member 544 are engaged with the rotational displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. The substrate member 545 easily shifts in the lateral direction with respect to the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 may be displaced, and the contact target may be worn.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 is formed with the cutout portion 14546b1 and the cutout portion 14546b2, so that the conductive member 546 can be easily sheared and deformed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. That is, the intermediate member 544 can be easily sheared in the lateral direction. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 can be sheared and deformed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being displaced and causing the contact target to be worn.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the through hole 15546d is formed through the conductive member 15546 in the longitudinal direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 171(a) is a top view of the conductive member 15546 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 171(b) is a side view of the conductive member 15546 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLIXIXb in FIG. 171(a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the conductive member 15546 of the fifteenth embodiment is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped having one long side, and a through hole 15546d penetrating in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 171(a)) is formed. The through hole 15546d is formed by penetrating the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

The through hole 15546d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view, which is parallel or orthogonal to the first portion 546b3 (the upper surface of FIG. 171(a)) of the conductive member 15546. Further, the through hole 15546d is formed in the center of the elastic member 546a in a top view.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the through hole 15546d is half the distance dimension in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 15546. The distance dimension of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the through hole 15546d in the facing direction is set to half the distance dimension of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 15546 in the facing direction.

When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 545 by the through hole 15546d, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 15546 is elastically deformed and the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are separated from each other. It is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surface.

More specifically, by forming the through hole 15546d in the conductive member 15546, it is possible to reduce the rigidity of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared and deformed in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in either one of the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, the elastic member 546a is sheared and deformed, and the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 546b. It is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surfaces of the substrate 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the contact surface of the conductive member 15546 from rubbing and damaging the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 15546.

In addition, at both ends of the upper and lower inner surfaces of the through hole 15546d in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b, first recesses 15546d1 recessed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b are formed in the entire area in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. Is formed over the entire length. In addition, the conductive member 15546 includes a second recess 15546d2 that is provided at a position facing the first recess 15546d1. That is, the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed at positions facing each other, and are recessed in the facing direction.

When the conductive member 15546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the first concave portion 15546d1 and the second concave portion 15546d2 are compressed and held by the elastic member 546a so that the concave inner portions are crushed. It will be in the state of being.

Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in either one of the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, the upper and lower side surfaces of the conductive member 15546 (elastic member 546a) extend. To transform. Therefore, with the deformation, the conductive member 15546 is drawn in between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. Therefore, the area where the conductive member 15546 contacts the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed, when the end surface of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is stretched and deformed, the first recess 15546d1 and the first recess 15546d1 are not deformed. The recessed surface of the two recesses 15546d2 can be widened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 15546 from being drawn in between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact area between the conductive member 15546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being reduced.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 15546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the conductive member 16546 is provided with the recessed portion 16546e. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

172(a) is a top view of the conductive member 16546 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 172(b) is a side view of the conductive member 16546 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXXIIb in FIG. 172(a).

As shown in FIG. 172, the conductive member 16546 of the sixteenth embodiment is provided with a recessed portion 16546e that is recessed in the end surface of the cloth member 546b in the opening direction (left and right in FIG. 172(b)). That is, the recessed portion 16546e is formed by partially cutting out the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

The recessed portions 16546e are recessed on the upper surface side (the left surface side in FIG. 172(b)) and the lower surface side (the right surface side in FIG. 172(c)) of the conductive member 16546, and in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. It is formed over the entire area. The recessed portion 16546e is formed at the center of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 172(a)).

Further, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the recessed portion 16546e in the facing direction (the vertical direction of FIG. 172(a)) is determined by the first portion 546b3 and the second portion of the conductive member 16546. It is set to half the distance dimension of 546b4 in the opposing direction, and the depth dimension of one recessed portion 16546e (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 172) is the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 16546 (FIG. 172 (( b) It is set to one-third of the distance dimension in the left-right direction).

When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b by the recessed portion 16546e, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 16546 is elastically deformed, so that the conductive member 16546 and the liquid crystal device 543. Also, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the contact surface with the substrate member 545.

More specifically, by forming the recessed portion 16546e in the conductive member 16546, it is possible to reduce the rigidity of the conductive member 16546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared from the intermediate position in the facing direction between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to either one of the openings of the cloth member 546b with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is deformed and the conductive member 16546 is brought into contact with the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. The displacement of the surface can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the conductive member 16546 from rubbing and damaging the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 546.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a pair of third recesses 16546e1 recessed in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 are provided at the ends in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b on the side surfaces where the two recessed portions 16546e face each other. Is formed over the entire area of the third portion 546b5 in the facing direction.

When the conductive member 16546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the third recess 16546e1 is in a state in which the recessed inside is crushed by the elastic member 546a being compressed and held. It

Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in either one of the opening directions of the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a positioned between the facing portions of the recessed portions 16546e moves in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. The end faces stretch and deform. Therefore, with the deformation, the conductive member 16546 is drawn between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. Therefore. The area where the conductive member 16546 contacts the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third concave portion 16546e1 is formed, when the end face of the elastic member 546a located between the facing portions of the concave portion 16546e in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is elongated and deformed, The concave surface of the third concave portion 16546e1 is expanded. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 16546 from being drawn in between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact area between the conductive member 16546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being reduced.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 546 is formed in a cube has been described, but in the seventeenth embodiment, the conductive member 17546 is formed in an irregular shape. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the conductive member 17546 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 173. 173(a) is a top view of the conductive member 17546 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 173(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 17546 taken along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 173(a).

As shown in FIG. 173, in the conductive member 17546, the first portion 17546b3 is curved in an arc shape in the top view, the second portion 546b4 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion are formed. A constricted portion 546c is formed at an intermediate position in the facing direction of the portion 546b4 and has a constricted portion 546c that is inclined toward the center side in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5.

The conductive member 17546 is formed of an elastic member 17546a formed of an elastic material inside and a cloth member 546b arranged around the elastic member 17546a.

The elastic member 17546a is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a top view and an arcuate portion 17546a2 protruding in a semi-arcuate shape from one side of the rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 in the lateral direction.

The arcuate portion 17546a2 has a length in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 173(a)) of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 which is equal to the length of the facing direction of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the elastic member 17546a. The size is set to about one-half and the constricted portion 546c is formed in the arc portion 17546a2. Accordingly, the elastic member 17546a can be easily elastically deformed from the constricted portion 546c in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 (left and right direction in FIG. 173(a)). Further, the conductive member 17546 is formed in a constant shape in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, a state in which the elastic member 17546a is arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described.

174(a) and 174(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. 175(a) to 175(c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

174(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), FIG. 174(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b), and FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c) corresponds to FIG. 174(b). This corresponds to the cross section of (FIG. 166(b)). Further, in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), FIG. 175(b) is taken as the normal (reference) position, and in FIG. 175(a), the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545. In FIG. 175(b), the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced toward the other end side (left side in FIG. 175(a)) in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 (FIG. 175(c)). The state of being displaced to the right side) is shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 174, when the conductive member 17546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the side surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 side is brought into contact with the substrate member 545 and the arc portion is formed. A part of the side surface on the side of 17546a2 is elastically deformed and brought into contact with the liquid crystal device 543 (see FIG. 174(b)).

Note that in FIGS. 174 and 175, the contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 that contacts the conductive member 17546 in the normal state (the state illustrated in FIG. 174(b)) is illustrated as the first contact area 17543d1, and The contact area of the cloth member 546b that contacts the first contact area 17543d1 is illustrated as the first deformation area NR1.

Further, in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 to the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (left side in FIG. 175(a)), the conductive member 17546 is formed in a region different from the first contact region 17543d1. The contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 that contacts with the second contact area 17543d2 is illustrated, and the contact area of the cloth member 546b that contacts the second contact area 17543d2 is illustrated as the second deformation area NR2.

Further, in a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (right side in FIG. 175(c)) with respect to the substrate member 545, a conductive member 17546 is formed in a region different from the first contact region 17543d1. The contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 that contacts the third contact area 17543d3 is illustrated, and the contact area of the cloth member 546b that contacts the third contact area 17543d3 is illustrated as the third deformation area NR3.

In addition, in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), a virtual line KJ1 is shown by a two-dot chain line at a central position in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 in the first region 545a of the substrate member 545.

As shown in FIG. 174, in the seventeenth embodiment, in a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are arranged at the reference position, the first deformation region NR1 of the conductive member 17546 is deformed and the liquid crystal device 543 of the first deformation region NR1 is deformed. The first contact area 17543d1 is contacted. On the other hand, the conductive member 17546 on the side of the rectangular portion 17546a1 is arranged in a state of being in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 as in the thirteenth embodiment.

Therefore, since the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be connected by the conductive member 17546, electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be released to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, elasticity around the constricted portion 546c occurs. By elastically deforming the member 17546a, each contact region and each deformation region can be brought into contact with each other. This can prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 17546. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 from being rubbed and damaged.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 175(a), when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced leftward with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a elastically deforms, so that the elastic member 546a moves to the left side. Being biased. As a result, the left elastic member 546a is pushed toward the liquid crystal device 543 side and abuts on the liquid crystal device 543.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 to the other end in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (left side in FIG. 175(a)), the second displacement region NR2 is set to the second position. By contacting the contact area 17543d2, the contact state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

In other words, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 to the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (left side in FIG. 175(a)), the liquid crystal device By abutting the second displacement region NR2 corresponding to the second abutting region 17543d2 of 543, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 17546. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 from being rubbed and damaged.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are opposed to each other and the liquid crystal device 543 is opposite to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 175(b)). When displaced in the direction, the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact surface of the conductive member 17546 can be separated from each other.

This can prevent static electricity from being conducted from the liquid crystal device 543 to the conductive member 17546 at the same position. Here, since static electricity conducts at a place with low resistance, if the contact surfaces are at exactly the same position, static electricity is repeatedly conducted at a place with low resistance. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 may be partially deteriorated at a portion where static electricity is easily conducted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by separating the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 from the contact surface of the conductive member 17546, the contact position of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member are different due to the difference in expansion and contraction of the cloth member 546b. The contact position of the 17546 can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electric resistance from decreasing at the same position. Therefore, it is possible to change a portion where static electricity is easily conducted, and it is possible to suppress partial deterioration of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 at a portion where static electricity is easily conducted. As a result, the conductivity between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 can be maintained.

Note that the state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the right with respect to the substrate member 545 shown in FIG. 175(c) is opposite to the state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the left with respect to the substrate member 545. Since the contact surface between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 is changed to the third contact area 17543d3 and the third deformed area, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where a part of the conductive member 17546 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but in the 18th embodiment, the conductive member 18546 is formed in a cylindrical shape.

176(a) is a top view of the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 18546 taken along the line CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb in FIG. 176(a).

As shown in FIG. 176, the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed in a circular column shape in a top view. That is, the elastic member 18546a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the cloth member 546b is wound (wrapped) around the outer peripheral surface thereof. In this case, the diameter of the conductive member 18546 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 163(a)) of the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment.

Accordingly, when the conductive member 18546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 slightly moves the elastic member 546 a disposed inside in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is arranged in a compressed state. In other words, the conductive member 18546 is arranged between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 while being elastically deformed into an elliptical shape in a top view.

The cloth member 546b is bonded to the outer peripheral surface of the elastic member 18546a. Further, the conductive member 18546 is disposed in the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 in a posture in which the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is directed to the lateral direction of the liquid crystal device 543, similarly to the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment. ..

When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced about its center. Accordingly, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the contact state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

That is, in the eighteenth embodiment, by rotating the conductive member 18546, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 18546 from being electrically connected to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 at the same position as in the seventeenth embodiment. That is, by rotating the conductive member 18546b, the contact position with the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact position with the substrate member 545 can be changed to suppress partial deterioration of the contact surface. As a result, the conductivity of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 18546 can be maintained.

Further, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced (displaced) with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced, so that it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 18546. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 18546 from being rubbed and damaged.

Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a staggered manner has been described. However, in the first region 19545a of the nineteenth embodiment, the protrusions 19545a1 are arranged on the outer edge of the first region 19545a. It

177(a) is a front view of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). 178(a) is a top view of the conductive member 19546, and FIG. 178(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 19546 taken along the line CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb in FIG. 178(a). 179(a) and 179(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 19546.

Note that FIG. 179(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), and FIG. 179(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b). Further, in FIG. 177(a), the first region 19545a and the second region 19545b are illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 177 to 179, in the first region 19545a of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged only in the through hole 545a2 located along the outer edge of the first region 19545a. In other words, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged along the outer edge of the first region 19545a.

Further, the conductive member 19546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and includes an elastic member 19546a formed of an elastic material and a cloth member 546b arranged on four surfaces of the elastic member 19546a excluding two opposite surfaces in one direction. Prepared to be formed.

The elastic member 19546a is formed of a sponge-like member, and is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped when the cloth member 546b is not arranged. Further, the elastic member 19546a is formed by forming notches 19546a3, which are cut out, on four sides around the side surface on the substrate member 545 side (lower side in FIG. 178(a)). In other words, the elastic member 19546a includes a non-recessed portion 19546a4 which is not formed by cutting out in the center of the side surface on the substrate member 545 side.

That is, the other side of the elastic member 19546a is provided with a recessed portion 19546a3 (first region) facing the region where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 is provided, and a region where the protrusion of the substrate member 545 is not formed. And a non-concave notch portion 19546a4 (second region) facing each other, and the non-concave notch portion 19546a4 (second region) is projected to one side (board member 545 side) beyond the recessed notch portion 19546a3 (first region). Therefore, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the elastic member 546a is compressed, it is possible to increase the surface pressure in the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region). it can. As a result, the non-concave recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) is less likely to ride over the protrusion 545a1, and accordingly, the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding with respect to the substrate member 545. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the recessed portion 19546a3 (first region) can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a that is difficult to shear.

The non-recessed portion 19546a4 has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular inwardly in contact with each protrusion 545a1 arranged around the first region 19545a (a region formed by a tangent line in contact with the inner periphery of each protrusion 545a1). It is formed to be small, and in the present embodiment, it is set to have the same size as the second region 19545b (that is, the size where the outer edge is located between the protrusion 545a1 and the through hole 545a2). Further, the recessed dimension L8 (see FIG. 178(a)) along the facing direction of the first portion 19546b3 and the second portion 19546b4 of the recessed portion 19546a3 is the protrusion dimension L9 of the protrusion 545a1 from the substrate member 545 (FIG. 177). (See (b)) (L8>L9).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 179, when the conductive member 19546 is arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b (second portion 19546b3) arranged in the non-concave cutout 19546a4 is brought into contact with the second region 19545b. It can be installed in the opened state. Further, the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are arranged in the recessed portion 19546a3 by being compressed when the elastic member 546a is arranged between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. The entire area of the cloth member 546b (second portion 19546b3) can be brought into contact with each protrusion 545a1.

In this case, as described above, the recessed dimension L8 is set to be larger than the protruding dimension L9, so that the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 19546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed portion 19546a3.

Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the protrusions 545a1 are arranged in a zigzag pattern with respect to the first region 545a, the entire surface of the cloth member 546b (the second portion 546b3) is substantially uniformly supported by the plurality of protrusions 545a1. Therefore, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be reduced. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing planes, the contact surface between the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be displaced.

On the other hand, in the nineteenth embodiment, the compression ratio of the non-concave cutout portion 19546a4 is set to be larger than that of the concave cutout portion 19546a3, and each projection 545a1 surrounds the non-concave cutout portion 19546a4. It is possible to prevent the position shift unless the cutout portion 19546a4 portion rides over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing planes, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 from being displaced.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a staggered manner has been described. However, in the first region 20545a of the twentieth embodiment, the protrusions 545a1 are linearly arranged in the first region 20545a. They are arranged side by side.

180A is a front view of the substrate member 545 according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180B is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXXXb-CLXXXb of FIG. 180A. 181(a) is a top view of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 181(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 taken along the line CLXXXIb-CLXXXXIb in FIG. 181(a). 182(a) and 182(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 182(c) is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 in the range CLXXXIIc of FIG. 182(b).

182(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), and FIG. 182(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b). Further, in FIG. 180(a), the first region 20545a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 180 to 182, in the first region 20545a of the substrate member 545 in the twentieth embodiment, the protrusion 545a1 is substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 of the first region 20545a (left and right direction in FIG. 180(a)). At the position, the board members 545 are arranged linearly in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 180(a)).

In addition, the conductive member 20546 is formed in a cubic shape and includes an elastic member 20546a formed of an elastic material and a cloth member 546b arranged on four surfaces of the elastic member 20546a excluding two facing surfaces in one direction. Prepared to be formed.

The elastic member 20546a is formed of a sponge-like member, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped when the cloth member 546b is not arranged. In addition, the elastic member 20546a is located at a substantially central position on the side surface of the substrate member 545 side (the lower side in FIG. 181(a)) (a substantially central position in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 (left and right direction in FIG. 181(a))). Is provided with a recessed portion 20546a3 formed by cutting out along the opening direction of the cloth member 546b (left and right direction in FIG. 181(b)). As a result, the elastic member 20546a is formed with two non-concave cutouts 20546a4 on the end surface (side surface) on the substrate member 545 side with the recessed cutouts 20546a3 interposed therebetween.

In other words, the end surface of the elastic member 20546a on the second portion 546b4 side has the concave portion 20546a3 (first area) facing the area where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 is provided, and the protrusion of the substrate member 545. The non-concave cutout portion 20546a4 (second area) faces the non-formed area, and the non-concave cutout portion 20546a4 (second area) is projected more than the concave cutout portion 20546a3 (first area).

Therefore, in the state where the conductive member 20546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the elastic member 546a is compressed, the surface pressure in the non-recessed portion 20546a4 (second region) can be increased. As a result, since the protrusion 545a1 received in the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region) is used, the cloth member 546b (second portion 20546b4) arranged in the non-recessed portion 20546a4 can be hard to ride over the protrusion 545a1. Accordingly, the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding on the substrate member 545. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region) can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a that is difficult to shear.

The non-recessed portion 20546a4 is formed such that its outer shape is approximately the same size as the second region 20545b in which the protrusion 545a1 of the first region 20545a is not formed. Further, the recessed dimension L10 of the recessed portion 20546a3 (the depth dimension in the direction along the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, see FIG. 181(a)) is the protrusion of the protrusion 545a1 from the substrate member 545. It is set larger than the dimension L9 (see FIG. 180(b)) (L10>L9). Further, the width dimension of the recessed portion 20546a3 (dimension in the direction along the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5, lateral dimension in FIG. 181(a)) is the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1 (horizontal dimension in FIG. 181(a)). ), and in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the recessed portion 20546a3 is set to be approximately twice the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1.

As shown in FIG. 182, when the conductive member 20546 is arranged on the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b arranged on the side surface of the non-concave cutout portion 20546a4 is arranged in a state of being in contact with the inside of the second region 20545b. To be done. When the elastic member 20546a is arranged between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are compressed so that the entire area of the cloth member 546b is the first region. It is brought into contact with the 20545a.

In this case, since the recessed dimension L10 is set to be larger than the protruding dimension L9 as described above, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed portion 20546a3.

In the twentieth embodiment, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 is made larger than that of the recessed portion 20546a3, and the protrusion 545a1 is arranged between the pair of non-recessed portion 20546a4. The position can be prevented from being displaced unless it gets over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing planes, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 from being displaced.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are slidably displaced by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pair of rod-shaped bodies (one side member and the other side). Members) are arranged, and the one side guided member 521 (rail side member 521a) and the other side guided member 522 are slid along the pair of rod-shaped bodies, so that the slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are It may be slidable.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the configuration that allows the relative displacement between the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 is formed from the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1 has been described. However, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. The elastic body may be elastically deformed to allow relative displacement.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically located at least toward the display surface 523a side from the axis center of the rotation shaft 523c has been described, but the position is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may be aligned with the axis of the rotation shaft 523c.

The position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotation shaft 523c (longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523) may be located at the center in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, or the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. It may be eccentrically located on one side or the other side in the direction. In this case, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotary shaft 523c is preferably eccentric on the side closer to the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism. This is because the deviation of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be used as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are slidably arranged with respect to the cover member 420 via the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A member having a different displacement form (displacement member) may be provided.

For example, a pair of rotating bodies that are rotatably supported by the cover member 420 may be provided on a rotation axis that is the same as the rotation direction of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are arranged point-symmetrically with the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300 as a symmetry point, and the rotation directions of the two are opposite. This makes it possible to cancel out inertial forces associated with the start or stop of rotation of the pair of rotating bodies, and suppress rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the pair of rotating bodies while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rotary drive mechanism (the drive motor 531, the pinion gear 532, the first gear 533, and the second gear 534) is arranged on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 has been described. However, the rotation drive mechanism is not necessarily limited to this, and the other side guided member 521 may be provided.

In this case, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position, when an inertial force caused by the start of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement is applied, the liquid crystal display device 523. It is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of the. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced by its inertial force, and the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid and displaced in the horizontal direction. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the wear of the slide rail 510 due to the slide displacement.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as the passages of the game balls flowing down the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members are the objects. Also good. For example, it may be a spherical member used for performance outside the game area.

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the slide unit SL as the displacement member is displaced while the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a overlaps the range Rg has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the displacement member A part thereof may be displaced to a position where it is inserted into the passage member 8600 from the opening portion 8654 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. In this case, the displacement area of the slide unit SL can be maximized, and the effect of the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, it is possible to displace the displacement member further to the front side, and it is possible to give a force by bringing the displacement member closer to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while overlapping the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg, the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a of the slide unit SL can be independently displaced with the portion overlapping with the range Rg. As a variable structure, when interference with the game ball is predicted, it is possible to suppress the interference with the game ball by displacing only the variable structure portion. As a result, when interference with the game ball is predicted, it is not necessary to displace the entire slide unit SL, and it is possible to quickly take measures to suppress the interference with the game ball.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the elastic members 546a and 17546a are made of polyurethane has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic member 546a may be formed of a rubber molded product or a coil spring.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed in a sponge shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, foamed rubber (foamed rubber) obtained by kneading a foaming agent into a rubber raw material and vulcanizing it may be used. In this case, the form of the bubbles may be closed bubbles or continuous bubbles.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the elastic members 546a and 17546a are made of a non-conductive material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic members may be made of a conductive material. Good.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the cloth member 546b is wound around the elastic members 546a and 17546a once is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cloth member 546b may be arranged on three-fourths of the entire circumference of the elastic members 546a and 17546a from the side surface of the elastic members 546a and 17546a on the substrate member 545 side to the side surface of the liquid crystal device 543 side.

In this case, by opening one side surface, the elastic members 546a and 17546a can be easily elastically deformed. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545, the contact positions of the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are maintained. It can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 546 from rubbing against the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, so that the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 contact each other. It is possible to prevent the contact surface from being displaced and wear of the contact target.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the cloth member 546b is bonded to the outer surfaces of the elastic members 546a and 17546a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cloth member 546b may be non-bonded to the outer surfaces of the elastic members 546a and 17546a.

In this case, since the cloth member 546b can be made hard to receive the tensile force from the elastic member 546a, the elastic member 546a can be easily deformed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the conductive member 16546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being displaced.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the protrusion 545a1 is formed only on the substrate member 545 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The protrusion 545a1 may be formed on the conductive member 546, 14556, 15546 of the liquid crystal device 543. , 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546, the contact surface (back surface portion 543c) may be formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 from being displaced.

Further, in this case, it is preferable that the protrusion 545a1 of the liquid crystal device 543 and the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 do not overlap in the facing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. That is, it is preferable that the protrusion 545a1 on the liquid crystal device 543 side is located at a position where the through hole 545a2 of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. Accordingly, when the liquid crystal display device 543 and the substrate member 545 are misaligned in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the elastic deformation force of the conductive member 546 in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be increased. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543, the conductive member 546, and the liquid crystal device 543 from being displaced.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the first regions 545a, 19545a, and 20545a of the substrate member 545 are formed on one end side with respect to the central position in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 has been described. A control chip for controlling the display of the liquid crystal device 543 or controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the substrate member 545 may be provided on one end side of the substrate member 545.

According to this, since the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 are arranged around the control chip, static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device is suppressed from being conducted to the control chip. It can be done easily. As a result, the control chip attached to the substrate member 545 can be easily protected.

In this case, the control chip is preferably arranged in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. As described above, the conductive member 546 is configured to be easily deformed in the direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the cloth member 546b by elastically deforming the elastic member 546a. Therefore, for example, when the control chip is arranged in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 546, when the conductive member 546 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 532, the cloth member 546b on the side of the third portion 546b5. May deform and move closer to the control chip as the elastic member 546a deforms. Therefore, the third portion 546b5 (cloth member 546b) may come into contact with the control chip, and the wiring for conducting the control chip may be short-circuited.

On the other hand, by disposing the control chip in the opening direction of the cloth member 545, it is possible to prevent the cloth member 546b from approaching the control chip when the conductive member 546 is elastically deformed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring that conducts the control chip from being short-circuited.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments described above, the case where the covering member 545e is arranged on one surface of the ground portion 545d of the first region 545a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the covering member 545e may not be formed and the protrusion 545a1 may not be formed on one surface of the ground portion 545d.

In this case, the contact area between the second portion 546b4 of the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 and the ground portion 545d can be secured, so that when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged. The electric charge can be easily removed through the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the notch portion is formed in the cloth member 14546b to reduce the rigidity thereof has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rigidity may be reduced by forming a part of the cloth member 14546b thin. In this case, conductivity can be secured.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, the case where the through hole 15546d is formed at one place in the conductive member 15546 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in the conductive member 15546. Thereby, the deformability of the conductive member 15546 can be improved. In this case, the plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in different sizes.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where one recessed portion 16546e is formed on one side surface of the conductive member 16546 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed portions 16546e may be arranged in parallel in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4. Accordingly, the deformability of the conductive member 16546 can be improved. In this case, the recessed widths and the recessed distances of the plurality of recessed portions 16546e may be set to different dimensions.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Concept of the invention exemplifying the slide member 520 in which the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable>
In a gaming machine including one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member that is slidably displaced by the one side member and the other side member being guided by the one side and the other side, respectively. The slide member includes one side guided member guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A rotation member rotatably supported on the one side member, and a relative displacement allowable state of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is a relative displacement amount of the other guided member with respect to the other side member. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being different from the state.

Here, the one side member, the other side member that is arranged to face the one side member, and the slide member that is slidably displaced by the one side and the other side being guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A game machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application discloses that the slide member includes one side guided member guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A structure formed of a rotating member that is rotatably supported in between is devised (not known at the time of filing of the present application). According to such a configuration, the rotating member can be rotated as well as slidably displaced, so that variations in the rendering operation can be increased. Further, by rotating the rotating member, for example, not only the front side of the rotating member but also the back side can be made visible to the player.

However, in such a configuration, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the slide member is slid and displaced with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member by the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation. .. That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the permissible state of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is different from the permissible state of relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member, When the inertial force caused by the start of rotation or the stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction can be used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and the slide member can be used as the one-side member and the other-side member. It is possible to suppress the slide displacement with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

As a configuration for forming relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is equivalent to the gap. A form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, or the like) is interposed between the both, and relative displacement is possible as the elastic body deforms elastically. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

In addition, as a form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or a combination of these is used. An example is the case where

In the gaming machine A1, a rotary drive means for rotationally driving the rotary member is provided, and the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. A gaming machine A2, which has a configuration that is more easily tolerated, and in which the rotation driving means is disposed on the one side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. Since the rotation driving means is disposed on the one-side guided member whose relative displacement is likely to be allowed, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction can be transferred to the one-side member or the other-side member. When the pressing force (braking force) is applied, the pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia of the rotary drive means. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

Note that examples of forms in which relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. It is illustrated.

In the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, and the gaming machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, since the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, the one side member is provided. On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced along a trajectory farther from the other-side displaced member. Accordingly, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, it is easier to use the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means. Then, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a pair of the slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement, and when the slide members are slid and displaced in a direction in which they are close to each other, one of the slide members is one of the slide members. The side guided member is arranged to face the other guided member of the other slide member, and the other guided member of the one slide member is arranged to face the one guided member of the other slide member. Characteristic game machine A4.

Here, when a pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of slide displacement and are slidably displaced toward each other in a direction in which they are close to each other, when they are arranged to face each other at the central position, the two slide members are at the central position without a gap. When they come into contact with each other, the load of the drive means (motor) for slidingly displacing these slide members increases, and the drive means and the drive force transmission mechanism (gear etc.) are damaged.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, or a control tolerance so that there is a margin at a position where both are stopped (a sufficient gap is set between the two at the central position). Then, the back side is visually recognized by the player through the gap, which deteriorates the appearance (effect).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, since the pair of slide members are arranged face to face in alternate directions, they are slid in the directions in which they approach each other and are displaced centrally. When the slide members are brought into contact with each other at the position, one guided member on one side of the one slide member and the other slide member on the other slide member retract to receive the guided member on the other side of the other slide member (the other and the one slide member). (The pair of slide members can be placed in a posture inclined with respect to the direction of the slide displacement based on the difference in the relative displacement allowable state described above). That is, even if the pair of slide members come into contact with each other at the central position, damage to the drive means and the drive force transmission mechanism can be suppressed, so that the positions at which they are stopped can be set closer to each other. As a result, at the central position, the pair of slide members can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between them, and the appearance (effect) can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member on which the one side member and the other side member are arranged, a sensor device arranged on the base member, and a detected member detected by the sensor device. A gaming machine A5, characterized in that the detected member is disposed on the other-side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member is less allowed than the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member. Since the member to be detected is arranged, even if the posture of the slide member changes, the position shift of the member to be detected with respect to the base member (sensor device) can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the position of the slide member with respect to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide mechanism 2500 in which the one-side guided members 521 are arranged opposite to each other>
A gaming machine comprising a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, wherein an inertial force caused by displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine B1 is provided with a suppressing unit that suppresses the base member from rotating with respect to the base.

Here, a game machine including a member that is displaceably formed is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

In this case, for example, in a structure in which such a configuration (displacement member) is disposed on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing of the present application), the displacement member starts or displaces There is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base due to the inertial force caused by the stop of the. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the suppression means for suppressing the base member from rotating with respect to the base due to the inertial force associated with the displacement of the displacement member is provided, so that the displacement member starts or stops rotating. It is possible to prevent the base member from rotating with respect to the base when the inertial force associated with the base member acts on the base member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide and displace the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

The mode of displacement is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rotational displacement, swing displacement, slide displacement, and displacement in a combination thereof. The locus of slide displacement may be a straight line, a curved line, or a combination of these. Further, the direction of displacement may be indefinite. For example, the displacement member may be elastically supported by the base member via an elastic body, and the displacement member may be displaced by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is slid and displaced by one side member, the other side member facing the one side member, and the one side member and the other side member being guided to the one side and the other side, respectively. A slide member, the slide member is guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion, A rotating member rotatably supported between the other-side guided portions, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. Unlike the relative displacement allowable state of the guide member, the pair of slide members includes one slide member on one side and the other guide member on one side, and the other slide member on one side guided member and the other slide member. A gaming machine B2, wherein the side guided member is arranged in a posture facing each other.

Here, the one side member, the other side member that is arranged to face the one side member, and the slide member that is slidably displaced by the one side and the other side being guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A game machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application discloses that the slide member includes one side guided member guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A rotation member rotatably supported between the one side member and the relative displacement state of the one side guided member relative to the one side member different from the relative displacement state of the other side guided member relative to the other side member. The proposed configuration was devised (not known at the time of filing this application). According to this configuration, when the inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction can be used as the force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and as a result, the slide member is moved by the one-side member. And, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement with respect to the other side member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

In this case, the applicant of the present application has devised a configuration in which the one side member and the other side member described above are disposed on a base member and the base member is rotatably supported by a base (not known at the time of application of the present application). According to such a configuration, the direction of slide displacement of the slide member and the direction of the rotation axis of the rotary member can be changed according to the rotational position of the base member, so that variations in the production operation can be increased accordingly. ..

However, in such a configuration, when the slide members having the same configuration are arranged to face each other, when one of the slide members receives an inertial force caused by the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member, The displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the member and the displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the other slide member are in alternate directions (directions that are point-symmetrical and give rotational inertia to the base member). Therefore, there is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base. That is, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, a pair of slide members are provided between the one side guided member and the other side guided member of the one slide member and the other slide member. Since the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are arranged so as to face each other, when the inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member acts on the slide member, The displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member and the displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the other slide member can have the same direction (line-symmetrical direction), and the base member is the base. It is possible to suppress the rotation with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide and displace the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

As a configuration for forming relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is equivalent to the gap. A form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, or the like) is interposed between the both, and relative displacement is possible as the elastic body deforms elastically. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

In addition, as a form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or a combination of these is used. An example is the case where

In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. When slidingly displacing in the direction, the rotation of the base member with respect to the base is such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned substantially vertically above the other side guided member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a position is set.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. When slidingly displacing the slide member in a substantially horizontal direction, the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned substantially vertically above the other side guided member, so that the slide member forms a posture in which the base member is positioned relative to the base. Since the rotational position is set, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member acts on the slide member, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction The displacement component that exerts a force (braking force) that is pressed against the member or the other-side member can be downward in the vertical direction (gravitational direction). As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be prevented from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized.

Note that examples of forms in which relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. It is illustrated.

In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. When slidingly displacing the base member with respect to the base member, the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is positioned below the other-side guided member in a substantially vertical direction. A game machine B4 in which a rotational position is set.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. When the slide member is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base is arranged so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one guided member is positioned substantially vertically below the other guided member. Since the rotational position of the slide member is set, when an inertial force associated with the start of the slide displacement of the slide member or the stop of the slide displacement is applied to the slide member, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction (slide member The displacement component that exerts a force (braking force) that presses the one side member or the other side member can be set vertically upward (direction opposite to the gravity direction). Thereby, when the slide member is slid and displaced, the resistance due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the driving force necessary for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress wear of the sliding portion due to the slide displacement.

Note that examples of forms in which relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. It is illustrated.

The gaming machine B3 is provided with a rotation driving means for driving the rotating member to rotate, and the rotation driving means is arranged on the one side guided member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the rotation driving means is disposed on the one side guided member in a form in which relative displacement is more easily permitted as compared with the other side guided member, so that the slide is performed. When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction is the force (braking force) that presses the slide member against one side member or the other side member, the pressing force is increased by using the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means. can do. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is possible to easily prevent the slide member from floating, and it is possible to stabilize the rotation.

In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B6 is provided, which is provided with a rotation driving means for driving the rotation member to rotate, and the rotation driving means is disposed on the other-side guided member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction can be made vertically upward (the direction opposite to the gravity direction). Since the rotation driving means is arranged on the other guided member whose relative displacement is less likely to be permitted than the guide member, the rotation driving means is provided in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction due to the rotation inertia of the rotation driving means. The displacement component of can be prevented from becoming too large. As a result, when the rotary member is rotated, it is possible to suppress the slide displacement of the slide member, and when the slide member is slide displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed, and It is possible to suppress wear of the sliding portion due to displacement.

In the gaming machine B5, the rotation drive means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, and the gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, so that the one side member is provided. On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced along a trajectory farther from the other-side displaced member. Accordingly, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, it is easier to use the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means. Then, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is possible to easily prevent the slide member from floating, and it is possible to stabilize the rotation.

In the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the other-side guided member opposite to the other-side member.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the other side guided member opposite to the other side member, so that the one side member and the other side When the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are relatively displaced with respect to the member, the rotation driving means can be positioned at a portion where the relative displacement amount is smaller. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of the rotary drive unit. As a result, when the rotary member is rotated, it is possible to suppress the slide displacement of the slide member, and when the slide member is slide displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed, and It is possible to suppress wear of the sliding portion due to displacement.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide member 4520 in which the position of the rotating shaft 4523c is eccentric as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a slide member formed to be slidably displaceable between a first position and a second position, the slide member arranged at the first position is arranged to face the opposite side from the second position. A facing member and a rendering means for rendering between the facing member and the sliding member facing each other, and the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotary shaft eccentrically located along the slide displacement direction. A gaming machine C1 characterized by the above.

Here, a gaming machine including a slide member that is slidably formed between the first position and the second position is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application is provided with a facing member that is arranged to face the slide member that is arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position, and a rendering means that performs a rendering between the facing member and the slide member. A game machine was devised (not known at the time of filing of this application). However, in the above-described configuration, if the gap between the facing members of the slide member and the facing member arranged at the first position is narrow, the effect cannot be sufficiently performed by the effecting means (for example, the movement of the member for effecting is movable). Space cannot be secured, or area for visualizing members for production cannot be secured). On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member is projected to the second position side, and thus the slide member is positioned on the locus of slide displacement. This reduces the visible area of the member (for example, liquid crystal display device). When the facing member is displaced to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member becomes large, and the size of the entire apparatus increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotation shaft that is eccentrically located along the slide displacement direction. Therefore, depending on the rotation position, the slide member faces the facing member. The interval can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to the rotation position where the facing distance between the facing member and the facing member becomes large, the effect by the rendering means can be sufficiently performed, while the slide member moves to the rotating position where the facing distance between the facing member and the facing member becomes small. By rotating, the amount of protrusion of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and the visible region of other members can be secured accordingly. Moreover, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the device can be reduced.

As the effect means, for example, a displaceable member is displaced by utilizing the space between the facing member and the sliding member, and the facing member is a space between the facing member and the sliding member. Examples include those which are displaced by utilizing, those which visually recognize the display and decoration on the back side from between the facing members and the sliding members, those which irradiate light between the facing members and the sliding members, and a combination thereof. It

In the gaming machine C1, the rendering means includes an illuminating means for radiating light toward a space between the facing member and the sliding member facing each other.

Here, for example, in the configuration in which the facing member irradiates the light toward the facing portion with the slide member, the effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the light reflected by the sliding member from the facing portion between the slide member and the facing member. It can be carried out.

In this case, in the above-described configuration, if the gap between the facings of the slide member and the facing member arranged at the first position is narrow, the light reflected by the slide member cannot be sufficiently viewed by the player. On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member is projected to the second position side, and thus the slide member is positioned on the locus of slide displacement. This reduces the visible area of the member (for example, liquid crystal display device). When the facing member is displaced to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member becomes large, and the size of the entire apparatus increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotating shaft eccentrically located along the direction of slide displacement, so that the sliding position is maintained. Accordingly, the distance between the facing member and the facing member can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the facing distance between the facing member and the facing member becomes large, the player can sufficiently see the light emitted from the radiating means, while the sliding member faces the facing member. By rotating the slide member to the rotation position where the distance becomes smaller, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position side can be reduced, and the visible area of other members can be secured accordingly. Moreover, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the device can be reduced.

The irradiating means may be disposed at a position where the sliding member can be irradiated to the facing member, a position where the sliding member is capable of irradiating the facing member, and a position where the sliding member and the facing member face each other. Illustrative examples include a mode in which they are irradiatingly arranged on the back side between the opposing surfaces, and a mode in which these are combined.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 is provided with a base and a base member that is rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member is disposed on the base member.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for rotation of the base member with respect to the base while maintaining the slide member at the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C3, the pair of slide members are arranged so as to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the pair of slide members are arranged face to face along the direction of slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members can be arranged symmetrically. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be brought close to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base. Accordingly, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be easily made effective.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, the slide member is rotated to change the position of the center of gravity to the base. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member with respect to.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in the direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, rotation of the slide member causes Since the position of the center of gravity is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base due to the change in the position of the center of gravity. As a result, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is in a direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is changed by the rotation of the slide member. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that it is brought close to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is the rotation in the direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, the sliding member The rotation brings the position of the center of gravity close to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, so that the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base due to the change in the position of the center of gravity. As a result, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention with an example of the overhanging wall portion 5640 in which the opening portion 5641 is formed>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes, the passage member has an opening formed on its side surface, and the object is a part thereof. The game machine D1 is formed so as to be able to pass through in a state of being projected to the outside from the opening.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a passage member which surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to such a passage member, for example, a game ball passing through the game area can be introduced from one end side and passed on the back side of the game area, and then discharged from the other end side to the game area. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a problem that the movable range of the effect member disposed displaceably on the back side of the game area is limited by the amount of the passage member protruding.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member has an opening formed on the side surface thereof, and the object is formed so that the object can pass therethrough with a part of the object protruding from the opening to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the passage member as compared with the case where the entire object is surrounded on the inner peripheral side. Therefore, the space for disposing the other member and the movable range of the other member can be secured accordingly.

The sectional shape of the passage member is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a circular section, an elliptical section, a polygonal section, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine D1, a pair of the openings are arranged to face each other in the passage member, and the gaming machine D2 is provided.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the passage member has a pair of openings arranged to face each other. Therefore, it is necessary to narrow the facing distance between the side surfaces on which the pair of openings is formed. Therefore, the space for disposing other members and the movable range of the other members can be efficiently secured by that amount.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side at the peripheral edge of the opening portion, the gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side at the peripheral edge of the opening portion. The amount of protrusion of the portion from the opening to the outside is increased to suppress the overhanging of the passage member, while ensuring the thickness dimension of the passage member at the peripheral portion of the opening to improve the rigidity of the passage member. be able to.

In the gaming machine D3, the passage member is set such that a distance between base ends of the inclined surfaces in a direction orthogonal to a passing direction of the object is set to be at least smaller than a diameter of the object. Gaming machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the passage member is such that the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is smaller than at least the diameter of the object. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the object from being received only by the tip (inner peripheral side end) of the inclined surface when the object partially projects from the opening to the outside. That is, since the sphere can be received by the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, it is possible to suppress damage to the passage member (the peripheral edge of the opening).

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular cross section from four side wall portions, and the opening is formed in at least one of the four side wall portions. A gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular cross section from the four-sided wall portion, and is formed on at least one of the four-sided wall portions. Since the opening is formed, it is possible to secure the section modulus of the passage member and improve the rigidity thereof.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed into a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and the circular cross section is a line segment connecting two points on the curve. The opening is formed by cutting with the gaming machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and on the curved line in the circular cross-section. Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, it is possible to minimize the overhang of the passage member. As a result, the space for disposing other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the passage member has a passage path of the object curved or bent, and the opening has a direction of a centrifugal force acting on the object due to the passage path curving or bending. A gaming machine D7, which is formed on a side surface of the passage member opposite to the side.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the passage in which the formation position of the opening is on the opposite side of the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object due to the curving or bending of the passage path. Since the opening is formed on the side surface of the opening, that is, on the side surface opposite to the side surface on which the object is pressed by the centrifugal force, it is possible to prevent the peripheral edge of the opening from being worn or damaged.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable is provided, and the displacement member has a range including at least a displacement trajectory of a part of the object that protrudes from the opening of the passage member. A gaming machine D8, which is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine D8, any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a displacement member that is displaceable, and the displacement member shows a displacement locus of a part of the object projected from the opening of the passage member. Since it is formed so as to be displaceable to at least the range including it, the displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded by effectively utilizing the region in which the overhang of the passage member is reduced. This can enhance the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

The displacement member may be formed such that a part thereof can be displaced from the opening of the passage member to a position where the passage member is inserted into the passage member. In this case, the displacement area of the displacement member can be maximized, and the effect of displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, it is possible to displace the displacement member further forward, and it is possible to give a force by bringing the displacement member closer to the player.

In the gaming machine D8, a detection means for detecting the presence or absence of an object in at least the area of the passage member where the opening is formed is provided, and when the object is detected by the detection means, the displacement member is A gaming machine D9, which is restricted from being displaced to a range including at least the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D8, when the object is detected by the detecting means in the region where at least the opening of the passage member is formed, at least the displacement locus (passage member Since it is restricted to be displaced to a range including at least a displacement locus of a part of the object projected from the opening, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

In the gaming machine D9, the detection means includes a first switch and a second switch which are respectively arranged upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and which detect passage of the object at the respective arrangement positions. A gaming machine D10 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D9, the detection means is arranged upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member, and detects the passage of the object at each of the arrangement positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, it is possible to reliably detect the presence or absence of the object in the region of the passage member where at least the opening is formed. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

<Feature E group> (Directed with over-winning game balls)
Based on the establishment of a specific condition and a variable member that can be changed between one state in which the game ball can enter and one state that restricts the entry of the game ball in the game ball and the second state in which the restriction is released. Then, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the ball enters the ball entering means. Based on that the count means for counting the number of game balls played and the count value by the count means have reached a predetermined upper limit value, the variable member is changed from the second state to the first state. Means and the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means before being changed to the second state by the means and the effect changing means, and the effect executed by the effect executing means is determined. The game machine E1 is characterized in that the game machine E1 is configured to determine the special effect mode when the special condition is satisfied. ..

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed on the basis of a start ball, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state. In such a gaming machine, the large opening provided on the board is set to the open state when the hit state is achieved. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, and the winning state is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a winning of a prescribed number or more of game balls is detected in the open state of 1 with respect to the large opening. By doing so, there are things that aim to improve the interest of the player.

However, in such a conventional game machine, even if the over-winning performance is executed, the player only recognizes that he or she has won a slightly larger number of award balls than usual, so that the player's interest can be sufficiently enhanced. In some cases it could not be improved.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, it is possible to change the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, the 1 state in which the entering of the game ball into the ball entering means is restricted, and the second state in which the restriction is released. Variable member, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. In this case, based on the fact that the counting means for counting the number of game balls entering the entering means and the count value by the counting means have reached a predetermined upper limit value, the variable member is Changing means for changing from the second state to the first state, and an effect that is executed based on that a game ball enters the entering means before being changed to the second state by the changing means It has an executing means and an effect determining means for determining an effect executed by the effect executing means, and the effect determining means can determine a special effect mode when a special condition is satisfied. Is configured.

As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

Based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition in the gaming machine E1, an acquisition unit for acquiring the information, a storage unit for storing the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit for storing the information based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The special condition is stored in the storage unit by the discriminating unit, and the discriminating unit discriminating information and the specific condition satisfying unit that satisfies the specific condition when the discriminating result by the discriminating unit is a specific discriminating result. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at least one condition is that the information determined to be a specific determination result is stored.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2. That is, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit that stores the information based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. And a specific condition satisfying unit that establishes the specific condition when the determination result by the determining unit is a specific determination result, and the special condition is stored in the storage unit. It is set as at least one condition that the information discriminated as a specific discrimination result by the means is stored.

As a result, when the special effect mode effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the information that is the specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, since it is possible to perform the game in the expectation that the special effect mode effect will be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game while the privilege game is being executed.

In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is satisfied with a predetermined probability when the storage unit stores the information determined to be a specific determination result by the determination unit. Machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the special condition is a predetermined probability when the storage unit stores the information determined to be a specific determination result by the determination unit. Therefore, even if the special effect mode is not performed in the privilege game, there is a possibility that the information that is the specific determination result is stored in the storage unit. Therefore, even when the special effect mode effect is not executed, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the expectation that the information that will be the specific determination result is stored, so that the player's game There is an effect that motivation can be maintained.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes an effect by using the game balls counted by the counting means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes the effect by using the game balls counted by the counting means. The number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where a configuration for executing an effect is provided separately from the game ball.

In the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode includes a mode in which the game ball after being counted by the counting means is guided to a specific region that is visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode guides the game ball after being counted by the counting means to a specific area which is configured to be visible to the player. Since it includes the above, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine E6 having a sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the gaming machine E6 has a sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. It is possible to achieve a realistic effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

A gaming machine E7 having a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E6.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the gaming machine E7 has a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a visual effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, an end effect execution means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means and a mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. A game machine E8, characterized in that the game machine E8 has an end effect mode determining means for determining.

The gaming machine E8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E7. That is, an end effect execution unit that executes an end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution unit, and an end effect mode determination that determines the mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution unit. Since the means is provided, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the end of the privilege game.

<Characteristic F group> (Form a character by sub liquid crystal inversion)
A performance executing unit that executes a performance based on the determination information, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the performances executed by the performance executing unit, and the performance on the back side of the first display area. As one of the above, the display mode is displayed as one of the effects performed by the first display means having a first specific notification section for notifying the player of the specific notification mode and the effect execution means. Second display means having a second display area and a second specific notification section for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area, the first display area, and the second display area And at least the first state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification section and the second state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section, respectively. 1. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having one display means and a displacement means capable of displacing the second display means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable member that can be moved, and the like, and can perform various effect operations by the display effect and the movable effect. Some of the conventional game machines employ a technique for ensuring the visibility of the display effect even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during execution of the display effect. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-134091).

However, in such a conventional game machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device itself is variable. For this reason, if the display device itself is variably operated, it may not be possible to realize an appropriate effect operation using the display effect. That is, it may be difficult to increase the degree of freedom of production.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the discrimination information and the effect executed by the effect execution means. And a first display unit having a first specific notification unit for notifying the player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area, and the effect execution unit executes the effect. As one of the effects described above, a second display having a second display area in which a display mode is displayed and a second specific notification section for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area. Means, a first state in which the player can visually recognize the first display area and the second display area, respectively, and the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section to the player. It has at least the first display means and the displacement means capable of displacing the first display means and the second display means in the visible second state.

With this, it is possible to realize a plurality of effects in different modes by using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of production.

In the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, respectively. Characteristic game machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the notification mode notified by the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section are combined to combine the specific information. Since the notification mode is formed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is configured by a specific symbol, the first specific notification unit, a part of the specific symbol is displayed, in the second specific notification unit Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. A game machine F3, characterized in that the specific pattern is formed by combining them.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific notification mode is configured by a specific symbol, a part of the specific symbol is displayed in the first specific notification unit, the second specific notification unit in Of the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. By combining, the specific pattern is formed.

Thereby, the specific symbol can be dynamically displayed by using the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, so that there is an effect that the specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3 has a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the effect execution means has the effect in the third display area of the third display means. In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are in close proximity to each other in the third display area or at least partially overlap each other. A gaming machine F4, which is arranged at a position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F3, the following effect is produced. That is, the first display means and the second display means have different third display means, and the effect execution means has a predetermined display as one of the effects in the third display area of the third display means. A display mode is displayed, and in the first state, the first display area and the second display area are arranged close to and parallel to the third display area, or at least partially overlapped with each other. Therefore, there is an effect that a more flexible production can be realized.

When any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4 performs the specific effect by the effect executing means, the effect executing means is provided with the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that it is easy to execute the specific notification mode when executing the effect.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player is provided, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect. In addition, it is easy to execute the specific notification mode.

As a result, the game can be played in the expectation that the specific notification mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Based on the determination condition being satisfied in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the determination means for performing the determination and the effect determination means for determining the effect mode executed by the effect execution means based on the determination result of the determiner. And a gaming machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F5, the following effect is produced. That is, it has a discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and an effect determination means for determining the effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means based on the result of the judgment of the judgment means.

Thereby, there is an effect that various effect modes can be realized according to the determination result of the determination means.

<Characteristic G group> (Display by moving the pattern of the main liquid crystal while moving the sub liquid crystal)
First display means capable of displaying a symbol, second display means different from the first display means, and a display area of the second display means at least at a position where the display area of the first display means overlaps the second display means. A predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the display control means and the second display means for controlling the display of the first movable means capable of moving the first display means and the second display means, respectively. In the state, when the display area of the first display means is moved by the first movable means, the first area after the movement is performed with respect to the display area of the first display means exposed by the movement. Display mode setting means for setting, in the display control means, a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display means, Gaming machine G1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional type gaming machine, by using a main display device that displays a main effect related to the game and a sub display device that displays an auxiliary effect, the degree of freedom of the display effect is increased and the player's interest is improved. (For example, JP-A-2014-117576).

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effect.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the first display means capable of displaying a symbol, the second display means different from the first display means, and the display area of the second display means are the display areas of the first display means. First movable means capable of moving at least the second display means to a position overlapping with, display control means for controlling display of the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means. When a predetermined symbol is displayed in the overlapping position on the display area of the first display means when the first movable means moves the display area of the first display means, the display of the first display means exposed by the movement. A display mode setting that sets a movable display mode in the display control unit that can form one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the first display unit after the region is moved And means.

Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a display effect with a higher degree of freedom by using the first display means and the second display means.

In the gaming machine G1, third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and a display area of the third display means overlaps with the first display area, and the second display means and one end of each overlap. And a second movable unit capable of moving at least the third display unit to the same position, wherein the display control unit includes the second display unit and the third display unit. When it is moved to the same position, a specific display mode in which one symbol is displayed across each other's display area with the one end as a boundary is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Gaming machine G2.

The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is, the third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, the display area of the third display means overlaps with the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means is the same. A second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means to a position to be a position, and the display control means includes each of the second display means and the third display means. When moved to the same position, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across each display area with the one end as a boundary.

Thereby, one symbol can be displayed by using the second display means and the third display means, so that there is an effect that the display with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means displays the specific display mode by the display control means by the second display means and the third display means, and the second display means and the third display means. A gaming machine G3, characterized in that, when at least one of the display means is moved in a direction away from the display means, the specific movable display mode is set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means displays the specific display mode by the display control means by the second display means and the third display means. In the state, when at least one of the second display means and the third display means is movable in the direction in which they are separated from each other, the specific movable display mode is set. There is an effect that appropriate display contents can be displayed for each of the three display means.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is that the one symbol displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means, the second display means, the first display means and the A gaming machine G4, wherein the gaming machine G4 is set to be displayed by the third display means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the one symbol displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the first display means. Since the second display means, the first display means, and the third display means are set so as to be displayed respectively, the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means can be used more freely. There is an effect that display contents with high frequency can be realized.

<Characteristic H group> (Right-handed notification on rotating display device)
A ball-entering means into which the game ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball-incoming means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the discrimination execution means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means, the display means for displaying the discrimination information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means specific to the display means When the identification information based on the discrimination result is displayed, a variable ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the launch strength of the game ball based on the operation of the player in the game machine. And a first flow path through which a game ball launched at a first launch strength by the launching means can flow down, and a launching means capable of varying and launching, and the first launching strength are different. The game ball shot with the second launch strength flows down, the second flow path in which the variable ball entering means is arranged, and the identification information based on the specific determination result are displayed, and then the second flow. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a suggesting means for displaying on the display means a suggestive manner for suggesting that a game ball is to be launched onto a road.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable member that can be moved, and the like, and can perform various effect operations by the display effect and the movable effect. Some of the conventional game machines are capable of displaying a suggestion display image suggesting a direction in which a game ball is launched on a display device. This conventional gaming machine employs a technique for ensuring the visibility of the suggestion display image even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device while the suggestion display image is displayed (for example, JP-A-2015-134091).

However, in such a conventional game machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device can be changed. Therefore, when the orientation of the display device is changed, there is a possibility that the direction in which the game ball is launched cannot be properly notified.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, an acquiring means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and an acquiring means thereof. Based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means and the discriminating execution means for discriminating the information stored in the storing means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition. Having display means for displaying identification information, and variable ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter when the identification information based on the particular discrimination result is displayed on the display means According to the operation of the player, the launching means capable of varying the launching strength of the game ball and launching the game ball, and the game ball launched by the launching means at the first launching strength may flow down. A possible first flow path, a game ball that has been launched with a second launch strength different from the first launch strength, and a second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is arranged, After the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, there is a suggestion unit that causes the display unit to display a suggestion mode that suggests that the game ball should be launched into the second flow path.

This allows the player who has confirmed the suggestion mode to shoot the game ball with the second launch strength, so that even a beginner in the game can easily enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. You can make it a ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a game machine whose game method is easier to understand.

In the gaming machine H1, in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side, the suggesting aspect has a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of the rotating condition. A gaming machine H2, which has at least a part of a ring shape and includes a direction suggesting mode that indicates a direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, the display means has a turning means capable of turning the display means based on the establishment of a turning condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side. It includes a direction indicating mode having at least a part of the shape and indicating the direction of the second flow path.

Thereby, even if the display means is rotated, the direction of the second flow path can be accurately suggested by the direction suggesting mode having at least a part of the ring shape.

In the gaming machine H2, the direction suggesting mode is one in which the gaming ball is dynamically displayed by rotating in a direction of flying to the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the direction suggestion mode is dynamically displayed by rotating in the direction in which the gaming ball flies to the second flow path. On the other hand, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is fired can be notified more easily.

The gaming machine H4, wherein character information indicating that a gaming ball is launched into the second flow path in the gaming machine H2 or H3 is displayed as part of the direction suggesting mode.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, character information indicating that a gaming ball is launched into the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggesting mode. There is an effect that the player who visually recognizes the mode can more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is shot.

In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggesting mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggesting mode is displayed as a pattern indicating the direction of the second flow path, so that the pattern is presented to the player. From the impression, it is possible to intuitively understand the direction in which the game ball is to be fired.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there is a reversing means for reversing the back side of the display means so that the back side is located on the player side, and on the back side of the display means, a decoration portion indicating the direction of the second flow path. A gaming machine H6, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5. That is, since there is a reversing means for reversing the back side of the display means so as to be positioned on the player side, and on the back side of the display means, a decoration portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is arranged. Even if the display means is reversed by the reversing means, there is an effect that the player can correctly understand the direction in which the game ball is shot.

In the gaming machine H6, the ornamental portion has a light emitting means sequentially arranged in the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means is sequentially controlled to light in the direction of the second flow path. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6, the decoration portion has light emitting means arranged in order in the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means includes the second flow. Since the lighting is sequentially controlled in the direction of the road, there is an effect that the player can more easily understand the direction in which the game ball is shot.

<Characteristic I group> (The sub liquid crystal is used as the main liquid crystal.)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. In the case where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, it is specific to the effect execution means and the display means for causing the display means to display the effect mode associated with the identification information based on the determination result. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed based on the determination result, the display unit is a main display unit and a first display unit thereof. At least a first position parallel to the display area and a sub-display means movable at a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means, the sub-display means being the first position and the second position. When the movable means movable to the second position and the sub-display means movable to the first position, the identification information is displayed on the main display means, and the sub-display means displays the identification information. When at least a part of the effect mode is switched to the first state and set, the sub-display means is moved to the second position, and the specific condition is satisfied, the identification is displayed on the sub-display means. A gaming machine I1 having a switching means capable of switching and setting a second state in which information is displayed.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional type gaming machine, by using a main display device that displays a main effect related to the game and a sub display device that displays an auxiliary effect, the degree of freedom of the display effect is increased and the player's interest is improved. I am trying to Further, among such conventional gaming machines, there is one in which the sub display device can be moved to the front side of the main display device and a composite display effect can be executed by the main display device and the sub display device (for example, , JP-A-2015-029606).

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effect.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, the discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination on the display means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and in the case where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, display of an effect mode accompanying the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. And an effect giving means for giving effect, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means based on the specific determination result. The means is at least a main display means, a first position parallel to the display area of the main display means, and a sub-display means movable at least at a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means. A movable means configured to move the sub display means to the first position and the second position; and the main display when the sub display means is moved to the first position. The identification information is displayed on the means, the sub display means is switched to the first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed, the sub display means is moved to the second position, and the specific condition is set. When it is established, the sub-display means has a switching means capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed.

With this, the first state and the second state can be appropriately switched according to the position of the sub display unit, and thus there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine I1, the sub display means is composed of at least a first display means arranged on one end side of the main display means and a second display means arranged on the other end side of the main display means. The game machine I2, wherein the first display means and the second display means are at positions facing each other with the main display means in between at a position 1.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sub-display means is composed of at least a first display means arranged on one end side of the main display means and a second display means arranged on the other end side of the main display means. At the position, the first display means and the second display means are at positions facing each other with the main display means in between.

Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means at the first position.

In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are in contact with each other at one end side so that the display area of the main display means is covered in a visually difficult manner. A game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are brought into contact with each other at one end side, thereby displaying the main display means. Since the area is covered so as to be difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to realize a compact display using only the sub display means at the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to the display content.

A gaming machine I4, characterized in that the gaming machine I2 or I3 has a turning means for turning the first display means and the second display means respectively around the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the gaming machine I4 has a rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means around the main display means. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a display effect with a higher degree of freedom using the display means.

In the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means, so that the first display means and the second display means are arranged in the vertical direction of the main display means. An amusement machine I5, characterized in that it is variable between a vertical position and a horizontal position where the first display means and the second display means are positioned in the left-right direction of the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means, thereby vertically moving the main display means. The vertical position where the first display means and the second display means are located and the horizontal position where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means are made variable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a display effect with a higher degree of freedom using the sub display means.

In the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position, the sub display means and the main display means are used. A first combined display mode in which the sub-displays are combined and displayed, and when the first display unit and the second display unit are moved from the left-right position to the second position, the sub-display is moved when the first display unit and the second display unit are moved to the left-right position. A game machine I6 having a fusion display mode setting unit for switching and setting a second fusion display mode which is displayed by fusion with the display unit and the main display unit.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I5, in the case where the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position. A first merged display mode in which the sub display means and the main display means are fused together, and the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right position to the second position. Since it has a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting the second fusion display mode which is fused and displayed by the sub display means and the main display means when it is moved to the left and right position later, There is an effect that an appropriate display effect can be realized depending on whether there is a right or left position.

<Characteristic J group> (Display mode of inverted sub liquid crystal is displayed by mirror)
In the case where the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the determination result by the determiner, and the effect mode based on the specific determination result are displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having a privilege giving unit for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player, the display unit includes at least a first display unit and a second display unit, and the first display unit and the first display unit. The rotating means capable of rotating the two display means to the front position in which the display area faces the front side and the second position in which the display area faces the rear side and the first display means are rotated to the back position. In this case, when the first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the first projection means is displayed on the second display means. A second projecting means for projecting the effect mode on the front side, and a gaming machine J1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a projection device such as a mirror in the configuration. In such a conventional type gaming machine, when a predetermined entertaining entertainment is selected, it is possible to realize an entertaining entertaining entertainment by making the projection device visible and projecting the player's face or the like on the projection device. (For example, JP-A-2005-329159).

However, in such a conventional game machine, the projection device is merely set in a state in which it can be visually recognized by the player, and thus the target projected on the projection device is limited. Therefore, it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player by using the projection device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and the display means are specified. And a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the effect mode based on the discrimination result is displayed. The display means is the first display means and the second display means. And a rotation means capable of rotating the first display means and the second display means respectively to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side. A first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the back position, and the second display means for the back position. And a second projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the front side when rotated.

Thereby, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the effect mode displayed on each. That is, it is possible to realize a novel production operation in which the first display means and the second display means can be rotated while the production mode is still visible, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the gaming machine J1, the first projecting means and the second projecting means each have a mirror surface portion capable of displaying the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the first projecting means and the second projecting means reflect the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Since it has a mirror surface portion capable of performing, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, it is possible for the player to clearly see through the mirror surface portion the effect mode displayed on each. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine J2, the rotating means is configured to rotate the first display means and the second display means, respectively, as the rear surface position to a V-shaped position on the front side of the gaming machine. Amusement machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the rotating means has the V-shape on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the back surface of the first display means and the second display means. Since it is rotated to the position, the appearance at the back position can be greatly different from that at the front position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are the first projection means and the second projection means when the first display means and the second display means are respectively rotated to the back position. A game machine J4 having a projection surface capable of facing the display area of the display means or the display area of the second display means.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means have the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since it has a projection surface that can face the display area of the first display means or the display area of the second display means when rotated to the back position, the display area of the first display means and the second display Since the effect mode displayed in the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projection means and the second projection means can be made compact.

The gaming machine J1 is arranged at a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the first display means is diffracted to the first projection means. It is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the first display means and the second display means rotated to the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the second display means is diffracted to the second projection means. A second diffracting means for causing the gaming machine J5.

The gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1. That is, the first diffractive means is disposed at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the back position, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means. And a second diffractive means which is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the back position and which diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means. And.

Thereby, the arrangement of the first projecting means and the second projecting means can be freely determined within a range diffractable by the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be increased.

In the gaming machine J5, the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means are half mirrors. A gaming machine J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J5, the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means are constituted by half mirrors, so the display area of the first display means and the second Whether or not to diffract the effect mode displayed in the display area of the display means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of production.

In the gaming machine J5 or J6, the first diffractive means and the second diffractive means, respectively, when at least one of the first display means and the second display means is rotated to the back position, the first A gaming machine J7 having display means or movable means for moving the display means to a position facing the second display means.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J5 or J6, at least one of the first display means and the second display means is provided with the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means, respectively. When it is rotated to the back position, it has a movable means for moving the first display means or the second display means so as to face the first display means or the second display means. Therefore, the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means Is more accurately diffracted.

<Characteristic K group> (Over winning with closing command)
Main control means for executing the control of the game, sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, the open state in which the game ball can enter and the entry of the game ball are restricted. A variable ball entrance means that can be changed to a regulated state, the main control means performs a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and a performance based on the determination result by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the effect information determining means for determining effect information and the determining means being a specific determination result, the variable ball entering means is changed from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a succession signal output means for outputting a succession signal based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and a ball entry signal based on a game ball entering the variable ball entry means The sub-control means has the admission signal output means for effecting and the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable entrance means. Based on the performance information determined by the means, a performance mode determining means for determining a performance mode, a performance executing means for executing the performance mode determined by the performance mode determining means, and a predetermined signal after receiving the establishment signal. A game machine K1 comprising: a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the incoming signal is received during a period until the condition is satisfied.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed on the basis of a start ball, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state. In such a gaming machine, the large opening provided on the board is set to the open state when the hit state is achieved. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, and the winning state is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a winning of a prescribed number or more of game balls is detected in the open state of 1 with respect to the large opening. By doing so, there is one that aims to improve the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-112239).

In such a conventional game machine, it is necessary to count the number of game balls that have won the large opening in order to determine whether or not the over-winning effect is to be executed. It was common that the number of balls entered before the mouth was closed was different. Therefore, since it is necessary to reset the condition for executing the over-winning effect depending on the model, it may not be possible to transfer the program adopted for one model to another game machine as it is. It was That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, main control means for executing the control of the game, sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and opening for allowing the game ball to enter. The main control means has a variable ball entering means that is changeable between a state and a restricted state in which the entering of a game ball is restricted, and the main control means executes a judgment based on the establishment of a determination condition, and its determining means. Based on the effect information determination means for determining effect information for executing effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is varied from a regulated state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, a success signal output means for outputting a success signal based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the variable ball entering means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered, a ball signal output means for outputting a ball signal, and based on the game ball entering the variable ball means, the player is provided with an advantageous privilege. And a privilege giving means, and the sub-control means determines a performance mode determining means for determining a performance mode based on the performance information determined by the performance information determining means, and the performance mode determining means. And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the ball input signal is received within a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the establishment signal is received, With.

With this, the sub control unit can determine whether to execute the specific effect depending on whether or not the establishment signal is received from the main control unit, and thus the sub control unit directly determines whether or not the predetermined condition is established. There is no need to determine. Therefore, it is possible to easily divert the control program set in the secondary control unit, and thus it is possible to reduce the workload of the developer.

In the game machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means or when a predetermined time period has elapsed. ..

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means or when a predetermined time period elapses. Since the specific effect is executed, the variable number of game balls is further changed to the player after the predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means or after a predetermined time elapses. It is possible to make the means recognize that the game ball has entered. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who confirms the specific effect can be pleased.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the subordinate control means receives the establishment signal output by the establishment signal output means based on the passage of a predetermined period as the predetermined condition, the specific effect. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is provided with an avoiding means for avoiding the execution of.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means outputs the success signal output means based on the passage of a predetermined period as the predetermined condition. Since the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the specific effect when the establishment signal is received is provided, the execution of the specific effect causes the player to play a certain number of game balls that exceeds a predetermined number. Can notify that the player has entered the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who confirms the specific effect can be more pleased.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the main control means obtains information discriminated by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the discrimination condition is satisfied by the information obtained by the acquisition means. Until at least the storage means for storing and the pre-discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination condition is satisfied and a pre-signal indicating pre-discrimination information based on the pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means. And a preliminary signal output means for outputting to the slave control means, the slave control means has a preliminary information storage means for storing the preliminary information indicated by the preliminary signal, and the specific effect mode is The gaming machine K4, which shows the contents of the advance information stored in the advance information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following advantages are exhibited. That is, the main control means stores the information that is discriminated by the discrimination means on the basis of the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and stores at least the information obtained by the acquisition means until the discrimination condition is satisfied. A storage unit, a pre-discrimination unit that discriminates the information stored in the storage unit before the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a pre-signal indicating the pre-discrimination information based on the pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination unit. Advance signal output means for outputting to the control means, the sub-control means has advance information storage means for storing the advance information indicated by the advance signal, the specific effect mode, The contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means are shown.

As a result, in order to confirm the contents of the advance information, the player tries to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means after the predetermined condition is satisfied, and actively plays the game ball to the player during execution of the privilege game. Can be launched. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

<About the concept of the invention with the liquid crystal display device 523 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with an electric device, a substrate having a ground portion that is arranged to face one surface side of the electric device and is grounded, and a connecting unit that electrically connects the electric device to the ground portion of the substrate. In the above, the connection means is sandwiched between the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, and the relative position when the electric device or the substrate is relatively displaced in a direction orthogonal to the facing direction. A gaming machine L1 characterized by being formed so as to be sheared and deformable with displacement.

Here, an electric device, a substrate having a ground portion that is arranged to face one surface side of the electric device and is grounded, and a connecting unit that electrically connects the electric device to the ground portion of the substrate are provided. A game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-236463). Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal panel. Further, the connecting means is formed as an arcuate leaf spring, the base end of which abuts (electrically connects) with the ground portion of the substrate, and the arcuate convex surface abuts (electrically connects) the shield member. It The connecting means has a base end fixed to the substrate and an arcuate convex surface pressed against the shield member, and is kept in contact by elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thereby, the static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground through the ground portion of the substrate. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged by static electricity generated due to rolling of a game ball or displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the charge is removed through the ground portion of the substrate to cause color unevenness or dot defects in the liquid crystal display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

However, in the above-described conventional technique, the electric device is displaced, or the electric device is vibrated due to the displacement of another effect member or the input of the external force caused by the rolling/collision of the game ball, thereby shielding the shield. When the member and the substrate are relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connecting means is slid with respect to the shield member, and the connecting means or the contact target of the connecting means is worn. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the connection means is sandwiched between the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the board, and the electric device or the board is relatively displaced in a direction orthogonal to the facing direction. When it is subjected to the relative displacement, it is formed so that it can be sheared and deformed, so that the one side and the other side of the connecting means can be maintained in contact with the one side of the electric device and the ground part of the board, respectively. .. That is, the shearing deformation of the connecting means can prevent the one side or the other side of the connecting means from sliding on the electric device or the substrate. As a result, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the connecting means or the contact target (electrical device or substrate) of the connecting means.

Further, since the connecting means is sandwiched between the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the board, at the time of assembly, it suffices to sandwich the connecting means between the electric machine and the board, and work such as fastening. Can be unnecessary. As a result, it is possible to improve workability and reduce product cost.

In the gaming machine L1, the connection means includes an elastic member, one side of which faces one side of the electric device and the other side of which faces the ground portion of the board, and an elastic member formed of an elastic material. A gaming machine L2, further comprising: a conductive member which is at least covered on the other side, is in contact with the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, and is formed of a conductive material.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, one side of the electric device faces one side and the other side faces the ground portion of the board, and the other side of the elastic member is formed of an elastic material. Since at least one side and the other side are provided so as to be in contact with the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate and a conductive member formed of a conductive material, the electric device or the substrate is orthogonal to the facing direction. When the elastic member is sheared due to the relative displacement, the conductive member is brought into contact with the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the board. Can be maintained. That is, when the elastic member undergoes shear deformation, it is possible to prevent the conductive member sandwiched between one side and the other side of the elastic member and the electric device or the substrate from sliding. As a result, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the connecting means (conductive member) or the contact target (electrical device or substrate) of the connecting means.

In the gaming machine L2, in the connecting means, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape, the elastic member is fitted into the conductive member, and the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member is on one side of the electric device and the substrate. A gaming machine L3, which is brought into contact with the ground portion of the gaming machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape in the connecting means, and the elastic member is internally fitted to the conductive member, so that the assembling of the connecting means is simplified. The cost of parts can be reduced.

Moreover, since the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member is in contact with the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, the contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the electric device is charged, the electric charge can be easily removed via the ground portion of the substrate.

In the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end in a strip shape, and a connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end in the strip shape is one surface side of the electric device or the substrate. A gaming machine L4, which is disposed at a position where it is not in contact with the ground portion of the gaming machine L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of the band shape, and the connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end of the band shape is provided. Since it is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the one side of the electric device or the ground part of the board, the connecting portion becomes a step, and the contact state with the one side of the electric device or the ground part of the board is not It can suppress becoming stable. That is, the contact area can be secured, and the conductive member can be suppressed from sliding with respect to the electric device or the substrate, and the charge can be easily removed.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member includes a first portion abutting on one surface side of the electric device, a second portion abutting on a ground portion of the board, and the first and second portions. A pair of third portions connecting between the portions, wherein the width dimension of the third portion is set to be smaller than the width dimension of the first portion and the second portion at least partially. Gaming machine L5.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member has a first portion that is in contact with one surface side of the electric device and a second portion that is in contact with the ground portion of the board. , A pair of third portions connecting the first portion and the second portion, and the width dimension of the third portion is smaller than the width dimension of the first portion and the second portion at least in part. Since it is set, the conductive member can be easily deformed in the endless belt-shaped opening direction by using the third portion. Therefore, when the electric device or the board is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction and in the opening direction of the endless belt of the conductive member, the first portion and the second portion of the conductive member are It is possible to suppress sliding on the one surface side and the ground portion of the substrate.

In the gaming machine L5, the pair of third portions are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of an endless belt, and the gaming machine L6.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L5, since the pair of third portions are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of the endless belt, the conductive member is deformed in the opening direction of the endless belt. You can improve your sex.

The gaming machine L7 according to any one of the gaming machines L2 to L6, wherein the conductive member is formed of a conductive cloth or a conductive non-woven fabric.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L2 to L6, since the conductive member is formed of conductive cloth or conductive non-woven fabric, its flexibility can be secured. Therefore, when the elastic member undergoes shear deformation due to relative displacement of the electric device or the substrate in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the conductive member can easily follow the shear deformation of the elastic member. As a result, the conductive member can be suppressed from sliding on the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate.

Further, since the conductive member is formed of a conductive cloth or a conductive non-woven fabric, its flexibility can be ensured, which improves durability when the conductive member is repeatedly deformed due to relative displacement of an electric device or a substrate. Can be planned.

As the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, for example, a thread in which one or both of copper and nickel are coated on the outer surface of polyester fiber is woven or not woven to form a cloth (sheet) is exemplified. To be done. Examples of the weave method include plain weave and twill weave.

In the gaming machine L7, one or a plurality of protrusions are provided so as to project on one surface side of the electric device or on a ground portion of the board.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L7, one or a plurality of protrusions are provided on the one surface side of the electric device or on the ground portion of the substrate, so that the conductive member follows the shape of the protrusion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sliding of the conductive member with respect to the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate.

In the gaming machine L8, the protrusion is formed by solder soldered to the ground portion of the board, the gaming machine L9.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L8, the protrusion is formed by the solder soldered to the ground portion of the substrate, so the protrusion should be formed in the step of soldering the electronic component to the substrate. You can Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a step for forming the protrusion, and the step can be shared, so that the number of steps can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the solder is soldered to the ground portion to form the protrusions, so that the contact area between the conductive member and the ground portion can be secured by that amount, and when the electrical device is charged, the ground area of the board Can easily remove the charge.

In the gaming machine L9, the board is provided with a plurality of through holes, the plurality of protrusions are provided in a protruding manner, and the through holes and the protrusions are arranged in a staggered manner.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L9, the board is provided with a plurality of through holes, and a plurality of protrusions are provided so that the through holes and the protrusions are arranged in a staggered pattern. By using the plurality of protrusions, it is possible to suppress the conductive member from sliding on the substrate, it is easy for the electric device to remove the charged electric charge, and the through holes are used to form the protrusion and the conductive member. The heat generated during this can be efficiently released.

In the gaming machine L9, the other side of the elastic member faces a first region facing a region where the protrusion of the substrate projects and a second region facing a region where the protrusion of the substrate does not form. And a gaming machine L11 in which the second area is projected more than the first area.

According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L9, on the other side of the elastic member, the first region facing the region where the protrusion of the substrate is projected and the protrusion of the substrate are not formed. A second region facing the region, and the second region is projected more than the first region, so that the connection means is sandwiched between the electric device and the substrate, and the elastic member is compressed. The surface pressure in the second region can be increased. As a result, the conductive member sandwiched between the second region and the substrate can be less likely to ride over the protrusion, and accordingly, the conductive member can be suppressed from sliding on the substrate. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the first region can be lowered, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of shear deformation of the elastic member accordingly.

Any one of the gaming machines L2 to L11 includes a plate-shaped interposing member that is provided between the one surface side of the electric device and the substrate and has an opening formed therein, and the interposing member is A game machine L12, wherein the size of the opening is smaller than the size of the connecting means in the unloaded state.

According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L2 to L11, a plate-shaped interposing member that is provided between the one surface side of the electric device and the substrate and has an opening formed therein. Since the size of the opening of the interposing member is smaller than the size of the connecting unit in the unloaded state, the connecting unit can be held in the opening of the interposing member. Therefore, the assembling work can be performed while holding the connecting means on the interposing member, and the connecting means can be positioned along with the disposition of the interposing member, and accordingly, the workability of the assembling work can be improved. It is possible to improve.

In the gaming machine L12, in a state where the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member and the connecting means is sandwiched between the electric device and the board, the connection is made with the inner edge of the opening of the intermediate member. A gaming machine L13, characterized in that a gap is formed between the outer surface of the means.

Here, in the configuration in which the size of the opening of the interposition member is made smaller than the size of the connection means in the unloaded state, and the connection means is sandwiched between the openings of the interposition member, shear deformation of the elastic member is hindered. Therefore, when the electric device or the board is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the conductive member may slide with respect to the electric device or the board.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L12, the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member, and when the connecting means is sandwiched between the electric device and the board, Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of the opening of the installation member and the outer surface of the connecting means, it is possible to prevent the connecting means (elastic member) from being restrained by the inner edge of the opening. That is, during the assembling work, the interposing member (opening) holds the connecting means to improve the workability of the assembling work, and the assembled state (the state where the connecting means is sandwiched between the electric device and the board). In (), the elastic member can be easily sheared and the conductive member can be prevented from sliding on the electric device or the substrate.

The compressible elastic material is preferably a porous elastic body, for example, synthetic sponge formed by foaming a synthetic resin such as polyurethane, foamed rubber obtained by kneading and foaming a foaming agent into a rubber raw material (cellular rubber). ) Etc. are illustrated. In this case, the form of the bubbles may be closed bubbles or continuous bubbles.

In the gaming machine L13, an outer surface of the elastic member on the side sandwiched by the opening of the interposing member is recessed inward.

According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L13, the outer surface of the elastic member that is sandwiched by the opening of the intervening member is recessed inward, so that the electric device and the board are separated from each other. When the connecting means is sandwiched therebetween, it is easy to deform the outer surface of the elastic member in a direction away from the inner edge of the opening of the intermediate member (inward of the elastic member), starting from the inwardly concave portion. it can. As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening of the interposing member and the outer surface of the connecting means.

In the gaming machine L14, the connecting means is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting the conductive member to one end and the other end in a strip shape, and the elastic member is fitted into the conductive member to form one end in the strip shape. A gaming machine L15, wherein a connecting portion connecting the other end is arranged on an outer surface side that is recessed inward of the elastic member.

According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L14, the connecting means is formed into an endless belt by connecting one end and the other end of the belt-shaped conductive member, and the conductive member includes the elastic member inside. The connecting portion, which is fitted and connects the one end and the other end of the strip shape, is disposed on the outer surface side of the elastic member that is recessed inward, so that it is formed by the recessed inward. It is possible to accommodate a connection portion in which one end and the other end of the strip shape are connected to each other in the space. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end of the strip shape to abut on the inner edge of the opening of the interposing member. As a result, the deformability of the connecting means can be secured.

A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine M1 is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine M2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board 64 first prize hole (ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
300 Rear case (base)
400 base member 510 slide rail (one side member, other side member)
520, 2520, 3520, 4520 Slide members 521, 4521 One side guided member 522, 4522 Other side guided member 523, 4523 Liquid crystal display device (rotating member)
523c Rotating shaft 525 Opposing member 531 Drive motor (rotation driving means)
543 Liquid crystal device (electrical device)
544 Interposition member 544a Opening (opening)
545 Substrate member (substrate)
545a1 protrusion 545a2 through hole (through hole)
545d ground part 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 conductive member (connecting means)
546a Elastic member 19546a1, 20546a1 Recessed portion (second region)
19546a2, 20546a2 Non-recessed notch (first region)
546b, 17546a Cloth member (conductive member)
546b3 1st part 546b4 2nd part 546b5 3rd part 5600,6600,7600,8600 Passage member 5641,6641, 7654,8654 Opening part 5640,6640 Overhang wall part (passage member)
SL slide unit (displacement member)
8655 1st switch (detection means)
8656 2nd switch (detection means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine including a slide member that is slidably movable between a first position and a second position (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-014602, A

When the facing member is arranged to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position (not known at the time of filing of the present application), sufficient effect is provided between the facing of the slide member and the facing member. There was a problem that I could not do it.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating an effect between the slide member and the facing member facing each other.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a slide member that is slidably displaceable between a first position and a second position, and is arranged at the first position. a facing member disposed opposite from the side opposite to the second position relative to said sliding member, and a presentation unit that conducts effect between opposing the opposing member and the sliding member, the presentation means, the opposing member And a first display device that irradiates light from the back side of the facing member toward the facing of the slide member , wherein the slide member is at least provided by a rotating shaft that is eccentrically positioned in a direction along the slide displacement direction. The first surface of the slide member or a second surface different from the first surface is rotatably formed at a position facing the front side, and one of the first surface and the second surface receives light toward the front side. A second display device for irradiating is provided, and in a state in which the one of the first surface or the second surface is directed to the front side, the facing distance between the facing member and the slide member is reduced, and the first surface or the second surface is provided. in a state where the other surface is directed to the player side, between the opposite of the facing member and the slide member is Ru is increased.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily perform an effect between the slide member and the facing member facing each other.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member taken along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at the separated position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a reference figure, (b) is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. FIG. 6A is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position, and FIG. 9B is a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in a 2nd embodiment typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a reference drawing. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in a 3rd embodiment typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism in the state where the liquid crystal surface is directed to the front side, and (b) is a schematic view showing the slide mechanism in the state where the decorative surface is directed to the front side. It is the front schematic diagram shown. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of a slide mechanism which shows a transition state when a base member is rotated from a 1st rotation position to a 2nd rotation position. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of a slide mechanism which shows a transition state when a base member is rotated from a 2nd rotation position to a 1st rotation position. (A) is a partial expanded front perspective view of the game board in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a partial expanded front view of the game board. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the LVI-LVI line of FIG. 55(b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the LVII-LVII line of FIG. 56(b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the passage member in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of a passage member in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a passage member in a LIXb-LIXb line of Drawing 59 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the passage member in an 8th embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the 1st control example as 9th Embodiment, and (b) is the actual display screen in the 1st control example. It is the figure which illustrated. (A) is a figure which shows the control of the display area in a 1st control example, (b) is a figure which shows the effect in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the reversal operation of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decoration surface of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display control in a 1st control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, (b), the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence relationship with, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence relationship between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the variation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of a voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM of a voice lamp control apparatus typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of an over-winning table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of a winning over-winning table typically, (c) is a sign overrun It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the winning a prize table typically, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the omission over winning table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of an ending table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit ending table typically, (c) is a sign ending table It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the detachment ending table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a sub liquid crystal drive scenario, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of a slide drive scenario, and (c) is a rotary drive. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the scenario typically, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the inversion drive scenario typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of a drive data storage area. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows over-win prize processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp edit process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows sub liquid crystal drive processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing performed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display jackpot related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the number-of-rounds command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a normal winning effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing an over-winning effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a flow chart which shows sub-symbol setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing correction process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example as a 10th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing the internal configuration of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the example of the 2nd control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decorative surface of the slide member in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a distribution motor setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game method notification process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display device of the pachinko machine in a 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example as 11th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario in the 3rd control example, (b) is the model which showed the content of the mirror production drive scenario in the 3rd control example typically. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example as 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows ending processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit game timekeeping processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 4th example of control. It is the figure which shows one example of production display. It is the figure which shows one example of production display. FIG. 15A is a front view of the liquid crystal display device according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159B is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a liquid crystal display device. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a liquid crystal display device. It is an exploded view of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 16A is a top view of the conductive member, and FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb in FIG. FIG. 16A is a front view of the substrate member, and FIG. 16B is a sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXIVb-CLXIVb in FIG. It is a rear view of a liquid crystal display device. 165A is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device taken along line CLXVIa-CLXVIa in FIG. 165, FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. It is an expanded sectional view of a liquid crystal display in the range LXVIIIc of 166 (b). It (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a liquid crystal display device. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 16A is a top view of the conductive member according to the fourteenth embodiment, FIG. 16B is a side view of the conductive member as seen in the direction of arrow CLXIXb in FIG. 169A, and FIG. FIG. 169 is a side view of the conductive member as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXIXc of 169. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 17A is a top view of the conductive member according to the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the conductive member as seen in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in FIG. 171A. FIG. 17A is a top view of the conductive member according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the conductive member as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIIb in FIG. 172A. FIG. 17A is a top view of the conductive member according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 173A. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a liquid crystal display device. (A) to (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (A) is a top view of the electrically conductive member in 18th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrically conductive member in CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb line of FIG. 176 (a). FIG. 17A is a front view of the substrate member according to the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177A. FIG. 17A is a top view of the conductive member, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb in FIG. 178A. (A) And (b) is a schematic cross section of a conductive member. FIG. 180A is a front view of the substrate member according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180B is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXXXb-CLXXXb in FIG. 180A. 18A is a top view of the conductive member, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXXIb-CLXXXIb in FIG. 181A. (A) And (b) is a schematic cross section of a conductive member.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open. .. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a "thousand box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Mounted on the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided on the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by the lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing or not by the lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with the lit state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lit state, and the 7-segment display device gives a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is carried out when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. On the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, not only is the lottery result a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but also a big jackpot type is shown if it is a big hit. ..

Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a certainty jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R regular jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

The "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of big jackpot is not occurring, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is odd. In addition, the short-time state (time-shortening state) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

During the probability change or time saving, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the balls to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a opens at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4 ), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. Thereby, during the probability change and time reduction, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric winning object 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or the shortening, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of the through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first winning opening 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning opening 640. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also short, so in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than that during normal time during the probability change and the shortening of time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability of being a jackpot is the same in the case where the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball wins the second winning opening 640 in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

A second variable winning device 82a is arranged on the upper left of the first winning port 64, and a second specific winning port 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot), the second variable winning device is opened (in the expanded state), so that the ball is in the special game state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning opening 82. You can

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example, Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 stores, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is cut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is reached. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 to 14 are front views of the operation unit 200. 5 to 14, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface of the back case 300 is omitted.

Here, FIGS. 7 to 10 show a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, and FIGS. 11 to 14 show a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position. It

In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position with the display surface 523a facing the front is shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, and the display surface 523a is facing the front. The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is shown in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 9 and 13, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the close position with the decorative surface 523b facing forward is shown in FIGS. 10 and 14, and the decorative surface 523b is facing forward. The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is shown in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and the slide unit SL is rotatably accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 300.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front surface. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. ..

The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 rotatably supported by the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a slide mechanism 500 arranged on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 that are formed so as to be slidable in a direction in which they approach or separate from each other. It should be noted that the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged such that their displacements (the rotation about the rotation shaft 523c and the slide displacement accompanying the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and the timing of the displacement (the start of the displacement or the stop of the displacement). ) Are set (controlled) so that they are the same as each other.

The base member 400 is rotatably formed between a first rotation position and a second rotation position having a phase difference of approximately 90° from the first rotation position. In the first rotation position, the direction of slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and in the second rotation position, the direction of slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. Is the left-right direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display for displaying a pattern and the like, is rotatably supported, and has a display surface 523a facing the front (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11, and 12). ) And a posture in which the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a, faces the front (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13, and 14).

When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid in a direction in which they approach each other and are arranged in the proximity position, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the third symbol While the display device 81 is invisiblely shielded (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11, and 13), when the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and are arranged in the separated position, By retracting the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (FIGS. 8, 10, 12 and 12). 14).

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 43. First, with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23, a configuration in which the base member 400 of the slide unit SL is rotatably supported with respect to the rear case 300 will be described.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL. 17 to 19 are front views of the rear case 300 and the base member 400.

Note that, in FIG. 17, the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, in FIG. 19, the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position, and in FIG. 18, the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position. The transition states are illustrated as they are rotated from one rotational position to a second rotational position and vice versa.

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 19, the rear case 300 includes a rotation driving mechanism for applying a rotation driving force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and The second wheel member 322 and the covering members 331 to 334 for holding the respective wheel members 321 and 322 are arranged.

The rotary drive mechanism includes a drive motor 311, a pinion gear 312 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 311, a head gear (first transmission gear 313a) meshed with the pinion gear 312, and an end gear (first gear). 3 transmission gear 313c) is provided with a transmission gear train that is meshed with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 at the upper right of the front view. The second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disk-shaped members that are rotatably supported by a shaft 303 that is erected from the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the outer peripheral edge of the base member 400. A plurality of them are arranged at a predetermined interval along the. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is located in two places below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is located in two places above and two places on the left and right of the base member 400. Each is arranged. Here, the detailed configuration of each of the wheel members 321 and 322 will be described with reference to FIG.

20A is a sectional view of the first wheel member 321 taken along the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 20B is a sectional view of the second wheel member 322 taken along the line XXb-XXb of FIG. is there.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in such a manner that the shaft 303 projects toward the front side. Around the periphery of 303, a first recess 301b1 and a second recess 301b2, which are concentric with the shaft 303 and are circular in a front view, are provided in the bottom wall 301.

The first recess 301b1 and the second recess 301b2 are recesses for receiving and accommodating the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported by the shaft 303, and the inner diameter of the second recess 301b2 is , Smaller than the outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 and larger than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. As a result, it is possible to suppress an error in assembling the first wheel member 321 into the second recess 301b2.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are formed as members having an H-shaped cross section in which grooves 321a and 322a having a U-shaped cross section that are continuous in the circumferential direction are recessed in the outer peripheral surface, and the bases of the grooves 321a and 322a are formed. The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. Thereby, the base member 400 is rotatably supported on the rear base 300 while restricting the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (downward direction in FIG. 20A) and the front-back direction (leftward and rightward direction in FIG. 20A). it can.

The first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spheres are arranged between the inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and the outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. Accordingly, the durability of the first wheel member 321 that bears the load of the base member 400 can be ensured, and the output required for the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

Further, in the second wheel member 322, the outer diameter of the wall portion located on the front side (left side in FIG. 20B) of the pair of wall portions facing each other across the groove 322a is larger than the inner diameter of the recess 301b2. To be done. That is, the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322 is larger at the front wall portion than at the rear wall portion. Accordingly, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the second wheel member 322 and improve the durability while suppressing an error in the mounting direction of the second wheel member 322 to the shaft 303.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the slide mechanism 500, which is relatively heavy, is arranged on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400, which receives the weight of the slide mechanism 500, leans forward and tilts. However, since the second wheel member 322 is disposed above and on the left and right of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the front wall portion of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. The configuration described above is particularly effective for suppressing the forward tilted posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

It returns to FIG. 15 to FIG. 19 and demonstrates. The covering members 331 to 334 are formed in a shape in which a rectangular plate-shaped body having a circular opening in the center is divided into four parts vertically and horizontally, and are arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. .. Accordingly, the covering members 331 to 334 are covered on the front sides of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and the wheel members 321 and 322 are restricted from coming off the shaft 303.

The base member 400 is a disc-shaped member having a substantially rectangular opening 401 formed in a front view in the center thereof, and is formed in a flange shape along the outer edge thereof to form the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 321 described above. The flange portion 402 that is inserted into the grooves 321a and 322a of the wheel member 322, and the last gear (the third transmission) in the transmission gear train of the rotary drive mechanism that is engraved on the front side and curved in an arc shape along the circumferential direction. A gear portion 403 with which the gear 313c) is meshed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the forward direction from the state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17, and the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312. The rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise in a front view (clockwise rotation direction in FIG. 17). When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the forward direction, the base member 400 moves to the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19 through the state shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state in which the base member 400 is located at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19, the rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is stopped. , And is transmitted to the gear portion 403, the base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (counterclockwise rotation direction in FIG. 19), and is placed at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17 through the state shown in FIG. It

In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 being mainly in contact with the groove bottom of the groove 321a of the first wheel member 321. That is, since the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer peripheral surface of the groove bottom of the groove 321a are supported by rolling contact between the peripheral surfaces, the contact surface is minimized and the friction surface is supported in a low friction state. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 required for rotationally driving the base member 400 can be suppressed.

Further, since the slide mechanism 500 is disposed (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, as described above, the base member 400 has the first rotation position and the second rotation position with respect to the rear case 300. When the slide mechanism 500 is rotated between the two, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23. 21 to 23 are front views of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG. 23 corresponds to FIG. 19, respectively.

Next, a detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 43. 24 and 25 are a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position, and FIGS. 26 and 27 are the liquid crystal display device 523 arranged at the separated position. It is a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in the closed state. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 arranged on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail arranged on the front side of the cover member 420. 510, a slide member 520 disposed on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 to slide the slide member 520.

The cover member 420 is a disk-shaped member having a substantially rectangular opening 421 formed in a front view in the center thereof. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is provided on the front side of the base member 400 at a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap. Are arranged (fixed).

The space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is arranged at a position overlapping with the openings 401 and 421 in a front view in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position, and can be rotated without interfering with the cover member 420.

Here, the detailed configuration of the slide driving mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 28 and 29. 30, 32 and 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33 and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

30 and 31, the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inward protruding position, which is a position for arranging the slide member 520 at the close position, is different from that in FIG. 34 and FIG. 32 and 32, the transmission arm 437 is rotated from the inward protruding position to the outward inversion position, or vice versa. The transition states when the process is performed are respectively illustrated. 30 to 35, the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 is schematically illustrated using a chain double-dashed line to show the positional relationship with the transmission arm 437 and to facilitate understanding.

In the slide mechanism 500 of the present embodiment, a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for respectively driving the slide members 520 are arranged. Since they are structurally the same, the same reference numerals are given to both, and only one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 arranged on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and a pinion gear 432. A transmission gear 433 to be meshed, a rack gear 434a to which the transmission gear 433 is meshed are engraved on the outer peripheral side, and a rack member 434 is formed in a curved plate shape, and an inner peripheral side of the rack member 434. A transmission gear 435 meshed with a rack gear 434b engraved with the gear, a pair of arm drive gears 436 rotated in opposite directions by the transmission gear 435, and a base end side fixed to the pair of arm drive gears 436. And a pair of transmission arms 437, which are mainly provided.

Therefore, for example, the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inwardly projecting position (the position in which the tip end side faces the opening 421 side of the cover member 420) shown in FIGS. 30 and 31. When the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated, whereby a pair of transmissions is transmitted. The arms 437 are rotated about the base end side in opposite directions.

When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the forward direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 undergoes the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and then the outer reversal position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 (approximately 180 from the inner reversal position). It is rotated and is arranged at a position in which the tip end side is directed to the side opposite to the opening 421 of the cover member 420).

On the other hand, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged in the outward reversal position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, and the rotation is transmitted via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433 to the rack member 434. When it is transmitted to the rack gear 434 a, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated, whereby a pair of transmissions is transmitted. The arms 437 are rotated about the base end side in opposite directions. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the reverse direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged in the inwardly inverted position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

As will be described later, the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 is slidably coupled to the sliding groove 524a in the coupling frame 524 of the slide member 520, and the transmission arm 437 is rotated about the proximal end side. The inner surface of the sliding groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520 is pushed and pulled by the tip side of the transmission arm 437, and the slide member 520 is slid and displaced (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

In this case, in the structure in which the linear driving member extending along the sliding direction of the slide member 520 is used to convert the rotational driving force of the drive motor 431 into the slide displacement of the slide member 520, When the slide displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member does not fit within the circular outer shapes of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and interferes with the rear case 300 (outer wall portion 302). You can no longer rotate it.

When the linear rack member is housed within the circular outer shapes of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 in order to enable the rotation of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 becomes short. Not only that, the linear rack member is exposed through the opening 421 so that it can be visually recognized by the player, and the appearance is impaired.

On the other hand, a structure in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431 is also conceivable. In this case, however, the position where the drive motor 431 is disposed overlaps the movement locus of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, and thus the slide movement is performed. The amount of slide displacement of the member 520 becomes shorter.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack member 434 curved in an arc shape is arranged on the outer edge side of the cover member 420 (outside the opening 421) along the circumferential direction, and the rotation of the drive motor 431 is controlled by the rack member 434. And the displacement of the arm drive gear 436 to rotate the transmission arm 437, the slide displacement of the slide member 520 is ensured while the base member 400 is moved relative to the rear case 300. The rack member 434 can be rotated by rotating it, and the rack member 434 can be prevented from being exposed through the opening 421 to improve the appearance. In addition, since the drive motor 431 can be disposed outside (both sides) of the slide displacement trajectory of the slide member 520, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 can be secured from this point as well.

It returns to FIG. 24 to FIG. 29 and demonstrates. The slide rail 510 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism provided between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520, and when the slide rail 510 is expanded and contracted, the slide member 520 moves relative to the cover member 420. The slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rail 510 has a pair of supporting both ends of the slide member 520 as one set, and the two sets are in the postures in which the expansion and contraction directions are different from each other (that is, the phases are different by 180°). It is arranged opposite.

Here, the detailed configurations of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are exploded rear perspective views of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. Note that, in FIGS. 36 to 38, the transmission arm 437 is illustrated for easy understanding.

In the present embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 and slide members 520 are arranged. In these two sets, the pair of slide rails 510 in one set are opposed to each other by a pair of slides in the other set. Since the rails 510 have substantially the same configuration except that they are smaller than the facing distance of the rails 510, the same reference numerals are given to both, and only one will be described, and description of the other will be omitted. It should be noted that by providing a difference in the facing intervals described above, the slide rails 510 of one set can be arranged between the facing slide rails 510 of the other set.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to a base end rail 511 arranged in front of the cover member 420 and a relative displacement in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the base end rail 511. And an end rail 513 connected to the front side of the intermediate rail 512 so as to be capable of relative displacement in the longitudinal direction. That is, the base rail 511 and the tip rail 513 can be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction with respect to each other via the intermediate rail 512.

The slide member 520 includes one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 on which the front end rails 512 of the pair of slide rails 510 are arranged on the back side, respectively, and the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522. A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between the members 522, a connecting frame 524 connecting the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the connecting frame 524. And a facing member 525 that is disposed so as to face each other.

The one-side guided member 521 is divided into a rail-side member 521a on which the tip rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is arranged, and a liquid crystal-side member 521b that rotatably supports the liquid crystal display device 523. 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so that relative displacement is possible.

Specifically, insertion holes 521a1 having a circular cross section are formed at two positions on the rail-side member 521a, and cylindrical insertion pins 521b1 respectively inserted into the insertion holes 521a1 at the two positions are paired from the liquid crystal-side member 521b. It is projected. The axial distance between the insertion holes 521a1 is the same as the axial distance between the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

In this case, the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 is orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 and parallel to the slide plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed over the entire circumference between the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1, and the gap can be relatively displaced in any direction (direction orthogonal to both axes). it can.

A washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1 to prevent the insertion pin 521b1 from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

In this case, the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped portion of the rail side member 521a in which the insertion hole 521a1 is bored is set to be smaller than the protruding dimension of the insertion pin 521b1. Accordingly, the rail side member 521a can be relatively displaced with respect to the liquid crystal side member 521b also in the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 can be inclined with respect to the rail side member 521a with the other guided member 522 side serving as a fulcrum. For example, the liquid crystal side member 521b precedes the rail side member 521a in the slide displacement direction, and the facing interval between them becomes larger on the front side in the slide displacement direction (smaller on the rear side in the slide displacement direction). Relative displacement in form is acceptable. Accordingly, as will be described later, it is possible to easily prevent the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced by the inertial force when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven.

The liquid crystal display device 523 is a plate-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed as a liquid crystal display as described above, and one side is a display surface 523a capable of displaying a pattern and the like, and the other side is opposite. The other side is a decorative surface 523b with decoration.

In this case, the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with cylindrical rotation shafts 523c protruding from both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof, and each rotation shaft 523c has one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member. The shaft support holes 521b2 and 522c of 522 are rotatably supported respectively. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 through the rotation shaft 523c and the shaft supporting holes 521b2 and 522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. It is possible to form a posture in which the front side (the player side) is directed and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

The axis of the rotating shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, since the liquid crystal display is arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523, the display surface 523a side is heavier than the decorative surface 523b side. Further, due to the asymmetrical shape of the components of the liquid crystal display and the decorative surface 523b, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically located from the axis of the rotating shaft 523c to at least the display surface 523a side. Therefore, an inertial force is likely to be generated when the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops rotating.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotational drive mechanism provided on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521. The rotary drive mechanism includes a drive motor 531, a pinion gear 532 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 531, a first gear 533 meshed with the pinion gear 532, and a meshed mesh with the first gear 533. A second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 523 via each gear 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. ..

The rotation drive mechanism sets (controls) the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 such that the speed of displacement (rotation) and the timing of displacement (rotation) (start of rotation or stop of rotation) are the same. To be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the facing member 525 is constant regardless of which of the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b the liquid crystal display device 523 faces.

The connecting frame 524 is provided with a sliding groove 524a linearly extending along a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510, and the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 slides in the sliding groove 524a. Can be inserted. Since the connection frame 524 is disposed on the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the slide driving mechanism described above, and the tip end side thereof is slid into the sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid and displaced.

The connecting frame 524 connects between the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, so that the liquid crystal side member 521b, the liquid crystal display device 523, and the other-side member 522 as a whole. As a result, it is possible to increase the rigidity. Accordingly, it is possible to easily maintain the facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521b and the other side member 522 constant, and to easily rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 smoothly. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to easily prevent the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced due to the inertial force when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven.

The facing member 525 is a plate-like member that is erected from the front of the connection frame, and is located at a predetermined distance (a surface that connects the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 and the liquid crystal display device 523. They are opposed to each other with a space (allowing rotation) therebetween. Further, a plurality of LEDs (effect means) are arranged on the facing member 525, and are formed so that light can be emitted toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light emitted from the LED and reflected on the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 is visually recognized by the player from between the facing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523.

A structure in which the slide member 520 thus configured is slid and displaced by the slide drive mechanism (transmission arm 437) will be described. 39(a), 40(a) and 41(a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIGS. 39(b), 40(b) and 41(b) show the slide member 520. FIG.

Note that in FIG. 39, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position, in FIG. 41, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position, and in FIG. 40, the liquid crystal display device 523 is located at the close position. The transition states as they are slid into the spaced position and vice versa are respectively illustrated. 39 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 34 and 35.

Here, as described above, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have the same displacement speed (sliding displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and displacement timing (displacement start or displacement stop). Is set (controlled) as follows. Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inward projecting positions (see FIGS. 30 and 31 ), the slide rail 510 is in a shortened state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is at the close position. Is located in. When the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in the opposite directions from each other around the base end side in this state, the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connection frame 524, so that the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 523 is slid and displaced in the direction in which the slide rail 510 is extended.

When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 are placed in the outward reversal position as shown in FIG. 41 through the state shown in FIG. 40 (see FIGS. 34 and 35). The slide rail 510 is extended and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position.

On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 41, when the pair of transmission arms 437 is rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above, the tip end side of the transmission arms 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the coupling frame 524. The liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced in the direction of shortening the slide rail 510. When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 are placed in the inward projecting position as shown in FIG. 39 through the state shown in FIG. 40, the slide rail 510 is shortened. Then, the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in the close position.

42A is a reference diagram, and FIG. 42B is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500.

In the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is composed of two parts, that is, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, which are connected so that they can be displaced relative to each other. In the structure shown as (hereinafter referred to as “reference structure”), the one-side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). The other configurations of the reference structure are the same as those of the present embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

In this embodiment, the slide member 520 is slidably formed by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 rotates between the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522. And a liquid crystal display device 523 that is pivotally supported as much as possible. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as slidably displaced, and the variation of the effect operation can be increased. That is, the player can visually recognize not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decoration surface 523b.

However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42A, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated with respect to the one-side guided member X and the other-side guided member 522, the rotation starts or stops. The accompanying inertial force becomes parallel to the direction of slide displacement, and the slide member (the one-side guided member X, the other-side guided member 522 and the liquid crystal display device 523) on which the inertial force acts causes the slide rail 510 to expand and contract. , Slide displacement will occur. That is, it becomes difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 only while the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped at a predetermined position in the sliding displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42A).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and both members 521a and 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. An allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 disposed on the side guided member 521 (right side in FIG. 42B) and a side disposed on the other guided member 522 (see FIG. 42(b) left side) The permissible amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 can be made different.

As a result, when the inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 is displaced to the other side displaced member. The liquid crystal display device 523 can be provided with a displacement component in a direction (left direction in FIG. 42B) orthogonal to the slide displacement direction (upward and downward direction in FIG. 42B) so that the liquid crystal display device 523 can be displaced more easily than the 522 side. .. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction can be used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510 (that is, the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 can be restricted). Sliding displacement of 520 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the sliding displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42B).

In this case, in the present embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 disposed on the one side guided member 521 (the right side in FIG. 42(b)) is distributed to the other side guided member 522. Where the liquid crystal display device 523 is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the slide rail 510 on the installed side (the left side in FIG. 42(b)), the one-side guided member 521 in which the relative displacement is easily tolerated. The liquid crystal side member 521b is provided with the rotation driving means (the driving motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other guided member 522 side.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, the rotation drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532 to 534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the sliding displacement direction.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism is arranged such that its drive shaft is directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 side and the main body is directed away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The position of the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be located farther from the other-side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other-side displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the sliding displacement direction.

43A is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position, and FIG. 43B shows the liquid crystal display device 523 at the close position. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the slide mechanism 500 in the state arrange|positioned.

Here, in the above-described reference structure (see FIG. 42(a)), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in a direction in which they are close to each other and are arranged at the close positions, they are brought into close contact with each other at the close positions without a gap. Then, the load of the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431, the gears 432, 433, etc., see FIG. 31) for slidingly displacing the liquid crystal display device 523 is increased, and the damage is caused.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allowance is made for the position where the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped in consideration of the dimensional tolerance, the assembly tolerance, or the control tolerance. If a sufficient gap is set between the two so that they do not come into contact with each other), the gap becomes large (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side from the gap is visually recognized by the player), and the appearance (effect effect) Worsen.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are relatively displaced. The slide members 520 thus formed are connected to each other as much as possible, and the slide members 520 thus formed are arranged face to face in a staggered posture. That is, the one guided member 521 of one slide member 520 is the other guided member 522 of the other slide member 520, and the other guided member 522 of the one slide member 520 is one side of the other slide member 520. The guided members 521 are arranged to face each other.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 43(b), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in a direction in which they are close to each other and the liquid crystal display devices 523 are in contact with each other at the close positions, the one slide member 520 and the other slide member 520 can be By the relative displacement of the side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b retracts with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other side guided member 522 of the other (the other and one) slide member 520 can be received. (One and the other liquid crystal display device 523 can each be in a posture inclined with respect to the slide displacement direction).

Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 come into contact with each other at close positions, damage to the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431, the gears 432, 433, etc.) can be suppressed, and the position at which the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped is made closer. Can be set to position. As a result, at the close position, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other in a state in which the gap between the liquid crystal display devices 523 is made smaller, and the appearance (effect effect) can be improved accordingly.

Here, in the present embodiment, the other-side guided member 522 is provided with a detected portion, and the cover member 420 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion. Is detected by the detection sensor, it is detected that the slide member 520 is slid to a predetermined position. Therefore, even if the attitude of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, the position shift of the detected member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor) can be suppressed. As a result, the slide displacement position of the slide member 520 can be detected more accurately.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of slide rails 510 and slide members 520 supported by the slide rails 510 (that is, the two sets have substantially the same configuration as each other). The case where the two sets are arranged to face each other (that is, the phases are different by 180°) and face each other has been described. However, the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment is different from the slide member 520 and the slide member having different configurations. 2520, and the slide members 520 and 2520 are arranged to face each other in a facing posture. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

44 and 45 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 46 is a reference diagram, and is a front schematic view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment. Note that, in FIG. 44, the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is shown in FIG. 45, and the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. In addition, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, as in the case of the first embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 have different expansion and contraction directions (that is, a phase of 180). They are placed facing each other in different postures.

In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, the slide member 520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 44 and 45) as in the case of the first embodiment. A slide member 2520 is provided on the slide rail 510 of the other set (lower side of FIGS. 44 and 45).

In the slide member 2520, the arrangement positions of the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed with respect to the slide member 520. Therefore, the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 of the one set includes the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of the other set and the other-side guided member 522 of the slide member 520 of the one set. The other side guided members 522 of the other set of slide members 2520 are arranged to face each other.

That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, the slide member 520 of one set and the slide member 2520 of the other set are slid displacement of both members 520, 2520 in the plan view shown in FIGS. 44 and 45. Is located in the center in the direction of and the line is symmetrical with respect to an imaginary line perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, as described above, two sets having substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases differ by 180°). Since the pair of slide members 520 are arranged to face each other, the one side guided member 521 of the one set of slide members 520 and the other side guided member 522 of the other set of slide members 2520 and the other side of the one set of slide members 520. The guided member 522 is arranged so as to face the one guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of the other set.

That is, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, the slide member 520 of one set and the slide member 520 of the other set are located at the center in the slide displacement direction of both members 520 in the plan view shown in FIG. It is arranged in a posture that is point-symmetric with respect to a virtual point (that is, the center of rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300) located at the center in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction. It

Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, when the inertial force caused by the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, it is orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the slide members 520 of one set. And the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction generated in the other set of slide members 520 are staggered in directions (point-symmetrical directions, ie, the base member 400 and the cover member 420). 46), the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are rotated in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 46 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while keeping the base member 400 and the cover member 420 stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when an inertial force caused by the rotation start or the rotation stop of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one set of slides is slid. A displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement generated in the member 520 and a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 2520 have the same direction (direction of line symmetry). ) Can be.

Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 due to the displacement component, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

FIG. 47 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500, and shows a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position (see FIG. 45 ), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of the one set and the other set of the slide member 520 are set. The one guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 is disposed on the right side in front view.

In this case, the second rotation position of the base member 400 is a position rotated by 90° from the first rotation position in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction) when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, the slide displacement direction of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 47)). Arranging the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 of one set and the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of the other set on the lower side in the front view (lower side in the vertical direction), respectively. You can

As a result, when the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 47 and the inertial force caused by the start of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement is applied, the slide displacement is performed. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (displacement component in the direction in which the slide members 520 and 2520 are pressed against the slide rail 510 (the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 is restricted) is vertically upward (the direction opposite to the gravity direction, FIG. 47 upward direction).

As a result, when the slide member 520 (the liquid crystal display device 523) is slid and displaced in the horizontal direction, the action of gravity is canceled or reduced by the displacement component in the above-described direction, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity. Can be reduced, and as a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the wear of the slide rail 510 due to the slide displacement.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the second embodiment, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (the state where the slide members 520 and 2520 are slid and displaced in the horizontal direction), the one side guided member 521 is the other side guided member 522. The case where the one side guided member 521 of the third embodiment is arranged vertically above the other side guided member 522 has been described above. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

48 and 49 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment. Note that, in FIG. 48, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position. In FIG. 49, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. In addition, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180°. That is, contrary to the case of the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is provided on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49), while the other set (FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). A slide member 520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 on the lower side.

That is, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position, the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of one set and the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 of the other set are arranged. The guide member 521 and the guide member 521 are arranged on the left side in front view.

As in the case of the second embodiment, the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment having the above-described structure also operates when an inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 acts. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the slide member 2520 of the other set and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the slide member 520 of the other set have the same direction (line Symmetric orientation).

Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 due to the displacement component, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

FIG. 50 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500, and shows a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position (see FIG. 49), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of one set and the other set of the slide member 2520. The one guided member 521 of the slide member 520 is disposed on the left side in front view.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, the slide displacement direction of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 50)). The one side guided member 521 of the one set of slide members 2520 and the one side guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 520 can be arranged on the upper side in the front view (the upper side in the vertical direction). ..

As a result, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 47 and the inertial force caused by the rotation start or the rotation stop of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the slide displacement A displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (a displacement component that generates a force (braking force) that presses the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be set vertically downward (gravitational direction, lower side in FIG. 50). As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the slide member 520 from rising, and to stabilize the rotation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling caused by lifting.

In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 is provided with the rotation driving means (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other guided member 522 side.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, the rotation drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532 to 534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member 520 from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling caused by lifting.

Further, the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism is arranged such that its drive shaft is directed to the liquid crystal display device 523 side and the main body is directed away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The position of the center of gravity of can be arranged at a position farther from the other-side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other-side displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member 520 from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling caused by lifting.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary shaft 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the center in the width direction has been described. However, the rotary shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment has a position eccentric in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. It is installed in. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 4520 according to the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 52A is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 with the display surface 523a facing the front side, and FIG. 52B shows the decorative surface 523b facing the front side. FIG. 11 is a front schematic view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 in the closed state. Note that FIGS. 52A and 52B show a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 4523 is arranged at the separated position.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the slide mechanism 4500 according to the fourth embodiment, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, cylindrical rotation shafts 4523c are provided so as to project from both longitudinal ends of the liquid crystal display device 4523. The rotation shaft 4523c is rotatably supported by the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c of the one guided member 4521 (liquid crystal side member 4521b) and the other guided member 4522.

That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 4521 and the other-side guided member 4522 via the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft supporting holes 4521b2, 4522c, and the rotation thereof causes the display surface 523a to rotate. It is possible to form a posture in which the front side (the player side) is directed and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

In this case, the rotary shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c are separated from the facing member 525 in the slide displacement direction along the slide displacement direction as compared with the formation position in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Set to position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation shaft 523c is arranged at the center of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the width direction, whereas the rotation shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is arranged in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (see FIG. ) And FIG. 52( b) vertical direction).

In the rotary drive mechanism of the fourth embodiment, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are different from those of the rotary drive mechanism of the first embodiment because the formation position of the shaft support hole 4521b is separated from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531. And a third gear 4535 is additionally provided between and.

Here, as described above, the facing member 525 is provided with a plurality of LEDs on the side surface on the side facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surface (the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 4523 is arranged. Light is formed so as to be capable of irradiating light toward the connection surface), and light reflected from the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 that is emitted from such an LED is played between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 (a gap) between them. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the person.

Therefore, when the facing interval (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 is narrow, a space (gap) for passing the light reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 cannot be secured, and the light is effectively provided to the player. Can't be seen.

In this case, the facing interval between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the vertical interval in FIG. 52A) is the third symbol display from the facing interval through the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420. Since the player can visually recognize the device 81, it is preferable that the device 81 can be maximized. On the other hand, the facing distance between the pair of facing members 525 (the vertical distance in FIG. 52A) must be set to a size that allows the space to be stored between the facing walls of the outer wall portion 302 of the rear case 300. It cannot be expanded because it receives

Therefore, when the facing interval between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is increased and a space for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 is secured between the facing faces, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (LED) face each other. Since the space (gap) is reduced, it is difficult to secure a space for irradiating, reflecting, or passing the light of the LED. On the other hand, in order to secure the space, the facing space between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is narrowed. Then, it becomes difficult to secure a space for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the formation positions of the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c are eccentrically located on one side in the slide displacement direction, the rotation position of the liquid crystal display device 4523 is changed. The space (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 facing each other can be increased or decreased.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be reduced. .. Therefore, the facing interval of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of protrusion of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to the front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced, and as a result, the player can display the third symbol display device. It is possible to secure a viewable area for viewing 81.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52B, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the decorative surface 523b faces the front side. .. Therefore, a space (gap) for passing the light emitted from the LEDs of the facing member 525 and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can be secured, and as a result, the space (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (gap). Therefore, it is possible to effectively perform an effect that the player visually recognizes.

Further, in order to increase the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525, it is necessary to dispose the facing member 525 at a position distant from the liquid crystal display device 4523 (that is, increase the distance between the pair of facing members 525). Therefore, the slide mechanism 4500 can be downsized. That is, the slide mechanism 4500 can be accommodated between the outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300 facing each other, and at the same time, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect produced by the light emitted from the LEDs are both achieved. You can

Next, a method for suppressing the driving force required for the rotation when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa will be described.

53A and 53B are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position.

When rotating the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. 53A, in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are placed at the close position. To place. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53(a)) has the display surface 523a oriented toward the front side, while the other (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53(a)). The liquid crystal display device 4523 is in a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

As a result, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 as a whole can be arranged at a position eccentric to the upper side with respect to the center in the vertical direction, and accordingly, the position of the center of gravity G is located above the center of rotation of the base member 400. Can be made.

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated clockwise by 90° in the front view (clockwise in FIG. 53A) to rotate from the first rotational position shown in FIG. 53(a) to the second rotational position shown in FIG. 53(b). When it is rotated to, the locus of movement of the center of gravity G (illustrated by the broken line arrow in FIG. 53(b)) can be taken as the locus of moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required to rotate the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position can be suppressed.

54A and 54B are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

When rotating the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 54A, in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are placed at the close position. To place. In this case, while the liquid crystal display device 4523 of one side (the side that moves in the direction of gravity along with the rotation to the first rotation position, the left side in FIG. 54A) has the display surface 523a in the attitude with the front side facing, The liquid crystal display device 4523 on the other side (the side that moves to the side opposite to the direction of gravity in accordance with the rotation to the first rotation position, the right side in FIG. 54A) has the decorative surface 523b in a posture with the front surface side facing.

As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the position of the center of gravity G) is located away from the center of rotation of the base member 400 and is eccentric to the side that moves in the direction of gravity with the subsequent rotation ( 54(a) left side).

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 54(a)) by 90°, and from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 54(a) to the first rotation shown in FIG. 54(b). When rotating to the position, the locus of movement of the center of gravity G (illustrated by the broken line arrow in FIG. 54(b)) can be taken as the locus of moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required to rotate the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position can be suppressed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

55A is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. Further, FIG. 56 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line LVI-LVI of FIG. 55(b), and FIG. 57 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line LVII-LVII of FIG. 56(b). It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 formed of a resin material and forming a passage through which the game balls flow down. In the passage member 5600, a rolling plate 5610 extending in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 55(b)) and a front side (55(b) front side of the drawing) of the rolling plate 5610. The front wall portion 5620 arranged, the rear wall portion 5630 arranged on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 55(b)), and a part of the rear wall portion 5630 are arranged on the back side. An overhanging wall portion 5640 formed by overhanging is mainly provided.

The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface serves as a rolling surface of the game ball, and has a first portion formed by being inclined downward from the end portion in the width direction of the game board 13, and the first portion thereof. A W-shaped rolling surface in front view is formed from an end portion on the descending slope side and a second portion which is inclined upward toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610 is recessed in the connecting portion between the first portion and the second portion, and descends toward the front side (front side in FIG. 55B). A recessed portion 5611 that is inclined and a recessed portion 5612 that is recessed in the uppermost portion of the second portion and that is inclined downward toward the back side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 55(b)) are provided.

The front wall portion 5620 is erected above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and prevents the game balls from falling from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, the front wall portion 5620 is cut out at a portion corresponding to the recess 5611 of the rolling plate 5610, and the game ball received in the recess 5611 can be dropped.

The overhang wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for causing the game ball rolling on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area, and rolling. The game ball, which is rolled in the plate 5610 and received in the concave portion 5612, is received in the projecting wall portion 5640.

Here, the operation unit 200 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, when the projecting wall portion 5640 is projected from the rear surface side of the game board 13 as in the present embodiment, in order to avoid interference with the projecting wall portion 5640, the operation unit 200 (slide unit SL ), the movable range is limited, and its effect is impeded.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the overhang wall portion 5640 is formed in a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width dimension between the inner wall surfaces (dimension in the horizontal direction of FIG. 57) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is also set to a slightly larger size, while the depth dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 57) from the front surface of the back wall portion 5630 to the inner wall surface is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In this case, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is chamfered (cut) by a virtual plane parallel to the back surface wall portion 5630 at the top portion having an arcuate cross section in the overhanging direction (the right side in FIG. 56, the upper side in FIG. 57), In the chamfered portion, an opening 5641 whose width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed.

That is, the game ball can pass (flow down) through the passage formed by the overhang wall portion 5640 in a state where a part of the game ball is projected from the opening portion 5641 to the outside, so that the entire inner circumference of the game ball is obtained. It is possible to suppress the overhanging dimension L1 of the overhanging wall portion 5640 to the back side, as compared with the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed to have a size surrounding the side. Therefore, the space for disposing the operation unit 200 and the movable range of the slide unit SL can be secured accordingly.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member 6600 according to the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 57. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58, the overhang wall portion 6640 according to the sixth embodiment includes a pair of wall portions that are erected from the back wall portion 5630 and a wall portion that connects the standing tips of the pair of wall portions. Is formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and an opening 6641 is formed in the wall portion on the protruding tip side (upper side in FIG. 58) in the U-shaped cross section.

The opening 6641 is formed such that the width dimension (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 58) of the projecting wall portion 6640 decreases from the inner wall surface side toward the outer wall surface side. That is, the overhang wall portion 6640 has an inner peripheral surface formed as an inclined surface. Thereby, the amount of protrusion that allows a part of the game ball to protrude from the opening 6641 to the outside is increased, and the overhanging dimension L2 of the overhanging wall 5640 can be suppressed, while the peripheral portion of the opening 6641 (an inclined surface and It is possible to secure the rigidity of the overhang wall portion 6640 by maximizing the thickness dimension in the portion to be formed).

In this case, in this embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 in the inner wall surface of the overhang wall portion 6640 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall surface and the opening of the overhang wall portion 5640 are set. The angle of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) is set so that the ridgeline portion S with the inner peripheral surface of the portion 5641 comes into contact with the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the object from being received at the tip end side of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) while securing a projectable amount that allows a part of the game ball to project from the opening 6641 to the outside ( That is, it is possible to suppress damage to the overhang wall portion 6640 (periphery of the opening portion 6641) by receiving the game ball at the ridge line portion S having a relatively high rigidity.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. 59A is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59B is a sectional view of the passage member 7600 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the passage member 7600 according to the seventh embodiment includes a front wall portion 7651, a rear wall portion 7652 arranged to face the front wall portion 7651, and front surfaces thereof. The wall portion 7651 and the back wall portion 7652 are provided with side wall portions 7653 respectively disposed on both sides thereof, and a space having a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by these wall portions 7651 to 7653 forms a passage through which a game ball flows down. ..

Here, the passage member 7600 is configured such that a part of the front wall portion 7651 and the rear wall portion 7652 (the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) is projected toward the rear wall portion so that the front inner peripheral wall A bent passage is formed by the portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. That is, the inner peripheral side of the passage in which the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a is bent is formed, and the outer peripheral side of the path in which the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a is bent is formed.

In this case, in this embodiment, the opening 7654 is formed in the front inner peripheral wall 7651a on the inner peripheral side of the bent passage. That is, the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball (rightward in FIG. 59A) when passing through the bent passage. Since the opening 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by protruding a part of the game ball from the opening 7654 to the outside, it is possible not only to suppress the overhanging dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a, but also to suppress damage and wear of the passage member 7600. It can be done easily.

That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the curved passage (right direction in FIG. 59(a)), it is pressed by the centrifugal force. The game ball can be received by the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a, which has a relatively high rigidity without the opening portion 7654 being formed therein, and can be suppressed from being pressed against the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a by centrifugal force. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651 and wear on the peripheral edge of the opening 7654, which has a relatively low rigidity due to the formation of the opening 7654.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 60, the same parts as those in the above-described respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment has a front wall portion 7651 (front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a) and a rear wall portion 7652 (rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) as in the case of the seventh embodiment. And the side wall portion 7653 form a bent passage having a substantially rectangular cross section. In this embodiment, the opening 8654 is formed in the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. The opening portion 8654 is formed substantially the same as the opening portion 6641 in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball from the opening portion 8654 to the outside, the overhanging dimension L4 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed. In this case, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set to a position that overlaps with the range Rg that is a partial displacement locus of the game ball projected from the opening 8654. Accordingly, the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded by effectively utilizing the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the overhanging dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. As a result, the effect produced by the slide unit SL can be enhanced.

In this case, the passage member 8600 is provided with a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 for detecting passage of a game ball, respectively, on the upstream side and the downstream side of the opening 8654. Therefore, by monitoring the detection state by the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, at least the game ball does not exist in the passage of the passage member 8600, therefore, a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 8654. It is possible to understand that it is not done.

Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is moved to the range Rg only while it is understood that at least a part of the game ball is not projected from the opening 8654. It is possible to avoid the interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball by controlling the displacement so that the slide unit SL and the game ball overlap.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a ninth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 62 to 126. The first control example is configured to display an over-winning effect when the game ball overwins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the over-winning has occurred during the jackpot game, so that the player can provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

As the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of gaming balls over-winned may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily understand the number of gaming balls that have won an over-win. In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of game balls that have won the over prize. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, which can enhance the interest of the player.

In the first control example, as the over-prize effect, the over-win prize effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in accordance with the progress of the round in the jackpot game. That is, the selection ratio of the over-prize effect is configured to be different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the character strings suggesting right-handedness (right-handed right-handed right-handed) are arranged in a circle and displayed. Thereby, even when the display screen (sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

It should be noted that a display suggesting a right-handed stroke may be performed and a voice suggesting a right-handed stroke (for example, a voice saying "please right-hand") may be output. With this, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is right hitting.

In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LEDs are blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. Configured to.

As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 cannot be visually recognized, the blinking display state of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. According to the displacement, the display position of the design is changed. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 and perform an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to preferably display the effect.

In the first control example, the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are vertically driven (slide) (that is, the display area is vertically long) and horizontally (slide). The display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected in this case (that is, when the display area is horizontally long). As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 and perform an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

First, with reference to FIG. 62A, data of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described.

In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are configured to perform display based on one image data. Specifically, the image data represented by the coordinates (0,0) to (X,Y3) is used, and the image data in the area (0,0) to (X,Y1) is stored in the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Displayed on the upper display surface 523a, the image data of the area (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image of the area (0, Y2) to (X, Y3). The data is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 62(b) is a schematic diagram showing the effect contents at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to the close position, and the button with the word "PUSH" is drawn on the lower display surface 523a2. Is displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 while this button is displayed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the sliding movement. The effect is started (see FIGS. 63 to 65).

Next, the effect display in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In this control example, effect display using the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) and the third symbol display device 81 provided on the slide member 520 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is directed upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is directed downward. By sliding down (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), the display area used for effect display is enlarged, and the design (design imitating “fish” in FIG. 63) is enlarged using the enlarged display area. The effect display that causes the number of symbols to be increased is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to display a variety of patterns in the display area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram showing a display area in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. In this state, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to a position where the upper display surface 523a1 lowers the upper half of the design. The display is controlled so that the display surface 523a2 is displayed.

Even in such a case, the display data displayed on each display surface (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide display data for the sub liquid crystal display device, and the amount of data can be reduced.

In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, but other configurations may be used, for example, the third symbol display device displays. The display area in which the information regarding the game to be played (for example, the display of the number of stored memories and the display of an abnormality) is displayed may be visible regardless of the position of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Good.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts the sliding movement from the state shown in FIG. 63(a), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 63(b). FIG. 63(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has started from the state shown in FIG. 63(a). As shown in FIG. 63(b), when the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started, the upper display surface 523a1 slides upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63(b)), and moves downward. The display surface 523a2 slides downward (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63B). On the slide-moved upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2, the same display objects (the upper half and the lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63A are displayed. This can be realized by moving the display position of the display object according to the amount of movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

Then, as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. In the third symbol display device 81, the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2, the display of the symbol corresponding to the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the third symbol display The symbols displayed on the display surface of the device 81 are displayed, and from the front side (visible side), the lower display surface 523a2 (lower symbol), the upper display surface 523a1 (upper symbol), the third symbol display device 81. Are displayed in the order of the display surface (middle pattern).

In the state shown in FIG. 63(b), most of the three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) are displayed in an overlapping state, so it is clear which symbol is displayed to the player. It is difficult to get to know. In this state, since the symbols (middle symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are layered so that the symbols are most difficult to see, what symbol is the symbol that appears last for the player? There is an effect that it is possible to execute the effect while expecting, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), a state will be described in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 63(b). 64(a) is a diagram showing a state where the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63(b), and FIG. 64(b) is a diagram showing the state shown in FIG. 64(a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 advanced further.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), as the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. By gradually exposing the surface, the entire display area is gradually expanded. Even in this state, the same display object (the upper half and the lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63A is displayed on the slidably moved upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2.

Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the respective symbols are displayed so that the overlapping of the upper symbol, the middle symbol and the lower symbol is gradually reduced. With this configuration, with respect to the display of the upper display 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, display of display data corresponding to a specific display object (display object displayed from the state of FIG. 63(a)). It suffices to execute the control for moving the position in accordance with the sliding movement of each display surface, and it is possible to reduce the load of the display control.

Moreover, the effect display for gradually reducing the overlapping of the symbols is fixed by actually moving the display surfaces (the upper display 523a1, the lower display surface 523a2, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81). There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with the case of executing on a display surface.

In this case, the timing of sliding movement of each display surface (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) is changed, or the speed of the sliding movement is changed, and the display movement of each display surface is changed in accordance with the sliding movement. Display control should be executed. As a result, there is an effect that the staging effect can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b), a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is further slid from the state of FIG. 64(b) will be described. FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and FIG. 65(b) is a state showing the state shown in FIG. 65(a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 advanced further.

By sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to the position shown in FIG. 65(a), a part of the mode showing the numbers attached to the middle symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Further, when the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses and the state of FIG. 65(b) is reached, the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol are completely displayed (each display surface is separated to the maximum). It will be in a state of sliding to the position). In this state, the player visually recognizes the mode showing the number attached to the middle symbol, so that the result of the special symbol corresponding to the current display effect can be grasped.

In this control example, when a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are configured to be executed. , Other than that may be used. For example, after displaying that the special symbol has been won as a big jackpot with the third symbol, this technique is used to notify whether the big hit is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot using the effect display (so-called probability variation promotion effect). May be.

Next, the display content when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates will be described with reference to FIG. 66. 66(a) is a diagram showing a mode in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and FIG. 66(b) shows the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in the left/right direction. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of contacting in a direction.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66A to the state shown in FIG. 66B, the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is changed to the sub position. By correcting the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the rotation angle, the same display mode as before rotation can be displayed. Even in this case, since the display data displayed on each display surface is the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to separately provide the display data and the data amount can be reduced. There is an effect that you can.

Next, the inversion operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible as described above, and the display surface (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) described above is provided on one surface side of the slide member 520, and the other surface side thereof is provided. Is provided with decorative surfaces (upper decorative surface 523b1 and lower decorative surface 523b2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 67 to FIG. 68, an effect mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed at a position covering the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. 67(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from the state of facing the front surface side, and FIG. 67(b) is a display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in the rear surface. It is the figure which showed the state which started facing the side (state in which the decoration surface started facing the front side). The sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state in which most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side is hidden, and the main effect is switched to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in place of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. At the lower part of the lower display surface 523a2, a decorative design Z indicating that the special design is being variably displayed is displayed, and on the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative design Z on the front side and The sub-LEDs 290 are arranged at the matching positions. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 face the front surface side, respectively. By inverting, the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (connected in parallel (arranged in contact with each other)) to form a pattern of an apple, so that the characters "CHANGE" are formed. It is configured. In addition, the lower surface of the apple is provided with a corrugated decoration, and four LEDs are arranged at each tip. Among them, the bottom LED arranged on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is composed of the sub LED 290. 68A shows a state in which the sub LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68B shows a state in which the sub LED is turned on.

With this configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 520 is inverted and the display surface cannot be visually recognized, the player can be informed that the special symbol is changing, and the player will be confused. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a right-handed notification mode, which is a mode in which the launch position of the game ball during the jackpot game is suggested, will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a right hitting notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the jackpot game. The character "right hit" is displayed in a three-circle (ring-shaped) curve, and during the jackpot game, each character is rotated right and displayed. In this control example, the variable winning device 65, the game ball flowing down the right side (right flow path) of the third symbol display device 81, the game flow down the left side (left flow path) of the third symbol display device 81. The game balls are arranged at a position where it is easier to win than the balls (lower right part of the game area). As a result, the player normally operates the handle by passing the game ball through the left flow path and performing the game so that the first starting opening 64 is won and the left hitting strength is achieved. Although the ball is fired, during the jackpot game, the handle is operated so that the firing strength is such that the game ball passes through the right flow path to play the game.

Here, by displaying the right-handed notification mode, while notifying that the steering wheel is operated with the emission strength at which the game ball passes through the right-hand side flow path, and the word right-handed is rotated to the right, the right-hand side flow path is displayed. Position (direction) and the turning direction of the handle are simultaneously notified.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is slidably moved during the jackpot game, it moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and when the third symbol display device 81 is hidden. Displays a right-handed notification mode on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1. FIG. 69C is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated rightward. In this case, it is displayed in the lower right part of the upper display surface 523a1 (FIG. 69(b) and the actual display position is not changed). Also in this case, the right-handed operation can be correctly notified without changing the direction of the right-handed character display or the rotational display direction of the character.

As described above, in this control example, the right-handed character display is rotated and displayed in a ring shape, so that even if the displayed display surface is rotated, the correct position is notified without changing the display mode. You can Therefore, the load of the display control process can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data can be reduced as compared with the case where various right-handing notification modes are prepared.

In this control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed with characters, but a ring-shaped arrow symbol or a pattern simulating a game ball may be rotated. Further, it is also possible to rotate and display a design imitating a handle for changing the emission intensity of the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a modification of the right-handing notification mode in this control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a modification of the right-handed notification mode. This modification is modified in that an arrow symbol curved rightward is added in a three-ring shape on the back side of the right-handed character display.

FIG. 147(a) is a diagram showing the display area in the right-handed notification mode. The right-handed notification mode is displayed in the display area having a ring shape. This display area is divided into three areas every 120 degrees from the center, and is composed of a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. The first area α is an area in which an arrow symbol curved to the right is displayed by rotating to the right, and the second area β and the third area γ each have the characters “right hit” along the ring shape. It is curved and displayed. The second area β and the third area γ are set in a layer above the rotationally displayed arrow symbol, and the rotationally displayed arrow symbol is displayed in the second area β and the third area γ. It is configured not to be. Further, three arrow symbols are set, and when one arrow symbol moves to the back of the second area β, the next arrow symbol moves to the first area α and is displayed. There is. The position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is variably set according to the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 147(a) is a display mode when the right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the right-handed character display layer in the layer of the first area α is below the arrow pattern. It is set. Therefore, the arrow symbol is displayed in the first area α, and the right-handed character is not displayed. FIG. 147(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees to the right. In this case, the character display layer of the third area β is set below the arrow design layer, and the character display layer of the first area α is set to a layer above the arrow design.

With such a configuration, a rightward arrow symbol is always displayed in the upper direction of the gaming machine 10, and the player can be notified of the correct position of the right flow path. In this modification, the position where the arrow is displayed is changed by changing the setting of the layer, but the present invention is not limited to this. The liquid crystal display device 523 may be configured to be variable by being rotated according to the amount of rotation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, details for setting the effect described in FIGS. 63 to 65 will be described. In the present control example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid, the effect of correcting the display position of the symbol according to the amount of the slid movement is configured.

Specifically, in accordance with the fact that the upper display surface 523a1 is changed in the upward direction from FIG. 70(a) to FIG. 70(b), based on the amount by which the upper display surface 523a1 is slid and moved, the symbol 2 The display coordinates of (upper pattern) are corrected in the upward direction.

Further, in response to the lower display surface 523a2 being changed downward, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (lower symbol) are corrected downward based on the amount by which the lower display surface 523a2 is slid.

In this way, by changing the display coordinates of each symbol according to the amount of sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the symbol spreads as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides. The effect can be displayed.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for normal symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, to the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning of the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) The second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the winning of each is provided, respectively, in each of these areas, in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, the first hit The respective values of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a universal figure execution area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a sphere on either side. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67 of.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is the per per random number table. When it coincides with the value of the random number which is a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table, for low probability of special symbols (time period of low probability state of special symbols), and high probability of high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special symbols) Of high random number) and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9". It is determined whether there is any, and if any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is "9", and if "9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value is returned to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1 symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, the random number value "0" is for low probability Is stored in the random number table for the first. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for high probability. In this way, at the time of high probability of a special symbol, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random number value that is a big jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value that is a big jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability overlap. In order not to become, it is possible to set the random number value which becomes each jackpot. If there is a value that is always used as a big hit random number regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number will be input from the outside and the big hit will be apt to be fraudulently assigned. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), by changing the random number value to be a big jackpot, the jackpot of a special symbol Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that becomes, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 29" is "big hit A". Moreover, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In addition, in the present control example, there are two types of jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol, by setting the jackpot type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol can be more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the winning in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly motivated to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played longer.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol "disconnect reach." (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and “complete detachment” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 storage ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. Stored in area 203a. It is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the sphere has won the second winning opening 64.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbols and low probability for special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is 0 to 79, which is narrow and for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72(a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "variation (for long time)", "variation (for short time)", "variation normal reach", and "variation super reach" are defined as variation patterns for deviation. As the variation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Although not shown in the figure, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and more detailed fluctuations corresponding to the types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal symbol per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is a normal symbol. When it matches the value of the random number that is a hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined as a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table, for low probability of the normal symbol (the period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that at the time of low probability (at the time of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the number of big numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be a hit, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), when the normal symbol has a low probability, there are 24 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range thereof is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are a big hit is 24, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is "0.2 seconds x 1 time". However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values to win is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds”, as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and is further attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the electric accessory 640a becomes very long, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is "1 second x 2 times" only. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device (not shown) can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 72A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 72A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(a)) is a table in which the value of a random number that is a big prize for a special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

This first random number table 202a, the jackpot determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot at a low probability of the special symbol (the jackpot determination value at the time of a low probability), and the special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol And a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of high probability) for determining whether or not it is a jackpot, and the number of determination values (random numbers) to be each jackpot is different. In this way, by changing the number of judgment values (random numbers) that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73(b)) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be respectively selected. Specifically, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A, and “50 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit B.

Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 (that is, a lottery for determining whether or not it is in the probability variation state). However, in the “big hit B”, it is impossible (or difficult) to pass the probability variation switch 65a5 (that is, the lottery for determining whether or not the probability variation state is established is not executed).

Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73C is a diagram schematically showing the content of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 73(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 73(c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is usually determined as a winning symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device (not shown) ends, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time as being displayed, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74(a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74(a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74(b)), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74(c)), At least the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74(d)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a fluctuation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, "0 to 50" is for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "51 to 179" is for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds). ), the variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big jackpot, hits the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 74C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is out. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach “198” is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out during the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined and is acquired from the out-of-place (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 74C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase of the period until the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is lengthened during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 72(b), special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, action counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball It has at least a timer 203p, a probability variation valid flag 203q, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time saving counter 203t, a warning flag 203u, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. The respective values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2, which are acquired based on winning the prize, are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored are shifted.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 640 (for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a described above. It is different only in that it is changed to the second special symbol), so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) similarly to the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing is performed to pack the data of (1) into the reserved area having the area number smaller by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 (third) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the sphere enters the first winning port 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases 1 up to a maximum value of 4 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

Special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, the variable display of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball (start prize) into the second winning opening 640 (third) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time the sphere enters the second winning opening 640 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 1 up to 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 85).

The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times of variable display holding N1 in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (the number of holding times of variable display in the first special symbol N2) is The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the number of reserved balls command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85, S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is changed. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the variable display reserved sphere number itself, which is reserved in 110. As a result, the variable display holding ball number managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of held balls in the displayed actual variable display deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and holds the number of holding balls for display to notify the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a variable display holding sphere number (standby number) of the normal symbol (second symbol) which is performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the sphere at the normal starting opening 67. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the normal starting opening 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 89).

When the sphere normally passes through the starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. Then, the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (see S705 of FIG. 90). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S703 of FIG. 90). : No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low-probability gaming state (including a time saving gaming state). In the present control example, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when the probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. It should be noted that, in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed to the probability variation switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on the setting to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65a5 has passed before the power was turned off. 203h may be configured to be officially set to on and then returned. In this case, whether or not the probability variation switch 65a5 has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an irregularity in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65a5 in one round during the big hit game (13 rounds in the big hit A in this control example). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning port 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65a5 is passed (see S1511 in FIG. 98). In addition, after the process of determining whether the number of gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1611 in FIG. 99). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) become one. After it is discriminated whether it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds in the jackpot A based on the start of 13 rounds, and the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on in the jackpot B for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Is set. In the action counter 203k, the jackpot A is set with a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds as start data for 13 rounds, and the jackpot B is set with a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds (see S1202 in FIG. 95). .. On the other hand, in the process of S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65a5 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (a voice "Look at the liquid crystal" in this control example) for drawing the player's attention. In the present control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the twelfth round (10 winnings in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 in the processing of S1402 of the notification processing (see FIG. 97) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is prompted to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the passage solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined by the operation period of the passage solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is over, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, a notification is given to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is performed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed contents, and it is possible to divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the present control example, the notification is made to show the third symbol display device 81 so as to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable winning is started before the 13th round is started. The device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured so as to divert the player's attention by notifying the player that the decorative lamp 34 and the like are to be seen. Further, the player may be distracted by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 12 rounds and giving a notification prompting the user to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the distracting effect is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time necessary for discharging the game balls in the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. Is the counter.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for discharging the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this control example, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match ( S1607 in FIG. 99). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is blocked in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65, give a shock or the like at the start timing of the 13th round, and make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and it is a big hit B. Also, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5.

When the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability variation valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 based on that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It means that a certain amount of time has not elapsed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball may pass through the probability variation switch 65a5.

The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON. The probability variation valid timer 203r can determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65a5 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In this control example, the time required for the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65a5 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not to be passed.

Thereby, the switching member 65h is changed illegally to allow the probability variation switch 65a5 to pass the game ball, or to push the game ball from below the probability variation switch 65a5 with a piano wire or the like to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65a5. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as erroneous detection of passing through a magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (not shown) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1611 in FIG. 99).

The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present control example, if the probability variation game state is not set after the jackpot game, the time shift game state of 100 times is entered.

Prediction flag 203u, winning information is obtained when the transition to the probability variation gaming state, the winning information is already pending (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b It is a flag indicating that the winning information which becomes the big hit A (that is, there is a possibility of shifting to the probability variation gaming state) is stored in (Information). In the prefetch process (see FIG. 88), the sign flag 203u is changed based on the winning information when the winning information which is a big hit when the game shifts to the probability variation gaming state is acquired (S507: Yes in FIG. 88). When it is determined that there is a possibility that it is in the probability variation game state when the game is started (that is, there is winning information for jackpot A by then) (S508: Yes in FIG. 88), it is set to ON. It Then, the winning information command indicating that the precursor flag 203u is turned on is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S511 of FIG. 88). Then, in the ending process (see FIG. 96) executed at the end of the jackpot game, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (that is, when the probability variation game state is entered) (see S1304 in FIG. 96), Set off. Although illustration is omitted, in the ending process (FIG. 96), when it is determined that the jackpot game based on the winning information in which the predictor flag 203u is turned on is finished (that is, the jackpot A jackpot game is executed. In the case where the probability variation game state is not entered), the sign flag 203u is also set to OFF.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags and the like are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via the input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 91) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 225, the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and other devices 228 (slide motor 311, rotation motor 431, reversing motor 531). , A sub LED 290, a clock generator (CLK) 900, and the like, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

The slide motor 311 is a motor for sliding and moving the display surface 523a, which is the upper display surface 523a1 that is the sub liquid crystal display device 523, in a direction parallel to the gaming machine, and is configured by a stepping motor. The rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is composed of a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is composed of a stepping motor that is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The reversing motor 531 is provided with a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2, respectively. 523a2 can be rotated independently of each other. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 independently of each other such that the display area faces the front side and the display area faces the rear side. Is.

The sub LED 290 is arranged on the decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and when the upper display surface 523a1 is inverted, the decorative pattern Z (displayed on the third symbol display device 81). The symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is changing) is changed to blinking that the special symbol is changing to notify the player.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

The clock generator 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms period to the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. The clock generation device 900 is a device for supplying a synchronization signal for controlling blinking of the sub LED 290 and the decorative pattern Z at the same timing in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and moved to a position overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub LED 290 blinks 0 in synchronization with the displayed decorative symbol Z. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by notifying the player that the special symbol is fluctuating and displaying it by displaying.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78.

In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 75(a), a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over-winning table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and other various types necessary for game control. Data, programs, etc. are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (off, out-of-reach, various reach, etc.) are set in the counter value for not-shown variation pattern selection. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment of success or failure, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent a player from getting tired early.

The over-winning table 222b is a table for selecting an over-winning effect to be executed when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Here, the details of the over-winning prize table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the over-winning table 222b. The over-winning table 222b is a table used for selecting an over-winning effect in a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the over-winning table 222b includes a winning over-winning table 222b1 and a predictive over-winning table. 222b2 and a missed over winning table 222b3 are provided.

The winning over winning table 222b1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 76(b), the winning over-prize table 222b1 defines the effect content selected as the over-win prize effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f, and the rule varies depending on the number of rounds. Has become.

Specifically, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, not executed), and " If it is "150 to 198", it becomes "foam", and if it is "199", it becomes "fish school".

The "fish group" is selected as the effect content of the over-winning effect only when the winning over-winning table 222b1 is used (that is, when the pending winning information includes winning information that is a big hit). By displaying the effect of "fish school" as the over-winning effect, it can be suggested (notified) that the winning information held for the player includes the winning information to be a big hit.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, not executed), and "100 to 189". If so, it becomes "foam", and if it is "190-199", it becomes "fish group". In this way, as the round in the jackpot game progresses, the jackpot game is configured to be easily displayed with the over-winning performance indicating that the expectation that the jackpot information is held is high. Even for a long period of time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the predictive over-winning table 222b2, there is winning information that is a big hit if it shifts to the probability variation game state in the pending prize information, and the variation probability state before the fluctuation based on the pending prize information is started. It is a table used when there is a possibility of shifting to (that is, when there is a high probability that a big hit will occur afterwards, although it has not been determined that this is a big hit).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76C, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none." (That is, not executed), and if “150 to 199”, it becomes “bubble”.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, not executed), and "100 to 199". If so, it becomes "foam".

The out-of-over prize table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information that is a big hit among the pending winning information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76D, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 179", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none." (That is, not executed), and if it is “180 to 199”, it is “bubble”.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 159", the effect content of the over-prize effect is "none" (that is, not executed) and "160 to 199". If so, it becomes "foam".

As described above, the missed over-winning table 222b3 is configured so that “foam” is less likely to be selected as the over-winning effect than the predictive over-winning table 222b2. As a result, when "bubbles" are displayed as the over-winning effect, the player can be expected to win a big jackpot after that, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In this control example, any one of the three types of “none”, “bubble” or “fish school” is selected as the over-winning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to select from four types, or may be selected from two types. In addition, the effect content may be configured such that "none" (that is, not executed) is not selected, and an over-winning effect is displayed each time an over-winning is achieved. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand that the over-winning is achieved.

Further, as the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of gaming balls over-winned may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily understand the number of gaming balls that have won an over-win.

In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of game balls that have won the over prize. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, which can enhance the interest of the player.

Next, details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used for selecting an ending effect at the end of the big hit game, and as shown in FIG. 77(a), the ending table 222c includes a winning ending table 222c1 and a predictive ending table 222c2. A detaching ending table 222c3 is provided.

The winning ending table 222c1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77(b), the winning ending table 222c1 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect contents selected as the ending effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(b), when the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 19", the effect content of the ending effect is "none" (that is, not executed), In the case of "20 to 59", "foam" is selected, in the case of "60 to 99", "special foam" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 199", "fish school" is selected.

In the sign ending table 222c2, there is winning information that is a big hit if it shifts to the probability variation game state in the pending prize information, and it changes to the probability variation game state before the fluctuation based on the pending prize information is started. It is a table used when there is a possibility of migration.

As shown in FIG. 77(c), the predictive ending table 222c2 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect contents selected as the ending effect, and "foam" as the over-winning effect during the jackpot game. Is defined differently depending on the number of selected times (the value of the bubble number counter 223j).

Specifically, when the value of the bubble counter 223j is "0 to 4" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 149", the effect content of the ending effect is "none" (that is, not executed). ) Is selected, if “150 to 179”, “foam” is selected, and if “180 to 199”, “special foam” is selected.

When the value of the bubble counter 223j is "5 to 15" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 99", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect. If "100 to 159", "foam" is selected, and if "160 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

When the value of the bubble number counter 223j is "16 or more" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 49", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and " If "50 to 99", "foam" is selected, and if "100 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

In this way, when many "foam" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select the "foam" or "special foam" ending effect that suggests that a big hit is likely to occur thereafter. Is configured as follows. As a result, even though a large number of "bubbles" are selected (displayed) in the over-winning presentation, a production with a low degree of expectation (for example, "none") is selected in the ending production. It can prevent (suppress) that motivation is reduced.

In addition, when the ending effect is selected using the sign ending table 222c2, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur thereafter. Therefore, when a lot of "foam" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select an effect that suggests that a jackpot is likely to occur thereafter, that is, the reliability of the displayed effects is high. Will be. As a result, as the number of over-winning game balls increases, a benefit that the reliability of the ending effect is improved can be given, and the player's interest can be improved.

The off-ending ending table 222c3 is a table that is used when there is no winning information that is a big hit if the game shifts to the probability variation gaming state in the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77(d), the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect contents selected as the ending effect are defined in the detachment ending table 222c2.

Specifically, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 159", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and if "160 to 189", "foam". Is selected, and if “190 to 199”, “special bubble” is selected.

In the present control example, only the signing ending table 222c2 is configured to change the value of the effect counter 223f and the content of the effect according to the value of the bubble number counter 223j, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the same may be applied to the hit ending table 222c1 and the miss ending table 222c3.

Next, the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) for changing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523 are driven. The information of is stored.

Specifically, the slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving the slide motor 431 that slides the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, and the circumferential movement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. A rotation drive scenario 222d2 for driving the rotation motor 311 to be driven and a reversal drive scenario 222d3 for driving the reversal motor 531 for reversing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are provided.

First, the contents of the slide drive scenario 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. In the slide drive scenario 222d1, a set value (operating speed (pps), which is set for the motor control IC (motor driver), corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of variable display, The number of operation steps and the operation direction) are specified.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), an operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the close position in correspondence with the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m (forward path) Information) is stored. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction. The setting contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the separated position to the close position.

Here, the operating speed of 50 pps means that 50 pulses (steps) are output to the motor driver per second, so that the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 operate 100 steps (moving from the separated position to the close position). Required time is 100/50 seconds (2 seconds).

Corresponding to the value “5001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, information related to the operation (return path operation) for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is stored. There is. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. The setting contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

Here, since the drive scenario counter 223m is a counter that increments by 1 every 1 ms, the value of the drive scenario counter 223m becomes "5001" because the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are located close to each other. It is 5 seconds after the slide displacement is started to the separated position (that is, 3 seconds after the completion of the slide displacement for 2 seconds).

Then, the information "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored in correspondence with the value "7001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. The value of the drive scenario counter 223m becomes “7001” because 2 seconds after the operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is started (that is, This is when the slide displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is completed). By reading this "END" data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

As described above, in the slide drive scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and then are maintained at the separated position for 3 seconds, and then again moved to the second position. It takes a second to slide from the close position to the separate position.

Next, the contents of the rotary drive scenario 222d2 will be described with reference to FIG. Similarly, in the rotary drive scenario 222d2, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 correspond to the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m at the first rotation position (upper display). The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are left and right at a position rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first rotation position from the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 which are upper and lower positions. Stores information related to the operation for rotating in the circumferential direction to the position (the operation on the outward path). Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction.

Corresponding to the value “8001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the operation for rotating the third symbol display device 81, the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the second rotation position to the first rotation position in the circumferential direction (return path operation). ) Related information is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

Then, the information "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored in correspondence with the value "12001" of the drive scenario counter 223m.

Thus, in the rotation drive scenario 222d2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position over 3 seconds, and then the second rotation position for 5 seconds. Then, it is rotated again from the second rotation position to the first position in 3 seconds.

Next, the contents of the inversion drive scenario 222d3 will be described with reference to FIG. Similarly, the reverse drive scenario 222d3 also corresponds to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display, and the set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver). , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side) corresponding to the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m. Information regarding an operation (outward movement) for reversing the position from the (reverse position) to the reverse position (the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction.

Corresponding to the value "5001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, information about the operation (return operation) for the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to invert again from the inversion position to the normal position is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

Then, in correspondence with the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, information "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored.

As described above, in the inversion drive scenario 222d3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from the normal position to the inversion position over 2 seconds, then is maintained in the inversion position for 3 seconds, and then over 2 seconds again from the inversion position. Flip to position.

In this control example, the operation for one motor is specified in each drive scenario, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a driving scenario in which the reversing motor 531 is driven after the sliding motor 431 is driven may be defined. Accordingly, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be slid and displaced to the close position, and then the reversal operation can be performed. As a result, variations that drive (displace) the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, and a stop. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub prize number counter 223h, fish group flag 223i, bubble number counter 223j, clock counter 223k, drive scenario counter 223m, drive scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z, Is provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved ball before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control unit 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control unit 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a special sphere 1 reserved sphere number command 203d indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1907 in FIG. 102). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of holding sphere number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110, so that Detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2302 in FIG. 106). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2309 of FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 used for advance notice effect and various lottery. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round in the jackpot game is executed. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when the over-winning effect is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over-winning effect depending on the value of the round number counter 223g, the over-winning effect can be selected (displayed) at a different ratio for each round.

The sub winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 65a in the big hit game round. The sub winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning number command received from the main control device 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and is either a normal winning or an over winning depending on the value of the sub winning number counter 223h. Is determined (see S2008 in FIG. 103). Although not shown, it is initialized to 0 when a new round number command is received.

The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the effect of "fish school" is selected (displayed) in the over-winning effect. The fish school flag 223i is set to ON when the "fish school" over-winning effect is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2109 in FIG. 104), and is set to OFF in the ending setting process (see S2109). (See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), when the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes in FIG. 105), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probability variation game state is given is repeatedly executed (displayed) and the player feels uncomfortable. Further, it is possible to prevent a so-called fall, in which the effect of "bubbles" is displayed in the subsequent ending effect even though the effect of "fish school" is displayed as the over-winning effect.

The bubble number counter 223j is a counter for determining the number of times the effect of "bubble" is selected as the over-winning effect. The bubble number counter 223j is incremented by 1 when the "foam" over-winning effect is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2111 in FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of the bubble number counter 223j is used when the ending effect is selected in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated from 0 to 65535 that is counted according to the clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and by performing an effect based on the value of the clock counter 223k, the effect can be synchronized with the display control device 114.

Specifically, in the ramp editing process (see FIG. 107), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The effect timing is determined based on the value of the clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k reaches 1000, lighting of the sub LED 290 and display of the sub symbol are started, and at 1002, the sub LED 290 is turned off and the sub symbol is hidden. It is determined.

The clock of the clock generator 900 changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start an effect such as lighting of the LED after 2 seconds, it is sufficient to determine to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although illustration is omitted, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to one that changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock whose frequency is 5 Hz). For example, it may be changed in a cycle of once every 50 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 10 Hz), or may be changed in a cycle of once every 500 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 1 Hz). When the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high (that is, the changing interval becomes short), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may be made short. As a result, even when the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high, the clock counter 223k can be updated without missing the change.

The drive scenario counter 223m is a counter for determining the timing for executing control of various drive motors. The drive scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when the change pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the change display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). Then, in the sub liquid crystal drive processing (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, 1 is added when the drive scenario is set in the drive scenario storage area 223n described later. Information for driving the motors set in the drive scenario storage area 223n is acquired according to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m, and various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are acquired. ) Is driven and controlled.

The drive scenario storage area 223n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d stored in the ROM 222 described above. The drive scenario storage area 223m stores the corresponding drive scenario 222d when the change pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the change display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). It Various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are drive-controlled based on the drive scenario information stored in the drive scenario storage area 223m.

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 102) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 ( (Variation production) and notice production are controlled.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 ( (Variation production) and notice production are controlled.

FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113 and the clock generation device 900, and the output side of the input port 238 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 on the bus line. It is connected via 240. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages in succession, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND type flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is first stored after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c or less, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the information on the image being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are completed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when the entry of is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage”, the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all third symbol display devices. It is an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed at 81, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the back image is scrolled horizontally from left to right by the image controller 237. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, and therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 does The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is started in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers "0" to "9", main symbols consisting of rear symbols such as a wooden box, characters such as rear symbols and planers, furoshiki, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the device 114 stores it in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effect, jackpot-related A display data table corresponding to the command-related display, round effect, and demonstration effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started and the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbols showing the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time saving period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so the chances of drawing a regular symbol will increase, and the chances of winning the ordinary symbol also increase. .. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbols to be opened as a jackpot for the ordinary symbols, the balls can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the special symbols can be easily selected. Therefore, the longer the shortened time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit for the special symbol, which can be given to the player, and the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so the electric prize is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get the feeling of a period when you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol without it. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

Also, in the ending production, by notifying that the lottery result of any one of the held special symbols will be a jackpot of the special symbol, the player will be a special symbol in the lottery of the held special symbol. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is a main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified by this back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this control example, the case where only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table will be described. Instead of this, what range of the backside type and the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the back surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time but may be the information indicating the address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

As for the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information by managing the offset information with the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol changes at high speed for a predetermined time period when the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 82). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 82).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4705 in FIG. 123(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 of FIG. 111(b)) and the simple display setting process are performed so that the image at power-on 8 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2912 in FIG. 111B) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 and the like. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123(b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 on the basis of the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 111(b )), the pointer updating process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such updating of the pointer 233f is performed, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 83), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,. For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold sphere number symbol. Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 111(b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 of FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is displayed to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 111B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The display clock counter 233m is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535 that are counted according to the clock change input from the clock generation device 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect is easily synchronized with the audio lamp control device 113 by performing the effect based on the value of the display clock counter 223m. Can be made.

Specifically, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The clock of the clock generator 900 changes in a cycle of once in 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start an effect such as lighting of the LED after 2 seconds, it is sufficient to determine to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although illustration is omitted, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

Although details will be described later, the clock output of the clock generation device 900 is started after the startup process of the display control device 114 (see S2601 to S2606 of FIG. 109) is completed. As a result, the start-up process of the display control device 114, which requires more time than the voice lamp control device 113, ends (that is, the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 ends. Since the clock output is started, the values of the clock counters (clock counter 223k and display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

The drive data storage area 233p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p has a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and a reverse amount storage area 233p3.

This drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when the drive of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) is set in the voice lamp control device 113. The drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates and the display angle of each image forming one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. Accordingly, even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid or moved, it is possible to display a suitable effect.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and other than the demo display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 99. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present control example, When they reach 299, 99 and 239 respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is accompanied by the passage of a ball. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the third symbol It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

The value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A special symbol 2 holding ball number command (special figure 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the processing of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is subtracted (S270), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) indicating the holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 86. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it is a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

In this control example, when the big hit A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that although the display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (the present lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a scenario for opening the specific winning opening is set (S217), and then the setting of the start of jackpot A (such as 16 rounds). The jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is special. Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment) It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed on the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

If the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time, the jackpot of the special symbol Whether or not the lottery result is acquired from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(c)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(c)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. By configuring in this way, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state), the first obtained in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 73(c)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value for this hit, the jackpot for the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined as a jackpot for the special symbol (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of the big hit showing the big hit A is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type is set as the stop type. Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74(a)) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display state at the time of detachment corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Then, this process is completed.

Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process ends, it returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87, the starting winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. If there is, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

When the starting winning process (S87 in FIG. 87) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. With respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the prefetching process (S413) which is one process of the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413).

In this prefetching process (FIG. 88, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), the process proceeds to S502.

In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of fluctuation is a probable change (S502), and if the game state is a probable change (S502: Yes), the high probability of the first random number table 202a is determined. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the game state is not a certain change (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a (S504), and the process of S505 is performed. Move.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S505). In the processing of S505, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S505: Yes), a big hit is shown and a winning information command including a big hit type is set (S506), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if it is determined that the lottery result is out of place (S505: No), then, if the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the probability variation gaming state, whether the lottery result is a big hit or not. It is determined (S507).

In the processing of S507, even if the game state at the start of fluctuation is the probability variation game state, if the lottery result is out (S507: No), the winning information command indicating the out is set (S508), and The process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S507, if the gaming state at the start of variation is the probability variation gaming state, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S507: Yes), then the transition to the probability variation state at the time of variation start. It is determined whether there is a possibility (S508). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the changing winning information or the pending winning information includes the winning information that is a big hit for shifting to the probability changing state.

In the process of S508, when there is no possibility that the state has changed to the probability variation state at the start of fluctuation (that is, there is no jackpot winning information that shifts to the probability variation gaming state) (S508: No), a prize indicating a deviation The information command is set (S509), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when there is a possibility that the state has transitioned to the probability variation state at the start of fluctuation (that is, there is jackpot winning information that transitions to the probability variation gaming state) (S508: Yes), a high probability. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value for the game and the low probability (S520). Then, the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S511), which indicates that the sign flag 203u is ON, and the winning information command including each lottery result acquired in the process of S520 is set (S512), and the present process To finish.

Here, in this control example, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probability variation game state is given until the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65a5 during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the present control example, by executing the processing of S507 to S512, when there is the winning information that is a big hit that can pass through the probability variation switch 65a5, the lottery results at the high probability and the low probability are obtained. It can be acquired and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, an appropriate effect can be displayed regardless of whether the probability variation game state is given or not.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the electric winning combination associated with the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the first winning opening 64 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. The middle and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the high random probability second symbol per random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the high random number second random symbol table 202c per symbol. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 73(c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 73(c)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) by lighting.

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when the hit of the normal symbol is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 640. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of place (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the ordinary symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is opened/closed when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not normally completed, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 93), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), the output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 84) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, it transmits the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) and the start winning process (see FIG. 87) to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, if any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37A, 37B. In the present control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) is finished, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the stop symbol (first symbol) is the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B is stopped (lighted).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 91 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1008 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 93), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1103). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big jackpot of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the processing of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. Then, this process is completed. In the process of S1202, the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), a round number command corresponding to the round number is set (S1205), and this processing is ended.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects.

Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106). When it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1108). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is finished, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present control example), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1109), and the ending process is executed (S1110). Then, this process is completed. Although illustration is omitted, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF just in case in the process of S1009.

Here, details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the content of this ending process (FIG. 96, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302). In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1302: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1303), and this process ends. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S1302, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the present process ends.

Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability variation switch 65a5 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65a5 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. Therefore, whether the game ball passes to the probability variation switch 65a5 during the big hit game or not. You can play games with interest.

Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the contents of this notification processing (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402). The determination of the end timing of the twelfth round is made in the case of detecting that 10 balls have been won in the twelfth round or when it has been determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1402, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the twelfth round (S1402: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the counter of 2 seconds in S1403, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after 12 rounds are finished, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is given. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning a prize device 65 is identified, It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the end of the jackpot game with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given.

In the present control example, the notification counter 203m is provided to perform the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), the notification command is set (S1406). Then, this process is completed. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the output of the voice "Look at the liquid crystal".

Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1501). The round valid period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by incrementing by 1, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is displayed. It is set (S1503). Then, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1506). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1507). Then, the process of S1508 is executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1504 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1505). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the process of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the process of S1508 is executed.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1508). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1509). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i to update (S1511). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1512). Then, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1510, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the processing of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S1514). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1515). Then, this process is completed. Here, if the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 has passed the probability variation switch 65a5 even after the switching member 65h has been switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1508, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1516). If the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1516: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1516: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1517). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1518). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1518: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to OFF (S1519). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S1520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1518, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the process of S1510 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65a5, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball spitting. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65a5 from passing the game ball illegally and being given the probability variation game state.

Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing for monitoring whether or not the probability variation switch 65a5 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1601). If it is outside the round valid period (S1601: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1603). Then, the process of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed.

In the process of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1605). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1606: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1607).

If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the process of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). Then, the process of S1609 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65a5 even if it is the big hit B.

In the process of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1610). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1611), and thereafter, this process ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 100, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1815 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 101). It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 101, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 101), the power-off process of S1815 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1815 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1702: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1815 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1817 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1817, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process advances to S1704 to start the initialization of the RAM 223.

In the process of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1817 is executed (see S1816 in FIG. 101). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1817 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1708 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1817 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the startup process this time was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1704 to S1706 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1709, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1711), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1709 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704 when the processing of S1704 is passed through the processing of S1706 to the processing of S1708. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S1801 this time has been executed (S1801), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1811. In the process of S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1802 to S1811, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). It is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1813 and the command determination process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S1805 without the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display updating process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number of holding balls counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect. It is a process of setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. Further, the input of whether or not the touch operation is performed on the third symbol display device 81 is also monitored.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1808), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, etc. are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the ramp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1809, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1810 is completed, the sub liquid crystal drive processing is executed to drive (slide drive, rotation drive, etc.) the sub liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) 523 (S1811). Details of this sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1812). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the process proceeds to S1813. In the process of S1813, the variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

Then, when the variable display setting process ends, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in-process flag are both turned on (S1816), and the power-off process is executed (S1817). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1818), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1812). This command determination process (S1812) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 101) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. In addition, in this processing, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIG. 102, S1812), first of all unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The fluctuation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). When the reserved ball count command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball count command is the special map 1 reserved ball count command or the special map 2 reserved ball count command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the number of reserved balls counter 203e (the number of times N2 the variable display is reserved in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 number of reserved balls counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the processing of S1908, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c that have been updated are respectively set to the display holding sphere number command for notifying the display control device 114. After the processing of S1908 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), or a special symbol lottery Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol is selected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1908. The value of the number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. Incidentally, when the process of S1908 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1907, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S1909). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this control example, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected, and the display command for notification is set. Yes (S1910).

Next, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S1911). In the process of S1911, when it is determined that the command related to the big hit has been received (S1911: Yes), the big hit related process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. Details of the jackpot-related processing (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1911, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received, the processing directly proceeds to the processing of S1913.

In the process of S1913, it is determined whether or not another command is received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot-related processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the big hit related process (S1912). The jackpot-related processing (S1912) is processing that is executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related processing, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the opening command for display is set (S2002), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the big hit on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2003). In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S2004). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S2005), and this processing is ended.

In the processing of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S2003: No), it is determined whether or not the winning number command is received (S2006). In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to S2008.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub winning number counter 223h updated in the process of S2007 is larger than 10 (S2008). In the process of S2008, when the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is larger than 10 (S2008: Yes), more game balls than the predetermined winning number (10) in one round have entered the specific winning opening 65a ( This is the case when the so-called over-winning prize is given. In this case, the over-winning process is executed (S2009), and this process ends. The details of the over-winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the sub prize number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), the normal effect command is set to execute the normal winning effect, and the main winning command is set. The process ends.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command is not received (S2006: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S2011).

In the processing of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting processing is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and this processing ends. To do. Details of the ending setting process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S2014).

In the process of S2014, when it is determined that the V passage command is received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, and the effect suggesting that the probability variation game state is given is executed. The V effect command for display is set (S2015), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the over-winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the over-winning process (S2009). The over-winning process (S2009) is executed in the above-described jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect based on an over-winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the over-winning process, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning information to be won in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). When it is determined that there is winning information to be won (S2103: Yes), the over-winning effect is selected from the winning over-winning table 222b1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the process of S2101 (S2103). , S2107.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2103 that there is no winning information to be won (S2103: No), it is then determined whether or not there is winning information including the information in which the precursory flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). In the process of S2104, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information in which the predictive flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), the predictive over winning table 222b2 is overrun based on the value of the effect counter 223f. A winning effect is selected (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2107.

In the process of S2104, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information in which the predictive flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), the out-over winning table 222b3 causes an overrun based on the value of the effect counter 223f. A winning effect is selected (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107.

In the process of S2107, a display over-winning command indicating the over-winning effect selected in the process of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the process proceeds to S2108.

In the processing of S2108, it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is "fish school" (S2108). When it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is "fish school" (S2108: Yes), the fish school flag 223i is set to ON (S2109), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2108, when it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not "fish group" (S2108: No), it is determined whether the selected over-winning effect is "bubble". (S2110). When it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is "bubble" (S2110), the bubble number counter 223j is incremented by 1 (S2111), and this processing is ended. In the processing of S2111, the number of times "foam" is selected in the over-winning is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times "foam" is selected (Fig. 104).

In the processing of S2110, when it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not “bubble” (S2110: No), this processing is ended as it is.

In this way, the over-winning effect displayed at the time of over-winning is different depending on whether or not there is information that is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not it is a big hit thereafter). Is configured. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the over-winning effect will be displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S2012). This ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the above-mentioned big hit related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect when the big hit ends.

In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). In the process of S2201, when it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), in the over-winning effect, thereafter, an effect indicating that the probability variation game state is given is already executed (displayed). Since this is the case, the continuous ending effect is selected (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probability variation game state is given is repeatedly executed (displayed) and the player feels uncomfortable.

In the processing of S2201, if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information to be won is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204).

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be won is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: Yes), the ending effect is selected from the winning ending table 222c1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (S2205) and the process proceeds to S2209.

On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be won is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: No), then the winning information including the information in which the predictive flag 203u is set to ON It is determined whether there is any (S2206).

In the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information in which the predictor flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), an effect is selected from the predictor ending table 222c2, and the process proceeds to S2209. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information in which the precursory flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), the effect is selected from the out-of-game ending table 222c3, and the process of S2209. Move to.

In the process of S2209, the effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S2202, S2505, S2207, or S2208 is set (S2209), the fish school flag 223i is set to OFF (S2210), and the value of the bubble number counter 223j is set. This is set to 0 (S2211), and this processing ends.

In this way, the ending effect displayed at the end of the jackpot is different depending on whether or not there is information to be a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not to be a jackpot thereafter). Is configured. As a result, the player pays attention to the ending effect and executes the game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1813). This fluctuation display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2301: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2306 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then in the processing of S1903 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 102), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2303).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2304). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

When the process of S2304 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2303 includes a drive scenario setting (S2305). In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the driving scenario is set (S2305: Yes), the corresponding driving scenario is stored from the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d to the driving scenario storage area 223n (S2306), and the driving scenario is stored. The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

In the process of S2308, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2308). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2308: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process proceeds to S2312. In the processing of S2312, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2312). .. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a lamp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing this ramp edit processing (S1808). This lamp editing process (S1808) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114. Settings such as lighting of the sub LED whose lighting is controlled by are executed.

In the ramp edit process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2401). When it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the processes of S2402 to S2406 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2407.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). ..

In the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (S2403: No), the processes of S2404 to S2406 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2407.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is the change start timing (S2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be turned on is determined based on the selected change time (S2404). Then, a counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), the lighting data of the sub LED is set based on the determined value of the clock counter (S2406), and the process proceeds to S2407. To do.

In the process of S2407, the process for turning on the other lamps is executed, and the present process ends.

As will be described later in detail, the sound lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 perform lighting of the sub LED and display of the sub symbol based on the value of the counter updated based on the same clock signal. I am trying to do it. Thereby, it is possible to control to turn on the sub LED at the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

Next, the sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing this sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811). This sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and drives the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (slide drive, This is a process for rotating the drive).

In the sub liquid crystal drive process (FIG. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not a drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2501). In the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the driving scenario is not stored, it is not the timing to drive the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and thus the present processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the driving scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the driving scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is motor drive data corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m after addition in the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area (S2503). In the process of S2503, when it is determined that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. To do so, the motor drive data is set based on the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2504), the drive data command is set (S2505), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that there is no motor drive data (S2503), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506). Specifically, if the information of the drive scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is "END", it is determined that it is the end timing of the drive scenario.

In the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506: Yes), the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the drive scenario, the present process is directly ended.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 126. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, like the present control example, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2702, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2702, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs that are currently being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2703). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2601 in FIG. 109). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization processing (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing is completed.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S2601), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S2702. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2701 transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2701. Alternatively, the processing of S2703 to S2705 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2702 and S2702.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present control example, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2703 to S2705 without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 109. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2603, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2604). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2604, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2605). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 123(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 123A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S2908 of FIG. 111(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2909 of FIG. 111(b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to stand by until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issues an instruction to start the variation effect to the voice lamp control device. If it is through 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. You can Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining resident image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2605, the interrupt permission is set (S2606), and the clock output device 900 is set to start the clock output (S2607). As a result, the clock output is started after the display control device 114 starts up. Since the voice lamp control device 113 rises earlier than the display control device 114, the timing at which clock output is started is after both the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have risen, and both devices are activated. Can be accurately synchronized in.

After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the information on the image being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 111(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2902) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2903) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2902), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 to 90.

In the display setting process (S2903), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 93.

After the display setting process is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2904). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2903) or the simple display setting process (S2909). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview production or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, a drawing correction process is executed to correct the drawing contents (S2906). Details of the drawing correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2907). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2904), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905). The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). As a counter updated by the process of S2908, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/outside reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, chance of complete removal, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Then, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2909). When it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is incremented by 1 (S2910), and the V interrupt processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2911) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2912) is executed, and then S2904 is executed. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118, the details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S2902) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2903) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3002), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3003).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3005), the process returns to S3001.

Details of the variation pattern command processing (S3005) will be described with reference to FIG. 113(a). FIG. 113A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3101).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, there is no reception of two or more display fluctuation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, so the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may also be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, like the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed a time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S3101 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S3103, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S3105). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3106), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3105 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3102. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step 233f, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In the display setting process, the time counter 233h for which the time data is set in the process of S3104 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the process of S3004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006), If there is a display variation type command (S3006: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S3007), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 113(b). FIG. 113B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete disconnection, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S3201), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S3202).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S3203), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is described. In the above-described task process (S2904), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3203, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in the present control example, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3201, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S3202.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will be confused that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, like the present control example, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol jackpot", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3008), and the jackpot is determined. If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S3009), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, referring to FIGS. 114 to 117, the above-described display jackpot-related command process (S3009), which is one process of the command determination process (S2902, see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. Details will be described. First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 114, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3301), and if there is a display opening command (S3301). S3301: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3302), and the process proceeds to S3303.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). FIG. 115(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S3501). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. In the process of S3303, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and the display command is displayed. If there is an ending command for use (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3307.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116A is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3602).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the process of S3305, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the display normal winning effect command (S3307). If there is a display normal winning effect command (S3307: Yes), a normal winning effect command process is executed (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3309.

Details of the normal winning effect command processing (S3308) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG. 116(b) is a flowchart showing the normal winning effect command processing. This normal winning effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display normal winning effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the normal winning effect command processing, first, a normal winning display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal winning effect indicated by the display normal winning effect command is determined, and the determined normal winning display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. Read out from and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3702).

Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3705), the normal winning command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the process of S3307, if it is determined that there is no display normal winning award effect command (S3307: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display over-winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3309). ), if there is a display over-winning effect command (S3309: Yes), a normal over-effect command process is executed (S3310), and the process proceeds to S3311.

Here, the details of the over-prize effect command processing (S3310) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117(a) is a flowchart showing the over-winning effect command processing. This over-prize effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display over-prize effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the over-prize effect command processing, first, an over-prize effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over-prize effect indicated by the display over-prize effect command is determined, and the determined over-prize effect display data table is stored in the data table. It is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3802).

Next, based on the over-prize effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. Yes (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the over-prize effect command processing is terminated, and the display jackpot-related command processing is returned to.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the process of S3309, if it is determined that there is no display over-winning effect command (S3309: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3311). If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3312), and the display jackpot-related command process ends.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b). FIG. 117(b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing. The V effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Display data table buffer 233d (S3901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3902).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command processing is ended, and the processing for display jackpot related commands is returned to.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the process of S3311, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display jackpot-related command process is ended as it is.

Returning to FIG. 112, the description will be continued. In the process of S3008, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S3010), and the back image change command If there is (S3010: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S3009) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4603) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4001). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S4002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4001 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S4002. .. When the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S4002 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than 2 back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the process of S3010, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S3010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3010), and there is an error command. If (S3010: Yes), the error command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

Details of the error command process (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S4102), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S4102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S4102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the process of S3012, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a counter command among the unprocessed commands (S3014).

When it is determined that there is a counter command in the process of S3014 (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to S3001. The counter command notifies the display control device 114 of the timing of lighting the sub LED 290 in the audio lamp control device 113. The lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the notified timing of lighting the sub LED 290. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, a sub symbol is set in a sub symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) described later. Thereby, with reference to the display clock counter 223m that is a counter synchronized with the voice lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the sub-symbol is displayed at the same timing as the timing when the sub LED 290 is turned on in the voice lamp control device 113. Since it is possible, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol can be produced in synchronization.

In the process of S3014, if it is determined that there is no counter command (S3014: No), then it is determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016), and if there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes), reception The drive data storage area 223p is updated based on the command (S3017), and the process proceeds to S3001.

By the process of S3017, the display content (for example, display angle) can be changed according to the updated information driven by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, so that a suitable effect can be executed.

In the process of S3016, if it is determined that there is no drive data command (S3016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3018), and the process returns to S3001.

In the processing of S3001 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes). ), and the processes of S3002 to S3013 and S3019 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3001 to S3013 and S3019 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3001 that there are no unprocessed new commands, The command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S2911) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 113(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 113(b)) that are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed, and other The command is deleted without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122, details of the above-described display setting process (S2903) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this display setting processing.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S4201), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S4201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S4202 to S4204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S4202), and then S4203 to S4204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4301).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary for each sprite to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 119. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

In S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer updating process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S4403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and this processing is ended. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S4406), terminates this processing, and returns to display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, when the variable display data table is set, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4402: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

Here, returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S4206 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, in order to set the display of the sub symbol, a sub symbol setting process is executed (S4207). Here, details of the sub symbol setting process (S4207) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. This sub symbol setting process is a process for displaying the sub symbol on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in synchronization with the sub LED 290 whose lighting is controlled in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the sub symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not it is a variable period (S4501). In the process of S4501, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation period (S4501: No), it is not the timing to display the sub-symbols displayed corresponding to the fluctuation, and thus the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is the fluctuation period (S4501), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502). Specifically, it is determined whether, of the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n, the information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m is the lighting information.

In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) is selected. Of these, the information of the sub-symbol is set to be turned on (changed), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) Of these, the information on the sub-symbols is set to be off (changed), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When the process of S4207 is completed, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4209: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag 233z is on. Yes (S4210).

As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the finalized display effect is not yet produced, and the finalized display effect is reached. Therefore, first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set (S4311) and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S4212). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4213), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4215), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4216), and returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol final display effect in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect that is performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by S4216, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4210, if the confirmed display flag 233z is OFF instead of ON (S4210: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is ON (S4217). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the display data table for demo is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting them in the table buffer 233d (S4218) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4219). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4222), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

In the process of S4217, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S4217: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Therefore, the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2912) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting a display data table that specifies that (not shown) is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 123(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S4702). In the process of S4702, when the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237 and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S4702 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Further, as a result of the processing in S4701, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the processing proceeds to S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No), it is determined that the resident target image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

As a result of the processing in S4703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting processing (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer updating process (S4205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2903). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Further, in the processing of S4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the processing of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4805. In the processing of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

In the processing of S4806, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S4806 that the transfer processing is not completed (S4806: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4806: Yes), the process moves to S4807. Further, as a result of the processing in S4805, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is turned on (S4807). If the transfer start flag is turned on (S4807: Yes), image data to be transferred is present. Is turned off (S4808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S4807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4809). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S4809: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4813, if the back image determination flag in the on state is that of the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing in S4813, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer processing, if the back-side image is changed based on the reception of the back-side image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the back-side image is changed. The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, among the image data used in step S1, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d must be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the above-described drawing correction processing (S2906) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this drawing correction processing. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting the effect to be displayed according to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

In the drawing correction process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901). In the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not driven (S4901: No), there is no need to correct the drawing content, and thus this processing is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4902 in order to perform the correction according to the driving state.

In the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to slide (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to slide (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of sliding movement. (S4903) and S4904 are executed. In the process of S4903, the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected, so that the display positions of the symbols 1 to 3 are integrally changed corresponding to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (display). It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the processing of S4902, when it is determined that the slide driving is not performed (S4902: No), the processing of S4903 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4904.

In the process of S4904, it is determined whether the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904). In the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and the display angle of all images are displayed according to the rotationally driven rotation amount. ) Is corrected (S4905), and this processing ends.

By the processing of S4905, the display coordinates (and display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the rotation amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, so that even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates, a suitable effect is displayed. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the above-described drawing process (S2907) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2904). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the rearranged sprites are sorted in the detailed order for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 111B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

As described above, the first control example is configured to display the over-winning effect when the game ball overwins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the over-winning has occurred during the jackpot game, so that the player can provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

As the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of gaming balls over-winned may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily understand the number of gaming balls that have won an over-win. In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of game balls that have won the over prize. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, which can enhance the interest of the player.

In the first control example, as the over-prize effect, the over-win prize effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in accordance with the progress of the round in the jackpot game. That is, the selection ratio of the over-prize effect is configured to be different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the character strings suggesting right-handedness (right-handed right-handed right-handed) are arranged in a circle and displayed. Thereby, even when the display screen (sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

It should be noted that a display suggesting a right-handed stroke may be performed and a voice suggesting a right-handed stroke (for example, a voice saying "please right-hand") may be output. With this, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is right hitting.

In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LEDs are blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. Configured to.

As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 cannot be visually recognized, the blinking display state of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. According to the displacement, the display position of the design is changed. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 and perform an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to preferably display the effect.

In the first control example, the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are vertically driven (slide) (that is, the display area is vertically long) and horizontally (slide). The display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected in this case (that is, when the display area is horizontally long). As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 and perform an effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a tenth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine that displays an effect when the gaming ball overwins the specific winning opening 65a has been described.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the game balls over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in an area visible to the player, and the ending effect of the jackpot game is set according to the number of the stored game balls. It was configured to change the contents of the performance. As a result, it is possible to focus on the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the first control example described above, the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device) is displayed by arranging and displaying the character strings suggesting right-handed (right-handed, right-handed, right-handed) in a circle. Even when 81) rotates, the gaming machine capable of suitably suggesting that the game state is right hitting has been described.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for indicating the game state (the direction in which the game ball is shot) are arranged in a circle on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the circumference thereof is arranged. The gaming patterns are configured to be suggested by the lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern and counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a-j arranged in a circle. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse video, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the game state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged circumferentially.

In the second control example, in comparison with the first control example, the variable winning device 65 is over-winned and the game balls are changed so as to be stored in an area visible to the player. A distribution member 65c for distributing whether or not to store the winning game balls and a distribution motor 65c2 for driving the distribution member, and a decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in a game state. The difference is that the direction notification LEDs 295a-j for indicating the (direction of shooting the game ball) are arranged in a circle. Further, the contents of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control process 113 are partially changed. The difference is that you did. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, the present control example is different in that the inside of the variable winning a prize device 65 in the above-described first control example is changed, and the other points are the same.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, the variable winning a prize device 65 in the present control example has the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 a predetermined number of times (for example, when the jackpot game is started, as in the first control example. , 15 times (round). In each round, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or a predetermined number (10) balls are won).

In each round, a predetermined number of game balls that have won the prize are discharged by flowing down the normal winning passage 65e1 in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, game balls that have won more than a predetermined number (so-called over-winned game balls) are configured to flow down the over-winning flow passage 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

On the left side of the opening/closing door 65f1, a performance unit for performing a performance with the game ball after winning the variable winning device 65 is formed. This effect section will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 128. In each round game, game balls that have won more than 10 prizes (hereinafter referred to as over-winning prizes) are distributed members 65c (see FIG. 128). And the effect of whether or not to be guided to the storage channel 65e4 is executed. In the present control example, it is configured such that, in each round, when the four or more balls are stored in the storage channel 65e4, the holding balls that are hits are stored in the holding balls. As shown in FIG. 127, since the distribution member 65c and the storage flow path 65e4 are arranged at positions visible to the player, more prize balls will be paid out than usual by over-winning during the jackpot game. In addition to the expectation for that, it is possible to enjoy the effect of whether the over-winning game ball is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved.

Next, the details of the variable winning a prize device 65 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128A is a rear view of the variable winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening formed at a height that allows one game ball to pass, and the game ball entering the opening is directed to the back side of the game board 13. A guideway is formed to guide Inside the specific winning opening 65a, a guide hole for guiding the game ball to a guide path for letting the game ball flow down is formed, and the guide hole and an over-winning flow passage 65e3 or a normal prize described later. It is formed so as to communicate with the flow path 65e1. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guide hole, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is detected.

A winning passage switching member 65b is arranged between the normal winning passage 65e1 and the over-winning passage 65e3, and the game balls are distributed to the normal winning passage 65e1 and the over-winning passage 65e3. Has been done. The prize flow passage switching member 65b is rotated upward by an unillustrated over-winning solenoid so that its tip is oriented horizontally (see FIG. 128(b)) and is rotated downward so that its tip is directed downward. It is configured to be rotatable in the state (see FIG. 128(a)). When the over-winning solenoid is turned on, the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward (see FIG. 128(b)), and when the over-winning solenoid is turned off, the winning flow path switching member 65b is moved downward. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128(a)).

The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path for vertically flowing down the game ball when the prize flow path switching member 65b is rotated downward (see FIG. 128(a)), and is for discharging the game ball. It is configured to communicate with the discharge flow path 65e2. The discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a game ball flowing down. This normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path through which the game balls until 10 balls are won in each round flow down, and the flow down game balls pass through the discharge flow path 65e2 and the probability variation switch 65a5 is arranged. Is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine after being guided to. The game ball detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball like the game ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, it is possible to store a game ball and use it for an effect.

The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path for flowing down the game ball to the left in a state where the winning-flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward and communicates with the over-winning flow path 65e3 (see FIG. 128(b)). Is. The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path through which over-winning game balls that have won over 10 balls in each round flow down. At the end of the over-winning flow path 65e3, an over-winning detection switch 65a2 (photo sensor) for detecting passage of an over-winning game ball is arranged. On the downstream side of the over-winning flow path 65e3, a distribution member 65c for allocating the over-winning game balls to the storage flow path 65e4 and the discharge flow path 65e2 is arranged.

The distribution member 65c has a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than that of one game ball. A shaft portion is formed at the center of the distribution member 65c so as to project to the back side, and is configured to be rotatable left and right by a stepping motor. The distribution member 65c is configured with a recessed area into which one game ball can be inserted as a storage area 65c1. The storage area 65c1 has an opening formed on the side surface of the distribution member 65c so that a game ball flowing down from the over-winning flow path 65e3 can enter. The storage area 65c1 is configured such that when a game ball enters, the entire game ball fits within the storage area 65c1, and even if the distribution member 65c rotates, the rotation is not hindered. Has been done. The distribution member 65c is a position (see FIG. 128(a)) at which the game ball flowing down from the over-winning flow passage 65e3 can always be received by the head region 65c1 (see FIG. 128(a)). It is stopped with the opening facing, and two seconds after the game ball is detected by the over-prize detection switch 65a2, the game ball is stored in the storage area 65c1 so that it rotates in either the left or right direction. It is configured. The direction in which the ball is rotated is determined on the basis of the result of judgment whether or not the reserved ball is stored in the reserved ball. As will be described later in detail, when a reserved ball that is a jackpot is stored, a lottery is executed with a probability of 1/2 each time an over-winning game ball is generated, and if a lottery is won, it is rolled out. The minute member 65c rotates to the left, and the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Note that the upper limit number is 6 balls, and when the 6 balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the distribution member 65c rotates to the right with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. Then, the game ball stored in the discharge flow path 65e2 is caused to flow down. In addition, in the case of being out of the above-mentioned 1/2 probability lottery, the distribution member 65c is rotated rightward, and the game balls in the storage area 65c1 are guided to the discharge flow path 65e2 (distribution). To be done.

In the case where the holding ball which is a big hit is not stored in the holding balls in the hold (when the holding ball which is a big hit is stored when the probability variation switch 65a5 is passed (including before passing the probability variation switch 65a5)) , 1/3, and the sorting member 65c is swung to the left and right in the same manner as in the case where the above-mentioned big hitting holding ball is stored. When the reserved ball which is a big hit when passing through the switch 65a5 is stored, the over-winning ball is guided to the storage area 65i up to a maximum of 4 balls, and the distribution member 65c is on the right for the game balls larger than that. The game ball that is rotated in the direction and stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the discharge flow path 65e2.

As described above, the storage channel 65e4 has the storage area 65i capable of storing up to six over-winning balls at the end portion. The storage area 65i is formed with a height that allows the game balls to be stacked in two stages and has a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined to the right, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging the game balls in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end portion. The storage switching member 65g has a shaft portion 65g1 formed on one end side rotatably fixed to the upper wall portion of the storage region 65i and is rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128(b). ) And a state in which the tip portion is oriented vertically downward and is rotated downward. In this control example, at the start of the big hit game, it is in a state of being rotated downward, and based on the ending start timing which is the end timing of the big hit game, the storage area is rotated upward (rotated in the upper right direction). The game ball in 65i is configured to be discharged to the storage discharge channel 65e6. A storage/discharge switch 65a4 (photosensor or the like) capable of detecting the game balls discharged from the storage area 65i is arranged at the upstream portion (entrance portion) of the storage/discharge flow path 65e6. The game balls discharged from the storage area 65i are not guided to the probability variation switch 65a5.

Although not shown, a switching member 65h and a probability variation switch 65a5 that are varied by the probability variation solenoid 65k are provided at the destination of the discharge flow path 65e2. When the probability variation solenoid 65k is on, the flowing down game ball can pass the probability variation switch 65a5, and when the probability variation solenoid 65k is off, the flowing down game ball cannot pass (or is difficult) through the probability variation switch 65a5. Is configured to be.

In this way, in the variable winning device 65 in the present control example, the winning flow passage switching member 65b is configured so that the game balls pass through the normal winning passage 65e1 until the number of ten winning balls determined in each round is reached. Is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to separate the flow path of the game ball that has won over and the game ball that has not won over, and it is possible to accurately detect the game ball that has won over.

In the present control example, the game board 13 is hollowed out on the front surface of the rendering unit (the distribution member 65c, the storage channel 65e4, and the storage area 65i), and is configured to be visible from the front side of the game machine 10. There is.

As described above, in this control example, when an over-winning occurs in each round, the distribution member 65c is rotated to perform an effect as to whether or not the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the over-winning is achieved. The player can visually recognize that a game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, can confirm the over-winning, and can enjoy the effect of whether the distribution member 65c rotates to the left or right. it can. Depending on the number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i during the jackpot game, it is also possible to predict the hit determination result of the hold balls stored in the hold. In this control example, when the holding ball which is a big hit is stored in the holding ball, the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i with a high probability, and thus the storage area 65i is distributed by the distribution member 65c. The determination result in the reserved ball can be predicted also by the frequency of distribution to the. Therefore, the player stores the game balls in the storage area 65i to store the holding balls that are the big hits in the holding balls, and the big hits are continuously executed in a short period even after the big hit game. Can have expectations for Further, in this control example, the maximum number of game balls to be guided to the storage area 65i is set to be variable according to the determination result stored in the hold, so that the result of determination of win/fail can be obtained early from the number of guidance. Can be predicted. Further, when five or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it is possible to recognize that a holding ball that is a big hit is stored in the holding, and the player is notified of the determination result at an early stage, which is interesting. Can be improved.

In addition, in the present control example, although it is configured to notify that the reserved balls that are a big hit with five or more balls are stored, the number of balls or the like may be set as appropriate. In addition, the lottery probability of whether or not to distribute to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c may be appropriately set. Furthermore, the lottery probability of distribution may be changed according to the history of the occurrence rate of over-winning prizes (in the previous jackpot game). Furthermore, the maximum number based on the determination result in the reserve ball guided to the storage area 65i may be changed according to the occurrence rate of over-winning (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of the big hit game, during the big hit game, or the like, the third symbol display device 81 is provided with characters or voice guidance such as "If three game balls are accumulated in the storage area 65i, the holding sequence is confirmed!!". Thus, the player can easily play the game. Furthermore, although the distribution member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by rotating, the distribution member 65c is not limited to this, and may be arranged in a seesaw shape. In addition, by guiding all over prize balls to the storage area 65i, the judgment result in the reserved ball is notified by the number of accumulated over prize balls, and is used for promotion production during a jackpot game from normal symbols to probability variation symbols. You may. In this case, it is conceivable that the number of over-prize balls during the jackpot game may give a chance to be promoted.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second control example, in comparison with the first control example described above, the distribution motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. However, the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The distribution motor 65c2 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is drive-controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 is started and the distribution member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the distribution motor 65c2 is alternately driven in the counterclockwise direction and the clockwise direction at regular intervals (two-second intervals), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c has flowed down the over-winning flow passage 65e3. A position that rotates 120 degrees counterclockwise around the position where the game ball can be received (a position where the game ball in the storage area 65c1 flows down to the storage channel 65e4) and a position that rotates 90 degrees clockwise ( The game ball in the storage area 65c1 is alternately moved to a position where it flows down to the outflow path 65e5) (see FIG. 128).

The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp output device 113, and lighting is controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The direction notification LEDs 295 are arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and five pieces (295f to 295j) are provided on the upper decorative surface 523b1 and five pieces (295a to 295e) are provided on the lower decorative surface 523b2. (See FIG. 132). As described above, when the gaming state is a gaming state in which the player strikes to the right, the direction notification LED 295 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the lighting order is clockwise (clockwise), and it is suggested that the player strikes to the right. (Notification), when the game state is a left-handed game state, the direction LED 295 is controlled to turn left and right (counterclockwise) so that the left-handed state is controlled. (Notified).

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example in that a storage number counter 203v and a storage upper limit number 203w are added. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The stored number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have been distributed to the storage region 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. In the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), the value of the stored number counter 203v is incremented by one when the distribution motor drive is set with the distribution destination 65e4 as the distribution destination (see FIG. 133). 5111). Then, in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4, it is determined whether the game balls will be distributed to the storage region in excess of the storage upper limit number. Referenced for. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the storage number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the big hit game.

The storage upper limit number 203w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of game balls that are distributed to the storage region 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. The value of the storage upper limit number 203w is set in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 134) according to the pending winning information (that is, in accordance with the degree of expectation of a big hit thereafter) (see FIG. 134). See S5103, S5105, S5106). Then, when the value of the storage number counter 203v described above is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w, the allocation destination is allowed to be determined in the storage channel 65e4. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the storage upper limit number 203w is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a specific winning port state 223p and a stored number counter 223r in addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is open, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is open, and that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Indicates. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to an open state when a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game (that is, opening of the specific winning opening 65a) is received from the main control device 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136). The closed state is set when the closing command based on the closing of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is received (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when the winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2032 of FIG. 136), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether the command is based on over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, which is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in the present control example, will be described. 131A and 131B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect executed in the present control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 131A, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven vertically will be described.

As shown in FIG. 131A, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are vertically driven, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the The display content displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 is changed.

Specifically, in the state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. An image of a star is displayed on the section.

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 is visible in the central portion. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left and displayed. The image of the star that is moved and displayed in the upper right and the upper left is displayed across the visible third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, and is moved and displayed in the lower right and lower left. The image of the star is displayed across the visible third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2.

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is driven further upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is driven further downward, the star images that are moved to the upper right and upper left and displayed are displayed on the upper display surface 523a1. The star image displayed by moving to the lower right and lower left is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

In this way, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, as the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven up and down, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 The effect of moving the star image in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is displayed together. As a result, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be driven up and down, and an effect according to the driving can be displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 131B, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right will be described. ..

In the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the above-mentioned upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are vertically driven. The same image data is used, and the effect is executed by correcting the rotation angle and position of the image data. As a result, it is possible to reduce the volume of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect.

Specifically, in the state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. An image of a star is displayed on the section.

The image of the star displayed in the center is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. Accordingly, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) by 90 degrees, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven to the left, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven to the right, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 is visible in the central portion. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left and displayed. The image of the star displayed by moving to the upper left and the lower left is displayed across the visible third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, and moved to the upper right and lower right to be displayed. The image of the star is displayed across the visible third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2.

The star image that is moved and displayed in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is counterclockwise (when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down). It is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise and displayed. Further, the display positions are corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, the display area is vertically long. The display area changes to a horizontally long display area. Therefore, the display position is corrected so that each star pattern has a small vertical movement amount and a large horizontal movement amount. Accordingly, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) by 90 degrees, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is driven further upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and the display position of each star image are corrected, and the images are moved to the upper left and lower left. The displayed star image is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the star image that is moved to the upper right and lower right is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

As described above, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the above-described upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. The same image data is used in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the effect is performed, and the effect is executed by correcting the rotation angle and the display position of the image data. As a result, it is possible to reduce the volume of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect.

In this control example, the display position of the image data is corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) so as to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the image data may be compressed (reduced) so as to be horizontally long.

Further, when either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven due to a failure or the like and the display area cannot be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display area. Alternatively, the image data may be compressed (reduced). As a result, even when either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven and the display area cannot be expanded, it is possible to preferably display the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a game method suggesting effect executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents of the game method suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), the decorative surface 523 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is decorated with an imitation of an apple, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 is decorated with the left half thereof. The remaining right half is decorated on the lower decorative surface 523b2. Therefore, by driving the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to be adjacent to each other, it is possible to perform an integrated effect.

Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are circumferentially arranged on the round fruit of the decoration of the decoration surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LED 295a is arranged at the uppermost position of the right half, and the direction notification LEDs 295 are arranged in that order clockwise (direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c... 295j). The direction notification LED 295j is arranged at the uppermost position of the left half.

The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are controlled by lighting by setting a right-handing notification command or a left-handing command according to the current game state by a game method notification process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

When the right-handing notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a gaming state of performing right-handing is set, first, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on and off, then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on and off, Thus, the respective direction notification LEDs 295 are turned on and off in the clockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circle are turned on and off in a clockwise direction (clockwise direction), which suggests to the player that the player is currently in a right-handed gaming state ( Notification).

On the other hand, when the left hitting notification command indicating that the current gaming state is the left hitting gaming state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on/off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on/off. , And so on, the direction notification LEDs 295 are turned on and off in the order of counterclockwise rotation. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circle are turned on and off counterclockwise (counterclockwise), which suggests to the player that the player is currently in a left-handed game state. (Notification) can be made.

FIG. 132(b) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven clockwise by 90 degrees with respect to FIG. 132(a). Also in this case, when the right-handing notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on and off in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction). When the left-handing notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on and off counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

As described above, in this control example, regardless of the state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, the same control process is executed to make a game state in which the right hit (or left hit) is performed. Can be suggested (notified). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the control process from becoming complicated.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 133. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in this control example. This jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of main controller 110.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

Then, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and the present process is ended. To do.

Further, by the process of S1131, the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON, and thus it becomes possible to store the game ball that has entered the storage region 65i. This storage area 65i is an area in which over-winning game balls flow down, and the content of the ending effect is configured to differ according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game. .. The game ball stored in the storage area 65i is flown down to the storage discharge passage 65e6 by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to OFF at the end of the jackpot (before the start of the ending effect).

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the big hit (S1101: No), it is then determined whether or not the big hit is in progress (S1103). In the process of S1103, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF (S1132), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1134), This process ends.

By the process of S1132, the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF, so that the game ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed through the detection switch 65a1 can flow down to the normal winning passage 65e1. Although the details will be described later, when a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of game balls pass through the detection switch 65a1 in the same round, the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to ON and enters the specific winning opening 65a. The game ball that has passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1 and flows down to the over-winning flow path 65e2.

In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the closing operation timing (S1133). When it is determined in the processing of S1133 that it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to ON (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to OFF (S1135), and the closing command is set. Then (S1136), the present process is terminated.

By the process of S1134, the over-win prize solenoid 65b1 is set to ON, so that the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a and passing through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning passage 65e1. It is ready to flow down to the winning passage 65e2. The game ball flowing down to the over-winning flow path 65e2 flows down to the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c and is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5.

By the process of S1135, the open solenoid is set to OFF, so that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

By the processing of S1136, the fact that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. By notifying the closing command, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine that the incoming ball number command notified thereafter is the incoming ball number command based on over-winning.

In the processing of S1133, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106). In the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1133, when it is determined that it is not the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: No), it is then determined whether or not it is the storage and discharge timing (S1137), and it is determined that the storage and discharge timing is reached. If so (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is set to off (S1138), and this processing ends.

In the process of S1137, if it is a predetermined timing as the jackpot game (5 seconds before the ending timing of the ending effect in this control example), it is determined to be the storage discharge timing. As a result, the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i before the ending effect can be counted by the storage/discharge switch 65a4, and the ending effect corresponding to the count result can be displayed.

The storage and discharge timing is not limited to the above. For example, the numbers may be counted such that they are discharged in each round, or may be discharged at the timing when the ending command is received.

In the processing of S1137, if it is determined that it is not the storage and discharge timing (S1137: No), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the storage and discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage and discharge switch 65a4 is set to the game ball. When it is determined that the sheet has passed (S1139: Yes), the storage and discharge command is set (S1140), and this processing is ended.

By the processing of S1140, since the storage discharge command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 can count the number of game balls stored during the jackpot game, and depending on the count result. The ending effect can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1139, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

In the process of S1108, when it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1108: Yes), the processes of S1109 and S1110 are executed and the present process is ended, as in the first control example.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: No), the distribution motor setting process is executed (S1141), and other processes (notification process (S1111), winning process) (S1112) and abnormality processing (S1113) are executed, and this processing is ended.

Here, the details of the distribution motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether the distribution motor 65c2 is driven so as to distribute the game ball that has passed through the over-winning prize switch 65a2 to the storage flow passage 65e4 or the out flow passage 65e5. This is a process for setting.

In the distribution motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), it is not necessary to drive the distribution motor to distribute the game ball. finish. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution motor may be always driven.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the held winning information includes winning information that is a jackpot. Yes (S5102).

In the process of S5102, when it is determined that the pending winning information includes the winning information of the big hit (S5102: Yes), it is the case that it is determined that the big hit will occur thereafter. Is set to 4, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5102, when it is determined that the winning information held is not the jackpot information (S5102: No), then it is determined whether the predictor flag 203u is on (S5103). ).

In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the precursory flag 203u is ON (S5103), although it is not decided that a big hit will occur after that, it is a case where a big hit is likely to occur. Is set to 3, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the precursory flag 203u is ON (S5103: No), when all the pending winning information is out (that is, when the probability of being a big jackpot thereafter is low). Therefore, the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 2, and the process proceeds to S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined which of the storage passage 65e4 and the out passage 65e5 the game sphere that has passed through the over-winning switch 65a2 is to be sorted (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

Specifically, if the pending winning information has big winning information, the table for big winning is used, and if the value of the counter is “0 to 2”, the distribution destination is stored. The path 65e4 is determined, and in the case of "3 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, if there is no jackpot information in the pending prize information, a table for deviation is used. If it is determined to be “2 to 5,” the distribution destination is determined to be the outflow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

In this way, when the pending winning information has a big hit, the distribution destination is likely to be determined to the storage flow path 65e4, and when the pending winning information does not have a big hit, the sorting destination is determined to the out flow path 65e5. It is structured to be easy. The distribution ratio is not limited to this, and may be changed appropriately.

When the process of S5107 is completed, it is determined whether or not the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 in the process of S5107 (S5108).

In the process of S5108, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 (S5108: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

In the processing of S5109, when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set with the distribution destination 65e4 as the distribution destination. In S5111), the stored number counter 203v is incremented by 1 (S5112), and this processing ends.

By the drive control of the distribution motor 65c2 by the process of S5111, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over-winning flow passage 65e2. The state (direction) in which the storage channel 65e4 is in communication with the storage channel 65e4 is changed. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, and flow down to the storage area 65i via the storage flow path 65e4. Become. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to the position (origin position) in which it is in a state of communicating with the over-winning flow passage 65e2.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution destination is the outflow path 65e5 (S5108: No) and when the value of the storage number counter 203v is the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes). Sets the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 with the distribution destination being the outflow path 65e5 (S5112), and ends this processing.

By the drive control of the distribution motor 65c2 by the processing of S5112, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over-winning flow passage 65e2. The state (direction) of changing from the open state to the state of communicating with the out channel 65e4. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the out flow path 65e4. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in which it is in a state of communicating with the over-winning flow passage 65e2.

In this way, in the distribution motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 is determined based on the pending winning information (that is, according to the degree of expectation of a big hit thereafter). Configured differently. As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 can be suggested to the player. Since it can be noticed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, since the rendering unit 65α is configured to be visible, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be viewed. As a result, attention can be paid to the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, since the storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is provided in the production unit 65α so as to be visible, the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the jackpot game can be changed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be easily grasped and is easy for the player to understand.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the present control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) is changed to execute the game method notification process (see FIG. 138), and the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103). The difference is that the jackpot related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead, the ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of the ending process (see FIG. 105), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 135. In the main process 2, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

After the processing of S1811, the game method notification processing is executed (S1831), and the processing proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the game method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Here, the jackpot-related process 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 136. As described above, in the present control example, the main controller 110 is the closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a is closed during the jackpot game, and the storage discharge command indicating that the game ball has passed the storage discharge switch 65a4. Sent by. In contrast to the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 103) in the first control example, the jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912) in this control example is different in that it is modified to perform the processing when these commands are received. Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the opening command is not received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether the round number command is received (S2003).

When it is determined that the round number command is received in the process of S2003 (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S2004), and the round for display is displayed based on the value of the round number counter 223g. A number command is set (S2005). Then, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state (S2031), and this processing is ended.

By the process of S2031, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state based on the reception of the round number command indicating the start of the round from the main control device 110. As a result, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state is a normal winning (that is, not an over-winning).

On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning number command is received (S2006).

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command is received (S2006: Yes), it is then determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2032). In the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is the closed state (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on over-winning, so the over-winning process is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is the open state (S2032: No), the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, so the normal winning command is set. The setting is made (S2010), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether the closing command has been received (S2033). In the process of S2033, when it is determined that the close command is received (S2033: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2034), and this process is ended.

In this way, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state when the closing command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, after the closing command is received from the main control device 110 until a new round number command is received (that is, after the specific winning opening 65a finishes the specified number (10) of winnings, the next specific winning is performed. Until the opening of the mouth 65a), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state. This makes it possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is the winning number command based on over-winning.

If the closed state is set based on the elapse of the predetermined period (30 seconds), it may not be determined that the over-winning is achieved. In this case, the elapsed time from the start of the round may be measured and it may be determined whether or not the closing command is received at the elapse timing of the predetermined period.

In the processing of S2033, when it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2033: No), it is then determined whether or not the storage discharge command has been received (S2035). In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage/discharge command is received (S2035: Yes), the storage/discharge counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S2036), and the present process is ended.

Since the storage discharge command is transmitted from the main control device 110 by the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, when all the storage discharge commands are received, the value of the storage discharge counter 233r is stored. It is the number of game balls stored in the area 65i. The display content of the ending effect is determined based on the value of the storage discharge counter 223r. That is, the ending effect corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received (S2011). In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command is received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting process 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is executed. finish.

In the process of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command is not received (S2011: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are performed in the same manner as the jackpot-related process of the first control example (see FIG. 103 ). The process is executed and the present process is terminated.

Next, details of the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 137. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example in that the ending effect is selected according to the value of the storage discharge counter 223r. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ending effect process 2 (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is turned on (S2201). If it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is turned on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is performed. The continuous effect is selected as (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209.

In the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is larger than 4 (S2231). In the process of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage discharge counter 223r is 4 or less (that is, when the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is 4 or less) (S2231: No). ), the normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect, and the process proceeds to S2209.

On the other hand, in the process of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage discharge counter is larger than 4 (that is, when the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is more than 4 balls) (S2231: Yes). ), similarly to the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2203 to S2208 are executed, and the process proceeds to S2209.

In the process of S2209, a display ending effect command indicating the ending effect selected in the process of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208 or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, similarly to the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed, and the present process is ended.

As described above, in this control example, when the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the ending effect that suggests the degree of expectation that there is winning information that is a big hit in the hold is selected. When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, the normal ending effect is selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the value of the storage and discharge counter will be 2 or more in the jackpot game (that is, two or more game balls will enter the storage area 65i). Can be improved.

Although the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is set to 2 or more, the present invention is not limited to this and may be set to 3 or more, or such a limitation may be omitted.

Furthermore, only when the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately indicates whether or not there is a winning information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may do so.

Further, the table for selecting the ending effect may be changed according to the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r.

Details of the game method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138. In the game method notification process (S1831), the current game state is a game state in which the game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down the left side of the third symbol display device 81 (so-called left-handed game state), and the third symbol display. This is a process for suggesting (displaying) which one of the game state (so-called right hitting game state) in which the right side of the device 81 is shot so that the game ball flows down.

In the gaming method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state (S5201). In the processing of S5201, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state (S5201: Yes), it is the gaming state in which right-handing is performed, so the display right-handing suggestion command is set (S5202). ).

The display right-handing suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display right-handing suggestion command, whereby the third symbol display device 81, or the sub-device. An image suggesting right-handedness is displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 523. With this, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

When the process of S5202 is completed, the right-handing suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and the process is completed. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are sequentially turned on and off one by one in the order of 295a to 295j by the right hitting suggestive LED command set in the process of S5203. Be done. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are turned on clockwise (clockwise), which is right for the player. It can be suggested (notified) that it is in a game state of hitting. As a result, even during the performance in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inverted state, it is possible to suggest (notify) that the player is in the game state in which the player is right-handed by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b. ..

Further, the suggestion (notification) of the game state of right-handed striking is that the LED is turned on clockwise (clockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Since there is not, it is possible to make a suggestion (notification) with the same control.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5201, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving or the probability variation gaming state (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67.

In the process of S5201, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the game state is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 even though the game state is the left-handed game state. Since the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided (that is, the case where the right-handed game is being performed), the processing of S5205 is performed to suggest (notify) that the game state is the left-handed game. Move to.

In the process of S5205, a left-handed display suggesting command for display is set (S5205). The display left-handing suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display left-handing suggestion command, whereby the third symbol display device 81 or the sub On one of the liquid crystal display devices 523, the character "Please return to the left!" is displayed. With this, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

When the process of S5205 is finished, the left hitting suggestive LED command is set (S5206), and the process is finished. The direction indicating LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are sequentially turned on and off one by one in the order from 295j to a by the left hitting suggestive LED command set in the process of S5205. Be done. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are turned on counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the player is informed. It is possible to indicate (notify) that the player is in the left-handed gaming state. Thereby, even during the production in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inverted state, it is possible to suggest (notify) that the player is in the left-handed game state by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b. ..

Further, this suggestion (notification) that the game state is left-handed is that the lighting of the LED is performed counterclockwise (counterclockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. Since there is no change, it is possible to make a suggestion (notification) with the same control.

As described above, in the second control example, the distribution ratio for allocating the game balls over-winning during the big hit to the storage flow path 65e4 is based on the pending winning information (that is, the big hit is subsequently made). Configured differently (depending on expectations). As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 can be suggested to the player. Since it can be noticed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the second control example, the production section 65α in which the distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game balls is arranged is made visible. As a result, the player can visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, and the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be focused on, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the second control example, a storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is provided in the rendering unit 65α so as to be visible. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 during the big hit game, and to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the second control example, the game balls over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in a region visible to the player, and the jackpot is awarded according to the number of the stored game balls (the value of the storage discharge counter 223r). It was configured to change the effect contents of the ending effect of the game. As a result, it is possible to focus on the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved.

It should be noted that only when the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether or not there is jackpot information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may do so.

In the second control example, direction notification LEDs 295a-j for indicating a game state (direction of shooting a game ball) are arranged in a circle on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and are arranged in the circle. The gaming state is suggested by the lighting pattern (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse video, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the game state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged circumferentially.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as an eleventh embodiment with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145.

In the above-described first control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2, which are the back sides of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, are used. I explained about the gaming machine that performs the production.

On the other hand, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a1 facing the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display effect on the surface 523a2 is configured to be executable by a mirror effect in which it can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine via a mirror (mirror) 298. Accordingly, since the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the back surface thereof can be used at the same time for the effect, the variation of the effect can be increased. This can improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror), and light is reflected from the bright side to be a mirror (mirror). However, when viewed from the dark side, light penetrates and becomes like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the LED 297 on the rear surface of the mirror, the rear surface of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 simply becomes a window (glass).

In this control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) that is inverted and becomes the back side is ready for display (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on, The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. This prevents the player from seeing the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display is ready, so that it is possible to provide a suitable effect.

Here, an aspect of the mirror effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the mirror effect in this control example. FIG. 139(a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to the close position, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), in the mirror effect in this control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left-right direction and are moved to the proximity position, and the proximity thereof is set. At the position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted, and the upper decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

A left mirror 298a is arranged on the left rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a right mirror 298b is arranged on the right rear side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are arranged so as to be inclined toward the rear (rear side) position toward the center of the pachinko machine 10. When the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are viewed from the upper side, It is arranged in the shape of a letter (see FIG. 139(b)). Therefore, the rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the center side of each mirror 298 can be viewed from the front side through the right mirror 298a and the left mirror 298.

The right mirror front LED 296a is arranged on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and the left mirror front LED 296b is arranged on the front side of the left mirror 298b. Further, the left mirror rear surface LED 297a is arranged on the rear surface side of the left mirror 298a, and the right mirror rear surface LED 297b is arranged on the rear surface side of the right mirror 298b. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are respectively configured by magic mirrors, and when the left mirror front side LED 296a is turned on, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror, and the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decorative surface 523b1 is The decoration mode can be displayed. When the left-mirror rear LED 297a is lit, the magic mirror is transparent and the rear side is visible (a transmissive member, not a mirror) and does not form a mirror surface. Therefore, the rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not reflected on the left mirror 298a. Is configured. The right mirror 298b is similarly configured.

With such a configuration, the state of the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between a state in which the player can visually recognize it and a state in which the player cannot visually recognize it, thereby providing the player with a fresh effect. You can

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The third control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 are connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device, and the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different. The difference is that the contents and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 141. As shown in FIG. 141(a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a mirror liquid crystal drive scenario 222d4 is added to the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and the other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 141(b). The mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 is a scenario for sliding and then reversing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

In the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4, a set value (operating speed (pps)) to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141(b), the slide motor 431 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 50 pps, and the number of operation steps is defined in accordance with the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m. Is defined as 100, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

Corresponding to the value “2001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 100 pps, the operation step number is defined as 200, and the operation direction is defined as the forward direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value “8001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 100 pps, the operation step number is defined as 200, and the operation direction is defined as the negative direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value “10001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 50 pps, the operation step number is defined as 100, and the operation direction is defined as the negative direction. ing.

Then, the information "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored in correspondence with the value "12001" of the drive scenario counter 223m.

As described above, in the mirror effect driving scenario 222d4, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and at the close position, the normal position is changed to the reflection position (the display surface (523a1 facing the rear side). 523a2) is turned over to a position where it can be visually recognized from the front side through the mirror 298) over 2 seconds, and then maintained at the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then again over 2 seconds from the reflection position to the normal position. It reverses and slides from the proximity position to the separation position over 2 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a flag 223s during mirror effect is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mirror effect in-progress flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not the mirror effect is being executed. When the flag is on, it indicates that the mirror effect is being executed, and when it is off, the mirror effect is being executed. Indicates that there is no. The mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as the drive scenario in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145) (that is, when the mirror effect is set as the effect pattern). Is set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is turned on, in the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144), the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 are controlled to be turned on and off, and the display content is inverted with respect to the display control device 114. The command to perform this is notified. Although illustration is omitted, it is set to OFF when the variable display in which the mirror effect is executed ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the present control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, a change is made so that the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 143) is executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143), and the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106). The difference is that the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead of the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 143. In the main process 3, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed, similar to the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1811 is completed, the mirror effect setting process is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. The mirror effect setting process (S1851) is a command for controlling turning on/off of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 and a command for inverting the display content to the display control device 114 when the mirror effect is being executed. This is a process for notifying.

In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect flag 223s is on. In the process of S1851, when it is determined that the flag 223s during mirror effect is off (S5301: No), the mirror effect has not been executed, and thus this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, when it is determined that the mirror effect flag 223s is ON (S5301: YES), it is determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). In the process of S5302, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF so that the mirror 298 does not function as a mirror (S5303). ), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to ON (S5304), and this processing ends.

When it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

In the processing of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to the close position. This is the timing at which the reversing operation is completed at the close position. In this case, since the display surface (523a1, 523a2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized from the front side through the mirror 298 by performing the reversing operation, the process proceeds to S5306. Transition.

In the process of S5306, a display inversion correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front LED 296 is set to ON (S5307), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to OFF (S5308), and this process is ended. As a result, the display content of the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) is symmetrically inverted (that is, the display content becomes normal when viewed through a mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and thus the mirror 298 is illuminated. Will function as a mirror.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

In the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309: Yes), it is the timing when the display surface facing the back side is reversed to the front side in the mirror effect. ..

In this case, the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF (S5310), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to ON (S5311), the display inversion correction end command is set (S5312), and this processing is ended.

By the processing of S5310 to S5312, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 which is display-controlled by the display control device 114 is set to the normal state, and the mirror 298 is set to the state not functioning as a mirror. To be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), it is then determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

In the process of S5313, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), since it is the end timing of the mirror effect, the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF (S5314), and the mirror is turned on. The back LED 297 is set to OFF (S5315), and this processing ends.

By the processing of S5313 and S5314, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 can be turned off when the mirror effect is not performed, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

Details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described below with reference to FIG. 145. In the variable display setting process 3 (S1813), the processes of S2301 to S2307 are executed as in the first control example. When the process of S2307 ends, it is determined whether the drive scenario stored in the process of S2306 is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351).

In the process of S2351, when it is determined that the drive scenario is the drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351: Yes), it means that the variation pattern including the mirror effect is set, and thus the mirror effect flag 223s. Is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2308.

On the other hand, in the process of S2351, when it is determined that the drive scenario does not correspond to the mirror effect (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2308.

After S2308, the processes of S2308 to S2312 are executed similarly to the first control example described above, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a1 facing the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display effect on the surface 523a2 is configured to be executable by a mirror effect in which it can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine via a mirror (mirror) 298. Accordingly, since the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the back surface thereof can be used at the same time for the effect, the variation of the effect can be increased. This can improve the interest of the player.

In the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged for executing the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror). When viewed from the bright side, light reflects and becomes a mirror (mirror), but when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and becomes a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the rear side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the LED 297 on the rear surface of the mirror, the rear surface of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 simply becomes a window (glass). In this manner, by controlling the lighting of the LED, it is possible to change whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or a window.

In the case of functioning as a window, a pattern, a pattern, or the like can be provided on the back side of the mirror 298 so that the mirror 298 can be integrated with the sub liquid crystal display device 523. In addition, by arranging LEDs for effect on the back side and varying the lighting pattern of the LEDs, it is possible to change the pattern or pattern that is visible when the mirror 298 functions as a window. As a result, the variation of production can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the third control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) that is inverted and becomes the rear side is ready for display (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on. The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. This prevents the player from seeing the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display is ready, so that it is possible to provide a suitable effect.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested (notified) depending on whether or not the mirror 298 functions as a mirror in the mirror effect. As a result, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the close position, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted at the close position, and then the upper display is displayed. Since it is possible to focus on whether the display contents of the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are displayed via the mirror 298, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<Modification of Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a modification of the mirror effect described in FIG. 139 will be described. In the present control example, in the case of executing a mirror effect for allowing the player to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, a left back mirror member 299a is provided between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved to project (reflect) on the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With such a configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely inverted up to a position facing the third symbol display device 81 in parallel, the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 of the sub liquid crystal display mode with the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely flattened.

<Regarding Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the effect display in the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150. 148 to 150 are different from the effect display shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example, in which the order in which the respective symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) are overlapped is different, and It is used for the technology (so-called "probability variation promotion production") that uses the performance display to notify whether the jackpot this time is a regular jackpot or a probability variation jackpot after displaying that the symbol has been won as a jackpot with the third symbol. is there.

In this case, when the probability variation promotion effect is started, as shown in FIG. 148(a), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid so that the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered (the upper display surface 523a1 and The lower display surface 523a2 is slid so that the lower display surface 523a2 is in contact with the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the fact that the "probable variation promotion effect" is started is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(a), one promotion effect design is enlarged and displayed. The symbols for promotion effect displayed in this case are different from the third symbols displayed corresponding to the normal game (special symbol variation game), and are the character symbols in which the parts indicating the numbers are deleted. If the character design displayed in this state is the same mode (character) as the "probability variation design" (designated with specific numbers, for example, "3" or "7") used in the normal game, , "Probability change promotion effect", it becomes an effect display showing that the probability change jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the character design displayed in this state is the same mode (character) as the design other than the "probability variation pattern" used in the normal game, "probability variation promotion without notifying that the probability variation jackpot was won. Production” continues.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 148(b) to 150(b), the display area is gradually expanded by slidingly moving the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the display area is expanded to the state of FIG. 150(b). When enlarged, some character designs (for example, the character design displayed in the center) out of the three character designs displayed side by side in the up-down direction are provided with a mode showing numbers.

If the number given in this case is a number (for example, "3", "7") attached to the "probability variation pattern" used in the normal game, the "probability variation promotion effect" wins the probability variation jackpot. The effect display will indicate that. That is, as the character design used in this "probability variation promotion effect", a character similar to the third design used in the normal game is used, and a plurality of numbers (at least "probability variation design" are attached to the character design). And a number other than the “probability variation pattern”).

According to the above-mentioned “probable change promotion effect”, the timing at which the character symbol is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148(a)) and the timing at which the character symbol is given a mode indicating a numeral (FIG. 150(b) It is possible to notify that the probability variation jackpot has been won at the two timings of ()). Therefore, from the start to the end of the "probability variation promotion effect", the player will pay attention to the performance while expecting to be promoted to the probability variation jackpot, which can improve the enjoyment of the game. effective.

Further, in the above-mentioned "probability change promotion effect", a mode showing numbers is attached to each of the three character designs displayed in the vertical direction, and the numbers attached to the respective character designs are set according to a predetermined rule (numbers are added. If it is an odd number, or if the number satisfies a predetermined rule (eg, “341” is displayed), it may be notified that the probability variation jackpot has been won. Thereby, it becomes possible to more effectively use the enlargement of the display area for the effect.

In addition, the timing at which a mode showing a number is attached to the three character patterns displayed in the vertical direction is shifted, or the mode of the character patterns displayed in the three vertical directions is switched in the middle of the "probability change promotion effect". You may do it.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a twelfth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. In the fourth control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, after transmitting an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game as a command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only a closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is transmitted. Is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the time elapsed after receiving the closing command. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

First, with reference to FIG. 151, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a big jackpot flag 223t, and a clock counter 223u are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is open, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is open, and that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Indicates. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state (see S5306 in FIG. 156) when it is determined that it is the round start timing in the jackpot game timing process (see FIG. 156), and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set. The closing state is set when the closing command based on the closing is received (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when the winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether the command is based on over-winning.

The jackpot flag 223t is a flag for determining whether the jackpot game is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the jackpot game is being executed, and when it is off, the jackpot game is being executed. Indicates that there is no. The big hit flag 223t is set to ON when the opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2071). Then, in the jackpot timing process (see FIG. 156), it is referred to for determining whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and when it is determined that it is the ending start timing of the jackpot game. , Are set to OFF (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the present control example, the big hit operation setting process 4 (S1105) in which a part of the process is changed is executed instead of the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example described above. The difference is that the ending process 4 (S1110) in which a part of the process is changed is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 96), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that the round number command is not set, and other points are the same, and thus the details thereof will be described. Description is omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the round by measuring the elapsed time after receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round. As a result, the number-of-rounds command indicating the start of the round in the jackpot game from the main controller 110 can be eliminated, and the processing load can be reduced.

Next, details of ending processing 4 (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. The ending process 4 (S1110) is different from the ending process (FIG. 96) in the first control example in that the ending command is not set, and the other points are the same, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the ending by counting the elapsed time after receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round and the number of executed rounds. There is. Thereby, the ending command from the main control device 110 indicating the start of the ending in the jackpot game can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. In the present control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the jackpot related processing 4 (S1912) in which a part of the processing is changed is executed instead of the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 103), and the jackpot timing processing. (See FIG. 156) is different from the point that it is newly executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 154. In the main process 4, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed, similar to the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the processing of S1811 is completed, the jackpot timing processing is executed (S1831), and the processing proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the jackpot timing process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the jackpot-related processing 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination processing (S1812) will be described in detail. In the jackpot-related processing 4 (S1912), in contrast to the first control example, when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received, the jackpot medium flag 223t is set to ON, and a specific winning during the jackpot game. When the closing command indicating that the mouth 65a has been closed is received, the elapsed time after receiving the closing command is measured, and the number of rounds command and the ending command are received. The difference is that the processing is deleted, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot related process 4 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received (S2001), and when it is determined that the opening command is received (S2001: Yes), the opening command for display is set. Then (S2002), the big hitting medium flag is set to ON (S2071), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the winning number command is received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2072).

In the process of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is the closed state (S2072: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on over-winning, so the over-winning process is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, so the normal winning command is set. The setting is made (S2010), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether the closing command has been received (S2073).

In the process of S2073, when it is determined that the close command is received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2074), and the clock counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), and this processing ends.

By the processing of S2075, the clock counter 223u is initialized to 0 every time the specific winning opening 65a is closed. As a result, the elapsed time after the specific winning opening 65a is closed can be measured.

On the other hand, in the process of S2073, when it is determined that the close command is not received (S2073: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are executed similarly to the first control example, and the present process is ended.

Next, details of the jackpot time counting process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. The jackpot time counting process (S1831) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process of timing to determine the round start timing and ending timing in the jackpot game.

In the big hit time counting process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 223t is ON (S5301). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is off (S5301: No), it is not in the jackpot game, and since it is not necessary to measure the time, this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the big hit flag 223t is on (S5301: Yes), the value of the clock counter 223u is incremented by 1 (S5302), and the added value of the clock counter 223u is added. Based on this, it is determined whether or not it is the round start timing (S5303).

Specifically, if the value of the clock counter 223u is 4000, it means that 4 seconds have elapsed since the end of the round, so that it is determined that it is the round start timing.

If it is determined that it is the round start timing in the process of S5303 (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S5304), the display round number command is set (S5305), and the specific winning is performed. The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5303, if it is determined that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), then it is determined whether it is the ending start timing (S5307).

Specifically, when the value of the round counter 223g is 16 and the value of the clock counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the clock counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving the close command in the final round. It is determined that it is the case, and it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

In the final round, when the ending effect is started a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed, it is sufficient to wait until the time counter 223u reaches the predetermined period.

In the processing of S5307, when it is determined that it is the ending start timing (S5307), the same ending setting processing (see FIG. 105) as in the first control example is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), the big hit medium flag 223t is set to OFF (S5310), and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the fourth control example, after the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is mainly performed. The control device 110 is configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the time elapsed after receiving the closing command. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification 2 of the first control example>
Next, a modification of the open/close display effect in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 158.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. To be done. On the lower right part of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative pattern Z is displayed in a blinking manner. It shows that the middle symbol that is the reach display mode is changing.

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start to slide vertically with respect to each other. The reach symbols are moved to the upper right, respectively, and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed region of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A school of fish effects (an effect in which the school of fish is variably displayed) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 158(c), when the sliding amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. In this way, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area where the middle pattern is displayed is a small group of fish and the school of many fish is moved and displayed in the area where the middle pattern is not displayed. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the fluctuation of the school of fish schools in accordance with the sliding direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and to effectively use the display area that is expanded by sliding to move the school of fish. It is possible to widen the area to be used.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid to the left and right (slides outward in the left-right direction). FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. To be done. On the lower right part of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative pattern Z is displayed in a blinking manner. It shows that the middle symbol that is the reach display mode is changing.

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start to slide outward from each other. The reach symbols are moved to the upper right, respectively, and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed region of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A school of fish effects (an effect in which the school of fish is variably displayed) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 158(c), when the sliding amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. In this way, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area where the middle pattern is displayed is a small group of fish and the school of many fish is moved and displayed in the area where the middle pattern is not displayed. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the fluctuation of the school of fish schools in accordance with the sliding direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and to effectively use the display area that is expanded by sliding to move the school of fish. It is possible to widen the area to be used.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated to the state shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the rotation coordinates and the display coordinates of the display data of the similar fish school effect are corrected and set, so that the respective display is performed. Is configured to be. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately store the fish school data when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates, and the data amount can be suppressed.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168. Although the detailed description of the liquid crystal display device 523 is omitted in the first embodiment, the internal configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described in detail in the thirteenth embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 161. 159(a) is a front view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159(b) is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective front view of the liquid crystal display device 523, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523.

As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the liquid crystal display device 523 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view, and a front case 541 disposed on the front side (player side) and a rear side of the front case 541. , A liquid crystal device 543 disposed between the front case 541 and the rear case 542 facing each other, a substrate member 545 disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal device 543, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member. And an interposition member 544 provided between the opposing surfaces of the 545.

The front case 541 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and a front opening 541a is formed in the bottom surface of the front case 541 so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction in a rectangular shape. The front case 541 is formed so that the liquid crystal device 543 can be disposed inside from the side of the back opening 541b that opens on one side. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543 can be viewed by the player through the front opening 541a.

The front case 541 is formed with two recesses 541c, which are recessed inside the left and right side surfaces. Further, a through hole 541d penetrating in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541 (horizontal direction in FIG. 159(a)) is formed at the tip of the recessed portion 541c.

Further, in the concave portion 541c formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541 (left side in FIG. 159(a)), a concave portion that is concave from the rear opening 541b side of the concave tip portion to the front opening 541a side. 541c1 is formed. The recessed portion 541c1 is a recess that engages with an engaging portion 544b of the intervening member 544 described below.

The liquid crystal device 543 includes a liquid crystal display 543a for displaying symbols and the like on the front surface (a surface visible to the player through the front opening 541a). Further, the liquid crystal device 543 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its lateral dimension is set to be substantially the same as the lateral dimension inside the rear opening 541b, and its longitudinal dimension is set to the left and right of the front case 541. The width is set to be substantially the same as the width between the recesses 541c facing each other.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces thereof are in contact with the inner wall of the front case 541. This makes it possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 from being displaced with respect to the front case 541.

Further, the liquid crystal device 543 has a rear surface (a surface opposite to the liquid crystal display 543a) covered with a rear surface portion 543c formed of a plate member made of a metal material. The back surface portion 543c is a shield member for blocking electrical noise (reducing the influence of the electrical noise on the liquid crystal device 543), and includes a substrate member 54 and a conductive member 546 (connecting means) described later. It is electrically connected. Accordingly, the static electricity charged on the liquid crystal device 543 (back surface portion 543c) can be released to the substrate member 545 through the conductive member 546.

The liquid crystal device 543 is set such that its thickness dimension (dimension in the depth direction in the plane of FIG. 159(a)) is smaller than the distance dimension from the rear opening 541b side of the inner portion of the front case 541 to the front opening 541a side. .. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 can be housed inside the front case 541. Further, the front case 541 is provided with a standing portion 541e which stands on the inner side surface on one side in the short-side direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)).

The standing portion 541e is formed so as to partially project from the substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541. The distance dimension between the inner side surface of the front case 541 facing the rear opening 541b and the side surface of the standing portion 541e is set to be substantially the same as the thickness dimension of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged inside the front case 541, the side surface of the standing portion 541e and the liquid crystal device 543 are in contact with each other.

That is, the standing portion 541e is brought into a state of being engaged with the lower end portion of the liquid crystal device 543. Thus, in the state where the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged inside the front case 541, the liquid crystal device 543 is prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 comes out of the rear case 542) with respect to the front case 541. It can be made easier.

The liquid crystal display 543a is formed in a shape that is substantially the same as the shape of the opening 541a of the front case 541 in a front view, and its size is set to be substantially the same as the opening 541a. This allows the player to view the entire area of the liquid crystal display 543a through the opening 541a of the front case 541.

The liquid crystal device 543 is provided with fastening holes 543b formed in a circular shape at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The fastening hole 543b is a hole to which the tip of the screw inserted into the through hole 541d of the front case 541 is fastened, and the axis of the fastening hole 543b is in the same straight line as the axis of the through hole 541d when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. Are formed in a shape. Accordingly, the liquid crystal device 543 can be fixed to the front case 541 by fastening the screw to the fastening hole 543b through the through hole 541d in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged inside the front case 541.

Further, as described above, since the through hole 541d is formed in the recessed tip of the recess 541c, the head of the screw can be housed inside the recess 541c when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. A wall portion that covers the space of the recess 541c is formed on the front opening side 541a side of the front case 541. On the other hand, on the rear opening side 541a side of the recess 541c, a back case 542 is attached at a position facing the recess 541c. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the fastening portion between the front case 541 and the liquid crystal device 543.

The interposition member 544 is formed in a plate shape of a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a plurality of openings 544a that open in the plate thickness direction (from the liquid crystal device 543 side to the substrate member 545 side), and protrudes in the longitudinal direction from one end in the longitudinal direction. It is mainly provided with an engaging portion 544b and a through hole 544c penetratingly formed in the plate thickness direction at the other end in the longitudinal direction.

The opening 544a is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and its inner wall is formed along the plate thickness direction. In this embodiment, four positions are formed on the interposition member 544. Further, a plurality of openings 544a are formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 159(a)) with respect to the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and the openings 544a are formed at different positions in the longitudinal direction.

Since the pair of third portions 546b5 are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of the endless belt (cloth member 546b), the deformability of the cloth member 546b in the opening direction of the endless belt can be enhanced.

Further, the four openings 544a are formed on one side in the short-side direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)) with respect to the center position in the short-side direction of the interposition member 544. The interposition member 544 is formed in an outer shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of the front case 541, and is disposed on the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the four openings 544a are located at one side in the short-side direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)) with respect to the center position in the short-side direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (front case 541).

As described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged so that one pair faces the rear case 300 (see FIG. 7). Therefore, in the state where the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 is directed to the player side (the state shown in FIGS. 7 and 11), the openings 544a are arranged so as to be biased toward the opposing side.

The engaging portion 544b is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction from the end surface on the one end side (left side in FIG. 159(a)) in the longitudinal direction of the interposing member 544, and the protruding tip end surface thereof is a short side of the interposing member 544. It is bent in both directions (vertical direction in FIG. 159(a)). That is, the engaging portion 544b is formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front.

The tip of the engaging portion 544b is disposed inside the concave portion 541c via the concave portion 541c1. Therefore, the one end side (the engaging portion 544b side) in the longitudinal direction of the interposition member 544 can be positioned in the lateral direction with respect to the front case 541.

The through hole 544c is formed so as to penetrate in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction. The inner diameter of the through hole 544c is substantially the same as or larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 541f formed in a cylindrical shape on the back surface of the other end side (right side in FIG. 159(a)) of the front case 541. Is also set a little larger. The through hole 544c and the protrusion 541f are formed coaxially in the assembled state of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Therefore, when the interposition member 544 is attached to the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543, the protrusion 541f can be inserted into the through hole 544c. As a result, the other end side (through hole 554c side) of the interposition member 544 in the longitudinal direction can be positioned with respect to the front case 541.

As described above, the interposition member 544 is positioned on both sides in the longitudinal direction with respect to the front case 541 by the through hole 544c and the engaging portion 544b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interposition member 544 from moving (displacement) with respect to the front case 541.

The board member 545 is formed in a plate shape having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is formed smaller than the shape of the rear case 542 in front view. The substrate member 545 is formed by providing a plurality of LEDs that irradiate the rear case 542 with light on the rear surface on the rear case 542 side. This allows the rear case 542 described later to emit light.

The board member 545 also includes a first region 545a in which a plurality of protrusions 545a1 (see FIG. 164) protruding toward the front case 541 are formed. A detailed description of the first area 545a will be given later.

The substrate member 545 is formed with a plurality of through holes that are circularly opened in the plate thickness direction, and the through holes are fitted into the plurality of protrusions that protrude from the intermediate member 544 into a cylindrical shape, so that the intermediate member is formed. It can be positioned relative to 544.

The rear case 542 has a front view shape that is substantially the same as the front case shape of the front case 541, and is also formed to have substantially the same size as the outer shape of the front case 541. The rear case 542 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the front case 541 side. Therefore, by combining the front case 541 and the back case 542, the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 can be arranged between the facing (inside) the front case 541 and the back case 542.

Next, the conductive member 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 is an exploded view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 163(a) is a top view of the conductive member 546, and FIG. 163(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 546 taken along the line CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb in FIG. 163(a). Note that FIG. 162 illustrates a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the interposed member 544 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the conductive member 546 is inserted into the inside of the opening 544a in the front portion (upper portion of FIG. 163(a)) on the front case 541 side when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. .. The front surface of the conductive member 546 is in contact with the rear surface 543c of the liquid crystal device 543, and the rear surface (lower part of FIG. 163(b)) is in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545. ..

The conductive member 546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped long in one direction (left and right direction in FIG. 163(a)) in a state before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523 (between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545). In addition, the conductive member 546 is parallel to the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 165) of the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 163(a)). It is arranged inside.

Further, the conductive member 546 has a laterally long rectangular outer shape in a front view before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, and has a longitudinal dimension that is a distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the opening 544a of the interposing member 554. The dimension in the short side direction is smaller than the distance dimension in the short side direction of the opening 544a.

Further, the conductive member 546, when assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, is constricted toward the inner side in the longitudinal direction at the intermediate portion between the contact surface with the back surface portion 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a. A constricted portion 546c is provided.

The conductive member 546 is mainly provided with an elastic member 546a formed of an elastic material and cloth members 546b arranged on four surfaces of the elastic member 546a excluding two opposite surfaces.

The elastic member 546a is formed of a non-conductive sponge-like material. The elastic member 546a is a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in one direction when the cloth member 546b is not provided (that is, the constricted portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is not formed). In this embodiment, the elastic member 546a is made of synthetic sponge formed by foaming a synthetic resin of polyurethane.

The cloth member 546b is formed of an endless belt-shaped cloth-like body (a conductive cloth in the present embodiment) in which a fibrous body formed of a conductive metal material is woven. Further, since the cloth member 546b is formed of a fibrous body of a metal material, it is easily deformed, and the conductive member 546 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 523 while being wound around the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a. The constricted portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is formed by making a crease at both ends in the longitudinal direction (left and right in FIG. 163(a)) of the intermediate portion between the contact surface with the 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a. Can be formed.

Further, in the conductive member 546, since the cloth member 546b is formed in an endless belt shape and the elastic member 546a is fitted in the cloth member 546b, the assembly of the conductive member 546 is simplified and the cost of parts is reduced. be able to.

Further, since the cloth member 546b is formed of a conductive cloth, its flexibility can be ensured, so that the durability of the cloth member 546b when repeatedly deformed due to the relative displacement of the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 can be improved. It is possible to improve.

In addition, although the case where the cloth member 546b is formed of a conductive cloth has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cloth member 546b may be formed of a conductive nonwoven fabric. Examples of the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric include a polyester fiber whose outer surface is coated with one or both of copper and nickel and which are woven or not woven to form a cloth (sheet). .. Examples of the weave method include plain weave and twill weave.

The cloth member 546b includes a first portion 546b3 that is in contact with one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543, a second portion 546b4 that is in contact with the ground portion 545d (projection 545a1) of the substrate member 545, and A pair of third portions 546b5 connecting between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, and a width dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 (a contact surface with the back surface portion 543c of the first portion 546b3). Or the width dimension of the third portion 546b5 (dimension L11 (see FIG. 163(a))) on the contact surface between the second portion 546b4 and the first region 545a (the pair of the first and second portions 546b4 and 545a). The facing dimension (dimension L12 (see FIG. 163(b))) of the three portions 546b is set to a small dimension at least in part.

Therefore, the cloth member 546b can be easily deformed in the opening direction of the endless belt by using the third portion 546b5. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction and in the opening direction of the endless belt of the cloth member 546b, the first portion 546b3 and the second portion of the cloth member 546b are moved. It is possible to prevent the portion 546b4 from sliding on the one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Further, as described above, since the elastic member 546a can be elastically deformed to form the constricted portion 546c in the conductive member 546 by making a crease in the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a is held in the elastically deformed state. it can. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a can be increased in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other (vertical direction in FIG. 163(a)). As a result, the elastic member 546a can be easily clamped between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545.

Further, the cloth member 546b is bonded at the contact surface with the elastic member 546a, and both ends thereof are bonded together. As described above, since the elastic member 546a is formed of a sponge body, the adhesive area of the cloth member 546b is reduced by the amount of bubbles when the sponge body is formed. Therefore, the cloth member 546b is easily separated from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a. When the cloth member 546b is peeled from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a, it becomes difficult to maintain the contact state between the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 546, and static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device 523 described later is applied to the ground portion 545c (projection of the substrate member 545). 545a1) could be difficult to escape.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since both ends of the cloth member 546b are bonded to each other, the area of the bonding surface of the cloth member 546b can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cloth member 546b from coming off from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a.

Further, the cloth members 546b are arranged such that the adhesive surfaces at both ends thereof are arranged at the one constricted portion 546c of the conductive member 546 (that is, the adhesive surface between the end portions of the cloth member 546b is provided on one of the pair of third portions 546b5). Is formed). Accordingly, the contact area of the conductive member 546 with the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be secured.

That is, when the end portions of the cloth member 546b are adhered to each other, the end portions are overlapped with each other to form a step, so that the adhering surfaces of both ends are the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546 with the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. If formed, the contact area between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is reduced by the step difference.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting the one end and the other end of the strip shape, and the connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end of the strip shape is the one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543. Since it is disposed at the (back surface portion 543c) or at a position that is not in contact with the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545, the connecting portion becomes a step and one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 or the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545. It is possible to prevent the contact state with the contact from becoming unstable. That is, the contact area can be secured, and the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545, and the charge can be easily removed.

Further, the conductive member 546, in a state in which the conductive member 546 is not assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, has a distance dimension between opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of left and right constricted portions 546c (a dimension L13 between opposing outer peripheral portions of the pair of third portions 546b5). (See FIG. 163(a)) is larger than the dimension of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 in the longitudinal direction.

Accordingly, when the conductive member 546 is inserted into the opening 544a of the interposition member 544, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 can be elastically deformed, and thus the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily assembled.

That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with a plate-shaped interposing member 544 that is interposed between the one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and has an opening 544a formed therein. Since the size of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the size of the conductive member 546 in the unloaded state in the longitudinal direction, the size of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546 is reduced. It can hold two sides.

Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while holding the conductive member 546 on the interposition member 544, and the positioning with respect to the conductive member 546 can be performed along with the disposition of the interposition member 544. The workability of can be improved.

In the state where the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the constricted portion 546c is smaller than the dimension of the opening 544a in the longitudinal direction, and the two surfaces at the longitudinal ends of the conductive member 546 are not sandwiched by the opening 544a. Further, the conductive member 546 is interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and is only inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the opening 544a and is not fixed by a screw or the like. It is difficult to hold the conductive member 546 during assembly. Therefore, it is necessary to carefully assemble the liquid crystal display device 523.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 can be held by sandwiching the two surfaces of the conductive member 546 at both ends in the longitudinal direction between the openings 544a, so that the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily assembled. Can be done. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 523 and the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is compressed to be deformed inward by the amount of bubbles formed by foaming. Thus, the state of being sandwiched by the opening 544a can be eliminated.

In addition, as described above, the four openings 544a face each other in the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 when the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 is directed to the player (the state shown in FIGS. 7 and 11). It is arranged in a biased manner to the side where Therefore, the conductive member 546 disposed inside the opening 544a is also biased to the opposite side of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 in a state where the liquid crystal display 543a is directed to the player side.

Here, when the liquid crystal display 543a faces the player side and the liquid crystal display devices 523 facing each other are made to collide (merge) at the center of the rear case 300 (see FIG. 7), the two liquid crystal displays 543a are set to one. It is necessary to bring the liquid crystal display devices 523 closer to each other in order to make them easily visible to the player as one display surface.

Further, since the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal display device 523 has an edge portion in which liquid crystal cannot be displayed on the outer edge of the liquid crystal display 543a, in order to allow the player to visually recognize the two liquid crystal displays 543a as one display surface, It is necessary to arrange the two liquid crystal devices 523 without a gap.

Therefore, in order to move the two liquid crystal display devices 523 to positions closer to each other, the two liquid crystal display devices 523 are likely to collide. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 arranged inside the liquid crystal display device 523 are likely to shake. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 inside the liquid crystal display device 523 may collide with other members.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the opening 544a faces the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 toward the player, the conductive member 546 is biasedly arranged on the opposite side, so that the two Shaking inside the liquid crystal device 523 that occurs when the liquid crystal display device 523 collides can be easily suppressed.

That is, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the collision side of the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 arranged inside the liquid crystal display device 523 is high because the kinetic energy on the collision side is high. Easy to shake. Therefore, when the board member 543, the interposition member 544, and the board member 545 swing, the board member 545 collides with another member (for example, the interposition member 544) to short the wiring, or the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal device 543. Etc. may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 arranged inside the liquid crystal display device 523 are electrically conductive to the swaying side. Since the member 546 is arranged, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, it is possible to easily prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 from swinging due to the elastic force of the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the interposition member 544, and the substrate member 545 from being damaged.

Next, the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 164(a) is a front view of the substrate member 545, and FIG. 164(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXIVb-CLXIVb in FIG. 164(a). In addition, in FIG. 164, the first region 545a is illustrated by a broken line. Further, in FIG. 164(a), the wiring 545g is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 164, the substrate member 545 is formed of a plate member 545c formed of a non-conductive resin material in a plate shape, and a conductive metal material provided on one surface side of the plate member 545c. And a cover member 545e formed of a non-conductive resin material, which is arranged so as to cover one side of the ground portion 545d and the plate member 545c. ..

The plate member 545c is a plate material that forms the skeleton of the substrate member 545, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view of the substrate member 545.

The ground portion 545d is a conductor that conducts electricity to the control component mounted on the board member 545. The ground portion 545d in the present embodiment is formed over the entire first region 545a. The board member 545 is formed between the covering member 545e and the plate member 545c, and includes a wiring 545g connected to each ground portion 545.

The wiring 545g is formed of a metal material and is connected to a connector 545f provided on the substrate member 545. The wiring 545g is connected (conducted) to the ground (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 via the connector 545f. Therefore, the electricity input to the ground portion 545d can be released to the ground of the pachinko machine 10 via the wiring 545g.

The covering member 545e is arranged so as to cover the entire area of one surface of the ground portion 545d and the plate member 545c. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the electricity that conducts the ground portion 545d and the wiring 545g from being discharged to another member (such as a chip arranged on the base member 545).

Further, the covering member 545e is not formed around the protrusion 545a1 provided on the substrate member 545, but is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 545a1 by a predetermined distance. In this case, a projection 545a1 described later is projected from the covering member 545e. This ensures the contact (connection) between the conductive member 546 and the ground portion 545d (see FIG. 164(b)).

The plate member 545c, the ground portion 545d, and the covering member 545e described above are illustrated only in FIG. 164(b), and are not illustrated in other drawings.

The first region 545a mainly includes a plurality of protrusions 545a1 protruding toward the liquid crystal device 543 side and a plurality of through holes 545a2 penetrating in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction of the substrate member 545 (left and right direction in FIG. 164(b)). Prepared to be formed.

A plurality of through holes 545a2 are formed in the first region 545a in a state of being aligned in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction of the substrate member 545. In this embodiment, five substrate members 545 are formed in the longitudinal direction, and four substrate members 545 are formed in the lateral direction.

It should be noted that projections 545a2, which will be described later, are fitted into the through holes 545a2 in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction of the substrate member 545 at every other location. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through holes 545a2 penetrating in the plate thickness direction (the state in which the protrusion 545a1 is not fitted) are formed at three positions in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 and at two positions in the lateral direction. ..

The protrusion 545a1 is formed of solder soldered to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545. That is, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged in the through hole 545a2 by soldering to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Therefore, the protrusion 545a1 can be formed in the step of soldering the electronic component to the board member 545. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a step for forming the protrusion 545a1, and the step can be used in common, so that the number of steps can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since the protrusion 545a1 is formed by the solder soldered to the ground portion 545d, the contact area between the cloth member 546b and the ground portion 545d can be secured accordingly, and when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, the substrate The charge can be easily removed through the ground portion 545d of the member 545.

The protrusion 545a1 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 545a2. Further, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged so as to be fitted inside the through hole 545a2, and the outer diameter of the tip end on the liquid crystal device 543 side is formed so as to swell in the radial direction, and the protrusion 545a1 protrudes from the through hole 545a2. It is said that

Accordingly, the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 can be connected (in a state of being in contact with each other), so that electricity conducted to the protrusion 545a1 is transmitted through the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 and the wiring 545g. You can escape to the ground of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the protrusion 545a1 has a radially bulged tip end portion that abuts on the liquid crystal device 543 side of the ground portion 545d, and the outer peripheral surface of the base end portion contacts the inner edge portion of the through hole 545a that penetrates the ground portion 545d. Since they are in contact with each other, the contact area between the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d can be secured. As a result, the static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

Further, the cloth member 546b can be made to follow the shape of the protrusion 545a1, and the cloth member 546b can slide relative to the one surface side (the back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 by that much. Can be suppressed.

That is, since the tip of the protrusion 545a1 is projected from the substrate member 545, the protrusion 545a1 can be arranged in a state of biting into the side surface of the conductive member 546. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the conductive member 546 to be displaced in the direction (shear direction) parallel to the front surface (the left side surface of FIG. 164(b)) of the substrate member 545. As a result, the static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

The protrusions 545a1 are arranged at intervals of one place with respect to the through holes 545a2 formed by arranging a plurality of protrusions. That is, the protrusions 545a1 are arranged in a staggered manner with respect to the through holes 545a2.

Therefore, the plurality of protrusions 545a1 can be used to prevent the cloth member 546b from sliding with respect to the substrate member 545, and the liquid crystal device 543 can easily remove the charged electric charge, and the through hole 545a2 can be used. Thus, the heat generated between the protrusion and the cloth member 546b can be efficiently released.

That is, since static electricity flows through the cloth member 546b in the conductive member 546, heat is likely to be accumulated due to the electricity, and the heat may easily destroy the substrate member 545. However, the heat is easily discharged through the through hole 545a2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the substrate member 545 from being broken by cooling the conductive member 546.

Next, the arrangement state of the conductive members 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. FIG. 165 is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. 166(a) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along the line CLXVIa-CLXVIa in FIG. 165, and FIG. 166(b) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. FIG. 166(c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the range LXVIIIc of FIG. 166(b).

Note that FIG. 165 illustrates a state where the rear case 542 and the substrate member 545 of the liquid crystal display device 523 are removed, and in FIGS. 166(a) to 166(c), the rear case 542 and the substrate member 545 are mounted. The closed state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the conductive member 546 is in a state in which the front side (the first portion 546b3 side described later (FIG. 166(b) upper side)) is in contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543, The back surface side (the second portion 546b4 side (to be described below, FIG. 166(b) lower side) to be described later) is brought into contact with the first region 545a (see FIG. 164(a)) of the substrate member 545, and the elastic member 546a serves as the liquid crystal. The device 543 and the substrate member 545 are arranged in a compressed state in the opposing direction.

That is, in the state where the conductive member 546 is not arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523, the distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 163(a)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 in the facing direction is the same as that of the liquid crystal device 543. The distance dimension L5 is set to be larger than the distance dimension L5 facing the substrate member 545. Therefore, when the substrate member 545 is assembled to the liquid crystal device 543, the conductive member 546 can be compressed in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other.

Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the conductive member 546 in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are opposed to each other (the horizontal direction in FIG. 166(b)) can be increased, so that the conductive member 546 is connected to the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is possible to bring the conductive member 546 into contact with and to maintain the contact state.

Further, since the conductive member 546 is formed with the constricted portion 546c and the elastic member 546a is made of a compressible material, the conductive member 546 is compressed (smallly) in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. In this case, the compressive force can be applied to the fold portion of the cloth member 546b of the constricted portion 546c, and the constricted portion 546c can be folded inside the conductive member 546.

As a result, as described above, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled (when the conductive member 546 is provided between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other), the two ends of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction are separated. The state of being sandwiched between the surface and the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 can be eliminated.

More specifically, in the configuration in which the conductive member 546 is made smaller than the size of the conductive member 546 in the unloaded state and the conductive member 546 is sandwiched by the opening 544a of the interposition member 544, shear deformation of the elastic member 546a is hindered, and thus the liquid crystal device When the 543 or the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the cloth member 546b may slide with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the elastic member 546a is formed of the compressible elastic member 546a, and the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the opening of the intermediate member 544 is opened. Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of 544a and the outer surface of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 546 other than the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 side, the conductive member 546 (elastic member 546a) is formed on the inner edge of the opening 544a. You can suppress being restrained. That is, at the time of assembling work, the conductive member 546 is held in the interposition member 544 (opening 544a) to improve workability of the assembling work, and at the same time, the conductive member is placed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. In a state in which 546 is sandwiched, the elastic member 546a can be easily sheared and the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding on the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

The first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b are in contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, so that the contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, the charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Further, the outer surface of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the elastic member 546a (on the side of the third portion 546b5 of the cloth member 546b) that is sandwiched by the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 is constricted (recessed) toward the inside. Since the portion 546c is provided, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the outer surface of the elastic member 546a starts from the inward constricted portion 546c, and the outer surface of the interposing member 544 is formed. It can be easily deformed in the direction away from the inner edge of the opening 544a (inward of the elastic member 546a). As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 and the outer surface of the conductive member 546.

Further, the conductive member 546 is formed into an endless belt shape by connecting a cloth member 546b to one end and the other end of the belt shape, and the elastic member 546a is fitted into the cloth member 546b to form one end and the other end of the belt shape. Since the connecting portion connecting the parts is disposed on the outer surface side (the third portion 546b5 side of the cloth member 546b) that is recessed inward of the elastic member 546a, it is formed by recessing inward. It is possible to accommodate a connection portion in which one end and the other end of the strip shape are connected to each other in the space. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the connecting portion that connects the one end and the other end of the strip shape to abut the inner edge of the opening 544a of the interposition member 544. As a result, the deformability of the conductive member 546 can be secured.

That is, at the bonding surface between the end portions of the cloth member 546b, the bonded portion of the cloth member 546 is less likely to be plastically deformed due to the fixing of the adhesive material. In the present embodiment, the bonding position is different from the fold position of the cloth member 546b, so that when the conductive member 546b is compressed in the direction in which the liquid phase device 543 and the substrate member 545 oppose each other, the cloth member The position of the fold line of 546b can be folded.

Further, since the bonded portion is less likely to be plastically deformed, the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a is increased in the process of compressing the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546, so that the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from being plastically deformed. As a result, the constricted portion 546c can be easily folded inside the conductive member 546.

Further, as shown in FIG. 166(c), the protrusion 545a1 is disposed so as to project from the substrate member 545 (covering member 545e), so that the conductive member 546 is prevented from contacting the opening edge of the through hole 545a2. Can be suppressed. That is, since the conductive member 546 is lifted by the protrusion 545a1 to form a space between the substrate member 545 (through hole 545a2) and the conductive member 546, it is possible to prevent the through hole 545a2 from being blocked by the conductive member 546.

Thereby, the outside air is caused to flow into the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546 through the through hole 545a, or the air in the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546 is caused to flow out through the through hole ka545a. be able to. That is, it is possible to secure (increase) a circulation path of air and easily cool the conductive member 546 and the substrate member 545. As a result, damage to the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a case where the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is changed will be described. 167(a) to 167(c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

167(a) to 167(c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166(b). 167(b) is a normal state (reference position), and FIGS. 167(a) and 167(c) show a state in which the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is changed.

Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed so as to be displaceable (rotation about the rotation shaft 523c and slide displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) (FIGS. 7 to 14). reference). Therefore, the inertial force of the displacement may change the positional relationship between the respective components inside the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, if the distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other changes, the contact state of the conductive member 546 interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be released. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167, since the conductive member 546 is formed of the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a, the elastic member 546a is elastically deformed, so that the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal are formed. The contact state between the device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be easily maintained.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 167( a ), when the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is close and the distance dimension L 6 is smaller than the distance dimension L 5, the distance dimension L 6 is adjusted. Then, the elastic member 546a is compressed in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are opposed to each other (vertical direction in FIG. 167(a)), thereby maintaining the contact state between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. it can.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(c), the distance between the facing surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is larger than the distance dimension L5 and smaller than the dimension L4 of the conductive member 546 (see FIG. 163). In the case of L7, since the elastic member 546a is arranged in a compressed state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other, the elastic member 546a corresponds to the distance dimension L7. It is possible to maintain the contact state between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 by elastically deforming the 543 and the substrate member 545 in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167(c)).

That is, since the conductive member 546 that is elastically deformable in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167(b)) is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are disposed. It is possible to easily maintain the contact state between the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 when the distance between the facing portions changes.

Next, a case where the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are changed in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. 168. 168(a) to 168(c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

168(a) to 168(c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166(a). 168(b) is taken as a normal (reference position), in FIG. 168(a), the liquid crystal device 543 is located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (right side in FIG. 168(a)) with respect to the substrate member 545. FIG. 168(c) shows a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 has changed to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (left side in FIG. 168(c)) with respect to the substrate member 545.

Further, in FIGS. 168(a) to 168(c), the virtual line KJ1 is located at the center position of the first region 545a in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545, and the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b (see FIG. 163(a)). The virtual line KJ2 is shown by a two-dot chain line at the center position in the longitudinal direction of FIG.

Here, conventionally, a substrate (substrate member 545) having an electric device (liquid crystal device 543) and a ground part (ground part 545d) which is arranged to face one surface of the electric device and is grounded, and the substrate thereof. There is known a gaming machine provided with a connecting means (a conductive member 546 in the present embodiment) for electrically connecting an electric device to the ground part of the. Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member (back surface portion 543c) made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal display 543a). In the conventional product, the connecting means is formed as an arcuate leaf spring, the base end of which abuts (electrically connects) with the ground portion of the substrate, and the arcuate convex surface abuts the shield member (electrical). Connected). The connecting means has a base end fixed to the substrate and an arcuate convex surface pressed against the shield member, and is kept in contact by elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thereby, the static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground through the ground portion of the substrate. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged by static electricity generated due to rolling of a game ball or displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the charge is removed through the ground portion of the substrate to cause color unevenness or dot defects in the liquid crystal display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

However, in the above-described conventional technique, the electric device is displaced, or the electric device is vibrated due to the displacement of another effect member or the input of the external force caused by the rolling/collision of the game ball, thereby shielding the shield. When the member and the substrate are relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connecting means is slid with respect to the shield member, and the connecting means or the contact target of the connecting means is worn. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the one surface (the back surface portion 543c) side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545, and the liquid crystal device 543 or When the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the shear displacement is caused by the relative displacement (the direction orthogonal to the facing direction between the first portion 546b3 side and the second portion 546b4 side of the cloth member 546b). Since the conductive member 546 is formed so as to be deformable (longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546), one side and the other side of the conductive member 546 are connected to the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (projection) of the substrate member 545. It is possible to maintain the state of being in contact with each of 545a1). That is, when the conductive member 546 is sheared and deformed, it is possible to prevent the first portion 546b3 or the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 546 from sliding (displacement) with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 546 or the contact target (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) of the conductive member 546 from being worn.

Further, since the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the rear surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 at the time of assembly. It suffices to sandwich the conductive member 546 between them, and work such as fastening can be unnecessary. As a result, it is possible to improve workability and reduce product cost.

That is, as shown in FIG. 168, when the liquid crystal device 543 changes in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (horizontal direction in FIG. 168(b)) with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546. By elastically deforming, it is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surface.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 168(a), the liquid crystal device 543 changes to one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (right side in FIG. 168(a)) with respect to the substrate member 545 (with respect to the virtual line KJ1). Then, when the virtual line KJ2 changes to one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523), the bending angle of the fold portion formed in the third portion 546b5 is made shallow (obtuse angle), and the first portion 546b3 side. Elastic member 546a is displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction.

In this case, as described above, the conductive member 546 elastically recovers the elastic member 546a in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 by folding the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b inside the conductive member 546. Since it is formed easily, it is possible to prevent the positions of the contact surfaces of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b from contacting the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 546 or the contact target (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) of the conductive member 546 from being worn.

Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 of the present embodiment is configured so that the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated 90 degrees about the axis of the base member 400. In this case, when the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is changed from the state parallel to the horizontal direction to the direction parallel to the direction of gravity, the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 cause the substrate member 545 and While the holding direction of the liquid crystal device 543 is changed, the holding portions of the interposition member 544 and the substrate member 545 with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 are the projections 541f and the through holes 544c on one side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the front case 541. (See FIG. 161) only, the interposition member 544 and the substrate member 545 are likely to be displaced in the gravity direction with respect to the liquid crystal device 543.

Therefore, the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are easily displaced. Therefore, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are displaced, the contact target may be worn.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 546 is arranged such that the opening direction of the endless belt shape is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the deformability of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be improved.

Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees about the axis of the base member 400, and its longitudinal direction is positioned parallel to the horizontal direction (see FIG. 7), and the longitudinal direction is positioned parallel to the gravity direction. It is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being displaced when being displaced to the opened state (see FIG. 11). As a result, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are misaligned, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the contact target.

Further, here, the liquid crystal display device 523 of the present embodiment is configured such that both longitudinal ends thereof are supported and can be slidably displaced in the lateral direction by the slide unit SL (see FIGS. 7 to 14). In this case, to the liquid crystal display device 523, a driving unit (driving motor 431) for enabling the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is connected to one end side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced, static electricity generated by driving the drive motor 431 is easily transmitted from one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523.

On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the present embodiment, the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 is formed (disposed) so as to be biased toward one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposition member 544. Therefore, the conductive member 546 disposed in the opening 544a is in a state of being biased to one end side of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Therefore, the static electricity transmitted from the drive unit (drive motor 431) to the liquid crystal device 543 when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slid in the lateral direction is transferred to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 543 before being transmitted. It is transmitted to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 by the conductive member 546. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity from accumulating in the liquid crystal device 543 due to the slide displacement. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of defects such as color unevenness and dot missing in the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal device 523.

Note that when the liquid crystal device 543 shown in FIG. 168(c) is changed to the left side (left direction in FIG. 168(c)) with respect to the substrate member 545, the liquid crystal device 543 shown in FIG. Since this is only the opposite of the case of changing to the right direction (right direction in FIG. 168(c)) with respect to the member 545, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170, the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Although the cloth member 546b is formed around the elastic member 546a with a constant width in the thirteenth embodiment, the cloth member 14546b is formed with a different width in the fourteenth embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

169(a) is a top view of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 169(b) is a side view of the conductive member 14546 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXIXb in FIG. 169(a). FIG. 16C is a side view of the conductive member 14546 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXIXc in FIG. 169. 170A to 170C are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Note that FIGS. 170A to 170C correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166A. 170(a) to 170(c), FIG. 170(b) is set to the normal (reference) position, and in FIG. 170(a), the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged on the substrate member 545 of the liquid crystal display device 523. In FIG. 170(c), the state in which the liquid crystal display device 543 is changed to one side in the lateral direction (lower side in FIG. 170(a)), the liquid crystal device 543 is positioned on the other side in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 relative to the substrate member 545 (FIG. The state changed to 170 (c) upper side) is shown respectively. Further, in FIG. 170, the cutout portions 14546b1 and 14546b2 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the cloth member 14546b of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment has a short side of the liquid crystal display device 523 on the third portion 14546b5 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 169(a)). A cutout portion 14546b1 is cut out from the end face on the other side (right side in FIG. 169(b)) toward the one side in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (left side in FIG. 169(b)), and one end side in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 169(a) right side of the third portion 14546b5 from the end face of the liquid crystal display device 523 in one lateral direction (right side of FIG. 169(c)) to the other side of the liquid crystal display device 523 in lateral direction (FIG. 169(c)). A cutout portion 14546b2 is cut out toward the left side).

The notch portion 14546b1 is formed at a substantially intermediate position in the facing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 169(a)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546, and the opening direction width of the cloth member 14546b is the same as that of the conductive member 14546. It is set to approximately one third of the width dimension of the cloth member 14546b in the opening direction. In addition, the notch size in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the notch portion 14546b1 (left and right direction in FIG. 169(b)) is the facing direction dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546. Is set to be larger than half of.

The cutout portion 14546b2 is formed at a substantially intermediate position in the facing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 169(a)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546, and the opening direction width of the cloth member 14546b is the conductive member. It is set to approximately one third of the width dimension of the cloth member 14546b of 14546 in the opening direction. In addition, the notch size in the facing direction (left and right direction in FIG. 169(c)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cutout portion 14546b2 is the facing direction dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546. Is set to be larger than half of.

That is, the cutout portion 14546b1 and the cutout portion 14546b2 are formed at substantially the same position in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, and at least a part of each other overlaps in the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 14546. Stated. Accordingly, it is possible to facilitate shear displacement of each side surface of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 14546 is elastically deformed, so that the conductive member 14546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the contact surface with.

More specifically, when the cloth member 14546b is formed endlessly by disposing the cloth member 14546b on four surfaces other than the two surfaces facing each other of the elastic member 546a, the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b is prevented. When the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced from each other in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 14546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced because the cloth member 14546b interferes with the displacement. I was afraid to do it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170(a) or 170(b), the cutout portion 14546b1 and the cutout portion 14546b2 are formed in the third portion 14546b5, so that the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b is reduced. The rigidity of can be reduced. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the elastic member 546a (conductive member 14546) is disposed at the intermediate portion of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 in the facing direction. It can be transformed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 14546 from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the contact surface between the substrate member 545 or the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 14546.

Here, as described above, the engaging portion 544b is formed at one longitudinal end of the interposition member 545, and is inserted into the recessed portion 541c1 formed in the front case 541. Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is configured to be rotatable by 90 degrees about the axis of the base member 400. In a state where the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is parallel to the direction of gravity, the other end of the longitudinal direction is positioned on the upper side in the direction of gravity and the one end in the longitudinal direction is positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, since one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposition member 544 only engages with the engaging portion 544b, the interposition member 544 and the interposition member 544 are engaged with the rotational displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. The substrate member 545 easily shifts in the lateral direction with respect to the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 may be displaced, and the contact target may be worn.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 is formed with the cutout portion 14546b1 and the cutout portion 14546b2, so that the conductive member 546 can be easily sheared and deformed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. That is, the intermediate member 544 can be easily sheared in the lateral direction. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 can be sheared and deformed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being displaced and causing the contact target to be worn.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the through hole 15546d is formed through the conductive member 15546 in the longitudinal direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 171(a) is a top view of the conductive member 15546 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 171(b) is a side view of the conductive member 15546 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLIXIXb in FIG. 171(a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the conductive member 15546 of the fifteenth embodiment is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped having one long side, and a through hole 15546d penetrating in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 171(a)) is formed. The through hole 15546d is formed by penetrating the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

The through hole 15546d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view, which is parallel or orthogonal to the first portion 546b3 (the upper surface of FIG. 171(a)) of the conductive member 15546. Further, the through hole 15546d is formed in the center of the elastic member 546a in a top view.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the through hole 15546d is half the distance dimension in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 15546. The distance dimension of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the through hole 15546d in the facing direction is set to half the distance dimension of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 15546 in the facing direction.

When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 545 by the through hole 15546d, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 15546 is elastically deformed and the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are separated from each other. It is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surface.

More specifically, by forming the through hole 15546d in the conductive member 15546, it is possible to reduce the rigidity of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared and deformed in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in either one of the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, the elastic member 546a is sheared and deformed, and the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 546b. It is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surfaces of the substrate 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the contact surface of the conductive member 15546 from rubbing and damaging the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 15546.

In addition, at both ends of the upper and lower inner surfaces of the through hole 15546d in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b, first recesses 15546d1 recessed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b are formed in the entire area in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. Is formed over the entire length. In addition, the conductive member 15546 includes a second recess 15546d2 that is provided at a position facing the first recess 15546d1. That is, the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed at positions facing each other, and are recessed in the facing direction.

When the conductive member 15546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the first concave portion 15546d1 and the second concave portion 15546d2 are compressed and held by the elastic member 546a so that the concave inner portions are crushed. It will be in the state of being.

Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in either one of the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, the upper and lower side surfaces of the conductive member 15546 (elastic member 546a) extend. To transform. Therefore, with the deformation, the conductive member 15546 is drawn in between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. Therefore, the area where the conductive member 15546 contacts the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed, when the end surface of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is stretched and deformed, the first recess 15546d1 and the first recess 15546d1 are not deformed. The recessed surface of the two recesses 15546d2 can be widened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 15546 from being drawn in between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact area between the conductive member 15546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being reduced.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 15546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the conductive member 16546 is provided with the recessed portion 16546e. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

172(a) is a top view of the conductive member 16546 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 172(b) is a side view of the conductive member 16546 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXXIIb in FIG. 172(a).

As shown in FIG. 172, the conductive member 16546 of the sixteenth embodiment is provided with a recessed portion 16546e that is recessed in the end surface of the cloth member 546b in the opening direction (left and right in FIG. 172(b)). That is, the recessed portion 16546e is formed by partially cutting out the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

The recessed portions 16546e are recessed on the upper surface side (the left surface side in FIG. 172(b)) and the lower surface side (the right surface side in FIG. 172(c)) of the conductive member 16546, and in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. It is formed over the entire area. The recessed portion 16546e is formed at the center of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 172(a)).

Further, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the recessed portion 16546e in the facing direction (the vertical direction of FIG. 172(a)) is determined by the first portion 546b3 and the second portion of the conductive member 16546. It is set to half the distance dimension of 546b4 in the opposing direction, and the depth dimension of one recessed portion 16546e (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 172) is the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 16546 (FIG. 172 (( b) It is set to one-third of the distance dimension in the left-right direction).

When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b by the recessed portion 16546e, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 16546 is elastically deformed, so that the conductive member 16546 and the liquid crystal device 543. Also, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the contact surface with the substrate member 545.

More specifically, by forming the recessed portion 16546e in the conductive member 16546, it is possible to reduce the rigidity of the conductive member 16546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared from the intermediate position in the facing direction between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to either one of the openings of the cloth member 546b with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is deformed and the conductive member 16546 is brought into contact with the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. The displacement of the surface can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the conductive member 16546 from rubbing and damaging the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 546.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a pair of third recesses 16546e1 recessed in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 are provided at the ends in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b on the side surfaces where the two recessed portions 16546e face each other. Is formed over the entire area of the third portion 546b5 in the facing direction.

When the conductive member 16546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the third recess 16546e1 is in a state in which the recessed inside is crushed by the elastic member 546a being compressed and held. It

Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in either one of the opening directions of the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a positioned between the facing portions of the recessed portions 16546e moves in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. The end faces stretch and deform. Therefore, with the deformation, the conductive member 16546 is drawn between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. Therefore. The area where the conductive member 16546 contacts the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third concave portion 16546e1 is formed, when the end face of the elastic member 546a located between the facing portions of the concave portion 16546e in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is elongated and deformed, The concave surface of the third concave portion 16546e1 is expanded. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 16546 from being drawn in between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact area between the conductive member 16546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being reduced.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 546 is formed in a cube has been described, but in the seventeenth embodiment, the conductive member 17546 is formed in an irregular shape. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the conductive member 17546 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 173. 173(a) is a top view of the conductive member 17546 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 173(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 17546 taken along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 173(a).

As shown in FIG. 173, in the conductive member 17546, the first portion 17546b3 is curved in an arc shape in the top view, the second portion 546b4 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion are formed. A constricted portion 546c is formed at an intermediate position in the facing direction of the portion 546b4 and has a constricted portion 546c that is inclined toward the center side in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5.

The conductive member 17546 is formed of an elastic member 17546a formed of an elastic material inside and a cloth member 546b arranged around the elastic member 17546a.

The elastic member 17546a is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a top view and an arcuate portion 17546a2 protruding in a semi-arcuate shape from one side of the rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 in the lateral direction.

The arcuate portion 17546a2 has a length in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 173(a)) of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 which is equal to the length of the facing direction of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the elastic member 17546a. The size is set to about one-half and the constricted portion 546c is formed in the arc portion 17546a2. Accordingly, the elastic member 17546a can be easily elastically deformed from the constricted portion 546c in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 (left and right direction in FIG. 173(a)). Further, the conductive member 17546 is formed in a constant shape in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, a state in which the elastic member 17546a is arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described.

174(a) and 174(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. 175(a) to 175(c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

174(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), FIG. 174(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b), and FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c) corresponds to FIG. 174(b). This corresponds to the cross section of (FIG. 166(b)). Further, in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), FIG. 175(b) is taken as the normal (reference) position, and in FIG. 175(a), the liquid crystal device 543 is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545. In FIG. 175(b), the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced toward the other end side (left side in FIG. 175(a)) in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 (FIG. 175(c)). The state of being displaced to the right side) is shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 174, when the conductive member 17546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the side surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 side is brought into contact with the substrate member 545 and the arc portion is formed. A part of the side surface on the side of 17546a2 is elastically deformed and brought into contact with the liquid crystal device 543 (see FIG. 174(b)).

Note that in FIGS. 174 and 175, the contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 that contacts the conductive member 17546 in the normal state (the state illustrated in FIG. 174(b)) is illustrated as the first contact area 17543d1, and The contact area of the cloth member 546b that contacts the first contact area 17543d1 is illustrated as the first deformation area NR1.

Further, in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 to the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (left side in FIG. 175(a)), the conductive member 17546 is formed in a region different from the first contact region 17543d1. The contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 that contacts with the second contact area 17543d2 is illustrated, and the contact area of the cloth member 546b that contacts the second contact area 17543d2 is illustrated as the second deformation area NR2.

Further, in a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (right side in FIG. 175(c)) with respect to the substrate member 545, a conductive member 17546 is formed in a region different from the first contact region 17543d1. The contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 that contacts the third contact area 17543d3 is illustrated, and the contact area of the cloth member 546b that contacts the third contact area 17543d3 is illustrated as the third deformation area NR3.

In addition, in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), a virtual line KJ1 is shown by a two-dot chain line at a central position in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 in the first region 545a of the substrate member 545.

As shown in FIG. 174, in the seventeenth embodiment, in a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are arranged at the reference position, the first deformation region NR1 of the conductive member 17546 is deformed and the liquid crystal device 543 of the first deformation region NR1 is deformed. The first contact area 17543d1 is contacted. On the other hand, the conductive member 17546 on the side of the rectangular portion 17546a1 is arranged in a state of being in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 as in the thirteenth embodiment.

Therefore, since the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be connected by the conductive member 17546, electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be released to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, elasticity around the constricted portion 546c occurs. By elastically deforming the member 17546a, each contact region and each deformation region can be brought into contact with each other. This can prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 17546. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 from being rubbed and damaged.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 175(a), when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced leftward with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a elastically deforms, so that the elastic member 546a moves to the left side. Being biased. As a result, the left elastic member 546a is pushed toward the liquid crystal device 543 side and abuts on the liquid crystal device 543.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 to the other end in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (left side in FIG. 175(a)), the second displacement region NR2 is set to the second position. By contacting the contact area 17543d2, the contact state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

In other words, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 to the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (left side in FIG. 175(a)), the liquid crystal device By abutting the second displacement region NR2 corresponding to the second abutting region 17543d2 of 543, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 17546. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 from being rubbed and damaged.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are opposed to each other and the liquid crystal device 543 is opposite to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 175(b)). When displaced in the direction, the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact surface of the conductive member 17546 can be separated from each other.

This can prevent static electricity from being conducted from the liquid crystal device 543 to the conductive member 17546 at the same position. Here, since static electricity conducts at a place with low resistance, if the contact surfaces are at exactly the same position, static electricity is repeatedly conducted at a place with low resistance. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 may be partially deteriorated at a portion where static electricity is easily conducted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by separating the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 from the contact surface of the conductive member 17546, the contact position of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member are different due to the difference in expansion and contraction of the cloth member 546b. The contact position of the 17546 can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electric resistance from decreasing at the same position. Therefore, it is possible to change a portion where static electricity is easily conducted, and it is possible to suppress partial deterioration of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 at a portion where static electricity is easily conducted. As a result, the conductivity between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 can be maintained.

Note that the state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the right with respect to the substrate member 545 shown in FIG. 175(c) is opposite to the state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the left with respect to the substrate member 545. Since the contact surface between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 is changed to the third contact area 17543d3 and the third deformed area, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where a part of the conductive member 17546 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but in the 18th embodiment, the conductive member 18546 is formed in a cylindrical shape.

176(a) is a top view of the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 18546 taken along the line CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb in FIG. 176(a).

As shown in FIG. 176, the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed in a circular column shape in a top view. That is, the elastic member 18546a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the cloth member 546b is wound (wrapped) around the outer peripheral surface thereof. In this case, the diameter of the conductive member 18546 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 163(a)) of the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment.

Accordingly, when the conductive member 18546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 slightly moves the elastic member 546 a disposed inside in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is arranged in a compressed state. In other words, the conductive member 18546 is arranged between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 while being elastically deformed into an elliptical shape in a top view.

The cloth member 546b is bonded to the outer peripheral surface of the elastic member 18546a. Further, the conductive member 18546 is disposed in the opening 544a of the interposition member 544 in a posture in which the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is directed to the lateral direction of the liquid crystal device 543, similarly to the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment. ..

When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced about its center. Accordingly, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the contact state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

That is, in the eighteenth embodiment, by rotating the conductive member 18546, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 18546 from being electrically connected to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 at the same position as in the seventeenth embodiment. That is, by rotating the conductive member 18546b, the contact position with the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact position with the substrate member 545 can be changed to suppress partial deterioration of the contact surface. As a result, the conductivity of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 18546 can be maintained.

Further, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced (displaced) with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced, so that it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 18546. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 18546 from being rubbed and damaged.

Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a staggered manner has been described. However, in the first region 19545a of the nineteenth embodiment, the protrusions 19545a1 are arranged on the outer edge of the first region 19545a. It

177(a) is a front view of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). 178(a) is a top view of the conductive member 19546, and FIG. 178(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 19546 taken along the line CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb in FIG. 178(a). 179(a) and 179(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 19546.

Note that FIG. 179(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), and FIG. 179(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b). Further, in FIG. 177(a), the first region 19545a and the second region 19545b are illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 177 to 179, in the first region 19545a of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged only in the through hole 545a2 located along the outer edge of the first region 19545a. In other words, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged along the outer edge of the first region 19545a.

Further, the conductive member 19546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and includes an elastic member 19546a formed of an elastic material and a cloth member 546b arranged on four surfaces of the elastic member 19546a excluding two opposite surfaces in one direction. Prepared to be formed.

The elastic member 19546a is formed of a sponge-like member, and is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped when the cloth member 546b is not arranged. Further, the elastic member 19546a is formed by forming notches 19546a3, which are cut out, on four sides around the side surface on the substrate member 545 side (lower side in FIG. 178(a)). In other words, the elastic member 19546a includes a non-recessed portion 19546a4 which is not formed by cutting out in the center of the side surface on the substrate member 545 side.

That is, the other side of the elastic member 19546a is provided with a recessed portion 19546a3 (first region) facing the region where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 is provided, and a region where the protrusion of the substrate member 545 is not formed. And a non-concave notch portion 19546a4 (second region) facing each other, and the non-concave notch portion 19546a4 (second region) is projected to one side (board member 545 side) beyond the recessed notch portion 19546a3 (first region). Therefore, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the elastic member 546a is compressed, it is possible to increase the surface pressure in the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region). it can. As a result, the non-concave recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) is less likely to ride over the protrusion 545a1, and accordingly, the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding with respect to the substrate member 545. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the recessed portion 19546a3 (first region) can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a that is difficult to shear.

The non-recessed portion 19546a4 has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular inwardly in contact with each protrusion 545a1 arranged around the first region 19545a (a region formed by a tangent line in contact with the inner periphery of each protrusion 545a1). It is formed to be small, and in the present embodiment, it is set to have the same size as the second region 19545b (that is, the size where the outer edge is located between the protrusion 545a1 and the through hole 545a2). Further, the recessed dimension L8 (see FIG. 178(a)) along the facing direction of the first portion 19546b3 and the second portion 19546b4 of the recessed portion 19546a3 is the protrusion dimension L9 of the protrusion 545a1 from the substrate member 545 (FIG. 177). (See (b)) (L8>L9).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 179, when the conductive member 19546 is arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b (second portion 19546b3) arranged in the non-concave cutout 19546a4 is brought into contact with the second region 19545b. It can be installed in the opened state. Further, the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are arranged in the recessed portion 19546a3 by being compressed when the elastic member 546a is arranged between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. The entire area of the cloth member 546b (second portion 19546b3) can be brought into contact with each protrusion 545a1.

In this case, as described above, the recessed dimension L8 is set to be larger than the protruding dimension L9, so that the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 19546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed portion 19546a3.

Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the protrusions 545a1 are arranged in a zigzag pattern with respect to the first region 545a, the entire surface of the cloth member 546b (the second portion 546b3) is substantially uniformly supported by the plurality of protrusions 545a1. Therefore, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be reduced. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing planes, the contact surface between the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be displaced.

On the other hand, in the nineteenth embodiment, the compression ratio of the non-concave cutout portion 19546a4 is set to be larger than that of the concave cutout portion 19546a3, and each projection 545a1 surrounds the non-concave cutout portion 19546a4. It is possible to prevent the position shift unless the cutout portion 19546a4 portion rides over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing planes, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 from being displaced.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a staggered manner has been described. However, in the first region 20545a of the twentieth embodiment, the protrusions 545a1 are linearly arranged in the first region 20545a. They are arranged side by side.

180A is a front view of the substrate member 545 according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180B is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXXXb-CLXXXb of FIG. 180A. 181(a) is a top view of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 181(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 taken along the line CLXXXIb-CLXXXXIb in FIG. 181(a). 182(a) and 182(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 182(c) is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 in the range CLXXXIIc of FIG. 182(b).

182(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), and FIG. 182(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b). Further, in FIG. 180(a), the first region 20545a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 180 to 182, in the first region 20545a of the substrate member 545 in the twentieth embodiment, the protrusion 545a1 is substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 of the first region 20545a (left and right direction in FIG. 180(a)). At the position, the board members 545 are arranged linearly in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 180(a)).

In addition, the conductive member 20546 is formed in a cubic shape and includes an elastic member 20546a formed of an elastic material and a cloth member 546b arranged on four surfaces of the elastic member 20546a excluding two facing surfaces in one direction. Prepared to be formed.

The elastic member 20546a is formed of a sponge-like member, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped when the cloth member 546b is not arranged. In addition, the elastic member 20546a is located at a substantially central position on the side surface of the substrate member 545 side (the lower side in FIG. 181(a)) (a substantially central position in the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 (left and right direction in FIG. 181(a))). Is provided with a recessed portion 20546a3 formed by cutting out along the opening direction of the cloth member 546b (left and right direction in FIG. 181(b)). As a result, the elastic member 20546a is formed with two non-concave cutouts 20546a4 on the end surface (side surface) on the substrate member 545 side with the recessed cutouts 20546a3 interposed therebetween.

In other words, the end surface of the elastic member 20546a on the second portion 546b4 side has the concave portion 20546a3 (first area) facing the area where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 is provided, and the protrusion of the substrate member 545. The non-concave cutout portion 20546a4 (second area) faces the non-formed area, and the non-concave cutout portion 20546a4 (second area) is projected more than the concave cutout portion 20546a3 (first area).

Therefore, in the state where the conductive member 20546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the elastic member 546a is compressed, the surface pressure in the non-recessed portion 20546a4 (second region) can be increased. As a result, since the protrusion 545a1 received in the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region) is used, the cloth member 546b (second portion 20546b4) arranged in the non-recessed portion 20546a4 can be hard to ride over the protrusion 545a1. Accordingly, the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding on the substrate member 545. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region) can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a that is difficult to shear.

The non-recessed portion 20546a4 is formed such that its outer shape is approximately the same size as the second region 20545b in which the protrusion 545a1 of the first region 20545a is not formed. Further, the recessed dimension L10 of the recessed portion 20546a3 (the depth dimension in the direction along the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, see FIG. 181(a)) is the protrusion of the protrusion 545a1 from the substrate member 545. It is set larger than the dimension L9 (see FIG. 180(b)) (L10>L9). Further, the width dimension of the recessed portion 20546a3 (dimension in the direction along the facing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5, lateral dimension in FIG. 181(a)) is the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1 (horizontal dimension in FIG. 181(a)). ), and in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the recessed portion 20546a3 is set to be approximately twice the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1.

As shown in FIG. 182, when the conductive member 20546 is arranged on the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b arranged on the side surface of the non-concave cutout portion 20546a4 is arranged in a state of being in contact with the inside of the second region 20545b. To be done. When the elastic member 20546a is arranged between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are compressed so that the entire area of the cloth member 546b is the first region. It is brought into contact with the 20545a.

In this case, since the recessed dimension L10 is set to be larger than the protruding dimension L9 as described above, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed portion 20546a3.

In the twentieth embodiment, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 is made larger than that of the recessed portion 20546a3, and the protrusion 545a1 is arranged between the pair of non-recessed portion 20546a4. The position can be prevented from being displaced unless it gets over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing planes, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 from being displaced.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are slidably displaced by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pair of rod-shaped bodies (one side member and the other side). Members) are arranged, and the one side guided member 521 (rail side member 521a) and the other side guided member 522 are slid along the pair of rod-shaped bodies, so that the slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are It may be slidable.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the configuration that allows the relative displacement between the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 is formed from the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1 has been described. However, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. The elastic body may be elastically deformed to allow relative displacement.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically located at least toward the display surface 523a side from the axis center of the rotation shaft 523c has been described, but the position is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may be aligned with the axis of the rotation shaft 523c.

The position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotation shaft 523c (longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523) may be located at the center in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, or the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. It may be eccentrically located on one side or the other side in the direction. In this case, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotary shaft 523c is preferably eccentric on the side closer to the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism. This is because the deviation of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be used as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are slidably arranged with respect to the cover member 420 via the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A member having a different displacement form (displacement member) may be provided.

For example, a pair of rotating bodies that are rotatably supported by the cover member 420 may be provided on a rotation axis that is the same as the rotation direction of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are arranged point-symmetrically with the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300 as a symmetry point, and the rotation directions of the two are opposite. This makes it possible to cancel out inertial forces associated with the start or stop of rotation of the pair of rotating bodies, and suppress rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the pair of rotating bodies while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rotary drive mechanism (the drive motor 531, the pinion gear 532, the first gear 533, and the second gear 534) is arranged on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 has been described. However, the rotation drive mechanism is not necessarily limited to this, and the other side guided member 521 may be provided.

In this case, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position, when an inertial force caused by the start of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement is applied, the liquid crystal display device 523. It is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of the. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced by its inertial force, and the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid and displaced in the horizontal direction. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the wear of the slide rail 510 due to the slide displacement.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as the passages of the game balls flowing down the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members are the objects. Also good. For example, it may be a spherical member used for performance outside the game area.

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the slide unit SL as the displacement member is displaced while the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a overlaps the range Rg has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the displacement member A part thereof may be displaced to a position where it is inserted into the passage member 8600 from the opening portion 8654 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. In this case, the displacement area of the slide unit SL can be maximized, and the effect of the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, it is possible to displace the displacement member further to the front side, and it is possible to give a force by bringing the displacement member closer to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while overlapping the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg, the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a of the slide unit SL can be independently displaced with the portion overlapping with the range Rg. As a variable structure, when interference with the game ball is predicted, it is possible to suppress the interference with the game ball by displacing only the variable structure portion. As a result, when interference with the game ball is predicted, it is not necessary to displace the entire slide unit SL, and it is possible to quickly take measures to suppress the interference with the game ball.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the elastic members 546a and 17546a are made of polyurethane has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic member 546a may be formed of a rubber molded product or a coil spring.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed in a sponge shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, foamed rubber (foamed rubber) obtained by kneading a foaming agent into a rubber raw material and vulcanizing it may be used. In this case, the form of the bubbles may be closed bubbles or continuous bubbles.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the elastic members 546a and 17546a are made of a non-conductive material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic members may be made of a conductive material. Good.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the cloth member 546b is wound around the elastic members 546a and 17546a once is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cloth member 546b may be arranged on three-fourths of the entire circumference of the elastic members 546a and 17546a from the side surface of the elastic members 546a and 17546a on the substrate member 545 side to the side surface of the liquid crystal device 543 side.

In this case, by opening one side surface, the elastic members 546a and 17546a can be easily elastically deformed. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545, the contact positions of the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are maintained. It can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conductive member 546 from rubbing against the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, so that the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 contact each other. It is possible to prevent the contact surface from being displaced and wear of the contact target.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the cloth member 546b is bonded to the outer surfaces of the elastic members 546a and 17546a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cloth member 546b may be non-bonded to the outer surfaces of the elastic members 546a and 17546a.

In this case, since the cloth member 546b can be made hard to receive the tensile force from the elastic member 546a, the elastic member 546a can be easily deformed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the conductive member 16546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 from being displaced.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the protrusion 545a1 is formed only on the substrate member 545 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The protrusion 545a1 may be formed on the conductive member 546, 14556, 15546 of the liquid crystal device 543. , 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546, the contact surface (back surface portion 543c) may be formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 from being displaced.

Further, in this case, it is preferable that the protrusion 545a1 of the liquid crystal device 543 and the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 do not overlap in the facing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. That is, it is preferable that the protrusion 545a1 on the liquid crystal device 543 side is located at a position where the through hole 545a2 of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. Accordingly, when the liquid crystal display device 543 and the substrate member 545 are misaligned in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the elastic deformation force of the conductive member 546 in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be increased. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543, the conductive member 546, and the liquid crystal device 543 from being displaced.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the first regions 545a, 19545a, and 20545a of the substrate member 545 are formed on one end side with respect to the central position in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 has been described. A control chip for controlling the display of the liquid crystal device 543 or controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the substrate member 545 may be provided on one end side of the substrate member 545.

According to this, since the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 are arranged around the control chip, static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device is suppressed from being conducted to the control chip. It can be done easily. As a result, the control chip attached to the substrate member 545 can be easily protected.

In this case, the control chip is preferably arranged in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. As described above, the conductive member 546 is configured to be easily deformed in the direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the cloth member 546b by elastically deforming the elastic member 546a. Therefore, for example, when the control chip is arranged in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 546, when the conductive member 546 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 532, the cloth member 546b on the side of the third portion 546b5. May deform and move closer to the control chip as the elastic member 546a deforms. Therefore, the third portion 546b5 (cloth member 546b) may come into contact with the control chip, and the wiring for conducting the control chip may be short-circuited.

On the other hand, by disposing the control chip in the opening direction of the cloth member 545, it is possible to prevent the cloth member 546b from approaching the control chip when the conductive member 546 is elastically deformed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring that conducts the control chip from being short-circuited.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments described above, the case where the covering member 545e is arranged on one surface of the ground portion 545d of the first region 545a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the covering member 545e may not be formed and the protrusion 545a1 may not be formed on one surface of the ground portion 545d.

In this case, the contact area between the second portion 546b4 of the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 and the ground portion 545d can be secured, so that when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged. The electric charge can be easily removed through the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the notch portion is formed in the cloth member 14546b to reduce the rigidity thereof has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rigidity may be reduced by forming a part of the cloth member 14546b thin. In this case, conductivity can be secured.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, the case where the through hole 15546d is formed at one place in the conductive member 15546 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in the conductive member 15546. Thereby, the deformability of the conductive member 15546 can be improved. In this case, the plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in different sizes.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where one recessed portion 16546e is formed on one side surface of the conductive member 16546 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed portions 16546e may be arranged in parallel in the facing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4. Accordingly, the deformability of the conductive member 16546 can be improved. In this case, the recessed widths and the recessed distances of the plurality of recessed portions 16546e may be set to different dimensions.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Concept of the invention exemplifying the slide member 520 in which the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable>
In a gaming machine including one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member that is slidably displaced by the one side member and the other side member being guided by the one side and the other side, respectively. The slide member includes one side guided member guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A rotation member rotatably supported on the one side member, and a relative displacement allowable state of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is a relative displacement amount of the other guided member with respect to the other side member. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being different from the state.

Here, the one side member, the other side member that is arranged to face the one side member, and the slide member that is slidably displaced by the one side and the other side being guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A game machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application discloses that the slide member includes one side guided member guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A structure formed of a rotating member that is rotatably supported in between is devised (not known at the time of filing of the present application). According to such a configuration, the rotating member can be rotated as well as slidably displaced, so that variations in the rendering operation can be increased. Further, by rotating the rotating member, for example, not only the front side of the rotating member but also the back side can be made visible to the player.

However, in such a configuration, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the slide member is slid and displaced with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member by the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation. .. That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the permissible state of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is different from the permissible state of relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member, When the inertial force caused by the start of rotation or the stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction can be used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and the slide member can be used as the one-side member and the other-side member. It is possible to suppress the slide displacement with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

As a configuration for forming relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is equivalent to the gap. A form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, or the like) is interposed between the both, and relative displacement is possible as the elastic body deforms elastically. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

In addition, as a form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or a combination of these is used. An example is the case where

In the gaming machine A1, a rotary drive means for rotationally driving the rotary member is provided, and the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. A gaming machine A2, which has a configuration that is more easily tolerated, and in which the rotation driving means is disposed on the one side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. Since the rotation driving means is disposed on the one-side guided member whose relative displacement is likely to be allowed, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction can be transferred to the one-side member or the other-side member. When the pressing force (braking force) is applied, the pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia of the rotary drive means. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

Note that examples of forms in which relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. It is illustrated.

In the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, and the gaming machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, since the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, the one side member is provided. On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced along a trajectory farther from the other-side displaced member. Accordingly, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, it is easier to use the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means. Then, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a pair of the slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement, and when the slide members are slid and displaced in a direction in which they are close to each other, one of the slide members is one of the slide members. The side guided member is arranged to face the other guided member of the other slide member, and the other guided member of the one slide member is arranged to face the one guided member of the other slide member. Characteristic game machine A4.

Here, when a pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of slide displacement and are slidably displaced toward each other in a direction in which they are close to each other, when they are arranged to face each other at the central position, the two slide members are at the central position without a gap. When they come into contact with each other, the load of the drive means (motor) for slidingly displacing these slide members increases, and the drive means and the drive force transmission mechanism (gear etc.) are damaged.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, or a control tolerance so that there is a margin at a position where both are stopped (a sufficient gap is set between the two at the central position). Then, the back side is visually recognized by the player through the gap, which deteriorates the appearance (effect).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, since the pair of slide members are arranged face to face in alternate directions, they are slid in the directions in which they approach each other and are displaced centrally. When the slide members are brought into contact with each other at the position, one guided member on one side of the one slide member and the other slide member on the other slide member retract to receive the guided member on the other side of the other slide member (the other and the one slide member). (The pair of slide members can be placed in a posture inclined with respect to the direction of the slide displacement based on the difference in the relative displacement allowable state described above). That is, even if the pair of slide members come into contact with each other at the central position, damage to the drive means and the drive force transmission mechanism can be suppressed, so that the positions at which they are stopped can be set closer to each other. As a result, at the central position, the pair of slide members can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between them, and the appearance (effect) can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member on which the one side member and the other side member are arranged, a sensor device arranged on the base member, and a detected member detected by the sensor device. A gaming machine A5, characterized in that the detected member is disposed on the other-side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member is less allowed than the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member. Since the member to be detected is arranged, even if the posture of the slide member changes, the position shift of the member to be detected with respect to the base member (sensor device) can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the position of the slide member with respect to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide mechanism 2500 in which the one-side guided members 521 are arranged opposite to each other>
A gaming machine comprising a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, wherein an inertial force caused by displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine B1 is provided with a suppressing unit that suppresses the base member from rotating with respect to the base.

Here, a game machine including a member that is displaceably formed is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

In this case, for example, in a structure in which such a configuration (displacement member) is disposed on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing of the present application), the displacement member starts or displaces There is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base due to the inertial force caused by the stop of the. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the suppression means for suppressing the base member from rotating with respect to the base due to the inertial force associated with the displacement of the displacement member is provided, so that the displacement member starts or stops rotating. It is possible to prevent the base member from rotating with respect to the base when the inertial force associated with the base member acts on the base member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide and displace the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

The mode of displacement is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rotational displacement, swing displacement, slide displacement, and displacement in a combination thereof. The locus of slide displacement may be a straight line, a curved line, or a combination of these. Further, the direction of displacement may be indefinite. For example, the displacement member may be elastically supported by the base member via an elastic body, and the displacement member may be displaced by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is slid and displaced by one side member, the other side member facing the one side member, and the one side member and the other side member being guided to the one side and the other side, respectively. A slide member, the slide member is guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion, A rotating member rotatably supported between the other-side guided portions, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. Unlike the relative displacement allowable state of the guide member, the pair of slide members includes one slide member on one side and the other guide member on one side, and the other slide member on one side guided member and the other slide member. A gaming machine B2, wherein the side guided member is arranged in a posture facing each other.

Here, the one side member, the other side member that is arranged to face the one side member, and the slide member that is slidably displaced by the one side and the other side being guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A game machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application discloses that the slide member includes one side guided member guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A rotation member rotatably supported between the one side member and the relative displacement state of the one side guided member relative to the one side member different from the relative displacement state of the other side guided member relative to the other side member. The proposed configuration was devised (not known at the time of filing this application). According to this configuration, when the inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction can be used as the force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and as a result, the slide member is moved by the one-side member. And, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement with respect to the other side member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

In this case, the applicant of the present application has devised a configuration in which the one side member and the other side member described above are disposed on a base member and the base member is rotatably supported by a base (not known at the time of application of the present application). According to such a configuration, the direction of slide displacement of the slide member and the direction of the rotation axis of the rotary member can be changed according to the rotational position of the base member, so that variations in the production operation can be increased accordingly. ..

However, in such a configuration, when the slide members having the same configuration are arranged to face each other, when one of the slide members receives an inertial force caused by the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member, The displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the member and the displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the other slide member are in alternate directions (directions that are point-symmetrical and give rotational inertia to the base member). Therefore, there is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base. That is, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, a pair of slide members are provided between the one side guided member and the other side guided member of the one slide member and the other slide member. Since the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are arranged so as to face each other, when the inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member acts on the slide member, The displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member and the displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the other slide member can have the same direction (line-symmetrical direction), and the base member is the base. It is possible to suppress the rotation with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide and displace the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

As a configuration for forming relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is equivalent to the gap. A form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, or the like) is interposed between the both, and relative displacement is possible as the elastic body deforms elastically. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

In addition, as a form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or a combination of these is used. An example is the case where

In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. When slidingly displacing in the direction, the rotation of the base member with respect to the base is such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned substantially vertically above the other side guided member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a position is set.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. When slidingly displacing the slide member in a substantially horizontal direction, the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned substantially vertically above the other side guided member, so that the slide member forms a posture in which the base member is positioned relative to the base. Since the rotational position is set, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member acts on the slide member, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction The displacement component that exerts a force (braking force) that is pressed against the member or the other-side member can be downward in the vertical direction (gravitational direction). As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be prevented from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized.

Note that examples of forms in which relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. It is illustrated.

In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. When slidingly displacing the base member with respect to the base member, the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is positioned below the other-side guided member in a substantially vertical direction. A game machine B4 in which a rotational position is set.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. When the slide member is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base is arranged so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one guided member is positioned substantially vertically below the other guided member. Since the rotational position of the slide member is set, when an inertial force associated with the start of the slide displacement of the slide member or the stop of the slide displacement is applied to the slide member, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction (slide member The displacement component that exerts a force (braking force) that presses the one side member or the other side member can be set vertically upward (direction opposite to the gravity direction). Thereby, when the slide member is slid and displaced, the resistance due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the driving force necessary for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress wear of the sliding portion due to the slide displacement.

Note that examples of forms in which relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. It is illustrated.

The gaming machine B3 is provided with a rotation driving means for driving the rotating member to rotate, and the rotation driving means is arranged on the one side guided member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the rotation driving means is disposed on the one side guided member in a form in which relative displacement is more easily permitted as compared with the other side guided member, so that the slide is performed. When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction is the force (braking force) that presses the slide member against one side member or the other side member, the pressing force is increased by using the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means. can do. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is possible to easily prevent the slide member from floating, and it is possible to stabilize the rotation.

In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B6 is provided, which is provided with a rotation driving means for driving the rotation member to rotate, and the rotation driving means is disposed on the other-side guided member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction can be made vertically upward (the direction opposite to the gravity direction). Since the rotation driving means is arranged on the other guided member whose relative displacement is less likely to be permitted than the guide member, the rotation driving means is provided in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction due to the rotation inertia of the rotation driving means. The displacement component of can be prevented from becoming too large. As a result, when the rotary member is rotated, it is possible to suppress the slide displacement of the slide member, and when the slide member is slide displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed, and It is possible to suppress wear of the sliding portion due to displacement.

In the gaming machine B5, the rotation drive means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, and the gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, so that the one side member is provided. On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced along a trajectory farther from the other-side displaced member. Accordingly, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, it is easier to use the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means. Then, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is possible to easily prevent the slide member from floating, and it is possible to stabilize the rotation.

In the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the other-side guided member opposite to the other-side member.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the other side guided member opposite to the other side member, so that the one side member and the other side When the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are relatively displaced with respect to the member, the rotation driving means can be positioned at a portion where the relative displacement amount is smaller. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of the rotary drive unit. As a result, when the rotary member is rotated, it is possible to suppress the slide displacement of the slide member, and when the slide member is slide displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed, and It is possible to suppress wear of the sliding portion due to displacement.

<About the concept of the invention with the slide member 4520 in which the position of the rotating shaft 4523c is eccentric as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a slide member formed to be slidably displaceable between a first position and a second position, the slide member arranged at the first position is arranged to face the opposite side from the second position. A facing member and a rendering means for rendering between the facing member and the sliding member facing each other, and the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotary shaft eccentrically located along the slide displacement direction. A gaming machine C1 characterized by the above.

Here, a gaming machine including a slide member that is slidably formed between the first position and the second position is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application is provided with a facing member that is arranged to face the slide member that is arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position, and a rendering means that performs a rendering between the facing member and the slide member. A game machine was devised (not known at the time of filing of this application). However, in the above-described configuration, if the gap between the facing members of the slide member and the facing member arranged at the first position is narrow, the effect cannot be sufficiently performed by the effecting means (for example, the movement of the member for effecting is movable). Space cannot be secured, or area for visualizing members for production cannot be secured). On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member is projected to the second position side, and thus the slide member is positioned on the locus of slide displacement. This reduces the visible area of the member (for example, liquid crystal display device). When the facing member is displaced to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member becomes large, and the size of the entire apparatus increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotation shaft that is eccentrically located along the slide displacement direction. Therefore, depending on the rotation position, the slide member faces the facing member. The interval can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to the rotation position where the facing distance between the facing member and the facing member becomes large, the effect by the rendering means can be sufficiently performed, while the slide member moves to the rotating position where the facing distance between the facing member and the facing member becomes small. By rotating, the amount of protrusion of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and the visible region of other members can be secured accordingly. Moreover, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the device can be reduced.

As the effect means, for example, a displaceable member is displaced by utilizing the space between the facing member and the sliding member, and the facing member is a space between the facing member and the sliding member. Examples include those which are displaced by utilizing, those which visually recognize the display and decoration on the back side from between the facing members and the sliding members, those which irradiate light between the facing members and the sliding members, and a combination thereof. It

In the gaming machine C1, the rendering means includes an illuminating means for radiating light toward a space between the facing member and the sliding member facing each other.

Here, for example, in the configuration in which the facing member irradiates the light toward the facing portion with the slide member, the effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the light reflected by the sliding member from the facing portion between the slide member and the facing member. It can be carried out.

In this case, in the above-described configuration, if the gap between the facings of the slide member and the facing member arranged at the first position is narrow, the light reflected by the slide member cannot be sufficiently viewed by the player. On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member is projected to the second position side, and thus the slide member is positioned on the locus of slide displacement. This reduces the visible area of the member (for example, liquid crystal display device). When the facing member is displaced to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member becomes large, and the size of the entire apparatus increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotating shaft eccentrically located along the direction of slide displacement, so that the sliding position is maintained. Accordingly, the distance between the facing member and the facing member can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the facing distance between the facing member and the facing member becomes large, the player can sufficiently see the light emitted from the radiating means, while the sliding member faces the facing member. By rotating the slide member to the rotation position where the distance becomes smaller, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position side can be reduced, and the visible area of other members can be secured accordingly. Moreover, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the device can be reduced.

The irradiating means may be disposed at a position where the sliding member can be irradiated to the facing member, a position where the sliding member is capable of irradiating the facing member, and a position where the sliding member and the facing member face each other. Illustrative examples include a mode in which they are irradiatingly arranged on the back side between the opposing surfaces, and a mode in which these are combined.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 is provided with a base and a base member that is rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member is disposed on the base member.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for rotation of the base member with respect to the base while maintaining the slide member at the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C3, the pair of slide members are arranged so as to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the pair of slide members are arranged face to face along the direction of slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members can be arranged symmetrically. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be brought close to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base. Accordingly, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be easily made effective.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, the slide member is rotated to change the position of the center of gravity to the base. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member with respect to.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in the direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, rotation of the slide member causes Since the position of the center of gravity is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base due to the change in the position of the center of gravity. As a result, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is in a direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is changed by the rotation of the slide member. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that it is brought close to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is the rotation in the direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, the sliding member The rotation brings the position of the center of gravity close to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, so that the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base due to the change in the position of the center of gravity. As a result, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention with an example of the overhanging wall portion 5640 in which the opening portion 5641 is formed>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes, the passage member has an opening formed on its side surface, and the object is a part thereof. The game machine D1 is formed so as to be able to pass through in a state of being projected to the outside from the opening.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a passage member which surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to such a passage member, for example, a game ball passing through the game area can be introduced from one end side and passed on the back side of the game area, and then discharged from the other end side to the game area. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a problem that the movable range of the effect member disposed displaceably on the back side of the game area is limited by the amount of the passage member protruding.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member has an opening formed on the side surface thereof, and the object is formed so that the object can pass therethrough with a part of the object protruding from the opening to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the passage member as compared with the case where the entire object is surrounded on the inner peripheral side. Therefore, the space for disposing the other member and the movable range of the other member can be secured accordingly.

The sectional shape of the passage member is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a circular section, an elliptical section, a polygonal section, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine D1, a pair of the openings are arranged to face each other in the passage member, and the gaming machine D2 is provided.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the passage member has a pair of openings arranged to face each other. Therefore, it is necessary to narrow the facing distance between the side surfaces on which the pair of openings is formed. Therefore, the space for disposing other members and the movable range of the other members can be efficiently secured by that amount.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side at the peripheral edge of the opening portion, the gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side at the peripheral edge of the opening portion. The amount of protrusion of the portion from the opening to the outside is increased to suppress the overhanging of the passage member, while ensuring the thickness dimension of the passage member at the peripheral portion of the opening to improve the rigidity of the passage member. be able to.

In the gaming machine D3, the passage member is set such that a distance between base ends of the inclined surfaces in a direction orthogonal to a passing direction of the object is set to be at least smaller than a diameter of the object. Gaming machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the passage member is such that the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is smaller than at least the diameter of the object. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the object from being received only by the tip (inner peripheral side end) of the inclined surface when the object partially projects from the opening to the outside. That is, since the sphere can be received by the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, it is possible to suppress damage to the passage member (the peripheral edge of the opening).

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular cross section from four side wall portions, and the opening is formed in at least one of the four side wall portions. A gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular cross section from the four-sided wall portion, and is formed on at least one of the four-sided wall portions. Since the opening is formed, it is possible to secure the section modulus of the passage member and improve the rigidity thereof.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed into a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and the circular cross section is a line segment connecting two points on the curve. The opening is formed by cutting with the gaming machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and on the curved line in the circular cross-section. Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, it is possible to minimize the overhang of the passage member. As a result, the space for disposing other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the passage member has a passage path of the object curved or bent, and the opening has a direction of a centrifugal force acting on the object due to the passage path curving or bending. A gaming machine D7, which is formed on a side surface of the passage member opposite to the side.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the passage in which the formation position of the opening is on the opposite side of the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object due to the curving or bending of the passage path. Since the opening is formed on the side surface of the opening, that is, on the side surface opposite to the side surface on which the object is pressed by the centrifugal force, it is possible to prevent the peripheral edge of the opening from being worn or damaged.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable is provided, and the displacement member has a range including at least a displacement trajectory of a part of the object that protrudes from the opening of the passage member. A gaming machine D8, which is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine D8, any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a displacement member that is displaceable, and the displacement member shows a displacement locus of a part of the object projected from the opening of the passage member. Since it is formed so as to be displaceable to at least the range including it, the displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded by effectively utilizing the region in which the overhang of the passage member is reduced. This can enhance the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

The displacement member may be formed such that a part thereof can be displaced from the opening of the passage member to a position where the passage member is inserted into the passage member. In this case, the displacement area of the displacement member can be maximized, and the effect of displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, it is possible to displace the displacement member further forward, and it is possible to give a force by bringing the displacement member closer to the player.

In the gaming machine D8, a detection means for detecting the presence or absence of an object in at least the area of the passage member where the opening is formed is provided, and when the object is detected by the detection means, the displacement member is A gaming machine D9, which is restricted from being displaced to a range including at least the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D8, when the object is detected by the detecting means in the region where at least the opening of the passage member is formed, at least the displacement locus (passage member Since it is restricted to be displaced to a range including at least a displacement locus of a part of the object projected from the opening, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

In the gaming machine D9, the detection means includes a first switch and a second switch which are respectively arranged upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and which detect passage of the object at the respective arrangement positions. A gaming machine D10 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D9, the detection means is arranged upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member, and detects the passage of the object at each of the arrangement positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, it is possible to reliably detect the presence or absence of the object in the region of the passage member where at least the opening is formed. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

<Feature E group> (Directed with over-winning game balls)
Based on the establishment of a specific condition and a variable member that can be changed between one state in which the game ball can enter and one state that restricts the entry of the game ball in the game ball and the second state in which the restriction is released. Then, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the ball enters the ball entering means. Based on that the count means for counting the number of game balls played and the count value by the count means have reached a predetermined upper limit value, the variable member is changed from the second state to the first state. Means and the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means before being changed to the second state by the means and the effect changing means, and the effect executed by the effect executing means is determined. The game machine E1 is characterized in that the game machine E1 is configured to determine the special effect mode when the special condition is satisfied. ..

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed on the basis of a start ball, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state. In such a gaming machine, the large opening provided on the board is set to the open state when the hit state is achieved. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, and the winning state is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a winning of a prescribed number or more of game balls is detected in the open state of 1 with respect to the large opening. By doing so, there are things that aim to improve the interest of the player.

However, in such a conventional game machine, even if the over-winning performance is executed, the player only recognizes that he or she has won a slightly larger number of award balls than usual, so that the player's interest can be sufficiently enhanced. In some cases it could not be improved.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, it is possible to change the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, the 1 state in which the entering of the game ball into the ball entering means is restricted, and the second state in which the restriction is released. Variable member, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. In this case, based on the fact that the counting means for counting the number of game balls entering the entering means and the count value by the counting means have reached a predetermined upper limit value, the variable member is Changing means for changing from the second state to the first state, and an effect that is executed based on that a game ball enters the entering means before being changed to the second state by the changing means It has an executing means and an effect determining means for determining an effect executed by the effect executing means, and the effect determining means can determine a special effect mode when a special condition is satisfied. Is configured.

As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

Based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition in the gaming machine E1, an acquisition unit for acquiring the information, a storage unit for storing the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit for storing the information based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The special condition is stored in the storage unit by the discriminating unit, and the discriminating unit discriminating information and the specific condition satisfying unit that satisfies the specific condition when the discriminating result by the discriminating unit is a specific discriminating result. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at least one condition is that the information determined to be a specific determination result is stored.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2. That is, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit that stores the information based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. And a specific condition satisfying unit that establishes the specific condition when the determination result by the determining unit is a specific determination result, and the special condition is stored in the storage unit. It is set as at least one condition that the information discriminated as a specific discrimination result by the means is stored.

As a result, when the special effect mode effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the information that is the specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, since it is possible to perform the game in the expectation that the special effect mode effect will be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game while the privilege game is being executed.

In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is satisfied with a predetermined probability when the storage unit stores the information determined to be a specific determination result by the determination unit. Machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the special condition is a predetermined probability when the storage unit stores the information determined to be a specific determination result by the determination unit. Therefore, even if the special effect mode is not performed in the privilege game, there is a possibility that the information that is the specific determination result is stored in the storage unit. Therefore, even when the special effect mode effect is not executed, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the expectation that the information that will be the specific determination result is stored, so that the player's game There is an effect that motivation can be maintained.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes an effect by using the game balls counted by the counting means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes the effect by using the game balls counted by the counting means. The number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where a configuration for executing an effect is provided separately from the game ball.

In the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode includes a mode in which the game ball after being counted by the counting means is guided to a specific region that is visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode guides the game ball after being counted by the counting means to a specific area which is configured to be visible to the player. Since it includes the above, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine E6 having a sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the gaming machine E6 has a sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. It is possible to achieve a realistic effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

A gaming machine E7 having a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E6.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the gaming machine E7 has a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a visual effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, an end effect execution means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means and a mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. A game machine E8, characterized in that the game machine E8 has an end effect mode determining means for determining.

The gaming machine E8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E7. That is, an end effect execution unit that executes an end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution unit, and an end effect mode determination that determines the mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution unit. Since the means is provided, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the end of the privilege game.

<Characteristic F group> (Form a character by sub liquid crystal inversion)
A performance executing unit that executes a performance based on the determination information, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the performances executed by the performance executing unit, and the performance on the back side of the first display area. As one of the above, the display mode is displayed as one of the effects performed by the first display means having a first specific notification section for notifying the player of the specific notification mode and the effect execution means. Second display means having a second display area and a second specific notification section for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area, the first display area, and the second display area And at least the first state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification section and the second state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section, respectively. 1. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having one display means and a displacement means capable of displacing the second display means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable member that can be moved, and the like, and can perform various effect operations by the display effect and the movable effect. Some of the conventional game machines employ a technique for ensuring the visibility of the display effect even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during execution of the display effect. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-134091).

However, in such a conventional game machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device itself is variable. For this reason, if the display device itself is variably operated, it may not be possible to realize an appropriate effect operation using the display effect. That is, it may be difficult to increase the degree of freedom of production.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the discrimination information and the effect executed by the effect execution means. And a first display unit having a first specific notification unit for notifying the player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area, and the effect execution unit executes the effect. As one of the effects described above, a second display having a second display area in which a display mode is displayed and a second specific notification section for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area. Means, a first state in which the player can visually recognize the first display area and the second display area, respectively, and the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section to the player. It has at least the first display means and the displacement means capable of displacing the first display means and the second display means in the visible second state.

With this, it is possible to realize a plurality of effects in different modes by using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of production.

In the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, respectively. Characteristic game machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the notification mode notified by the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section are combined to combine the specific information. Since the notification mode is formed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is configured by a specific symbol, the first specific notification unit, a part of the specific symbol is displayed, in the second specific notification unit Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. A game machine F3, characterized in that the specific pattern is formed by combining them.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific notification mode is configured by a specific symbol, a part of the specific symbol is displayed in the first specific notification unit, the second specific notification unit in Of the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. By combining, the specific pattern is formed.

Thereby, the specific symbol can be dynamically displayed by using the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, so that there is an effect that the specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3 has a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the effect execution means has the effect in the third display area of the third display means. In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are in close proximity to each other in the third display area or at least partially overlap each other. A gaming machine F4, which is arranged at a position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F3, the following effect is produced. That is, the first display means and the second display means have different third display means, and the effect execution means has a predetermined display as one of the effects in the third display area of the third display means. A display mode is displayed, and in the first state, the first display area and the second display area are arranged close to and parallel to the third display area, or at least partially overlapped with each other. Therefore, there is an effect that a more flexible production can be realized.

When any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4 performs the specific effect by the effect executing means, the effect executing means is provided with the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that it is easy to execute the specific notification mode when executing the effect.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player is provided, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect. In addition, it is easy to execute the specific notification mode.

As a result, the game can be played in the expectation that the specific notification mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Based on the determination condition being satisfied in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the determination means for performing the determination and the effect determination means for determining the effect mode executed by the effect execution means based on the determination result of the determiner. And a gaming machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F5, the following effect is produced. That is, it has a discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and an effect determination means for determining the effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means based on the result of the judgment of the judgment means.

Thereby, there is an effect that various effect modes can be realized according to the determination result of the determination means.

<Characteristic G group> (Display by moving the pattern of the main liquid crystal while moving the sub liquid crystal)
First display means capable of displaying a symbol, second display means different from the first display means, and a display area of the second display means at least at a position where the display area of the first display means overlaps the second display means. A predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the display control means and the second display means for controlling the display of the first movable means capable of moving the first display means and the second display means, respectively. In the state, when the display area of the first display means is moved by the first movable means, the first area after the movement is performed with respect to the display area of the first display means exposed by the movement. Display mode setting means for setting, in the display control means, a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display means, Gaming machine G1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional type gaming machine, by using a main display device that displays a main effect related to the game and a sub display device that displays an auxiliary effect, the degree of freedom of the display effect is increased and the player's interest is improved. (For example, JP-A-2014-117576).

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effect.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the first display means capable of displaying a symbol, the second display means different from the first display means, and the display area of the second display means are the display areas of the first display means. First movable means capable of moving at least the second display means to a position overlapping with, display control means for controlling display of the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means. When a predetermined symbol is displayed in the overlapping position on the display area of the first display means when the first movable means moves the display area of the first display means, the display of the first display means exposed by the movement. A display mode setting that sets a movable display mode in the display control unit that can form one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the first display unit after the region is moved And means.

Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a display effect with a higher degree of freedom by using the first display means and the second display means.

In the gaming machine G1, third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and a display area of the third display means overlaps with the first display area, and the second display means and one end of each overlap. And a second movable unit capable of moving at least the third display unit to the same position, wherein the display control unit includes the second display unit and the third display unit. When it is moved to the same position, a specific display mode in which one symbol is displayed across each other's display area with the one end as a boundary is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Gaming machine G2.

The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is, the third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, the display area of the third display means overlaps with the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means is the same. A second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means to a position to be a position, and the display control means includes each of the second display means and the third display means. When moved to the same position, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across each display area with the one end as a boundary.

Thereby, one symbol can be displayed by using the second display means and the third display means, so that there is an effect that the display with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means displays the specific display mode by the display control means by the second display means and the third display means, and the second display means and the third display means. A gaming machine G3, characterized in that, when at least one of the display means is moved in a direction away from the display means, the specific movable display mode is set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means displays the specific display mode by the display control means by the second display means and the third display means. In the state, when at least one of the second display means and the third display means is movable in the direction in which they are separated from each other, the specific movable display mode is set. There is an effect that appropriate display contents can be displayed for each of the three display means.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is that the one symbol displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means, the second display means, the first display means and the A gaming machine G4, wherein the gaming machine G4 is set to be displayed by the third display means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the one symbol displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the first display means. Since the second display means, the first display means, and the third display means are set so as to be displayed respectively, the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means can be used more freely. There is an effect that display contents with high frequency can be realized.

<Characteristic H group> (Right-handed notification on rotating display device)
A ball-entering means into which the game ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball-incoming means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the discrimination execution means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means, the display means for displaying the discrimination information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means specific to the display means When the identification information based on the discrimination result is displayed, a variable ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the launch strength of the game ball based on the operation of the player in the game machine. And a first flow path through which a game ball launched at a first launch strength by the launching means can flow down, and a launching means capable of varying and launching, and the first launching strength are different. The game ball shot with the second launch strength flows down, the second flow path in which the variable ball entering means is arranged, and the identification information based on the specific determination result are displayed, and then the second flow. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a suggesting means for displaying on the display means a suggestive manner for suggesting that a game ball is to be launched onto a road.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable member that can be moved, and the like, and can perform various effect operations by the display effect and the movable effect. Some of the conventional game machines are capable of displaying a suggestion display image suggesting a direction in which a game ball is launched on a display device. This conventional gaming machine employs a technique for ensuring the visibility of the suggestion display image even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device while the suggestion display image is displayed (for example, JP-A-2015-134091).

However, in such a conventional game machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device can be changed. Therefore, when the orientation of the display device is changed, there is a possibility that the direction in which the game ball is launched cannot be properly notified.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, an acquiring means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and an acquiring means thereof. Based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means and the discriminating execution means for discriminating the information stored in the storing means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition. Having display means for displaying identification information, and variable ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter when the identification information based on the particular discrimination result is displayed on the display means According to the operation of the player, the launching means capable of varying the launching strength of the game ball and launching the game ball, and the game ball launched by the launching means at the first launching strength may flow down. A possible first flow path, a game ball that has been launched with a second launch strength different from the first launch strength, and a second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is arranged, After the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, there is a suggestion unit that causes the display unit to display a suggestion mode that suggests that the game ball should be launched into the second flow path.

This allows the player who has confirmed the suggestion mode to shoot the game ball with the second launch strength, so that even a beginner in the game can easily enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. You can make it a ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a game machine whose game method is easier to understand.

In the gaming machine H1, in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side, the suggesting aspect has a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of the rotating condition. A gaming machine H2, which has at least a part of a ring shape and includes a direction suggesting mode that indicates a direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, the display means has a turning means capable of turning the display means based on the establishment of a turning condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side. It includes a direction indicating mode having at least a part of the shape and indicating the direction of the second flow path.

Thereby, even if the display means is rotated, the direction of the second flow path can be accurately suggested by the direction suggesting mode having at least a part of the ring shape.

In the gaming machine H2, the direction suggesting mode is one in which the gaming ball is dynamically displayed by rotating in a direction of flying to the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the direction suggestion mode is dynamically displayed by rotating in the direction in which the gaming ball flies to the second flow path. On the other hand, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is fired can be notified more easily.

The gaming machine H4, wherein character information indicating that a gaming ball is launched into the second flow path in the gaming machine H2 or H3 is displayed as part of the direction suggesting mode.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, character information indicating that a gaming ball is launched into the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggesting mode. There is an effect that the player who visually recognizes the mode can more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is shot.

In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggesting mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggesting mode is displayed as a pattern indicating the direction of the second flow path, so that the pattern is presented to the player. From the impression, it is possible to intuitively understand the direction in which the game ball is to be fired.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there is a reversing means for reversing the back side of the display means so that the back side is located on the player side, and on the back side of the display means, a decoration portion indicating the direction of the second flow path. A gaming machine H6, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5. That is, since there is a reversing means for reversing the back side of the display means so as to be positioned on the player side, and on the back side of the display means, a decoration portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is arranged. Even if the display means is reversed by the reversing means, there is an effect that the player can correctly understand the direction in which the game ball is shot.

In the gaming machine H6, the ornamental portion has a light emitting means sequentially arranged in the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means is sequentially controlled to light in the direction of the second flow path. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6, the decoration portion has light emitting means arranged in order in the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means includes the second flow. Since the lighting is sequentially controlled in the direction of the road, there is an effect that the player can more easily understand the direction in which the game ball is shot.

<Characteristic I group> (The sub liquid crystal is used as the main liquid crystal.)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. In the case where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, it is specific to the effect execution means and the display means for causing the display means to display the effect mode associated with the identification information based on the determination result. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed based on the determination result, the display unit is a main display unit and a first display unit thereof. At least a first position parallel to the display area and a sub-display means movable at a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means, the sub-display means being the first position and the second position. When the movable means movable to the second position and the sub-display means movable to the first position, the identification information is displayed on the main display means, and the sub-display means displays the identification information. When at least a part of the effect mode is switched to the first state and set, the sub-display means is moved to the second position, and the specific condition is satisfied, the identification is displayed on the sub-display means. A gaming machine I1 having a switching means capable of switching and setting a second state in which information is displayed.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional type gaming machine, by using a main display device that displays a main effect related to the game and a sub display device that displays an auxiliary effect, the degree of freedom of the display effect is increased and the player's interest is improved. I am trying to Further, among such conventional gaming machines, there is one in which the sub display device can be moved to the front side of the main display device and a composite display effect can be executed by the main display device and the sub display device (for example, , JP-A-2015-029606).

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effect.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, the discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination on the display means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and in the case where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, display of an effect mode accompanying the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. And an effect giving means for giving effect, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means based on the specific determination result. The means is at least a main display means, a first position parallel to the display area of the main display means, and a sub-display means movable at least at a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means. A movable means configured to move the sub display means to the first position and the second position; and the main display when the sub display means is moved to the first position. The identification information is displayed on the means, the sub display means is switched to the first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed, the sub display means is moved to the second position, and the specific condition is set. When it is established, the sub-display means has a switching means capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed.

With this, the first state and the second state can be appropriately switched according to the position of the sub display unit, and thus there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine I1, the sub display means is composed of at least a first display means arranged on one end side of the main display means and a second display means arranged on the other end side of the main display means. The game machine I2, wherein the first display means and the second display means are at positions facing each other with the main display means in between at a position 1.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sub-display means is composed of at least a first display means arranged on one end side of the main display means and a second display means arranged on the other end side of the main display means. At the position, the first display means and the second display means are at positions facing each other with the main display means in between.

Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means at the first position.

In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are in contact with each other at one end side so that the display area of the main display means is covered in a visually difficult manner. A game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are brought into contact with each other at one end side, thereby displaying the main display means. Since the area is covered so as to be difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to realize a compact display using only the sub display means at the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to the display content.

A gaming machine I4, characterized in that the gaming machine I2 or I3 has a turning means for turning the first display means and the second display means respectively around the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the gaming machine I4 has a rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means around the main display means. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a display effect with a higher degree of freedom using the display means.

In the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means, so that the first display means and the second display means are arranged in the vertical direction of the main display means. An amusement machine I5, characterized in that it is variable between a vertical position and a horizontal position where the first display means and the second display means are positioned in the left-right direction of the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means, thereby vertically moving the main display means. The vertical position where the first display means and the second display means are located and the horizontal position where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means are made variable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a display effect with a higher degree of freedom using the sub display means.

In the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position, the sub display means and the main display means are used. A first combined display mode in which the sub-displays are combined and displayed, and when the first display unit and the second display unit are moved from the left-right position to the second position, the sub-display is moved when the first display unit and the second display unit are moved to the left-right position. A game machine I6 having a fusion display mode setting unit for switching and setting a second fusion display mode which is displayed by fusion with the display unit and the main display unit.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I5, in the case where the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position. A first merged display mode in which the sub display means and the main display means are fused together, and the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right position to the second position. Since it has a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting the second fusion display mode which is fused and displayed by the sub display means and the main display means when it is moved to the left and right position later, There is an effect that an appropriate display effect can be realized depending on whether there is a right or left position.

<Characteristic J group> (Display mode of inverted sub liquid crystal is displayed by mirror)
In the case where the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the determination result by the determiner, and the effect mode based on the specific determination result are displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having a privilege giving unit for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player, the display unit includes at least a first display unit and a second display unit, and the first display unit and the first display unit. The rotating means capable of rotating the two display means to the front position in which the display area faces the front side and the second position in which the display area faces the rear side and the first display means are rotated to the back position. In this case, when the first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the first projection means is displayed on the second display means. A second projecting means for projecting the effect mode on the front side, and a gaming machine J1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a projection device such as a mirror in the configuration. In such a conventional type gaming machine, when a predetermined entertaining entertainment is selected, it is possible to realize an entertaining entertaining entertainment by making the projection device visible and projecting the player's face or the like on the projection device. (For example, JP-A-2005-329159).

However, in such a conventional game machine, the projection device is merely set in a state in which it can be visually recognized by the player, and thus the target projected on the projection device is limited. Therefore, it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player by using the projection device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and the display means are specified. And a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the effect mode based on the discrimination result is displayed. The display means is the first display means and the second display means. And a rotation means capable of rotating the first display means and the second display means respectively to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side. A first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the back position, and the second display means for the back position. And a second projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the front side when rotated.

Thereby, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the effect mode displayed on each. That is, it is possible to realize a novel production operation in which the first display means and the second display means can be rotated while the production mode is still visible, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the gaming machine J1, the first projecting means and the second projecting means each have a mirror surface portion capable of displaying the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the first projecting means and the second projecting means reflect the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Since it has a mirror surface portion capable of performing, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, it is possible for the player to clearly see through the mirror surface portion the effect mode displayed on each. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine J2, the rotating means is configured to rotate the first display means and the second display means, respectively, as the rear surface position to a V-shaped position on the front side of the gaming machine. Amusement machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the rotating means has the V-shape on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the back surface of the first display means and the second display means. Since it is rotated to the position, the appearance at the back position can be greatly different from that at the front position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are the first projection means and the second projection means when the first display means and the second display means are respectively rotated to the back position. A game machine J4 having a projection surface capable of facing the display area of the display means or the display area of the second display means.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means have the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since it has a projection surface that can face the display area of the first display means or the display area of the second display means when rotated to the back position, the display area of the first display means and the second display Since the effect mode displayed in the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projection means and the second projection means can be made compact.

The gaming machine J1 is arranged at a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the first display means is diffracted to the first projection means. It is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the first display means and the second display means rotated to the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the second display means is diffracted to the second projection means. A second diffracting means for causing the gaming machine J5.

The gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1. That is, the first diffractive means is disposed at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the back position, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means. And a second diffractive means which is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the back position and which diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means. And.

Thereby, the arrangement of the first projecting means and the second projecting means can be freely determined within a range diffractable by the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be increased.

In the gaming machine J5, the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means are half mirrors. A gaming machine J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J5, the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means are constituted by half mirrors, so the display area of the first display means and the second Whether or not to diffract the effect mode displayed in the display area of the display means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of production.

In the gaming machine J5 or J6, the first diffractive means and the second diffractive means, respectively, when at least one of the first display means and the second display means is rotated to the back position, the first A gaming machine J7 having display means or movable means for moving the display means to a position facing the second display means.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J5 or J6, at least one of the first display means and the second display means is provided with the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means, respectively. When it is rotated to the back position, it has a movable means for moving the first display means or the second display means so as to face the first display means or the second display means. Therefore, the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means Is more accurately diffracted.

<Characteristic K group> (Over winning with closing command)
Main control means for executing the control of the game, sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, the open state in which the game ball can enter and the entry of the game ball are restricted. A variable ball entrance means that can be changed to a regulated state, the main control means performs a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and a performance based on the determination result by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the effect information determining means for determining effect information and the determining means being a specific determination result, the variable ball entering means is changed from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a succession signal output means for outputting a succession signal based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and a ball entry signal based on a game ball entering the variable ball entry means The sub-control means has the admission signal output means for effecting and the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable entrance means. Based on the performance information determined by the means, a performance mode determining means for determining a performance mode, a performance executing means for executing the performance mode determined by the performance mode determining means, and a predetermined signal after receiving the establishment signal. A game machine K1 comprising: a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the incoming signal is received during a period until the condition is satisfied.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed on the basis of a start ball, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state. In such a gaming machine, the large opening provided on the board is set to the open state when the hit state is achieved. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, and the winning state is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a winning of a prescribed number or more of game balls is detected in the open state of 1 with respect to the large opening. By doing so, there is one that aims to improve the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-112239).

In such a conventional game machine, it is necessary to count the number of game balls that have won the large opening in order to determine whether or not the over-winning effect is to be executed. It was common that the number of balls entered before the mouth was closed was different. Therefore, since it is necessary to reset the condition for executing the over-winning effect depending on the model, it may not be possible to transfer the program adopted for one model to another game machine as it is. It was That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, main control means for executing the control of the game, sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and opening for allowing the game ball to enter. The main control means has a variable ball entering means that is changeable between a state and a restricted state in which the entering of a game ball is restricted, and the main control means executes a judgment based on the establishment of a determination condition, and its determining means. Based on the effect information determination means for determining effect information for executing effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is varied from a regulated state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, a success signal output means for outputting a success signal based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the variable ball entering means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered, a ball signal output means for outputting a ball signal, and based on the game ball entering the variable ball means, the player is provided with an advantageous privilege. And a privilege giving means, and the sub-control means determines a performance mode determining means for determining a performance mode based on the performance information determined by the performance information determining means, and the performance mode determining means. And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the ball input signal is received within a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the establishment signal is received, With.

With this, the sub control unit can determine whether to execute the specific effect depending on whether or not the establishment signal is received from the main control unit, and thus the sub control unit directly determines whether or not the predetermined condition is established. There is no need to determine. Therefore, it is possible to easily divert the control program set in the secondary control unit, and thus it is possible to reduce the workload of the developer.

In the game machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means or when a predetermined time period has elapsed. ..

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means or when a predetermined time period elapses. Since the specific effect is executed, the variable number of game balls is further changed to the player after the predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means or after a predetermined time elapses. It is possible to make the means recognize that the game ball has entered. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who confirms the specific effect can be pleased.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the subordinate control means receives the establishment signal output by the establishment signal output means based on the passage of a predetermined period as the predetermined condition, the specific effect. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is provided with an avoiding means for avoiding the execution of.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means outputs the success signal output means based on the passage of a predetermined period as the predetermined condition. Since the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the specific effect when the establishment signal is received is provided, the execution of the specific effect causes the player to play a certain number of game balls that exceeds a predetermined number. Can notify that the player has entered the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who confirms the specific effect can be more pleased.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the main control means obtains information discriminated by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the discrimination condition is satisfied by the information obtained by the acquisition means. Until at least the storage means for storing and the pre-discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination condition is satisfied and a pre-signal indicating pre-discrimination information based on the pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means. And a preliminary signal output means for outputting to the slave control means, the slave control means has a preliminary information storage means for storing the preliminary information indicated by the preliminary signal, and the specific effect mode is The gaming machine K4, which shows the contents of the advance information stored in the advance information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following advantages are exhibited. That is, the main control means stores the information that is discriminated by the discrimination means on the basis of the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and stores at least the information obtained by the acquisition means until the discrimination condition is satisfied. A storage unit, a pre-discrimination unit that discriminates the information stored in the storage unit before the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a pre-signal indicating the pre-discrimination information based on the pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination unit. Advance signal output means for outputting to the control means, the sub-control means has advance information storage means for storing the advance information indicated by the advance signal, the specific effect mode, The contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means are shown.

As a result, in order to confirm the contents of the advance information, the player tries to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means after the predetermined condition is satisfied, and actively plays the game ball to the player during execution of the privilege game. Can be launched. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

<About the concept of the invention with the liquid crystal display device 523 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with an electric device, a substrate having a ground portion that is arranged to face one surface side of the electric device and is grounded, and a connecting unit that electrically connects the electric device to the ground portion of the substrate. In the above, the connection means is sandwiched between the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, and the relative position when the electric device or the substrate is relatively displaced in a direction orthogonal to the facing direction. A gaming machine L1 characterized by being formed so as to be sheared and deformable with displacement.

Here, an electric device, a substrate having a ground portion that is arranged to face one surface side of the electric device and is grounded, and a connecting unit that electrically connects the electric device to the ground portion of the substrate are provided. A game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-236463). Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal panel. Further, the connecting means is formed as an arcuate leaf spring, the base end of which abuts (electrically connects) with the ground portion of the substrate, and the arcuate convex surface abuts (electrically connects) the shield member. It The connecting means has a base end fixed to the substrate and an arcuate convex surface pressed against the shield member, and is kept in contact by elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thereby, the static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground through the ground portion of the substrate. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged by static electricity generated due to rolling of a game ball or displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the charge is removed through the ground portion of the substrate to cause color unevenness or dot defects in the liquid crystal display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

However, in the above-described conventional technique, the electric device is displaced, or the electric device is vibrated due to the displacement of another effect member or the input of the external force caused by the rolling/collision of the game ball, thereby shielding the shield. When the member and the substrate are relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connecting means is slid with respect to the shield member, and the connecting means or the contact target of the connecting means is worn. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the connection means is sandwiched between the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the board, and the electric device or the board is relatively displaced in a direction orthogonal to the facing direction. When it is subjected to the relative displacement, it is formed so that it can be sheared and deformed, so that the one side and the other side of the connecting means can be maintained in contact with the one side of the electric device and the ground part of the board, respectively. .. That is, the shearing deformation of the connecting means can prevent the one side or the other side of the connecting means from sliding on the electric device or the substrate. As a result, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the connecting means or the contact target (electrical device or substrate) of the connecting means.

Further, since the connecting means is sandwiched between the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the board, at the time of assembly, it suffices to sandwich the connecting means between the electric machine and the board, and work such as fastening. Can be unnecessary. As a result, it is possible to improve workability and reduce product cost.

In the gaming machine L1, the connection means includes an elastic member, one side of which faces one side of the electric device and the other side of which faces the ground portion of the board, and an elastic member formed of an elastic material. A gaming machine L2, further comprising: a conductive member which is at least covered on the other side, is in contact with the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, and is formed of a conductive material.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, one side of the electric device faces one side and the other side faces the ground portion of the board, and the other side of the elastic member is formed of an elastic material. Since at least one side and the other side are provided so as to be in contact with the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate and a conductive member formed of a conductive material, the electric device or the substrate is orthogonal to the facing direction. When the elastic member is sheared due to the relative displacement, the conductive member is brought into contact with the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the board. Can be maintained. That is, when the elastic member undergoes shear deformation, it is possible to prevent the conductive member sandwiched between one side and the other side of the elastic member and the electric device or the substrate from sliding. As a result, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the connecting means (conductive member) or the contact target (electrical device or substrate) of the connecting means.

In the gaming machine L2, in the connecting means, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape, the elastic member is fitted into the conductive member, and the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member is on one side of the electric device and the substrate. A gaming machine L3, which is brought into contact with the ground portion of the gaming machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape in the connecting means, and the elastic member is internally fitted to the conductive member, so that the assembling of the connecting means is simplified. The cost of parts can be reduced.

Moreover, since the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member is in contact with the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, the contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the electric device is charged, the electric charge can be easily removed via the ground portion of the substrate.

In the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end in a strip shape, and a connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end in the strip shape is one surface side of the electric device or the substrate. A gaming machine L4, which is disposed at a position where it is not in contact with the ground portion of the gaming machine L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of the band shape, and the connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end of the band shape is provided. Since it is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the one side of the electric device or the ground part of the board, the connecting portion becomes a step, and the contact state with the one side of the electric device or the ground part of the board is not It can suppress becoming stable. That is, the contact area can be secured, and the conductive member can be suppressed from sliding with respect to the electric device or the substrate, and the charge can be easily removed.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member includes a first portion abutting on one surface side of the electric device, a second portion abutting on a ground portion of the board, and the first and second portions. A pair of third portions connecting between the portions, wherein the width dimension of the third portion is set to be smaller than the width dimension of the first portion and the second portion at least partially. Gaming machine L5.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member has a first portion that is in contact with one surface side of the electric device and a second portion that is in contact with the ground portion of the board. , A pair of third portions connecting the first portion and the second portion, and the width dimension of the third portion is smaller than the width dimension of the first portion and the second portion at least in part. Since it is set, the conductive member can be easily deformed in the endless belt-shaped opening direction by using the third portion. Therefore, when the electric device or the board is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction and in the opening direction of the endless belt of the conductive member, the first portion and the second portion of the conductive member are It is possible to suppress sliding on the one surface side and the ground portion of the substrate.

In the gaming machine L5, the pair of third portions are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of an endless belt, and the gaming machine L6.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L5, since the pair of third portions are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of the endless belt, the conductive member is deformed in the opening direction of the endless belt. You can improve your sex.

The gaming machine L7 according to any one of the gaming machines L2 to L6, wherein the conductive member is formed of a conductive cloth or a conductive non-woven fabric.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L2 to L6, since the conductive member is formed of conductive cloth or conductive non-woven fabric, its flexibility can be secured. Therefore, when the elastic member undergoes shear deformation due to relative displacement of the electric device or the substrate in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the conductive member can easily follow the shear deformation of the elastic member. As a result, the conductive member can be suppressed from sliding on the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate.

Further, since the conductive member is formed of a conductive cloth or a conductive non-woven fabric, its flexibility can be ensured, which improves durability when the conductive member is repeatedly deformed due to relative displacement of an electric device or a substrate. Can be planned.

As the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, for example, a thread in which one or both of copper and nickel are coated on the outer surface of polyester fiber is woven or not woven to form a cloth (sheet) is exemplified. To be done. Examples of the weave method include plain weave and twill weave.

In the gaming machine L7, one or a plurality of protrusions are provided so as to project on one surface side of the electric device or on a ground portion of the board.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L7, one or a plurality of protrusions are provided on the one surface side of the electric device or on the ground portion of the substrate, so that the conductive member follows the shape of the protrusion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sliding of the conductive member with respect to the one surface side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate.

In the gaming machine L8, the protrusion is formed by solder soldered to the ground portion of the board, the gaming machine L9.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L8, the protrusion is formed by the solder soldered to the ground portion of the substrate, so the protrusion should be formed in the step of soldering the electronic component to the substrate. You can Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a step for forming the protrusion, and the step can be shared, so that the number of steps can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the solder is soldered to the ground portion to form the protrusions, so that the contact area between the conductive member and the ground portion can be secured by that amount, and when the electrical device is charged, the ground area of the board Can easily remove the charge.

In the gaming machine L9, the board is provided with a plurality of through holes, the plurality of protrusions are provided in a protruding manner, and the through holes and the protrusions are arranged in a staggered manner.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L9, the board is provided with a plurality of through holes, and a plurality of protrusions are provided so that the through holes and the protrusions are arranged in a staggered pattern. By using the plurality of protrusions, it is possible to suppress the conductive member from sliding on the substrate, it is easy for the electric device to remove the charged electric charge, and the through holes are used to form the protrusion and the conductive member. The heat generated during this can be efficiently released.

In the gaming machine L9, the other side of the elastic member faces a first region facing a region where the protrusion of the substrate projects and a second region facing a region where the protrusion of the substrate does not form. And a gaming machine L11 in which the second area is projected more than the first area.

According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L9, on the other side of the elastic member, the first region facing the region where the protrusion of the substrate is projected and the protrusion of the substrate are not formed. A second region facing the region, and the second region is projected more than the first region, so that the connection means is sandwiched between the electric device and the substrate, and the elastic member is compressed. The surface pressure in the second region can be increased. As a result, the conductive member sandwiched between the second region and the substrate can be less likely to ride over the protrusion, and accordingly, the conductive member can be suppressed from sliding on the substrate. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the first region can be lowered, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of shear deformation of the elastic member accordingly.

Any one of the gaming machines L2 to L11 includes a plate-shaped interposing member that is provided between the one surface side of the electric device and the substrate and has an opening formed therein, and the interposing member is A game machine L12, wherein the size of the opening is smaller than the size of the connecting means in the unloaded state.

According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L2 to L11, a plate-shaped interposing member that is provided between the one surface side of the electric device and the substrate and has an opening formed therein. Since the size of the opening of the interposing member is smaller than the size of the connecting unit in the unloaded state, the connecting unit can be held in the opening of the interposing member. Therefore, the assembling work can be performed while holding the connecting means on the interposing member, and the connecting means can be positioned along with the disposition of the interposing member, and accordingly, the workability of the assembling work can be improved. It is possible to improve.

In the gaming machine L12, in a state where the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member and the connecting means is sandwiched between the electric device and the board, the connection is made with the inner edge of the opening of the intermediate member. A gaming machine L13, characterized in that a gap is formed between the outer surface of the means.

Here, in the configuration in which the size of the opening of the interposition member is made smaller than the size of the connection means in the unloaded state, and the connection means is sandwiched between the openings of the interposition member, shear deformation of the elastic member is hindered. Therefore, when the electric device or the board is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing direction, the conductive member may slide with respect to the electric device or the board.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L12, the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member, and when the connecting means is sandwiched between the electric device and the board, Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of the opening of the installation member and the outer surface of the connecting means, it is possible to prevent the connecting means (elastic member) from being restrained by the inner edge of the opening. That is, during the assembling work, the interposing member (opening) holds the connecting means to improve the workability of the assembling work, and the assembled state (the state where the connecting means is sandwiched between the electric device and the board). In (), the elastic member can be easily sheared and the conductive member can be prevented from sliding on the electric device or the substrate.

The compressible elastic material is preferably a porous elastic body, for example, synthetic sponge formed by foaming a synthetic resin such as polyurethane, foamed rubber obtained by kneading and foaming a foaming agent into a rubber raw material (cellular rubber). ) Etc. are illustrated. In this case, the form of the bubbles may be closed bubbles or continuous bubbles.

In the gaming machine L13, an outer surface of the elastic member on the side sandwiched by the opening of the interposing member is recessed inward.

According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L13, the outer surface of the elastic member that is sandwiched by the opening of the intervening member is recessed inward, so that the electric device and the board are separated from each other. When the connecting means is sandwiched therebetween, it is easy to deform the outer surface of the elastic member in a direction away from the inner edge of the opening of the intermediate member (inward of the elastic member), starting from the inwardly concave portion. it can. As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening of the interposing member and the outer surface of the connecting means.

In the gaming machine L14, the connecting means is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting the conductive member to one end and the other end in a strip shape, and the elastic member is fitted into the conductive member to form one end in the strip shape. A gaming machine L15, wherein a connecting portion connecting the other end is arranged on an outer surface side that is recessed inward of the elastic member.

According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L14, the connecting means is formed into an endless belt by connecting one end and the other end of the belt-shaped conductive member, and the conductive member includes the elastic member inside. The connecting portion, which is fitted and connects the one end and the other end of the strip shape, is disposed on the outer surface side of the elastic member that is recessed inward, so that it is formed by the recessed inward. It is possible to accommodate a connection portion in which one end and the other end of the strip shape are connected to each other in the space. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end of the strip shape to abut on the inner edge of the opening of the interposing member. As a result, the deformability of the connecting means can be secured.

A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine M1 is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine M2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine including a slide member that is slidably formed between a first position and a second position (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).
When the facing member is arranged to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position (not known at the time of filing of the present application), sufficient effect is provided between the facing of the slide member and the facing member. There was a problem that I could not do it.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating performance between facing of a slide member and a facing member. ..
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is provided with a slide member formed so as to be slidable between a first position and a second position, and is arranged at the first position. The slide member is provided with a facing member that is arranged to face the slide member from the side opposite to the second position, and a rendering unit that performs a rendering between the facing member and the slide member, and the slide member has a direction of the slide displacement. It is rotatably formed by a rotation shaft located eccentrically along the axis.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the rendering means includes an irradiation means for irradiating light between the facing member and the slide member.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, which includes a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member on the base member. Is provided.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to easily perform the effect between the facing of the slide member and the facing member.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the light emitted from the irradiation means can be visually recognized by the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted.
<Explanation of symbols>
10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board
64 1st prize hole (ball entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
300 Rear case (base)
400 base member
510 slide rail (one side member, other side member)
520, 2520, 3520, 4520 slide member
521,4521 One-side guided member
522,4522 Guided member on the other side
523, 4523 Liquid crystal display device (rotating member)
523c rotating shaft
525 Opposing member
531 Drive motor (rotation drive means)
543 Liquid crystal device (electrical device)
544 Interposition member
544a opening (opening)
545 Substrate member (substrate)
545a1 protrusion
545a2 Through hole (through hole)
545d ground section
546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 Conductive member (connecting means)
546a elastic member
19546a1, 20546a1 recessed portion (second region)
19546a2, 20546a2 Non-recessed notch (first region)
546b, 17546a Cloth member (conductive member)
546b3 first part
546b4 second part
546b5 third part
5600, 6600, 7600, 8600 Passage member
5641, 6641, 7654, 8654 Opening
5640, 6640 Overhanging wall portion (passage member)
SL slide unit (displacement member)
8655 1st switch (detection means)
8656 2nd switch (detection means)

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines )
8 1 3rd symbol display device ( production means, 1st display device)
5 234,523 Liquid crystal display device ( slide member)
523a display surface (first surface, second surface, second display device)
523b decorative surface (first surface, second surface)
4 523c rotary shaft 525 facing member

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine provided with a slide member formed to be slidable between a first position and a second position,
The slide member arranged at the first position is provided with a facing member facing the second position from a side opposite to the second position, and a rendering means for performing a rendering between the facing member and the slide member.
The gaming machine, wherein the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotary shaft eccentrically located along the slide displacement direction. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the effecting means includes an irradiating means for irradiating light toward a space between the facing member and the sliding member facing each other. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, wherein the slide member is disposed on the base member.

Images